Volume 2 Part B Civil Specifications R

MAIN WORKS
CONSTRUCTION OF 12 BUILDINGS STAFF ACCOMMODATION VILLAGE

ON PLOT-1 (SD_63), PLOT-2 (SD_62), PLOT-3 (SD_61), PLOT-4 (SD_60)
AT DLC STAFF VILLAGE, DUBAI SOUTH, U.A.E.
FOR M/S. DUBAI SOUTH
TENDER DOCUMENT
VOLUME – II
EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
PART B – CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS
MARCH 2018
MAIN WORKS
CONSTUCTION OF 12 BUILDINGS STAFF ACCOMMODATION VILLAGE
ON PLOT-1 (SD_63), PLOT-2 (SD_62), PLOT-3 (SD_61), PLOT-4 (SD_60)
AT DLC STAFF VILLAGE, DUBAI SOUTH, U.A.E.
INDEX
VOLUME I - TENDER AND CONTRACT CONDITIONS
VOLUME II - EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME II (PART A) - EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS
VOLUME II (PART B) - CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME II (PART C) - MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME II (PART D) - PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME II (PART E) - ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME III - SCHEMATIC DESIGN DRAWINGS
VOLUME IV - BILLS OF QUANTITIES
VOLUME V - OTHER DOCUMENTS - SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT

MAIN WORKS
ON ON PLOT-1 (SD_63), PLOT-2 (SD_62), PLOT-3 (SD_61),
PLOT-4 (SD_60) AT DLC STAFF VILLAGE, DUBAI SOUTH, U.A.E.
VOLUME II – PART B
CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS
The Engineer
NATIONAL ENGINEERING BUREAU
Architectural & Engineering Consultants
P.O.Box 26644, Dubai
U.A.E
MARCH 2018
Volume 2 - Part B April 2018 - R0

Civil Specifications
MAIN WORKS
INDEX
LIST OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS AND SUB CONTRACTORS

GUARANTEES
DIVISION 1 PRELIMINARIES
SECTION 01001 REFERENCES

01002 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION / SIGNBOARD
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
DIVISION 2 SITEWORK
SECTION 02240 DEWATERING

02300 EARTHWORK
02362 TERMITE CONTROL
02772 PRECAST CONCRETE CURBS
02783 INTERLOCKING PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS
02786 STONE PAVER
02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
02890 TRAFFIC SIGNS, MARKINGS, AND SIGNALS
02900 LANDSCAPE PLANTING
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03360 SHOTCRETE
03480 PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES (INCLLUDING HC SLAB)
03520 LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
03530 CONCRETE SCREED/TOPPING
03535 SAND CEMENT SCREED
03600 GROUT

DIVISION 4 MASONRY
SECTION 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 5 METALS
SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05700 ORNAMENTAL METALWORK
05720 ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS & RAILINGS
05810 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06402 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07130 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATER PROOFING

07140 LIQUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
07210 BUILDING INSULATION
07260 VAPOUR RETARDERS
07410 PRE-FINISHED METAL PANELS
07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07720 ROOF HATCHES
07840 FIRE STOPPING
07920 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08120 ALUMINIUM WORKS
08140 WOODEN DOORS & FRAMES
083100 ACCESS DOOR
085113 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS
087000 HARDWARES
08800 GLAZING
089100 LOUVERS
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

09310 CERAMIC TILE
09505 GYPSUM BOARD SUSPENDED CEILING
09677 FLOOR FINISHES

09910 PAINTS
09967 INTUMESCENT PAINT
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10210 METAL LOUVERS
10240 METAL GRILLES
10260 WALL & CORNER GUARDS
10270 ACCESS FLOORING
10350 FLAGPOLES
10431 SIGNS
10500 LOCKERS AND BENCHES
10536 AWNINGS
10650 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES & SANITARY WARES
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENTS
SECTION 11014 FACADE CLEANING EQUIPMENT

11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (N/A)
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (N/A)
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
SECTION 14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

14560 CHUTES AND COLLECTORS
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORKS
SECTION 310000 EARTH WORKS

311000 SITE CLEARING
313100 SOIL TREATMENT
DIVISION 32 EARTHWORKS
SECTION 321400 UNIT PAVING

321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
329000 TURF AND GRASSES (PLANTING)

LIST OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS
AND SUBCONTRACTORS

MAIN WORKS
CONSTRUCTION OF 12 BUILDINGS STAFF ACCOMMODATION VILLAGE ON PLOT‐1 (SD_63), PLOT‐2 (SD_62), PLOT‐3 (SD_61),
PLOT‐4 (SD_60) AT DLC STAFF VILLAGE, DUBAI SOUTH, U.A.E. FOR M/S. DUBAI SOUTH
Country /
Sl. Description Item Subcontractor/Supplier, Manufacturer/Brand
Origin
ARCHITECTURE / CIVIL
01 Subsurface Investigation a. Fugro UAE

b. Arab Center UAE
c. Al Haj UAE
d. Al Mawazeen UAE
e. Material lab UAE
or approved equivalent subject to Employers and Engineers approval
02 Concrete Ready Mix a. Arabian Ready Mix UAE

b. Unimix UAE
c. Dubai Ready Mix UAE
d. Cemex UAE
e. Con Mix UAE
f. Al Falah UAE
g. Middle East Readymix concrete UAE
03 Water Stops a. BASF UK

b. FOSROC UK
c. Sodamco
d. Mapei
e. Conmix
f. Henkel Polybit
g. PAC Technologies
04 Couplers a. Ancon/Emirate Specialities UK

b. Lenton Erico/Emirate spec USA
c. SBT-Luv Intl UK
05 Cement a. RAK Cement UAE

b. UNION Cement Factory UAE
c. National Cement Factory UAE
d Jebel Ali Cement Factory UAE
e Fujairah Cement Factory UAE
f Gulf Cement UAE
g Al Ain Cement Factory UAE
h NAEL Cement Factory UAE
06 Corrosion Inhibitors & a. BASF UK

Concrete Admixture and b. FOSROC UK
Concrete waterproofing c. Sodamco
d. Mapei
e. Conmix
f. Henkel Polybit
g. PAC Technologies
h. Colmef
07 Sand and Aggregate a. Ras Al Khaimah UAE

b. Hatta UAE
c. Al Ain UAE
08 Construction Chemicals a. BASF UK

b. FOSROC UK
c. Sodamco
d. Mapei
e. Conmix
f. Henkel Polybit
g. PAC Technologies
09 Reinforcement Steel a. Emirates Steel UAE

b. Saudi Steel KSA
c. Turkish Steel Turkey
NEB‐P‐17‐1747 APPROVED SUPPLIERS/
MANUFACTURERS/SUBCONTRACTORS LIST 1 / 14 MARCH 2018
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
10 Precast Concrete a. Gulf Precast Concrete UAE

Precast Concrete-HCS b. United Precast Concrete UAE
Manufacturers or Supplier Precast C c. Dubai Precast Concrete UAE
11 GRC/GRP precast firms a. Terrazzo (GRP & GRC) UAE

b. Fibrex (GRP & GRC) UAE
c. Emirates Cont (GRC/GRP) UAE
d. Arabian Profile UAE
e. Speed House UAE
f. Art Line UAE
12 Light Weight Concrete a. Hanan Al Khaleej UAE

Mineral Aggregates b. Gulf Perlite LLC UAE
c. Saudi Perlite KSA
13 Air Entraining Agent a. BASF UK

b. FOSROC UK
c. Sodamco
d. Mapei
e. Conmix
f. Henkel Polybit
g. PAC Technologies
14 Self Levelling Screed a. BASF EU

b. FOSROC UK
c. Mapei EU
15 Grouting a. BASF UK
b. FOSROC UK
c. Sodamco
d. Mapei
e. Conmix
f. Henkel Polybit
g. PAC Technologies
16 Concrete Unit Masonry a Juma Al Majid UAE

Concrete Masonry Unit b Al Jazeera UAE
c. Emcon UAE
d. Hardblock UAE
e. Azzani UAE
f. Incon UAE
g. Apex UAE
h. Phoenix Conc. Products UAE
i. NAEL Cement Products UAE
j. Jabel Ali Block factory UAE
17 Anchors & Reinforcement a. Hilti UK

b. TMI UAE
c. FOSROC UK
d. Fischer
18 (AAC) Lightweight Masonry Units a. Spectrum Light Block UAE

AAC Block b. Bena German Emarati Co. UAE
c. Emirates Thermostone UAE
d. Hebel (ACICO) UAE
e. Gulf Concrete & Blocks UAE
f. EMCON UAE
g. Al Jazeera Factory UAE
h. AIDE Building Products UAE
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
19 Thermal Concrete Block a. APEX UAE

b. Al Jazeera Factory UAE
c. Al Amaar UAE
d. Phoenix Conc. Products UAE
e. PASCO UAE
f. NAEL Cement Products UAE
20 Exterior Stone Cladding a. Al Hashim Marble GCC

Stone Suppliers b. Al Habtoor Marble GCC
c. Carrara ME GCC
d. Valencia Marble UAE
e. Hayat Marble Kuwait
21 Structural Steel Framing a. Galadari Steel UAE

b. Al Falah Steel UAE
c. EBS UAE
d. Gulf Steel Industries UAE
e. Amana Steel UAE
f. System Construct UAE
g. Tiger Steel UAE
h. Eversendai UAE
i. Techno Steel UAE
j. Girco UAE
k. Al Faraa Steel Structures UAE
l. Rasana
m. Stimes
n. Standard Fabricators UAE
o. Al Shurooq Industries UAE
p. Piekko UAE
22 Steel Decking a. Kirby Building System Kuwait

b. Zamil Steel KSA
c. Structural Metal Deck Ltd. UK
23 Glazed Metal Railing a. Intercare UAE

b. Al Masood Bergum UAE
c. Alico Industries Co. UAE
d. Al Hamy UAE
e. Armetal Saudi Arabia
24 Non Structural Metal Fabrications a. System Engineering UAE

b. Giffin Metal Fab UAE
c. Metallic Equipment UAE
d. Al Sahra UAE
e. Link Middle East UAE
f. Internation House UAE
g. RAM Metal UAE
h. Task UAE
i. Bin Ghurair UAE
25 Pipe and Tube Railing a. Intercare UAE

b. Al Masood Bergum UAE
c. Alico Industries Co. UAE
d. Al Hamy UAE
e. Armetal KSA
f. Metallic Equipment UAE
g. Belgium Aluminium & Glass UAE
26 Rough Carpentry a. Joubert Middle East UAE

Certified Wood Suppliers b. Gulf Timber Company FZC UAE
26a Rough Carpentry a. Leader Furniture UAE

Certified Wood Subcontractor b. Reference Interiors UAE
c. Woodpecker UAE
d. Prestige Furniture UAE
e. KitchenKraft UAE
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
27 Architectural Woodwork a. ECC UAE

b. Al Zubair UAE
c. UP Fit Out Divn UAE
d. Mughal Woodworks UAE
e. Dew Factory UAE
28 Certified Wood Suppliers a. ATE - Arab Technical Est. UAE

b. Joubert Middle East UAE
c. Gulf Timber Company FZC UAE
29 Solid Surfacing a. Dupont (Corian) EU

b. Avonite USA
c. Formica EU
d. LG Korea
e. Hanex Korea
f. Kalinga Stone India
30 Bituminous Damp Proofing a. BASF UK

b. FOSROC UK
c. Sodamco
d. Mapei
e. Conmix
f. Henkel Polybit
g. PAC Technologies
h. Emirates HICKSON
i. Imperbit
31 Sub-structure Waterproofing a. BASF UK

b. FOSROC UK
c. Sodamco
d. Mapei
e. Conmix
f. Henkel Polybit
g. PAC Technologies
h. Emirates HICKSON
i. Imperbit
32 Protection Board a. Servicised Ltd USA

b. W.R. Meadows Inc. USA
c. Texmastic USA
d. FOSROC UK
e. Polybit UAE
f. Al Majara Polychem
g. Fleetwick Middle East
h. Emirates Chemicals
i. Awazel International
j. Duproof
33 Liquid Applied Waterproofing a. BASF EU

b. CIM Industries Inc. UK
c. FOSROC UK
d. Henkel-Polybit EU
e. Mapei EU
34 Poly. Modified Cement Waterproofin a. BASF UK

b. FOSROC UK
c. Sodamco
d. Mapei
e. Conmix
f. Henkel Polybit
g. PAC Technologies
35 Approved Applicator a. Beam Engineering UAE

b. AMC UAE
c. Western UAE
d. ProTect UAE
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
36 Thermal Insulation
Extruded Polystyrene a. isoboard Kuwait
b. Roofmat KSA
c. National Polystrene UAE
d. TCTI UAE
e. Escofoam Kuwait
f. isofoam Kuwait
37 Thermal Blanket (Mineral Fiber) a. Fujeirah Rockwool Factory UAE

b. Rockwool International EU
c. Rockwool Manufacturing EU
d. Kimco Kuwait
e. Foamglass UK
f. Exeed glass Wool UAE
38 Fasteners a. Hilti USA

b. MKT Germany
c. Ancon UK
d. Fischer
39 Acoustic Insulations a. Fujeirah Rockwool Facotry UAE

b. Rockwool International S/A EU
c. Rockwool Manufacturing Co. USA
d. Foamglass UK
e. Exeed Glass Wool UAE
40 Water Repellants a. BASF UK

b. FOSROC UK
c. Sodamco
d. Mapei
e. Conmix
f. Henkel Polybit
g. PAC Technologies
41 Polymer-Based Exterior Insulation

a. BASF UAE
and Finish System
b. Terraco UAE Ltd UAE
c. Drywit (Middle East) UAE
42 Underlayments a. Carlisle Inc USA

b. Grace WR USA
c. Protector Wrap Company USA
43 Weather Barrier a. Carlisle Inc USA

b. Grace WC USA
c. Tremco USA
d. BASF
44 Roof Pavers and tiles a. Terrazzo Ltd UAE

b. National Tiles UAE
c. Pasco UAE
d. nael Concrete products UAE
e. Consent LLC UAE
f. Fujairah Building Industries UAE
i. Fujeirah marble & tiles UAE
j. Al Jassim Automatic Tiles (Fujeirah)
45 Pedestal Supports a. Index Spa Italy

b. Elmich Australia PTY Ltd. Australia
c. Siplast France
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
46 Metal Wall Panels

Alum Comp Panels a. Alucobond Germany
b. Alubond UAE
c. Alpolic Japan
d. Tosolbond UAE
e. Ajecobond UAE
47 Modified Bitu Membrane Roofing a. Axter Force France

b. Siplast France
c. Flexobit Netherland
d. Polybit UAE
e. Flexigum Belgium
f. Soprema France
g. Derbigum Italy
h. INDEX Spa Italy
i IMPER Italy
48 Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing a. BEMO Germany

Coil form material origin b. KALZIP Germany
c. Rigidal UK
48a Approved Installer a. Mosaco Metal Products UAE

b. CKK Middle East LLC UAE
c. Arabian Profile CO. Ltd UAE
d. Lakesmere Roofing & Cladding Specialist UAE
e. Intertouch Roofing Systems UAE
f. ALB ME UAE
g. Hoesch Contecna ME LLC UAE
49 Roof Hatches a. Bilco UK

b. Nystrom USA
c. Precision ladders USA
50 Sandwich Panel a. Arabian Profile UAE

b. Rigidal UAE
c. TSSC UAE
Saudi Arabia
51 Spray Fire Resistive Materials a. Arabian Vermiculite USA
b. Southwest Verm Products USA
c. Carboline Company USA
d. CAFCO-International
52 Intumscent Mastic Fireproofing a. Jotun UAE

b. Leighs UK
c. Nullifire UK
53 Fire Stopping a. HILTI (Regional Office) UAE

b. 3M Gulf Ltd. UAE
c. BASF UAE
d. Specified Technologies Inc. Bahrain
e. Nullifire LTD UK
f. Fischer
54 Joint Sealants a. FOSROC UK

b. Jointmaster USA
c. Jointseal UK
d. BASF EU
e. Sika Gulf EU
f. Mapei EU
g. Foamglass UK
h. Plastijoint UK
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
55 Expansion Control Joints a. Construction Specialties Ltd. UK

b. Migua EU
c. Balco USA
d. Deflex Germany
e. Construction Specialties USA
f. BASF
56 Polymer Modified Mortar a. Degussa-BASF EU

b. FOSROC UK
c. Mapei EU
57 Holow Metal Doors and Frames a. Prometal Metal Ind. UAE

b. Task UAE
c. Ceco USA UAE
d. Lakshmi Metal Tech. UAE
e. Hormann EU
f. Ram Metal UAE
g. Metalco UAE
h. TMI UAE
i. Laing O'Rourke Industrial Joinery LLC UAE
j. Bin Ghurair (Novfern Germany)
k. Karcher Trading (Karcher)
l. Al Bashir Trading (Martin Roberts)
m. RAM Metal Industries
n. Rimal International Trading
o. NAFFCO
p. Vicaima
60 Wood Doors a. Joubert UAE

b. ETA UAE
c. Danube UAE
d. Buhindi International LLC UAE
e. Al Faraa Joinery UAE
f. Nael Joinery & Interiors UAE
g. Laing O'Rourke Industrial Joinery LLC UAE
h. Bin Ghurair (Novfern Germany)
i. Karcher Trading (Karcher)
j. Al Bashir Trading (Martin Roberts)
k. RAM Metal Industries
l. Rimal International Trading
m. NAFFCO
n. Vicaima
61 Certrified Wood Suppliers a. Joubert Middle East UAE

b. Gulf Timber Company FZC UAE
62 Access Doors and Frames a. Karp Associates Inc. USA

b. ACE Ceiling Products UK
c. Acudor Product Inc. USA
d. Milcore Inc. USA
e. Knauf UK
63 Folding Doors a. DORMA EU

b. TORMAX EU
c. GEZE EU
d. Nanawall USA
e. solarlux USA
64 Flexible Curtains a. Hormann Middle East UAE

b. Ali Bakhit Doors UAE
c. Neo Era General Tranding UAE
d. Al Dar Doors UAE
e. SEDAR UAE
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
65 Aluminum and Glass Doors & Windows

System Design a. folcra EU
b. Hueck EU
c. Schucco EU
d. Technal EU
66 Approved Extuder a. White Aluminium Ind. UAE

b. Arabian Aluminium UAE
c. Gulf Extrusion UAE
d. Al Jaber UAE
67 Fabricator & Installer a. Alico UAE

b. Sykon UAE
c. Al Abbar Aluminium Co. UAE
e. Alumco UAE LLC UAE
68 Coating System a. PE-F by Jotun UAE

b. Interpon EU
c. Dupont USA
d. BASF
69 Tubular Daylighting Device a. Solatube International Inc. USA

b. Sola-Design USA
c. Elite Solar Systems USA
70 Door Hardware a. Euro art EU

*Hardware Manufacturer to b. Dorma EU
European Standards c. Hafele EU
d. Allgood Modric EU
e. Geze EU
f. Assa Abloy EU
g. Metallic Equipment EU
h. Haroon EU
i. Laidlaw EU
j. Consort EU
k. Briton EU
l. Silver Shore EU
71 Glass Glazing
Primary Glass & Mirros Manufacture a. Emirates Glass UAE
b. Gleverbel Belgium
c. Saint Gobain KSA
d. Pilkington USA
e. Cardinal USA
f. Guardian RAK
g. FORD USA
h. Interpane Germany
i. AGC Belgium/Japa
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
72 Glazing Fabricators, Assemblies & Sy a. Intraco UAE

Manufacturers b. Pilkington UK
c. Gulf Glass Industries UAE
d. Emirates Glass UAE
e. White Aluminium UAE
73 Louvers and Vents a. The Airolite Co. USA

b. CS Louvers UK
c. Schuco Germany
d. Colt UK
74 Gypsum Board Assemblies a. Knauf LLC Germany

b. National Gypsum Saudi Arabia
c. Danogips Denmark
d. USG UAE
e. British Gypsum UK
75 Portland Cement Plastering a. Dubai Plaster Drymix UAE

Pre-Mixed Plaster b. CONMIX UAE
c. SODAMCO UAE
d. Terraco Ltd. UAE
e. Plaxit Dry Mix Company UAE
f. M.B.T - Jotun
g. Expamet
76 Metal Lath and Plaster Accessories a. Catnic UAE

b. Emirates Specialities UAE
c. Expamet UAE
d. TMI UAE
77 Ceramic Tiling a. Porcellan UAE

Porcelain & Ceramic Tiles b. Marazzi EU
Mosaic/Rustic c. IRIS EU
Terrazzo d. Mirage EU
e. Imola Italy
f. Casalgrande Padana Italy
g. CISA Italy
h. Portobella Italy
i. Grante Fiandre Italy
j. Leandro Italy
k. Century Italy
l. Concorde Atlas Italy
m. Portiani Ceramica Brazil
n. RAK Ceramic UAE
o. Al Reyami Trading Enterprices UAE
p. Sultan Bin Rashed UAE
q. Al Futtaim Engineering UAE
r. Al Shaibani Specialty Materials UAE
78 Extruded Tiles a. Gail Germany

b. Agrob Buchtal Germany
c. Klinkersire Italy
d. Johnson EU
e. RAK UAE
f. Porcellan UAE
79 Adhesives, Mortar and Grouting Mat a. BASF UK

b. FOSROC UK
c. Sodamco
d. Mapei
e. Conmix
f. Henkel Polybit
g. PAC Technologies
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
80 Control Joints and Trims a. Vexcolt UK Ltd. UK

b. Schluter UK Ltd UK
c. Movemex UK
d. Acrobax UK
81 Stone Flooring a. Al Hashim Marble GCC

Marble & Granite b. Al Habtoor Marble GCC
c. Carrara ME Gcc
d. Valencia Marble EU
e. Hayat Marble GCC
f. Emirates Marble UAE
g. Al Jassim Automatic (Fujeirah) UAE
h. Classic marble
i. Terrazzo marble
j. Al Banna Marble
82 Reconstituted Stone Flooring a. Gulf Stone Oman

b. Quarella Italy
c. Stone Italiana Italy
d. Valencia Marble EU
83 Acoustic Ceilings a. Armstrong International USA

Mineral Fiber Ceilings b. USG Ceiling USA
c. AMS Ceiling Germany
84 Custom Acoustical Ceilings a. Decoustics Switzerland

b. RPG Diffusers USA
c. Topaoustic
85 Acoustic Ceiling Tile a. Decoustics Canada

b. Armstrong International UK
c. Danogips Denmark
d. Gypro-Saint Gobain EU
86 Suspended Gypsum Ceiling a. Space Arrow Building maintenance

and Decoration b. Standard Engineering and Decoration
c. Speedwell Décor
d. Arctic
e. MOSACO
f. Gala
g. Reference Interiors
h. RAZAN Interiors
87 False Ceiling Suspension System a. KNAUF

b. Siniat (Euro Panels)
c. Gypsemna
d. Gyproc (Saint Gobain)
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
88 Internal Paint a. Jotun

b. National Paint
c. Berger Paint
d. Kansai
e. Hempel
f. Caparol
89 External Paint (Epoxy/Stone Paint) a. Jotun

b. National Paint
c. Kansai
d. Hempel
e. Caparol
f. BASF
90 Wardrobe and kitchen units a. On-spot Interiors

b. Al Meera Kitchens
c. Prestige Furniture
d. Leader Furniture & Joinery
e. Creative Solutions & Supplies
f. KitchenKraft
g. Reference Interiors
h. Romeo Design
i. German Home
j. Al Otaiba Ferretti Co.
k. AlShaya Trading kitchen design
91 Window cleaning equipment a. Secalt

b. Tass Trading
c. Power Machine
d. EW Cox International
e. Malt Technic
f. Transwill
g. Mantech
h. Danway
i. Global BMU
92 Refuse chute/compactor a. Ostemeier FZE

b. Hardall
c. Chub
93 Post Tensioned Work a. Middle East post tension

b. Northern Terrotry
c. Emirates strong force
d. Freyysinet
e. AngloEast
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
94 Landscape a. United Technology and Trading

b. Green Technology
c. Orient Irrigation Services
d. Waterman
e. Waves Pools & Landscaping
f. Decert Landscaping
g. Hi-land
h. Areej Landscaping
95 Lifts and Escalators a. ETA Melco (Mitsubishi)

b. OTIS L.L.C.
c. KONE
d. Al Futtaim Engineering (Hitachi)
e. ThyssenKrupp
f. Techno lift (Schindler)
g. FUJI (Japan)
96 Automatic Garage Gates a. Crawford

b. RAM
c. NICE
d. FAAC
e. FUJI
f. Door Tech. Trading
g. Aprimatic
97 Signages a. Super Sign

b. Brand Plus
c. Future Vision
d. Saleem Jacobson
e. Sign Supplies & Services
f. Joseph Advertisers
98 Roller Shutter a. Bin Dasmal Doors

b. Ascorp Industrial Complex
c. ASSA ABLOY Entrance System
d. Crawford
e. Dosteen
99 Polythene a. Dubai Plastic Factory

b. Abu Mansoor Plastic Factory
c. Sinak Plasto International
d. Kangaroo
e. Cosmo Plast
f. Sadco
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
100 Ceilings & Partitions a. Khansaheb

b. Future Décor
c. Al Shirawi
d. Al Naboodah Gypsum & Marble
e. Hitec Interiors
101 Corner Guards, Wheel Stopper a. Emirates Specialities

Wall Guard, Road Humps b. Consent
c. Link Middle East
d. Synergy Building System
e. Al Falak Middle East
f. BASF
102 Glass Fencing a. Aluglass

b. Alumatec
c. Quantum Glass
d. Spectrum Glass
e. Glass Technic
103 Glass Partitions and Doors a. Aluglass

b. Alumatec
c. Al Reyami Glass & Aluminium
d. Spectrum Glass
e. Quantum Glass
104 GRP Ladders a. Gulf Fiber Glass Factory

b. Al Noor Fibre Glass
c. National Fibre Glass Industries
d. JIMS Fibre Glass Industry
e. German Tech Fibreglass Ind.
105 Interlock & Paving a. Consent

Kurbstones b. Transgulf Cement Products
c. Hard Block Factory
d. EMCON
e. Juma Al Majid
f. Jebel Ali Ind.
g. National Concrete Product Company
106 Lockers, Benches & Cubicles a. Heritage Palace Decoration

b. Wellness Today International
c. Prestige Furniture
d. United Decoration
e. Woodpecker Furniture
f. Mediterranean Building Materials (MBM)
g. Compactmel (FINSA)
h. Arab Technical Est. (ATE)
107 Mirror a. Al Abbar Glass & Trading

b. Ghantoot Gulf Glass industries
c. Al Reyami Glass and Aluminium
d. Thomas Bennett
e. Al Sabi Glass and Mirror
108 Sealants for Roofing and Joints a. Sodap

b. Fosroc
c. M.B.T - Jotun
d. BASF
109 Joint Filler Board a. Sodap

b. Fosroc
c. M.B.T - Jotun
MAIN WORKS
Country /
Origin
110 Thermite Control a. Sodap

b. Fosroc
c. M.B.T - Jotun
d. Pluvex
111 Crack Repair Materials a. Sodap

b. Fosroc
c. Cortech
d. BASF
112 Traffic Coating System a. Sodap

b. Fosroc
c. M.B.T - Jotun
d. BASF
113 Kitchen Sinks a. Blanco

b. Peramis
c. Franki
114 Natural Stone a. Premier Italy

b. Cambria USA
c. Marmiro Stones USA
d. Aydamar Natural Stone Turkey
e. Quality Marble Exports India
115 Traffic Mirror a. Grainger USA

b. CONVEX-Mirror UK
c. Enerjitrapik Turkey
116 Marble Vanity Counter a. EURO Marble & Granite NY, USA
Kitchen Counter top b. European Marble FL, USA
c. Natural Stone Surfaces UK
117 Roof Waterproofing - a. BASF

Combo system b. Roofcare
118 Antocarbonation coating for a. BASF

Inside car parking(Wall&ceiling) b. Joton
c. Fosroc
119 Industrial Floor Kitchen a. BASF

b. Flowcrete
120 Shoring & Piling a. Swiss boring Overseas

b. Middle East Foundation
c. Bauer International
d. Dutch Foundation
e. TMF Euro Foundations
GUARANTEES

MAIN WORKS
GUARANTEES
Care and Diligence by the

Contractor (Guarantees)
1) All structural works and roof finishes 10 Years
2) A/C Compressors 5 Years
3) Pumps 5 Years
4) Water tanks 10 Years
5) Water Heaters coils 1 Years
6) Water Heaters tanks 3 Years
7) Waterproofing 10 Years
8) Anti-termite Treatment 20 Years
9) Double Glazing Units 10 Years
10) Laminated Glass 5 Years
11) Reflective and low E Coating to Glazing 10 Years
12) External Paint 5 Years
13) Aluminum Coating 10 Years
14) Surface traffic coating 5 Years
15) All other elements of the works 1Year (Unless otherwise mentioned)


MAIN WORKS
CONSTRUCTION OF 12 BUILDINGS STAFF ACCOMMODATION VILLAGE ON PLOT-1 (SD_63), PLOT-2 (SD_62), PLOT-3 (SD_61),
PLOT-4 (SD_60) AT DLC STAFF VILLAGE, DUBAI SOUTH, U.A.E. FOR M/S. DUBAI SOUTH
SECTION 01001
REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Particular Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
Appendices shall form a part of these specifications and are to be read in
conjunction with General / Preliminaries
B. "Approved": The term "approved," when used to convey Engineer's action on
Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Engineer's duties
and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected,"
"approved," "required," and "permitted" mean directed by Engineer, requested by
Engineer, and similar phrases.
D.
"Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or
schedules on Drawings or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and
similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted,"
"scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference.
E.
"Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and
lawful orders issued by local authorities, as well as rules, conventions, and
agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready for
unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G.
"Install": The term "install" describes operations at Project site including unloading,
temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying,
working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for
the intended use.
I. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as
an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular
construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar
operations.
J. The term "experienced," when used with an entity, means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this
Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied
with requirements of local authorities.
K. "Project site" is the space available for performing construction activities. The
extent of Project site is shown on Drawings.
1 of 7 General Specs./Sec.01001
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A.
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and
effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent
referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by
reference. American Standards or equivalent British Standards shall be applicable.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract
Documents, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified
and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum
quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer
uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Engineer
for a decision before proceeding.
1
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or
specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may
comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the
minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated
numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of
requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be
familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of
applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity,
obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request.
E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean
the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)
AAADM 3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a

professional registered Civil Engineer in Dubai and/or approved by the
Owner.
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and

Transportation Officials
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

(The)
ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
ADC Air Diffusion Council
AI Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects (The)
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
ALA American Laminators Association
ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America
ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
ANLA American Nursery & Landscape Association

(Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen)
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APA Architectural Precast Association
API American Petroleum Institute
ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering

www.asse-plumbing.org
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

www.astm.org
AWCI AWCI International

(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International)
AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCMA)
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

www.buildershardware.com
BIA Brick Industry Association (The)
BIFMA BIFMA International

(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International)
BS British Standard Specification
BSCP British Standard Code of Practice
CGSB Canadian General Standards Board
CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
CRD Army Corps of Engineers

Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2 years.
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The)
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The)
CTI Cooling Tower Institute
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
DIN Deutsches institute fur Normug
DOC U.S Department of Commerce
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
EN European Norms
EPA Environmental Protection Agency, USA
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association (See GANA)
FED-STD Federal Standard
FM Factory Mutual System

(See FMG)
FMG FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)
FS Federal Specifications
GA Gypsum Association
GANA Glass Association of North America

(Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association)
GTA Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America (See GANA)
HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association

Division of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
(See NAAMM)
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (The)
IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineer’s Association
ISO International Standards Organization
ITS Intertek Testing Services
LPI Lightning Protection Institute
LSGA Laminated Safety Glass Association (See GANA)
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association
MIA Marble Institute of America (www.marble-institute.com)
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and

Fittings Industry, Inc.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NAAMM North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers (See GANA)
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council
NGA National Glass Association
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International)
NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association (The)
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SDI Steel Door Institute
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
STI Steel Tank Institute
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
UFAC Upholstered Furniture Action Council
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
USG United States Gypsum Company - A Subsidiary of USG Corporation
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association)
1.04 GOVERNMENT AGENCIES (LOCAL AUTHORITIES)
A The following list of Government Agencies is not intended to be exhaustive and the
Contractor shall carry out all works in strict accordance with current Codes and
Regulations of all Government Agencies whether listed hereunder or not.
1 DM – Dubai Municipality
2 Local Civil Defense Authorities.
3 ETISALAT/du
4 DEWA
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 01002
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNBOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Project identification signs.

1 Installation
2 Maintenance.
3 Removal/Handover.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Project identification sign boards shall be of same size and construction of the
required nos. as shown on the Drawing providing an approved workshop drawing
prior to work.
B. Project identification sign board shall have backlit perspective panel and shall be
also illuminated with flood lights.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer's Representative shop drawings for approval.
B. Show content, layout, lettering, colours, foundation, structure, sizes, and grades of
members. Show electrical system and electrical supply routing to avoid current and
anticipated works.
C.
Obtain Engineer's Representative approval and applicable approvals of Authorities.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Verify design and compliance with statutory requirements.
B. Design sign and structure to withstand 140 km/hr wind velocity.
Graphics : Graphics to be carried out by supplier with not less than five years
C. experience in similar kind of work.
Perspective Panel and Paint Finish: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and
D. chipping for duration of Project.
3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a professional
registered Civil Engineer in Dubai and/or approved by the Owner.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SIGN MATERIALS
A. Structure and Framing: New steel, structurally adequate.
B. Sign Surfaces: Painted surfaces, 0.5mm Thick metal plate. Transparent

perspective panel: flexible tensioned material “3M Panaflex” or similar approved.
C. Rough Hardware: Steel.

D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, primer and two coats. Colours designated
by Engineer's Representative.
E. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colours designated by the
Engineer's Representative. Languages: Arabic and English.
F. Relocate and adapt display boards as necessary from time to time to

accommodate the progress of the works. No other signs or advertisements will be
allowed to be displayed on the site without the written approval of the Owner’s
Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install project identification signs within 15 days of Signing the Contract.

B. Erect at designated and approved location(s)
Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to
C. resist wind loadings.
D. Install sign surface plumb and level. Anchor securely.
E. Paint sight‑exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.
3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
A. Two painted sign, etc. and in the content section (item C), as shown on drawings
B. Content:
1 Project title, logos and name of Owner and logos as shown on Contract Documents.
2 Name of Consultant(s) and logo(s).
3. Names of package contractors (or space for package contractors not awarded)
and major subcontractor(s).
4. Date of Project Commencement.
5. Date of Planned Project Completion.
Graphic Design, Colours, Style of Lettering: Designated by the Engineer's

C. Representative
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.03 MAINTENANCE
Maintain signs and supports, clean and repair where deterioration or damages have
ocurred to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative at no additional cost.
Replace defective lamps and pay electricity supply charges until substantial
A. completion.
B. Repaint as necessary.
3.04 RELOCATION
A. Relocate Project Identification signs if required by the Contract Drawings.
3.05 REMOVAL/HANDOVER
A. At handover the temporary signs shall be dismantled and removed off site.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY ACCOMMODATION, FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Temporary Accommodation facilities only to be considered by the Main Contractor.

Temporary accommodation and facilities for nominated/Direct Sub-Contractors,
Employer, Project Manager and Engineer to be provided by the Main Contractor.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and
security and protection facilities.
1.03 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the
Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without
cost, including, but not limited to Employer Representative, Engineer, testing
agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for
construction operations.
C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for
construction operations.
D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used
by all entities for construction operations.
E. Telecommunication services: Pay telecommunication service use charges by all

entities for construction operations.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show location and spatial requirements of temporary facilities, utility hook-
ups and / or temporary utility provision staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
NEB‐P‐ 17‐1747 1/23 Civil Specs./Sec. 01500

MAIN WORKS
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70 and local
authorities.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect
each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall

assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each
permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Employer's
acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pavement: Comply with Division 02
B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) thick,

galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with
galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-
inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts.
C. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel,

chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe
posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD
corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide
concrete bases for supporting posts.
D. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06
E. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by
maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with
ASTM C 36/C 36M.
F. Insulation: Un-faced mineral-fibre blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or

rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and
50, respectively.
G. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections.

MAIN WORKS
2.02 SITE MANAGEMENT
The Contractor shall allow for all site management. He shall maintain adequate site
organization under the control of qualified and experienced staff that is capable of
assuming complete responsibility for a contract of this nature:
A. Project Manager – 1 No (Full Time)

B. Construction Manager – 2 No (Full Time)
C. Project Engineer – 2 No (Full Time)
D. Quantity Surveyor – 1 No (Full Time)
E. Planning Engineer – 1 No (Full Time)
F. Supervision Team
1 Civil Engineers - Minimum 4 No. (Full Time)
2 Service Electrical Engineer -1 No (Full Time)
3 Service Mechanical Engineer -1 Nos.(Full Time)
4 Land Surveyor - 1 No. (Part Time)
G. QA/QC Team for;

1 QA/QC Manager – 1 No (Full Time)
2 QA/QC (Civil / Architect) – 2 No (Full Time)
3 QA/QC (Electrical) – 1 No (Full Time)
4 QA/QC (Mechanical) – 1 No (Full Time)
H. HSE Team for:

1 HSE Manager – 1 No (Full Time)
2 Safety Officers - 4 Nos. (Full Time)
I. Shop drawing preparation Team consisting of:

1 Architectural Engineer – 1 No (As required)
2 Structural Engineer – 1 No (As required)
3 MEP Coordinator - 1 No (Full Time)
4 Draftsman along with necessary computer equipment/plotters at site. – (Full Time)
and Nos. as required.
And other necessary staff required for satisfactory completion of the project to be
assessed by the Contractor.
The Contractor to submit the CV(s) of the above mentioned personnel to the
Engineer’s Representative for approval. All the above personnel should have
minimum seven years’ experience in similar size projects in the UAE.
The Contractor shall be responsible for his own setting out levels and lines to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

MAIN WORKS
2.03 TEMPORARY FACILITIES for Employer and Employer’s Consultants
A. Site Offices, General: Contractor to procure, supply, deliver, install, service,

maintain and clean the Offices/Communal buildings and all furniture and equipment
as described below. Facilities shall be fit for purpose with component U-values, day
lighting, solar shading, privacy considerations, etc in accordance with best practice.
The structure shall be formed by modular construction with serviceable, fire rated
finishes throughout; wall and ceiling surfaces forming office spaces to be durable
and easy clean, flooring to be hard wearing and easy to clean, doors to be
lockable. To include full temperature control. Foundations to be adequate for actual
loading. Offices shall be fitted throughout with fire detection, alarm and firefighting
facilities as prescribed by Civil Defence and/or other applicable regulations.
Emergency Lighting and Emergency Escape Signage shall also be provided in
accordance with the requirements of Civil Defence and/or other applicable
regulations. Utility services (whether permanent or temporary, or a combination of
both) shall also be provided by the Contractor, including the payment of all diversion
and supply costs, connection and disconnection fees, statutory charges, monthly
billings, etc.
Wherever possible the Site Offices for the Client and Consultant personnel should
be in a PPE free area, with concrete footpaths and clearly visible signage leading
from the site entrance and car park to the site office entrance. There should be no
slewing of loads in the air space above the site offices and access paths; if this is
unavoidable then adequate protective structures must be formed by the Contractor
above the site offices and access paths.
B. Prior to procurement or provision of such temporary facilities the Contractor’s

proposals for same are to be submitted for the review and comments of the
Engineer. The design shall fully detail the following:-
 location of proposed temporary facilities, including extent of any craneage
 layout and elevations of proposed facilities.
 all materials proposed (complete with performance criteria)
 identify all power outlets,
 depict floor loading capabilities and requirements
 demonstrate wind load resistance
 explain evacuation provisions (e.g. protected staircases)
 illustrate the selection parameters used in the identification of the proposed
 Explain foundation design.
A “No Objection” review status from the Engineer is required prior to any materials
being purchased or physical works commencing.

MAIN WORKS
C. Utilities
All required permits, utility contracts, deposits, wayleaves, etc are to be arranged at
the Contractor’s expense and in sufficient time to ensure completion of the facilities
when required by the Employer and thereafter impediment free use of the facilities.
1 Air Conditioning: 24 degree C +/- 1 degree C will be achieved in all occupied

spaces utilising the requisite number of split AC units to service each particular
room, office or area. Each individual split AC shall come with and respond to its own
unique remote thermostatic controller. Communal spaces to be under negative
pressure with suitably undercut doors and kitchens and toilets shall have no less
than 6 air changes per hour.
2 Lighting: The following tables identify the minimum lighting criteria which shall be
provided for each area type. All luminaires shall be of high energy efficiency type
utilising high frequency control gear and fluorescent lamps as indicated.
Internal
Generally the luminaires selected for internal applications shall be equipped with
either miniature fluorescent or linear T8 fluorescent lamps as appropriate.
Office areas: 500lux at 900mm AFFL; Min uniformity 0.8 3000-4000K
Corridor and Toilets: 100lux at FFL, Min uniformity 0.8 2500-4000K
Filing, Storage and Print Rooms: 300lux at 1000mm AFFL,Min uniformity 0.8 2500-
3000K
Entrances and Waiting Areas: 200 lux at FFL, Min uniformity 0.8 2500-3000K
Prayer Room and Storage Rooms: 250lux at FFL, Min uniformity 0.8 2500-3000K
Food Preparation and Cooking: 500 lux at 1000mm AFFL, Min uniformity 0.8,
3500–4000K
Dining / Canteen: 150 lux at 900mm AFFL, Min uniformity 0.8, 3000K
External
Generally the luminaires selected for eternal applications shall be equipped with
high intensity discharge lamps, with control being provided by 24hour time clock
photocells and over ride manual switching.
Perimeter Security Lighting and : 50 lux, Min uniformity ratio 0.6
Pedestrian Walkways
Carpark Areas: 30 lux, Min uniformity ratio 0.4
Roadways: 30 lux, Min uniformity ratio 0.4
Public Health: Ladies & Gents toilet facilities to be provided in accordance with the
demographics of the maximum occupancy, as well as Prayer Room & associated
ablutions area, Kitchen, Canteen/Rest Area and First Aid room. All wash hand
basins & sinks to be provided with both hot and cold water outlets. Hot water
storage cylinders shall each provide no more than 6 outlets and never further than
15 metres from source to outlet. All sewage should be collected in a manner to be
agreed with the Engineer and removed from site never less than once per week and
always outside of office hours, 6.00am – 7.00pm.

MAIN WORKS
3 Telecoms : As described in table below
4 Surge protection: The contractor shall provide suitable surge protective devices for,
and to protect sensitive electronic equipment such as computers, photocopiers, etc
as agreed with the Engineer prior to works commencing. Surge Protective Devices
(SPD) shall consist only of non-degrading Silicon Avalanche Suppressor Diodes.
The SPD power suppressors shall be replaceable and upgradeable to a higher
rating value, without turning power off, tools or skills. Construction materials to be
Listed or Recognised to IEC 61643.
5 IT facilities: As described in table below.
6 Electrical Generator: The Contractor shall provide, at no extra cost, standby backup
Generator supply if needed.
D. Communal Facilities
Entrance Lobby, Reception (waiting area), Prayer room & associated ablutions
area, Access Corridors & Signage, Meeting rooms, Stores (Samples, Cleaning
materials & sinks, etc), Kitchen, Canteen/rest area, First Aid room. Finishes to these
areas shall be to Engineer’s prior approval.
E. External Areas
Nominated shaded parking, General parking & Visitor parking as described below.
Hard & soft landscaping, Irrigation & Car wash, Waste management, Controlled
access & access roads, Lighting (Security lighting to perimeter of facility utilising
compact source high intensity discharge (H.I.D.) lamped luminaires under time
clock and photocell control. Car park / access roads to be illuminated using B-class
road lighting lamp posts.Lanterns to be complete with individual photocell control
and H.I.D. lamps.
The Contractor is responsible to provide access/ exit roads to the construction site.
All modification works required to provide proper access/ exit roads (e.g. removal of
curb stones, road markings, barriers, speed humps, signage, etc.) have to be
carried out by the Contractor and are included in his scope of work.
Modification and reinstatement of roads as well as provision of staff access routing,
staff buses parking and delivery truck access routing is the responsibility of the
Contractor and allowance for the same has to be made. The access routing for
staff, -busses, delivery trucks and others might need to be changed during the
course of the project according to the project progress. The Contractor has to
provide a detailed phasing plan for the arrangement of the various access routings
and update the same according to the project progress on a frequent basis. The
detailed phasing plan has to be approved by the client or it´s representative prior to
implementation on-site.

MAIN WORKS
F. Maintenance
Site Offices are to be cleaned daily with a minimum of 3 refuse removals from site
per week. The contractor will provide complete planned and preventative
maintenance as agreed with the Engineer. Maintenance of the facilities shall include
regular visits by an approved Pest Control specialist company using only W.H.O. or
similar authority approved chemicals.
G. Relocation
If it is required to relocate the personnel who utilise the temporary facilities, the
Contractor is obliged to manage the change in location without any interruption to
the operation of those staff, or reduction in the nature, extent and quality of the
facilities previously provided to those staff. The new temporary facility arrangements
are to be agreed with the Engineer.
H. Facility operation staff

The Contractor shall provide / allow the following full time facility operation staffs for
site management assistant’s staff such as but not limited to below items for the
complete duration of time that the temporary facilities are utilised.
 Designated person with necessary authority to act on all matters related to the
temporary facilities during their use.
 IT support technician (to be immediately available on site during normal work
hours)
 Car washing staff / car park attendant
 Document Controller
 Draftsman
 Site Office Secretary
 Tea boy
 Cleaner
I. Health & Safety.

1 The Contractor shall provide all personnel of the Employer, the Engineer,
Employer’s Consultants and all visitors to the site with all appropriate Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE) as follows:-
 Minimum requirements for each person shall be construction hard hat with
chin strap, safety footwear, high visibility vest, safety spectacles.
 Other PPE shall be provided by the Contractor to suit the prevailing activities
on site. Adequate training will be provided by the Contractor in the use of such PPE.
 All PPE shall comply with relevant British Standards or other equal standards
approved by the Engineer.
2 The Contractor will carry out safety inductions for all first time visitors to the project
site and maintain a record of all personnel who have attended such inductions.

MAIN WORKS
3 The Contractor to provide fire extinguisher training and fire marshall training to
Client and Consultant nominated representatives.
4 First Aid Room facilities provided and staffed by the Contractor shall be made
available for use by Client and Consultant team when necessary.
J. Consumables
Provide (without charge) all notepads, copy paper, printer cartridges, pens,
Compact Disks, Flash Drives, etc and various other item of stationery of all various
types, sizes and quantities, to provide uninterrupted operation to all personnel on
site employed by the Employer, Engineer, Employer’s Consultants. To also include
provision (without charge) of potable bottled drinking water, Tea, Coffee, Milk,
Sugar, Soft-drinks, biscuits, etc. suitable for accommodation population plus
Guests.
K. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1 All electrical equipment shall be Energystar (or similar) rated.
2 All printers to have facility for double sided printing as a default option.
3 All computer software shall be latest version, unless stated otherwise.

MAIN WORKS
No. of Furniture and Equipment per Room Plan area

Room
Rooms / Comments
Designation Qty Description / size
Spaces
EMPLOYER'S OFFICE ACCOMMODATION
EMPLOYER 1 Person 1 Room 24 m2

each
item Venetian Blinds - all windows
1 Desk + side table 1800 x

800mm
1 Executive desk chair
1 Credenza 1600 x
450mm
1 Table for Drawings 2000 x
1000mm
1 Drawing hangers and Stand
4 Visitors Chair
1 Round meeting Table with 4

chairs
1 White Board 1200 x
600mm
1 Tack Board 2400 x
900mm
1 Filing Trays (Set of 3)
1 Waste Paper Bin
ENGINEER’S OFFICE COMMODATION (NEB)
Resident 2 Person 2 Room 24 m2

Engineer/PM each
2 Pedestal desk 1800 x

800mm
2 Executive desk chair
2 Credenza 1600 x
450mm
1000mm

MAIN WORKS
2 3 Seats Sofa
4 Visitors Chair
2 Round meeting Table with 4

chairs
600mm
2 Tack Board 2400 x
900mm
1 Cabinet, 2 door lockable,
adjustable shelves
2 Drawing rack minimum 6
holders
2 Waste Paper Bin

The contractor shall provide 1 - Four Four wheel car of 2017/2018 or latest model
Wheel Car including all expenses (Toyota/Nissan, subject for Engineers approval) for
that may occur such as insurance, exclusive use of Engineer and/or his staff.
registration, spare parts,
consumables, (Petrol, Salik, etc.)
and maintenance.
Senior Staff 6 6 Rooms 16 m2

(Engineers) Persons each
6 Desk 1600 x
800mm
6 Desk chair
1000mm
12 Visitors Chair
600mm
6 Tack Board 1200 x
600mm
6 Cabinet, 2 door lockable,
adjustable shelves
holders
6 Filing Trays
(Set of 3)
6 Waste Paper Bin

MAIN WORKS
Site Inspection 2 Person 2 Room 12 m2

(Staff) each
2 Desk 1600 x
800mm
2 Desk chair

1000mm
4 Visitors Chair
2 Tack Board 900 x

600mm
2 Metal Filing Cabinets,
adjustable shelves
holders
2 Filing Trays
(Set of 3)
2 Waste Paper Bin
Secretary / 1 Person 1 Room 20 m2

Document
Controller
item Venetian Blinds - all windows 1600 x
800mm
1 Desk
1 desk chair
1 Side Unit for Computer/Fax
6 Visitors Chair Reception

MAIN WORKS
8 Metal Filing Cabinets, 4

drawers lockable.
1 Waste Paper Bin
As required Metal boxes for long term

archiving of Employer and
Engineer documents from
time to time throughout the
project.
1 Server Room with A/C 9 m2
1 Document Filing Room (Lockable) 16 m2
1 Table for Filing 1200x800
8 Metal racking/shelving (A4

height / depth)
2 Cupboard, lockable 1800 high
3 Filing Trays
(Set of 3)
1 Waste Paper Bin
1 Sample Room (Lockable) 24m2
1 Table for Filing 1200 x

800
8 Metal racking/shelving system On all
walls with
centre
racks
where
needed.
1 Kitchen / Pantry 12 m2
each
1 Refrigerator Min. 245
litres
1 Waste bin
1 Sink Base Unit 1200 x

600mm

MAIN WORKS
1 Stainless steel sink (hot &

cold water supply)
1 Wall Unit 1200 x
300mm
1 Kitchen Table + 2 Chairs
1 Drinking Water Cooler
1 Convection Microwave oven.

1200 watts, 2.1 cu. ft.
1 Kettle
1 Hot Plate
1 Fridge (smaller for individual

room)
As req~d Beverage, i.e. Drinking water,
bottled drinking water, coffee,
tea, juice, soft drink, etc.
W.C. FACILITIES (number to suit total office population, minimum number not less
than local codes) - For NEB
1 Male Toilets 16 m2
3 Western WC
3 Hand Bidet (flexible hose)
3 Toilet roll holder
3 Coat Hook
3 Urinal
3 Wash Basin (hot & cold)
3 Mirror 600 x
500mm
3 Paper Towel Holder (roll type)
4 Waste Paper Bin

MAIN WORKS
1 Female Toilets 12 m2
2 Western WC
2 Hand Bidet (flexible hose)
2 Toilet roll holder
2 Coat Hook
2 Wash Basin (hot & cold)
2 Mirror 600 x
500mm
2 Paper Towel Holder (roll type)
3 Waste Paper Bin
1 Prayer Room For Engineer and 16 m2

Employers use
MEETING ROOM REQUIREMENTS
1 MEETING ROOM (10 Persons) 24 m2
item Blackout Blinds - all windows
1 Conference Table for 32

persons
10 Attendee Chairs

600mm
1 Tack Board 2400 x
900mm
1 Waste Paper Bin

MAIN WORKS
MEETING ROOM REQUIREMENTS
1 MEETING ROOM (20 Persons) 40 m2
item Blackout Blinds - all windows
1 Conference Table for 32

persons
20 Attendee Chairs

600mm
1 Tack Board 2400 x
900mm
1 Waste Paper Bin
EMPLOYER'S / ENGINEER'S OFFICE EQUIPMENT, IT AND OTHERS
Computers (Hardware)
1 Main Server -Series x 3560

M3 with 6 x 500 GB Hard
drive
1 for Desktop PC –Dell T1500,
each 8GB RAM, 22” monitor
station including accessories
1 Laptop: 8 GB RAM / 1TB
HDD/DVD RW/18.5 LCD +
Keyboard + mouse + monitor
1 Laser Colour A4 Size Printer

MPC300 / MPC 400
1 A4/A3 heavy Duty
printer/scanner (Black &
White) Model: Canon image
runner advance 425i
1 A4/A3 heavy Duty
printer/scanner (Colored)
Model: Canon iRC2380i
1 for UPS -5KVA, 1 hour full load
each back -up
station
1 for Data back-up (1TB minimum
each capacity)
station

MAIN WORKS
Computers (Software)
1 License Server Windows Enterprise

Edition
1 License Firewall Software
1 for Anti Virus Software

each
station
1 for MS Exchange 2007 for e-mail
each communication (or latest
station version)
1 for Microsoft Office Professional
each 2010 / 2013
1 for Primavera or MS Project 2013
each or later (Latest version)
station
1 for Adobe Acrobat Professional
each (Latest version)
station
1 for AutoCAD (Latest version)
each
station
1 for DWF Design Review (Latest
each version)
station
OFFICE EQUIPMENT GENERAL
1 Multifunction colour
Printer/Scanner/Copier (A3 &
A5)
1 Heavy Duty A3/A4 photcopier
with feeder and sort facilities
1 A0 colour drawing Plotter

1 Spiral Ring Binder/Punch
1 Paper guillotine
1
Plain paper Fax Machine and
International IDD line
5 Digital Camera –Heavy duty;
water resistant
1 A3 and A4 size Laminator
As req~d All stationary items including
A4 & A3 papers until
Completion
MOBILE COMMUNICATION

MAIN WORKS
2 No. for NEB 3 Nos. Mobile Phones (Smart Phone)

PM/RE and 1 with SIM cards including post-
No. for paid payment of Bills
Employers
Representative
OFFICE TELEPHONE SYSTEM
1 - Employer International Lines

2 - NEB PM/RE
1 for Local lines
each
work
station
1 PABX minimum 6 lines & all
wiring, outlets, etc
1 for Telephone handsets
each
work
station
1 WIFI facility (for 10 or more
users)
1 Broadband High Speed
Internet facility -4MB
SHADED PARKING SPACES
2 Shaded parking spaces for

Employer
14 Shaded parking spaces for
NEB
20 min. Contractors, Subcontractors
and Visitors

MAIN WORKS
OFFICE SPACE AND STORAGE FOR NOMINATED / DIRECT SUBCONTRACTORS
2 Lockable storage space for 20 m2

Main and MEP Contractor for each
his tools and matl’s
Nominate Office space for each 12m2 for
d / Direct subcontractors with furniture each
Subcontr and all necessary facilities subcontrac
actors (excluding IT peripheral tor to have
equipment) separate
offices.
Storage space for each 12m2

subcontractors for their Storage
material deliveries and tools space for
each
subcontrac
tors
OTHER GENERAL FACILITIES (Contractor and Subcontractors)
2 Prayer Rooms 16m2

each room

MAIN WORKS
2.04 TEMPORARY FACILITIES FOR NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS.
Contractor to provide enough space for sub-contractors usage (offices and storage)
excluding IT facilities and equipment.
2.05 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and

conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental
regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or
B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified

in Division 02 Section.
C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil

erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent
properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
D. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in

and around excavations and sub-grade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of
storm water from heavy rains.
E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside
the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction
operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize

attraction and harbouring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform
extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of
pests and their residues at completion of the Works. Obtain extended warranty for
Employer. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
G. Site Enclosure Fence: Partial enclosure of the Site and access gates provided by
other contractor. Contractor shall take-over from other contractor, complete as
necessary to full site enclosure, maintain, adapt and remove on completion.
H. Site Security:
1 Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to
authorised personnel only.
2 Provide 24 hour monitoring of Entrance Gates.

MAIN WORKS
3 The Contractor shall guard and protect work, products, materials, plant, temporary
work, and Employer's operations, from theft, vandalism and unauthorized entry. ´
4 The Contractor shall safeguard Employer's and Engineer’s staff.

5 The Contractor shall initiate site security programme at job mobilisation, maintain
throughout construction period until Employer occupancy or Employer acceptance
precludes the need for Contractor security.
I. Site Access: The Contractor shall restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into
Site.Contractor shall control and be responsible for all vehicles and personnel
accessing the Site. The Contractor shall implement and maintain computerized
access control system for vehicles and personnel. Allow entrance only to personnel
with authorized picture ID passes and approved vehicles. Maintain system log of
labourers, staff, other contractors, agents of Local Authorities and utility companies,
Employer’s and Engineer’s staff and visitors. Make available to Employer and
Engineer on-line with secure password access. Security guard houses and traffic
control barriers and pedestrian control gates to be established and manned at all
functioning access gates. The Contractor shall maintain 24 hr guard and security for
the Site utilizing watch stations and tour route system. The Contractor’s access and
security measures shall be subject to regular review and satisfaction of the
Engineer.
J. The Contractor shall coordinate access of Employer's and Engineer’s personnel to

Site.
K. Vehicles with goods for sites other than the Project will not be allowed on site.
L. Vehicles are to enter and leave site in an orderly manner, no speeding will be
permitted.
M. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around

partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent
unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
N. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning
signs and lighting.
O. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction,

in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction
operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weather tight enclosure for
building exterior.
1 Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete,
insulate temporary enclosures.

MAIN WORKS
P. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and

dirt migration and to separate areas occupied from fumes and noise. Construct
dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and
fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side.
1 Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheet
on each side. Cover floor with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheet,
extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length
of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant plywood.
2 Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas.
3 Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.
4 Protect air-handling equipment.

5 Weather strip openings.
6 Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
Q. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of

types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses.
Comply with NFPA 241 and local regulations.
1 Prohibit smoking in all areas.
2 Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3 Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for

personnel at Site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures
to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and
information.
4 Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a
warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to
be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
2.06 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize

waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended
uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
C. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve
indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
D. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily in hours of darkness, particularly

from dusk until 12:00 midnight unless otherwise instructed.

MAIN WORKS
E. Temporary Facility Changeover: Make allowances to maintain the use of temporary

security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Taking Over the Works
or when otherwise instructed.
F. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its
service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent
facility, or no later than completion of the Works. Complete or, if necessary, restore
permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with
temporary facility. Repair damaged Works, clean exposed surfaces, and replace
construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1 Unless noted otherwise materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities
are property of Contractor. Employer reserves right to take possession of Project
identification signs.
2 Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into
permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil
and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove
materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds,
and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair
or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
3 At completion of the Works, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Closeout Procedures."
2.07 WHEEL WASH
A. At each vehicular exit from site, a wheel wash facility and operator is to be provided.
Remove on completion of bulk earthwork activities.
2.08 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. Within fourteen (14) calendar days of the Commencement Date, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer his Traffic Management Plan which shall provide for
safe and orderly passing of traffic through the site up to Taking Over of the Works.
B. The Traffic Management Plan shall be consistent with any Traffic Management Plan
outline submitted with the Contractor’s tender for the Contract.
C. The Traffic Management Plan shall include details of all proposed road closures,
detours, staged construction, necessary signing, the relevant Authorities whose
approval is required to be obtained and all other relevant information.
D. The Contractor shall implement, monitor and update the Traffic Management Plan
during the Contract and shall, within seven (7) calendar days of its amendment,
submit a copy of the Plan to the Engineer.

MAIN WORKS
E. The Contractor shall give the Engineer a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days
written notice of proposed changes in traffic movements necessary for the
performance of work under the Contract. All road closures shall be subject to
approval by the relevant Authority.
F. The Contractor shall inspect all traffic control devices and traffic control
arrangements daily to ensure the adequacy of such devices and arrangements. The
Contractor shall maintain records of these inspections and subsequent actions
taken to rectify any inadequacies. Such records shall be made available to the
Engineer upon written request.
G. Nothing contained in this section shall in any way limit or exclude any of the
Contractors obligations or liabilities under the Contract.
END OF SECTION 01 5000

MAIN WORKS
SECTION 02240
DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A.
This section specifies designing, furnishing, installing, maintaining, operating
and removing temporary dewatering systems as required to lower and
control water levels and hydrostatic pressures during construction; disposing
of pumped water; constructing, maintaining, and observing and removing of
equipment and instrumentation for control for the system.
B.
Dewatering includes lowering the water table and intercepting seepage
which would otherwise emerge from the slopes or bottom of the excavation;
increasing the stability of excavated slopes; preventing loss of material from
beneath the slopes or bottom of the excavation; improving the excavating
and hauling characteristics of on site soil; preventing rupture or heaving of
the bottom of an excavation; and disposing of pumped water.
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading: Section 02300.
1.03 DESIGN:
A. The Contractor is responsible for the adequacy of the dewatering system.

Design dewatering systems to:
1 Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure and lower the groundwater levels
60cm below excavation in soil;
2 Develop a substantially dry and stable sub grade for the protection of
subsequent operations;
3 Not result in damage to adjacent buildings, structures, utilities and other
work, included in this contract.
B.
Methods may include sump pumping, single or multiple stage well point or jet
eductor well point systems, deep wells, or combinations thereof.
C. Locate dewatering facilities where they will not interfere with utilities and
construction work to be done by others.
D. Modify dewatering procedures, which cause, or threaten to cause, damage

to new or existing facilities, so as to prevent further damage. Modifications
made at no additional expense to the Owner.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Design of dewatering systems by a Contractor of demonstrated ability,

experience and specialized in the design installation and operation of
dewatering systems:
1 Dewatering to be by an organization with long-term experience and proven
ability in dewatering of the type necessary for the work. Three technical
supervisory personnel of the dewatering organization shall have been
actively involved in dewatering work on five successful projects.
2. Provide names, current addresses and telephone numbers of persons
who were in responsible charge for the Owner of the construction project
during the time dewatering work.
3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a
professional registered Civil Engineer in Dubai and/or approved by the
Owner.
B. Before installation of the dewatering systems, submit information drawings to

the Engineer showing the following:
1 The proposed type of dewatering systems;
2 Arrangements, locations and depths of system components.
3 Methods of disposal of pumped water including approval of authorities.
4 During dewatering submit within 24 hours of reading, groundwater
observation records.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Surface Drawings: Intercept and divert precipitation, and surface water,

away from excavation through the use of dikes, ditches, pipes, sumps or
other means.
B. Drainage of Excavated Areas: Provide and maintain ditches of adequate

size to collect surface and seepage water, which may enter the excavations.
Divert the water into sumps and drain or pump into a temporary conduit for
discharge.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(NOT APPLICABLE)
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DEWATERING:
A. Keep the Engineer advised of any changes made to accommodate field

conditions and, on completion of the dewatering system installation, revise
and resubmit information drawings, as necessary to show the installed
configuration.
B. Organize dewatering operations to lower the groundwater level in

excavations as required for execution of the work, and to provide a stable,
dry sub grade for the execution of subsequent operations. Take all
precautions to prevent disturbance of foundation soils. Locate groundwater
to facilitate collection of water samples by Engineer.
C.
Maintain the water level at such lower elevations that no danger to structures
can occur because of buildup of excessive hydrostatic pressure, and in any
event maintain the water level a minimum of 60cm below the sub grade.
D. Monitor daily the depth of groundwater lowering by using observation wells

and/or peizometers.
E. Maintain auxiliary equipment at the site to continue dewatering in the event

of a breakdown. After the start of dewatering, continue 24 hours per day - 7
days per week for the extent of time the excavations are opened.
F. Notify the Engineer in the event of a disturbance to the foundation soils

caused by an interrupted or inadequate dewatering system. Take all
corrective measures necessary at no additional expense to the Owner.
G. Seal all dewatering wells upon completion of dewatering; the wells shall be
sealed by pressure injecting a suitable grout capable of sealing the wells and
preventing leakage.
3.02 RECORDS:
A. Observe and record daily the elevation of the groundwater during the period
that the dewatering system is in operation. Submit details on weekly basis.
3.03 DURATION
A. Period needed for dewatering to be running up till required slab levels (refer
to structural design and soil investigation report)
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including
haunches to support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before
laying pipe.
1. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
D. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary

flow of pore water.
E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed
by Engineer. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for
according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 3 m in width and pits more than 9
m in either length or width.
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or
beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without
additional compensation.
F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate

deposits and boulders of rock material 0.57 cu. m or more in volume that when
tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D
1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of 97 blows/50 mm.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks,

curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary
features constructed above or below the ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for
asphalt paving, or layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete
pavement or walk.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top

surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil
materials.
K. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well
as underground services within buildings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. 3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a

professional registered Civil Engineer in Dubai and/or approved by the Owner.
1. 14-kg samples, sealed in airtight containers, of each proposed soil material
2. from on-site or borrow sources.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and

interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements
indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil
material proposed for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or
borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.
3. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or
borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency

qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition
testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Client or

others unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written
permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before
excavation
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities

indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services
if lines are active.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil

materials are not available from excavations.
B Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW,
SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel
larger than 75 mm in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,
vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML,
MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
1 Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2

percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
1 Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90
percent passing a 1-1/2- inch (38-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent
passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
2 Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95
percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent
3 Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed

gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at
least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and not more than 12
percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
4 Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100
percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing
a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
5 Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed

or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100
percent passing a 1-1/2- inch (38-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No.
8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or

crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size
67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent
F. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a

dense state.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from
ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and
surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain

or water accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow
water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as
temporary drainage ditches.
2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground
water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
3. Dewatering shall not be stopped unless tanking of the basement is

completed.
3.02 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the

character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock,
soil materials, and obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil
materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
B. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as earth
and rock. Rock excavation will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum
according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents.
1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible

on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be
removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as
rock or unauthorized excavation.
a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of
material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.
2 Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock.

b. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-sectioned by
Engineer.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.03 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or

minus 1 inch (25 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from
structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services
and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of
excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete
reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base
to receive other work.
2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations from 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm)
above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven,
remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid
base to receive concrete pile caps.
3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical
Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a
tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of
excavations intended for bearing surface.
3.04 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections,

elevations, and grades.
3.05 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of
pipe below frost line.
B. 2. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on
each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench
bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of pipe or conduit.
2. Clearance: As indicated.
C. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2

years.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter and
flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and
support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter,
shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference.
Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in

rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of
pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
1 Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock
or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
3.06 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation
and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft
pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated
subgrades.
D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain,
accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Engineer.
3.07 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile

soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain
surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
B. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within
drip line of remaining trees.
3.08 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing
the following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
B. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported
walls.
3.09 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated.
Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and
barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of
bottom of footings; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
C. Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or

conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After
installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4
inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger
than 1 inch (25 mm), to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or
conduit.
E. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up
on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid
damage or displacement of utility system.
F. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
G. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as
sheeting is removed.
H. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
I. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished
grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.1 FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials,

obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.
B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4

horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.
C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
D. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.11 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer
before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or
contain frost or ice.
B. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material
that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact
to specified dry unit weight.
3.12 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular

surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross
sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new
grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required
surface tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent
ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following
tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13
mm) when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straight edge.
3.13 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE
A. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of drainage fabric around perimeter of

drainage trench as indicated. Place a 6-inch (150-mm) course of filter material
on drainage fabric to support drainage pipe. Encase drainage pipe in a
minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of filter material and wrap in drainage fabric,
overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).
1 Compact each course of filter material to 95 percent of maximum dry unit
weight according to ASTM D 698.
B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in
width indicated, to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade. Overlay
drainage backfill with one layer of drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends
at least 6 inches (150 mm).
1 Compact each course of filter material to 95 percent of maximum dry density
according to ASTM D 698.
C. Place and compact impervious fill material over drainage backfill to final
subgrade.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Install separation fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's

written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
B. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on separation fabric

according to fabric manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
C. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade

and as follows:
1 Place base course material over subbase.
2 Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required
grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
3 Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope
grades.
4 When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 mm)
or less, place materials in a single layer.
D. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150
mm), place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150
mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick when compacted.
E. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base

course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches
(300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with
each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit
weight according to ASTM D 1557.
3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE
A. Under slabs-on-grade, install drainage fabric on prepared subgrade according

to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. Place
drainage course on drainage fabric and as follows:
B. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as

follows:
1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not
less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches (150 mm) or

less, place materials in a single layer.
3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches (150
mm), place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150
mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick when compacted.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.16 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing,
and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or

partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they
lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather
conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by
Engineer; reshape and recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove

finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and
reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match
adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent
possible.
3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including

unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Client's
property.
B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on

Client's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Engineer.
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris,
and legally dispose of it off Client's property.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 02362
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for termite control:

1. Soil treatment.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency.
B. PCO: Pest control operator.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA-

Registered Label.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products

certifying that treatments furnished comply with requirements.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed
projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers
and Clients, and other information specified.
D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed,
submit report for Client's record information, including the following as applicable:
1 Date and time of application.
2 Moisture content of soil before application.
3 Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
4 Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5 Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
6 Areas of application.
7 Water source for application.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction
where Project is located and who is experienced and has completed termite
control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction
where Project is located and who is an experienced installer who employs
workers trained and approved by bait station system manufacturer to install
manufacturer's products.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a

Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities
having jurisdiction.
A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is

water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring.
Comply with EPA-Registered Label requirements and requirements of authorities
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and
concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-
supported slabs, before construction.
B. Install bait station system after construction, including landscaping, is completed.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor

certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment,
will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity
or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or
replace damage caused by termite infestation.
B. Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Continuing Service: Provide a proposal for continuing service, including

monitoring, inspection, and retreatment for occurrences of termite activity, from
applicator to Client, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) continuing
service agreement, starting on the date of Substantial Completion. State
services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future
renewal options.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements

of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated
formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent
termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to
plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for
the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according
to the product's EPA-Registered Label.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for

compliance with requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with
earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting
performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate.
Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials
such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction
waste wood from soil and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil

materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated.
Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas
under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted
fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer,
complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.03 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
3.04 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency.

Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the
maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-
Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical
termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building
construction. Distribute the treatment evenly.
B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until
completely dry.
C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted
until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to
EPA-Registered Label instructions.
D. Post warning signs in areas of application.
E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation,

grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 02772
PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes precast concrete kerbs and edgings.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Design, Engineer, fabricate, and install precast concrete
units to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver precast concrete units to Project site in such quantities and at such times
to ensure continuity of installation. Store units at Project site to prevent cracking,
distorting, warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are
visible.
B. Lift and support units only at designated lifting or supporting points shown on
Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M, Grade 460),

deformed.
2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type II. White cement to be used where white
concrete is required.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates meeting Class

5S and MNL-117 requirements.
C. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect colour stability,
setting, or strength of concrete.
D. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Accurately position steel dowels and other anchorage hardware for attachment of
loose hardware and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate
anchorage hardware where it does not affect the position of the main
reinforcement or the placing of concrete.
B. Supply steel dowels, and other anchorage hardware shapes not provided by
other trades necessary for securing precast concrete units to supporting and
adjacent members.
C. Cast-in holes, and other accessories in precast concrete units to receive dowels
and other similar work as indicated. Coordinate with other trades for installation
of cast-in items.
D. Reinforcement: Comply with the recommendations of CRSI's "Manual of
Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.
1 Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that
reduce or destroy the bond with concrete.
2 Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement
during concrete placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal
support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces. Do not use plastic-
coated or uncoated metal chair supports.
3 Place reinforcement to maintain at least 19-mm minimum cover after finishing.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in
position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed
concrete surfaces.
E. Mix concrete according to MNL-117 and requirements of this Section.
Following concrete batching, no additional water may be added.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,

true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of
precast concrete units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
B. Do not install precast units until supporting concrete has attained minimum
allowable design compressive strength.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install precast concrete units plumb, level, and in alignment. Provide temporary
supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as
units are being permanently connected.
B. Anchor precast concrete units in position. Remove temporary shims, wedges,

and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring are completed.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 02783
INTERLOCKING PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Particular Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes precast concrete pavers.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for the following:

1 Concrete pavers.
2 Mortar and grout materials.
3 Edge restraints.
B. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's colour charts consisting
of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and
patterns available for type of unit paver indicated.
C. Samples for verification in full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in
sets for each colour, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of
variations expected in these characteristics.
D. Shop drawings including unit pavers colour, pattern, and interface with other
paving units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 UNIT PAVERS PV-2 & PV-3
A. Precast Concrete Pavers: Interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936, locally

manufactured, heavy duty type. Obtain each type of unit paver from one source
produced in a single batch to ensure products of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties.
1 Colour and texture to Engineer's approval.
2 Shape and size : 200 x 100 x 60 mm; 200 x 100 x 80 mm.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.02 3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a
A. Graded Aggregate for Sub-base: ASTM D 2940.
B. Graded Aggregate for Base: ASTM D 2940.
C. Sand for levelling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone
complying with gradation requirements of ASTM C-33 for fine aggregate.
D. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100
percent passing No. 16 (1.18mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing
No. 200 (0.075mm) Sieve.
2.03 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINT
A. Provide control and expansion joint at distance of maximum 4 metres both sides.
Locate joints as per approved drawing. Metal joints will be of galvanised steel
used as a functional element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose
particles.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond,
including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas
requiring additional compaction. Do not proceed with installation of unit pavers
until deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase
for unit pavers.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discoloration’s, and other
defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform
blend of colors and textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit
adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible.
1 For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
B. Joint Pattern: Match field-constructed mock-up.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.03 SAND SETTING-BED PAVER APPLICATIONS
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557

laboratory density.
B. Place sand base in thickness indicated. Compact by tamping and screed to

depth required to allow setting of pavers.
C. Place graded sand for subbase over compacted subgrade. Provide compacted
thickness of base and subbase indicated. Compact subbase to 100 percent of
ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density.
D. Place sand for levelling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 25 to 38 mm,

taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and
constant until pavers are set and compacted.
E. Treat levelling base with soil sterilizer to prohibit growth of grass and weeds.
F. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1.5 mm and a maximum of 3 mm, being
careful not to disturb levelling base. Use string lines to keep straight lines.
G. Vibrate pavers into levelling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of
16- to 22-kN compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least 3 passes across
paving with vibrator.
H. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into levelling
course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then
remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint
filling.
I. Sprinkle sand over surface and sweep into joints. Recover joints with additional
sand until firm joints are achieved. Remove excess sands.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 02786
STONE PAVERS
PART 1 -GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

Stone paving.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For variety of stone, stone accessory, and other manufactured
products specified.
1 For stone varieties proposed for use on Project, include data on physical
properties required by referenced ASTM standards.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation of stone paving ,

including dimensions and profiles of stone units; arrangement and details of
jointing; and details showing relationship with, attachment to, and reception of
related work.
C. Stone Samples: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone required;
not less than 300 mm square. Include 2 or more samples in each set showing
the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in completed
Work.
D. Grout Samples: For each color required, showing the full range of exposed color
and texture expected in completed Work.

A. Deliver materials to Project site in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage
due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking,
chipping, or other causes.
1 Store stone on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers.
Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate
under covers to prevent condensation.
2 Store cementitious materials off ground, under cover, and in dry location.
3 Store aggregate materials covered and in dry location.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II; natural color, white, or a blend to
produce mortar color required.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as indicated below:
1 For joints narrower than 6 mm, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
2 White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural, white sand or ground, white stone.
3 Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural, colored sand or ground marble, granite, or
other sound stone, as required to match Engineer's sample.
D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of
satisfactory performance in stone mortars.
E. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.
F. Water: Potable.
G. Adhesive: Adhesives formulated for stone and recommended by their

manufacturer for the application indicated. Adhesive shall be factory mixed and
mixing at site shall not be permitted.
1 Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A 118.3.
2.02 GROUT
A. Grout Colors: Provide colors to comply with the following requirements:
1 Provide Engineer's selection from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Dry-Set Grout (Unsanded): ANSI A118.6, for joints 3-mm and narrower.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, composed as follows:

1 Factory-Prepared Dry-Grout Mixture: Factory-prepared mixture of portland
cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients
to produce the following:
a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3 mm and narrower.
2 Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared dry-
grout mix and latex additive to comply with the following requirements:
Unsanded Dry-Grout Mix: Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A118.6, for
materials described in H-2.3, for joints 3 mm and narrower.
Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Control and Dividing Joints Material
1 Flexible PVC push fit compressible infill with a gap width of 8mm and a finish
depth of 50mm.
2.04 STONE FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone paving in sizes and shapes required to comply with
requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
B. Cut stone to fit stone pattern as indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
Produce units to minimize field cutting for thickness, face sizes, and within
fabrication tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none,
by stone source. Do not execute field cutting except to those edges of stones
invisible under wall claddings or any other finishings.
C. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other
natural markings to comply with the following requirements:
1 Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural
markings occur.
2. Arrange units with veining as indicated on Drawings.
D. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with
requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
1 Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place.
Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match
range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive stone paving and conditions under which stone will
be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone paving
.
1 Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose
particles.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond,
including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Clean stone surfaces that have become dirty or stained by removing soil, stains,
and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with
fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning
A. Set stone to comply with Drawings and Shop Drawings. Match for color and
pattern by using units numbered in sequence as indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce tight and
neat joints.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
B. Protect stone paving during construction with nonstaining kraft paper. Where
adjoining areas require construction work access, cover stone paving with a
minimum of (19-mm) untreated plywood over nonstaining kraft paper.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 02810
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
A. Irrigation Heads.
B. Pipes, Fittings and Valves.
C. Remote Control Valves and Automatic Controllers.
D. Wiring and Related Electrical Works.
E. Connection to effluent Water Distribution System.
1.02 REFERENCES STANDARDS

A. ASME B 16.1 - Cast iron flanges.
B. ANSI B16.21 - Non-metallic gaskets for pipe flanges.
C. BS 5163 - Gate valves.
D. BS 1010 P2 - Stop Cocks.
E. ANSI B 16.34 - Pressure temperature ratings for valves.
F. ANSI B16.10 - Face to face dimensions of cast iron gate, globe and check valves.
G. ASME B 16.1 - End flange dimensions of cast iron valves.

H. AWWA C651 - Standard methods for the examination of water and waste water
I. ASTM D 1785 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipes, Schedules 40, 80 and 120 (DIN
8061 & 8062).
J. BS 3505 - UPVC Pipes.
K. ASTM D 2241 - Poy Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR series).
L. ASTM D 2466 - Socket type PVC Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

M. ASTM D 2564 - Solvent Cement for PVC Pipes and Fittings.
N. ASTM D 2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent Cemented Joints with
PVC Pipes and Fittings.
O. ASTM D 2239 - Polyethylene (PE) pipe - SDR-PR.
P. ASTM D 2737 - Polyethylene (PE) tubing.
Q. ASTM D 2609 - Plastic insert fittings for polyethylene plastic pipe.
R. ASTM D 2774 - Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping.
S. NEMA 1 – CS - Enclosures for Electrical Appliances.
T. BS 6004 - Copper Conductors, PVC Insulated and PVC Sheathed (Suitable for
Direct Burial).
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. The Irrigation system shall be executed by a contractor, engaged in the installation
and maintenance of such systems as primary business for at least five (5)
immediately preceding years, in UAE
B. Equipment used in the system shall have local agents, certified by the
manufacturer to check, test, adjust, commission and maintain the same. Materials
incorporated in the work covered by this Section shall be unused, new products in
good condition. Materials spoiled due to improper storage or mishandling shall be
rejected.
C. The system components shall be of the type and construction, capable of
withstanding the local ambient conditions and shall be resistant to deterioration
from high incidence of ultra violet rays. All copper alloys used in the construction
of valves etc, which comes in contact with water, shall be dezincification resistant
type.
D. Materials of similar nature shall be products of the same manufacturer. Mixing up
products of different standards or those of different manufactures shall not be
permitted for the same service.
E. Materials to equivalent British (BS), German (DIN), or Japanese (JIS) or other
international standards are acceptable, provided that the Contractor substantiates
their equivalence and ensures their compatibility with other components of the
system. Furnish copies of the current version of the reference standards for
comparison, if so required by the Engineer.
F. The Irrigation system and the system components described herein and detailed
in the drawings are intended to supply adequate amount of water to the various
kinds and configurations of planting, for their sustained growth, throughout the
seasons. The contractor shall, in his tender, high light and allow for alterations /
modifications to the system or the system components; which in his opinion is
necessary to accomplish the intended purpose.
G. Test certificates for materials used in the work covered by this Section, from
approved independent laboratories or testing agencies, shall be furnished, if
required by the Engineer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data, samples and shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with
the general conditions of contract.
1 Manufacturers printed brochures and catalogues (one original and three copies)
with relevant information high lighted (or irrelevant information struck out), along
with write up of selection criteria.
2 General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:200.
3 Irrigation piping layout plans of planted areas to a scale not smaller than 1:50,
clearly indicating the throw / area of coverage of each individual head.
4 Builder's work layout plans to a scale of 1:200 with details to a scale not smaller
than 1:20.
5 Installation details of Irrigation heads, valve boxes etc to a scale of 1:10.
6 Electrical wiring diagrams (NTS) and controller installation details (1:20).
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
7 Control Valve Schedule: Bar chart (hours of the day on the X-axis and control
valve flow in M3 / hour on the Y-axis), representing the operational regime of the
control valves; worked out in due consideration of the capacity of the booster
pump set and drawn on a project standard drawing sheet.
8 Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings.
9 Test and performance certificates of equipment, where required.
B. Copies of irrigation head(s) & valve(s) ordering schedules, with identification
numbers, shall be submitted for approval prior to ordering the same.
C. Project Record Documents, of all works installed under this Section, shall be
submitted in accordance with the general conditions of contract.
D. Three (3) hard bound copies of "Operation and Maintenance Manual" shall be
submitted in accordance with the general conditions of contract; with complete
data for each piece of equipment installed, as detailed below:
1 The Manual shall contain:
a. Table of contents.
b. Irrigation system material submittal with the Engineer's and local authorities
approval.
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's internal wiring diagrams.
e. Manufacturer's assembly details.
f. Replacement, parts number listings and description.
g. Preventive maintenance schedules listing frequency of service and or
replacement.
h. Name(s) and addresse(s) of manufacturer(s), sales and service agencies and
local representative(s) / distributor(s) including telephone and telex nos.
i. Name and address of the Contractor's maintenance department including Fax,
Telex and emergency contact telephone number(s).
2 The contents of the manual shall be arranged in sections with tags, grouping each
class of equipment as piping, valves, irrigation heads, controls, etc. Contents of
each section shall be arranged in the sequence listed above (Item 1).

A. Connections from the transfer pump set will be extended to feed the irrigation
system through back flow preventor.
B. Looped network will be extended from the plant room to feed the soft landscape
areas.
C. Field controller will be provided to control the operation of the remote control
valves.
D. Ordinary / pressure reducing type control valves shall be used for the various
zones, as appropriate, in order to attain optimum performance and to retain
flexibility.
E. Bubblers are used for trees.
F. Lawn heads pop up type spray are used for irrigating turf areas.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
G. Drip system is used for ground cover areas and shrub masses.
H. Check valves are provided where there is a chance of backflow of the water
contained in the piping.
I. Quick coupling valves are provided at a reasonable intervals, all over the area, for
manual watering.
J. The irrigation heads shall be fitted with special valves to prevent their opening at
gravity pressure.
1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Products shall be delivered to site, stored in the manufacturer's original packing
and protected under provisions of the conditions of contract.
B. Pipes (stored on elevated racks) and plastic and rubber products shall be stored
stored out of direct sunlight.
1.07 SYSTEM INTERFACES
A. Electrical works including the wiring up to the source of the power supply (up to
the terminals provided by the electrical trade) are included in this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Refer NEB Approved Suppliers and Subcontractors' List
2.02 PIPING - GENERAL
A. PVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin poly vinyl chloride
compound to ASTM D 1784 type 12454-B (PVC 1120) or approved equal.
B. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2 years.
C. Threads of fittings shall be side gated, injection molded type. Nipples shall be
standard weight, molded type.
D. Pipes shall have the following information, continuously printed on them.
1. Standard of Manufacture, Schedule or class and Pressure rating.
2. Manufacturer's Name.
3. Nominal Pipe Size.
4. Date of Manufacture.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.03 PIPES AND FITTINGS
2.04 PIPE JOINTS
A. PVC - Socket type: Solvent cemented joints. Use threaded adaptors as

appropriate.
B. PE: Plastic insert (compression) type joints. Use threaded adaptors as
appropriate.
C. All joints shall be rated for 1034 Kpa (150 psig) working water pressure at 121
deg.C (250 deg.F).
2.05 VALVES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Refer NEB Approved Suppliers and Subcontractors' List
B. Gate Valves.
1 Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body; non-rising stem and solid wedge or
disc; union bonnet; threaded ends.
2 Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM); outside screw
and Yoke (OS&Y); solid wedge; renewable seats; flanged ends.
C. Check Valves:
1 Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze; in-line, spring loaded, resilient seat and
disc; threaded ends.
2 Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze trim (IBBM); spring loaded,
renewable composite disc and seat; flanged ends.
D. Pressure Ratings.
1 Valves shall be rated for 1379 Kpa (200 psig) working water pressure at 121 oC
(250 oF), unless otherwise indicated.
2 Contractor shall allow for selecting higher pressure rated valves to meet the valve
construction features.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Valve Operators:
1 Hand wheels / operating levers shall be provided for valves as appropriate. Hand
wheels for gate and globe valves 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and smaller, shall be
non-ferrous metal (die cast zinc / aluminium alloy etc.).
2 One key / wrench of appropriate size shall be provided for each lever operated
valve installed.
2.06 VALVE PITS:

A RCC valve pits complete with 60 x 60 cm clear opening, medium duty, single seal,
cast iron cover and frame with closed key holes; 225 x 225mm cast iron, heavy
duty pattern surface boxes; galvanized cast iron steps and one prising and lifting
bar.
2.07 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES:
A Ordinary Type: Globe pattern electrically operated (24 volts / 1 phase / 50 Hertz)
normally closed diaphragm valves, of durable glass – filled nylon construction with
nylon reinforced rubber diaphragm and stainless steel / Brass trim; rated for 1034
Kpa (150 psig) inlet pressure. The valve shall have a manual open / close facility,
integral grit strainer and threaded connections.
B. Pressure Reducing Type: Globe pattern electrically operated (24 v / 1 ph / 50 Hz)
normally closed diaphragm & reverse flow design valves , of red brass
construction with nylon reinforced rubber diaphragm and stainless steel / Brass
trim; rated for (200 psi) inlet pressure and (15 to 100 psi) outlet pressure. The
valve shall have a manual open / close facility, integral grit strainer and threaded
connections.
2.08 IRRIGATION HEADS
A. See legend/schedule on drawing for details of selection

B. Drip Heads (Multi outlet emitters): Self cleaning internal construction with barbed
inlet and outlet, durable and heat resistant plastic body, elastomer, orificed
diaphragm and caps for plugging unwanted outlets
C. Bubblers: Pressure compensating type constructed from durable and heat
resistant plastic and rubber with inlet filter screen. The unit shall have trickling
discharge
D. Ground Cover Lawn Sprinkler Heads: Heat resistant plastic construction, Pop-up
spray, pressure activated Heads, constructed of heat resistant plastic, complete
with built in check valve and (non-removable) built into the stem pressure
regulator, in order to restricts water loss by up to 70% if nozzle is removed or
damaged (completely shut off models are not recommended)
E. Large Lawn Heads: Heat resistant plastic body, turbine drive full or part – circle
rotor pop-up sprinklers, full & part circle in one unit, easy arc adjustment requires
no tools, rain curtain nozzles, pressure activated, with heavy duty stainless steel
retract spring, seal-a-matic
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.09 VALVE BOXES
A. High density polystyrene body and locking type cover, of approved color (turf
green or grey) and size and appropriate size. The valve boxes shall have
approved identification code lettering stencilled on them. Use extensions as
appropriate.
2.10 QUICK COUPLING VALVE
A.
Red brass construction with 3/4 inch female threaded inlet and valved, quick
coupling outlet with self closing thermoplastic rubber cover. Furnish coupling
adaptor (key) and swivel elbow with 3/4 inch hose threaded outlet with each valve.
2.11 FLUSH VALVES
A. PVC construction, ball type with solvent weld/compression ends.
2.12 CONTROLLERS
A. Field Satellite Controllers: Hybrid type with weather proof, heavy duty, lockable,
steel cabinet with the following:
1 No. of Programmes: Four (4)
2 No. of Valves per Station: 2 (as appropriate).
3 Station Timing: 0 to 12 hours.
4 Automatic Starts: 32 starts total, eight per program per day.
Programming Schedule: 14 days calendar dial for every day, every other day
5 starts etc. for a two week period.
6 Interruption Facility: Master on/off switch (without loss of programme).
Electrical Supply: 240 v / 1 ph / 50 Hz input and 260 v / 1 ph / 50 Hz output with
7 the following:
a. Circuit breaker with manual reset for the controller.
b. Overload protection.
c. Heavy duty electrical surge protection for input and output.
d. Battery back-up
e. Program back-up
8 Accessories:
a. Pedestal for mounting controllers.
b. Terminal box as appropriate.
2.13 WIRING CABLES
A. For Medium Voltage (for power supply): Stranded copper PVC/SWA/PVC

multicore cables, rated for 600 volts and suitable for direct burial.
B. For Low Voltage (all other services): Solid copper, PVC insulated and PVC
sheathed, single conductor cables, rated for 600 volts and suitable for direct
burial. The cable shall have a minimum sectional area of 1.5 sq.mm.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.14 WIRE CONNECTORS
A. Water proof and corrosion resistant housing with 3 nos. flapped openings for
insertion of wires; copper crimp sleeves and snap- on cover. Use sealant to fill the
body after the connections are made. Unit shall be UL listed for this application.
Provide valve box for joints in the running length of the control wires (this shall
generally not be permitted).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall study Drawings and specifications and familiarize with the
structural and architectural details and the work of other trades.
B. It shall be ensured that the work under this Section, will not interfere with those of
other trades and are compatible with the architectural finishes, prior to placing
orders, fabrication and installation.
C. Other Sections shall be furnished with necessary templates, patterns, setting out
plans and other items for incorporation in the works or for leaving necessary
provisions for the work. Ensure timely placement of sleeves, inserts and the like.
D. Where work is installed in close proximity, to or will interfere with other works, the
Contractor shall assist in working out satisfactory space arrangements. Composite
shop drawings shall be prepared to a suitable scale, showing how the work is
installed in relation to the work of other trades.
E. Conflicts in requirements with other trades shall be resolved by the Contractor.
Only those conflicts, that cannot be solved without changes to structure or those
which involves changes to system design, shall be referred to the Engineer.
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Piping shall be routed in an orderly manner, maintaining gradient.
B. Factory manufactured fittings shall be installed where changes in pipe direction
occur. Bending or forming of piping shall not be permitted without the written
permission of the Engineer
C. Tapered reducer fittings shall be installed where changes in pipe sizes occur. The
use of site fabricated fittings or bushings shall not be permitted.
D. During progress of work, keep the ends of all piping closed with factory
manufactured plugs to prevent the entry of foreign matter.
E. Piping, control valves, quick coupling valves and other system components shall
be installed within the planting bed, unless otherwise noted or directed by the
Engineer.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
F. Threaded pipe fittings shall be assembled using Teflon thread sealing tapes.
G. DM – Dubai Municipality
H. Piping shall not be installed one over the other, in the same trench.
DEWA
I. The trenches shall be backfilled with clear agricultural soil and compacted
manually, to a dry density equal to that of the adjoining soil, to the level of the
adjoining finished grade. If settlement occurs after completion of the work,
J. PVC duct / schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves shall be provided for
irrigation piping and wiring, crossing roads and similar areas subjected to traffic
loading.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION - PARTICULAR FOR PVC PIPING
A. Only approved (recommended by the piping manufacturer) solvent cement shall

be used for making the joints.
B. Solvent joints shall not be made in humid or dusty atmosphere.
C. The required penetration and fitting alignment shall be marked on the pipe end, in
a clearly visible manner, prior to making the joint; for later verification.
D. A minimum period of twenty four (24) hours, from the time of making the joint,
shall be allowed; before filling the line.
3.04 VALVES
A. Valves shall be of the same size as the pipe, except where shown otherwise, on
the Drawings.
B. Valves with flanged ends shall be used in valve pits, irrespective of size.
C. Valves shall be installed with the stem upright or horizontal, not inverted, except
with written permission of the Engineer for each location.
D. Ball / gate valves shall be used for shutoff and to isolate equipment, part of
systems or risers.
E. Valve gland packing, sealing and gasket materials shall be selected for the
temperature and pressure encountered.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.05 VALVE BOXES
A. The approved valve schedule shall be used for identifying and locating the valves
and control stations in the as-built drawings.
B. Approved identification codes shall be painted on the valve boxes in 5 cm (2 inch)

high lettering; with white, resin based epoxy paint.
3.06 IRRIGATION HEADS
A. All heads shall be located and adjusted to minimize splash of water on non-
planted areas.
B. Spacing, recommended by the manufacturer, shall not be exceeded in respect of
irrigation heads, under any circumstance.
C. Turf sprinkler and rotor heads shall be set to finished grade.
D. Details on Drawings shall be referred to and complied with for the installation of all
types of heads.
E. Irrigation heads shall be installed on branches with offsets, swing joints etc; even if
they are not specifically indicated in the Drawings.
F. Spikes or similar rigid supports, as approved by the Engineer, for all irrigation
heads.
G. Do not install irrigation heads until after the complete piping system has been
thoroughly flushed.
3.07 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
A. The internal transformer shall be selected to suit the local system power supply
parameters and to furnish the power supply at the control valve at 24 + or - 2
volts.
B. Two (2) nos. keys shall be furnished with each of the controllers; along with an
identification tag, registered with the suppliers.
C. Power supply to the controller(s) shall be obtained from the building standby
power supply system, where possible.
3.08 ELECTRICAL CABLING - PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS
A. Medium voltage (power) cables, from distribution boards / feeder pillars, shall be
installed in PVC conduits.
B. Low voltage cables shall be installed in the same trench as the pressure supply
lines or in a separate trench as approved by the Engineer.
C. When more than one cable is placed in a trench, they shall be bound together
with dead locking type plastic cable ties, at intervals not exceeding 100 cm (40
inch).
D. 30 cm (12 inch) length of cable shall be left free at each termination.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Continuous single length of cable shall be used between the master controller and
satellites / satellite controllers and control valves. Splices shall be executed in a
valve box, only after obtaining written approval of the Engineer and identification
shall be provided at the splice.
F. Grounding wires for the controllers / control valves shall be colored green / green
and yellow.
G. Crimped on brass terminal lugs shall be used for termination of cables and
terminals shall be numbered with slip-on ferrules for quick identification.
H. Controller power supply cables shall be sized in accordance with ADC regulations
and control cables sized to obtain 24 + or - 2 volts, at the valves.
3.09 INSPECTION, TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. During the manufacture (at Contractor's premises only), installation and after
completion of works; the system, sections of the system or its components shall
be tested by the Contractor / specialist Subcontractor in the presence of the
Engineer, as directed below or else where. The Contractor shall procure all testing
instruments and accessories and bear all costs in connection with the same.
1 Basic materials for conformity with the specified standards.

2 Controller(s) for start time, operating period and cut off; tolerances, alarms etc.
3 Control valves for water tightness, cut-in and cut-out, pressure and flow.
4 Electrical wiring for continuity and dielectric resistance.
B. The following items shall be balanced / regulated, prior to the start of planting:
1 Irrigation programme - flow matched with the source capacity.
2 Control valve discharge pressure.
3 Irrigation heads throw and direction.
3.10 TESTING OF SUPPLY PIPING
A. The irrigation water supply piping, up to the control valve, shall be pressure tested
by this Section.
B. The piping shall be filled with clean water, leaving all high points open to allow
purging of air.
C. The system shall be pressurised using manual pumps, in increments of 25 % of
the test pressure. A standing period of 10 minutes shall be allowed after each
pressure increment. Pressure testing using motor driven pumps is prohibited.
D. The system shall not be per pressurised under any circumstance. Where the test
pressure is close to the maximum permissible working pressure of any of the
system components, calibrated pressure relief valves shall be installed in the
tested circuit.
E. The piping system shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 1034 Kpa (150
psig) for a minimum period of four (4) hours. Allow for pressure fluctuations due to
temperature variations. Record the circuit temperature along with the pressure
readings.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
F. Joints shall be checked for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue. Drop in pressure
to the order of 10 Kpa (1.5 psig) per hour shall be considered as acceptable.
G. Leakage through the seat shall be considered as reasonable grounds for rejecting
control valve(s).
3.11 TESTING OF DISTRIBUTION PIPING
A. Because of the limitations in conducting a pressure test on the piping system, this
requirement is waived.
B. Distribution piping shall be tested for line and gradient.
The integrity of the pipe joints, in respect of pressure tightness shall be subject to
C. scrutiny and piping with leaking joints shall be rejected.
3.12 SYSTEM FLUSHING

A.
On completion of the piping, but prior to the installation of the heads, the complete
system shall be thoroughly flushed with clean water to remove all debris.
3.13 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

A. The irrigation system shall be programmed to economically utilize the available
storage and pumping capacity and operate within the capacity of the booster
pump set provided by Section 02667.
B. Plant watering shall preferably be done before sunrise and after late in the
evening to facilitate the optimum use of the landscaped areas. This shall not be
applicable to systems which do not have surface sprays and which are watering
areas not used for sitting.
C. Alternate programme(s) shall be furnished for the seasons (summer, winter etc.)
so as to economize the water use without sacrificing the basic intent.
3.14 SYSTEM DEMONSTRATIONS

A. The services of a competent engineer shall be provided by the Contractor to
supervise the commissioning of all equipment and to train the Owner's personnel
in all aspects of the same during a five (5) working days period, during normal
working hours. All expenses in connection with the above shall be allowed for by
the Contractor.
B. The system demonstrations shall be conducted only after the substantial
completion of the project. A minimum of one week's written notice shall be given
and the Owner's written consent obtained, prior to such demonstrations.
3.15 PIPING PROTECTION AND IDENTIFICATION: The following protective
coating/wrapping shall be given to the piping. Requirements of Section 15075
shall be complied within respect of mechanical identification.
A. Buried plastic piping in areas subjected to traffic loading:
1 Schedule 40 galvanized steel sleeves.
2 Colored, metal coated, plastic foil warning grids.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.16 SERVICE AND UTILITY CONNECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall coordinate with other contractors for the location of
connection points.
3.17 GUARANTEE (defined in General Conditions as Defects Liability) AND
MAINTENANCE.
A. The general conditions of contract and Specification Section 01730 (Operation
and Maintenance) shall be referred to for requirements.
B. Allow for the following activities in respect of the complete system, for a period of
one (1) Calander years from the date of substantial completion.
1 Defect liability / breakdown maintenance, inclusive of replacement parts.
2 Preventive maintenance as scheduled, inclusive of replacement parts, water
treatment chemicals and consumables.
3 Attending to emergency situations, which may damage property or endanger lives,
even outside normal working hours.
C. Provide a written report to the Owner, detailing the maintenance work performed;
including dates, parts replaced etc.
D. The Owner's personnel shall be allowed to witness or participate (without
damaging interference) in the above activities.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 02890
TRAFFIC SIGNS, MARKINGS AND SIGNALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Traffic control signs.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section - Painting. Painting for painted posts where shown on the Drawings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation
only.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and
Seamless.
2. ASTM C94 - Ready Mix Concrete
3. ASTM D4956 - Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control.
C. US Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration:

1. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SIGNS
A. Conform to US Department of Transportation MUTCD. Sign classification, type,

size, and color shall be as shown on the drawings
B. Retroreflectivity: Microprismatic type sheeting conforming to ASTM D 4956, Type

VIII, IX, or XI.
2.02 POSTS
A. Square Post: Square tubular steel sign post, galvanized, 12 ga, perforated full-
length with 7/16 inch holes on four sides. Post size shall be as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S
(seamless), Grade B, Schedule 40, size as shown on the Drawings.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.03 CONCRETE
A. Mix concrete and deliver in accordance with ASTM C 94.
B. Design mix to produce normal weight concrete consisting of Portland cement,

aggregate, wa-ter reducing admixture, air entraining admixture, and water to
produce following:
1. Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Slump Range: 1 to 3-inches at time of placement
3. Air Entrainment: 5 to 8 percent
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Field verify underground utilities prior to sign installation. Primary utilities of

concern of shallow depths are lawn sprinkler systems, electric, telephone, fiber
optic, cable and gas.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install signs as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with MUTCD and
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install signs of the type and at locations shown on the Drawings.
C. Install posts of the type as shown on the drawing.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK

A. Section 02230 - Site Clearing.
B. Section 02300 - Earthwork.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. The supply, installation and maintenance of planting soil mix, to planting areas on
grade.
B. The supply, transportation, planting and maintenance of lawns, groundcovers and
palms, where planting is scheduled in the drawings and specifications.
C. Maintenance service for two-year guarantee period.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature Standardized Plant
Names (AJCHN).
B. American National Standards Institute Z60.1 (ANSI), American Standard for
Nursery Stock.
C. Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services, USA. Division of Plant
Industry Publication Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants - Part I and Part II.
D. Sunset Western Garden Book 4th Edition, Lane Publishing Co., Menlo Park, CA,
USA.
E. Hortus Third, staff of Bailey Hortorium, Macmillan Publishing Co. Inc., New York,
USA.
F. Landscape Plants in the United Arab Emirates, by Teresa Kwei and Tony
Esmonde, 1978 published by Teresa Kwei.
G. American Society of Agronomy Publication - Turfgrass, Monograph 14.
H. Golf Course Management by James B. Beard
I. Grass - U.S.D.A Year Book of Agriculture.
J. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards:
1 C 136
2 D 442
3 D 2607
4 D 2974
5 D 2976
K. 3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a

NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1 Submit samples of the following in accordance with Section 01300.

a. Agricultural Soil: 1 Kg.
b. Organic Soil Amendments; 0.25 Kg of each specified.
c. Inorganic Soil Amendments; 0.25 Kg of each specified.
d. Water: samples of landscape waters in use shall be submitted to Engineer as
required for suitability analysis of irrigation water.
2 Allow 14 calendar days for Engineer's review.
B. Manufacturer's Literature:
1 Manufacturer's literature and labels for the following materials shall be submitted:
a. Fertilizer.
b. Pesticide.
c. Anti-desiccant.
C. Test Reports:
1 Tests shall be based on a representative sample of material to be used. Submit
reports to the Engineer. Do not use materials until reviewed by the Engineer.
Material used in construction shall be the same as that reviewed in testing. The
testing shall be performed by an authorised testing laboratory accepted by the
Engineer and all costs for this work shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
a. Agriculture soil. The following information is required.

i. Mechanical analysis.
ii. Sodium absorption ratio (SAR) expressed in ohms/cm @ 25 degrees C.
iii. Electrical conductivity expressed in ohms/cm @ 25 degrees C.
iv. pH.
v. Boron content expressed in milligrams per litre.
b. Organic soil amendment the following information is required:

i. pH.
ii. Loss of weight by ignition expressed as a percentage of ash content compared to
the oven dry weight of the peat moss.
iii. Moisture absorption capacity expressed as a percentage by weight as compared
to the oven dry weight of the peat moss.
D. Certificates of Inspection:
1 Certificates of inspection shall accompany the invoice for each shipment of plants
as may be required by law for transportation. File certificates with Engineer prior to
acceptance of the material.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Perform work with personnel experienced in the work required of this Section
under direction of a skilled foreman.
B. Substitutions:
1 When material or plants of the species specified are not available, substitution
may be made only with the written approval of the Engineer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Trees, Shrubs
1 Notify the Engineer 14 calendar days in advance of time and manner of delivery of
plants.
2 Immediately before shipping all plants in partial or full leaf shall be sprayed with
anti-desiccant, applying an adequate film over trunk, branches, twigs and/or
foliage.
3 Plants shall be prepared for shipment in a manner that shall not cause damage to
the branches, shape, and future development of the plants after planting.
B. GENERAL
1 All plant material shall be packed to provide adequate protection against climatic,
seasonal, or breakage injuries during transit.
2 Evidence of inadequate protection, carelessness while in transit or improper
handling shall be cause for rejection. All plants shall be kept moist, fresh and
protected at all times. Such protection shall encompass the entire period during
which the plants are in transit, being handled or being planted.
3 Containerised plants shall not have their containers broken or their root systems
cracked or damaged in any way.
4 Upon arrival, plants will be inspected for proper transit procedures. Should the
roots be dried out, large branches be broken, balls of earth be broken, or
loosened, or areas of bark be torn, or should the plant have desiccation, leaf
shredding, diseases, insect eggs, insect infestation, frost damage, damage from
browsing or grazing, the Engineer will reject the injured plant(s).
1.07 ACCEPTANCE
A. The Engineer will inspect plant material upon delivery to the site. Upon
acceptance of the plant material as to the correct species, quantities, and
condition, written approval will be given and notice to proceed.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Provide two-year warranty from Date of Substantial Completion under provisions

of General Conditions of Contract.
B. Replace plant materials found not in a healthy growing condition.
C. Replacements: Plant materials of same size and species at the time of
replacement with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Begin maintenance of plant materials immediately after planting and continue until
termination of warranty period.
B. Maintenance shall include measures necessary to establish and maintain plants in
a vigorous and healthy growing condition. Include the following:
1 Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits. When herbicides are used for
weed control, apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy
damage resulting from use of herbicides.
2 Watering sufficient to saturate root system.
3 Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches, and treatment of prune
wounds.
4 Disease and insect control.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANT MATERIALS
A. SELECTION OF PLANTS:
1 Locate and tag the plant material in the Plant List. Tag plants provided that the
quantity of any one species is less than 50 units. Where more than 50 units of one
species are specified, tag 10% of the required number as "Sample Plants" and all
plants of this species delivered to the job shall match the quality of the sample.
2 Once having located the material in the nursery(s), notify the Engineer in writing
14 calendar days prior to digging or assembling plant materials for shipping.
B. REFERENCES
1 Nomenclature: Plant names shall agree with the nomenclature of the references
listed in 1.03 of this Section. Names of varieties not listed therein shall conform
generally with names accepted in the nursery trade.
C. PLANT SIZE AND QUALITY:

1 Trees, Shrubs:
a. Plants shall be of sound health, vigorous and free of disease or insect infestation
or damage.
b. Plants shall be of a quality equal to standards set forth in ANSI Z60.1.
c. Container grown plants shall be healthy, vigorous, well rooted and established in
the container in which they are grown. They shall have tops, which are of good
quality, normal size for the species, and are in healthy growing condition and shall
not be root bound. Fibrous roots to have developed so that the root mass will
retain its shape and hold together when removed from the container.
d. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2 years.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
e. Date palm trees shall be supplied with brown stem as specified in the plant list.
They shall be of a quality equal to heavy trunk type palms designated as “Florida
Fancy” in the Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Service
Publication. All palms shall be of sound health, vigorous and free of disease or
insect infestation or damage, and of uniform brown trunk height and similar firths
and physical characteristic. Fronds shall exhibit no signs of moisture stress. All
palms shall have straight trunks. Any tree having a weak or thin trunk not capable
of supporting itself when planted in the open will not be accepted.
2.02 PLANTING SOIL COMPONENTS
A. Agricultural Soil: Obtain the agricultural soil component of the planting soil mix
from one approved source. It shall conform to the following physical and chemical
characteristics:
1 Physical Characteristics
a. Material passing a No. 10 sieve
b. Material passing a No. 35 sieve
c. Material passing a No. 140 sieve
d. Material passing a No. 270 sieve
2 Chemical Characteristics
a. Salinity (ECe x 1000)
b. SAR (Sodium Absorption Ratio)
c. Boron (saturation extract)
d. PH
B. Organic Amendment
1 Physical Characteristics
a. Material passing 9.51mm (3/8") sieve
b. Material passing 6.35mm (1/4") sieve
c. Material passing 2.38mm (No. 8) sieve
d. Material passing 0.50mm (No.35) sieve
e. Bulk Density
2 Chemical Characteristics
a. Organic Matter
b. PH
c. Salinity (ECe x 1000)
d. Total Nitrogen
e. Available Phosphorous
f. CEC (meq/100 gms)
g. Boron (by hot water extraction)
h. SAR
3 Organic amendment shall be one of the following or approved equal in

manufacturer’s sealed containers and shall be nitrogen stabilized.
a. Shredded Coconut Fiber: Coconut fiber shall be finely shredded coconut fibre pith
free from chemical additives, sterilents and shall have more than 98% organic
matter.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
b. Sphagnum Peat: Peat shall have a PH from 3.7 to 5.5 and obtained from
recognized supplier.
C. Compound fertilizer : NPK 15:15:15 +Fe + Te (Trace Elements) added at a rate of

2 kg/m3 of a approved manufacturer.
D. Sand shall be washed sharp sand. PH less than 8.0 electrical conductivity (ECX
103 at 25oC) less than 3 mhos saturated extract.
E Micronutrients shall be copper sulphate, zice sulphate, manganese sulphate,

ferrous sulphate.
F. Superphosphate Fertilizer: Single superphosphate with a minimum contents of

18% P2O5.
G. Soil Sulphur: Finely ground agricultural sulphur of not less than 90% purity.
2.03 ANTI-DESICCANT
A. Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion, which provides a protective film over plant

surface and permeable enough to permit transpiration. It should be delivered in
containers of the manufacturer, mixed according to the manufacturer's directions,
and shall be one of the following:
1 Wiltpruf', manufactured by Nursery Specialty Products, Inc., Groton Falls, New
York
2 D-Way' manufactured by Plant Products Company, Blue Point, Long Island.
3 Foli-Gard', manufactured by E-Z Flo Chemical Company, Columbus, Ohio, USA
4 Or approved equal.
2.04 HERBICIDE
A. Herbicide shall be as approved by the Engineer.
2.05 PLANTS
A. A. Type:
1 Preserved Palms
a. Preserved washingtonia palms (8m overall height) with trunk consisting of
preserved palm bark over a steel core. First seven meters with clear trunk.
b. Trunk diameter: 508 mm (20”) at the base, tapering to 152 mm (6”) at the top.
c. Fronds: Total of thirty three preserved washingtonia palm fronds per tree. Each
frond approximately 1.22m (40”) wide and includes a 0.61 m (20”) long petiole.
Palm fronds shall be inherently fire retardant.
d. Each trunk to include a recessed, pre-drilled receiver for the preserved fronds.
Palm trunks shall be topically treated with fire retardant. Overall foliage canopy
diameter shall be 3.66m (12 feet) per tree.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
e. Each palm attached to the finished floor with a 610 x 610 mm (24” x 24”)
galvanised and painted steel base plate and four anchor bolts. The steel base
plate shall include a pipe extension, which the trunk fits over.
f. The palms shall be entirely fabricated in the palm supplier’s workshop and then
shipped as finished components to the site.
g. All foliage shall be humidity tolerant, inherently flame retarded, fade resistant and
each leaf to be structural supported using thin metal structure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENCE
A. Protect all utilities, structures and other installation during work.

B. Paving and other work installed under other sections of this specification, shall be
kept clean and free of soil, and other materials incidental to this work.
C. Provide, such barricades, temporary fencing, signs or policing as may be
necessary for the protection of all planted areas until they are accepted.
3.02 PLANTING SEASON
A. Upon approval of the Engineer.

B. Plant only when weather and soil conditions are in accordance with locally
accepted practice.
3.03 PLANTING SOIL MIX PREPARATION
A. The planting soil mix for all types of planting shall be:
1 Agricultural Soil
2 Organic Soil Amendment
3 1 kg/cu metre soil sulphur.
4 2 kg/cu metre fertilizer.
B. Soil mixes will conform to the following requirements:

1 Salinity (ECe x 1000)
2 SAR
3 pH
4 Boron (by saturation extract)
C. Soil Mixing Procedure:

1 Mix physical ingredients to a uniform mixture. The organic portion should be moist
(50% moisture content as received basis) but not overly wet to the point where
fertilizer particles cling to it. The agricultural soil should be moist (1 to 2%) but not
wet.
2 Mix fertilizer ingredients until homogeneous.
3 Apply fertilizer ingredients to the physical mixture and mix until homogeneous.
4 The resultant mix should be moistened to about 5-10%. The mix should be
covered if not to be utilized immediately. Soil mixes should not be stored for
periods longer than two (2) weeks.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.04 PLACEMENT OF PLANTING SOIL MIX.
A. The planting soil shall be placed in planting areas and compacted using water
saturation to the full mix depth. The area shall be levelled to within plus or minus
50mm and then again be thoroughly irrigated with water to eliminate air pockets
and settle soil. The soil shall be evenly moistened to a depth of 300mm. After the
irrigation system has been installed, recompact and settle all disturbed areas and
fine grade to a smooth continuous grade. There shall be no uneven surfaces
greater than plus or minus 15mm.
B. After a period of ten days, all germinating weeds shall be removed from the area
and the soil shall be relevelled to form a smooth continuous grade.
3.05 LAYOUT AND STAKING
A. When planting areas are ready to receive plants, stakes shall be driven in tree and
shrub locations. Shrub and groundcover plant rows shall be marked and
coordinated with tree locations.
B. Give the Engineer 7 calendar days notice in writing before the inspection of
staking
3.06 INSTALLATION OF PLANTS
A. GENERAL
1 Planting operations shall be confined to one area at a time. The objective being to
prepare, plant, and finish each landscape area in one operation complete with its
own functioning irrigation system.
2 Move and handle plants by container or rootball. Large Palms and Trees which
are moved by crane or front end loader must be protected so as not to damage
the rootball, trunk, branches, or fronds.
3 Plant containers shall be cut off all container grown plants and removed.
4 Set the plants at the same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the
ground from which they were dug or soil level in their container except palms.
5 Water all plants immediately after planting.
6 Immediately after planting, all plant material shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant,
applying an adequate film over trunks, branches, twigs, and/or foliage.
7 Cut ropes or strings from the tops of all plants after plant has been set, except
palms.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS

1 Set all planting plumb and brace trees and shrubs rigidly in position until the
planting soil mix has been consolidated around rootball by water settlement.
2 When planting, water thoroughly and lightly tamp to eliminate all air pockets in the
planting soil mix.
3 Groundcover and small shrubs shall be planted in neat rows with triangular
spacing as shown on the Drawings.
C. PALMS
1 Palms shall be planted in prepared pits, size as specified on the Contract
Drawings, backfilled and firmed.
2 Frond wrapping and dead fronds to be removed after turgidity in fronds is
observed or new growth indicates adequate recovery.
3.07 PRUNING
DEWA
A. Pruning shall be done after planting and staking operations are complete.
B. Pruning shall be done only by an experienced horticulturist or aborist. Do not
prune until guidelines for pruning have been established in the field with the
Engineer. The Engineer will require that several trees or shrubs be pruned in his
presence, such pruning being prototypical for the entire job.
C. Plants shall be pruned according to standard horticultural practice to preserve the
natural character of the plant. Tip back crowns if so instructed.
D. Remove all dead wood, suckers and broken or badly bruised branches.
E. All saw cuts on branches larger than 2cm., to be made with 3 cuts; i.e. undercut,
stub cutoff and final cut.
F. Only clean sharp proper tools shall be used. Do not use pruning shears where
loppers are required or loppers where a pruning saw is required.
3.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish and supply all materials, equipment and labour for maintenance of all
landscaped areas and irrigation installed as part of this contract.
B. The work shall include, but not be limited to mowing, weed control, insect control,
disease control, pruning, replacement of sub-standard or dead plant material and
maintenance of the irrigation system in full working order at all times.
C. Perform all work in a manner to comply with the original installation specifications.
E. Perform maintenance for a period of two years commencing from certified

completion.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,
concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Furnish all labours, materials, plant, equipment and appliances and perform all
necessary operations required to execute the work of this Section.
C. Furnishing, placing and finishing reinforced cast-in-place concrete to:

1 Foundations.
2 Ground and suspended slabs.
3 Columns, beams, lintels, upstands, downstands and the like.
4 Walls, parapets and the like.
D. Installation of concrete construction joints with all associated fillers, weatherbars,

etc.
E. Installation of blinding concrete to underside of basement slab to form protection

for bituthene.
F. Make provisions in forms of proper locations and installation of pipe sleeves duct
openings, keys, chases, electrical boxes, bolts, anchors, inserts and similar items
as required by other traders.
G. Make provision in forms of proper locations and installation for grounding pits
within basement slab.
H. Include all cut as shown on drawings or implied through slabs and perimeter
walls.
I. Unless specifically excluded, furnishing and installation of any other items of cast-
in-place concrete work indicated on drawings, specified or required to make work
of this section complete.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when
characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Submit to the Engineer prior to starting work, description of methods sequence of
construction and type of equipment proposed for use for performing cast-in-place
concrete work. This submission will not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for providing proper methods, equipment, workmanship and safety
precautions.
D. Submit to the Engineer samples and/or descriptive literature of any insert

specified as built in to concrete.
E. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and

placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete
Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special
reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.
F. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified

professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
Design and engineering of formwork are Contractor's responsibility.
G. Submit to the Engineer drawings showing details of any proposed corrective

work.
Shop Drawings: Submit detail fabrication and placement drawings for all
reinforcing steel which are correlated with forming and concrete placement
H. techniques and requirements.
I. Reinforcing shall be detailed based on construction joint locations which have

been shown on shop drawings reviewed by the Engineer.
J. The drawings shall consist of sections, plans and details clearly showing
locations, sizes and spacing of all schedules and diagrams to indicate bends,
sizes and lengths of all reinforcing steel.
K. A separate set of shop drawings, which shows the construction joint locations,
shall show all floor openings, wall openings and edges of concrete. Floor, wall
openings and sleeves for all mechanical, plumbing and electrical work shall be co-
ordinated with the respective trades and shown on these drawings in accordance
with the criteria indicated on the drawings.
L. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting
test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on
comprehensive testing of current materials.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
M. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the

following items complies with requirements:
1 Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2 Form materials and form-release agents.
3 Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
4 Fiber reinforcement.
5 Admixtures.
6 Waterstops.
7 Curing materials.
8 Floor and slab treatments.
9 Bonding agents.
10 Adhesives.
11 Vapor retarders.
12 Epoxy joint filler.

13 Joint-filler strips.
14 Repair materials.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete

Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for formwork and shoring and reshoring
installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design,
and extent.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed

concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production
facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed

Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production
Facilities.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E
329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1 Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification
program.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the

same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one
source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer.
F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural

Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
G. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are
indicated:
1 ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
2 ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

Contract requirements.
1 Before submitting design mixes, review concrete mix design and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of
each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the
following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
c. Ready-mix concrete producer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
1 Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
2 Repair damaged epoxy coatings on steel reinforcement according to ASTM D
3963/D 3963M.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01. FORM_FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide

continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable
sizes to minimize number of joints.
1 Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2 Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC
PS 1, and as follows:
a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better.

b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge
sealed.
c. Structural 1, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another

approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side
for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-

reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or
abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide
units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without
detrimental deformation.
D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to

resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
F. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance,

structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other
superimposed loads.
G. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19
mm), minimum.
H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not

bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair
subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
1 Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-

reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete
on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1 Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the
plane of the exposed concrete surface.
2 Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm)
in diameter in concrete surface.
3 Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive
dampproofing or waterproofing.
2.02. STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 460), deformed.
B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication and bending, of reinforcement type and zinc coating as follows:
1 Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 460), deformed.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2 Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 706/A 706M , deformed.

3 Zinc Coating: Class I.
4 Zinc Coating: Class II.
D. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M, and as follows:
E. Epoxy-Coated Fabricated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 934/A 934M, and as

follows:
1 Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 460), deformed.
2 Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
F. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, assembled with clips.

1 Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 460), deformed
bars.
2 Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed bars.
G. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
H. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, galvanized.
I. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.
J. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, plain-steel wire.
K. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, deformed-steel

wire.
L. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
M. Galvanized Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from

galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.
N. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
O. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel.
P. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, deformed

steel.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.03 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place.
Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice"
from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater
compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
1 For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact
forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar
supports.
2 For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-
coated wire bar supports.
3 For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated
wire bar supports.
B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).
Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
C. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A
615M, Grade 60 (Grade 460), plain-steel bars.
D. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with
epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 755M.
E. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust,
or sprayed zinc.
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.
C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
D. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type III.
E. Normal weight aggregate: ASTM C33, Uniformly graded as follows:

1 Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
2 Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm).
3 Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
F. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not
more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve,
except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50
(0.3-mm) sieve, and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No.
50 (0.3 mm).
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
G. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.

1 Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm).
H. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
2.05 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1

percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be
compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use
admixtures containing calcium chloride.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
2.06 MISSCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Waterstops shall be extruded virgin polyvinyl chloride or HDPE. Tensile strength

of 14 mpa (2000 psi) minimum, elongation of 300% minimum, Shore “A”
durometer hardness of 80-85, water absorption of 0.20% maximum and inert to
detrimental effects of fungus growth.
B. Vapour Barrier: Polyethylene sheet min. 1200 gauge thick of approved

manufacturer tested in accordance with ASTM E96 & E154.
C. Joint Filler: Shall be applied as indicated on drawing and must comply with the
following:
1 Composition
2 Compressibility
3 Water absorption
4 Thickness
D. Bitumen Emulsion Protective Coating: Damp-proof membrane for concrete in

contact with ground. Coating must contain 60% bitumen content and must be
chemical resistance. Coating must comply to BS 6949.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.07 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
C. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D

1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
D. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin
with a Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
E. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or

styrene butadiene.
F. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of

humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1 Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
2 Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete
to hardened concrete.
G. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick
galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent
intrusion of concrete or debris.
2.08 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by
either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:
1 Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.

2 Proportion lightweight structural concrete according to ACI 211.2 and ACI 301.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
C. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by

weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI
301 requirements.
D. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to

have low water permeability.
E. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete exposed to
deicers or subject to freezing and thawing while moist.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
F. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 for corrosion protection of

steel reinforcement in concrete exposed to chlorides from deicing chemicals, salt,
saltwater, brackish water, seawater, or spray from these sources.
G. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete subject to

moderate sulfate exposure.
H. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete subject to

severe or very severe sulfate exposure.
I. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1 Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture
(superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2 Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,
low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3 Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use
industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight,
and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
4 Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixes where indicated.
2.09 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.1 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information.
B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is
above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
C. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete
according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch
machine mixer.
1 For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least
one and one-half minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in
mixer, before any part of batch is released.
2 For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15
seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3 Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating
Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and
amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to
support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that
might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape,
alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or

gradual, as follows:
1 Class A, 1/8 inch (3 mm).
2 Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3 Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm).
4 Class D, 1 inch (25 mm).
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5
horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses,
and the like, for easy removal.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure
units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type
screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior
area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to
forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary
openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I. Do not chamfer corners or edges of concrete.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds,

and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades
providing such items.
K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood,
sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent

mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to

manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use
Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
1 Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.
2 Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to
receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls,
where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.
3 Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the
Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after
cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after
placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-
removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are
maintained.
B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that
supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
1 28-day design compressive strength.
2 At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
3 Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative
field- or laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301.
4 Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms
without loosening or disturbing shores.
C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed,
delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable
for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to
close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms
for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.04 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M), ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R
for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of

stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be
excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without
sufficient steel reinforcement.
C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete.

Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive
stress or deflection.
3.05 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to

ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular

material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation
tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).
C. Granular Fill: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill, moisten, and compact with
mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4
inch (19 mm).
1. Place and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular
material over granular fill.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.06 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing

reinforcement.
1 Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign
materials.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.

Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum
concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
D. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.
E Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
surfaces.
F Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh
spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in
either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
G Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-

coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair
coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.
H Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated
reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material.
3.07 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not

impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1 Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement
through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2 Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead
forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) into concrete.
3 Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans.
Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-
girder intersection.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
4 Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs,

beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5 Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with
walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6 Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
7 Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,

sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a
depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1 Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on
concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide
joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage
surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler

strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1 Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2 Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than
1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3 Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one
length is required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support
assemblies at joints where indicated.
1 Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent
concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.08 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints as indicated to form a

continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and
protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in
waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other

locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or
mechanically fastening and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths
practicable.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.09 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and
embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement,
unless approved by Architect.
C. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations
of ACI 301.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures
to mix.
D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new

concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or
planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide
construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
E. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600

mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while
preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints.
1 Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use
equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI
309R.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible
effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer
and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into
lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit
duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete
embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix
constituents to segregate.
F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation,
within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is
complete.
1 Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2 Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3 Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4 Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5 Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-
textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or
bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before
starting finishing operations.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect

concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by
frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1 When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg
C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete
mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80
deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.
2 Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3 Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix
designs.
H. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI

305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:
1 Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F
(32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be
used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total
amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's
option.
2 Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not
exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3 Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.1 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material

with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other
projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing

material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of
seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other
projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height.
1 Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating
or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing,
dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting.
2 Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-form finished concrete:
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten
concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until
producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that
created by the rubbing process.
2 Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency
of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement
to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and
water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so
color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and
remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and
keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one
part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent
and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so
color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by
grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar

unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with
a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of
formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding,

restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet
concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been
screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete

floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement
terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if

area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high
spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is
left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1 Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to
floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing,
built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate
concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and
restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and
appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through
applied coatings or floor coverings.
1 Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed
to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set
over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system
2 Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according
to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-
grade.
c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended
slabs.
d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and levelness, F(L) 35; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 24.
3 Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and
an unleveled freestanding 10-foot (3.05-m) long straightedge, resting on two high
spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following:
a. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
b. 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
c. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after
second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry
tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after
second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a
fine broom.
F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and
ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1 Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming
with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required
final finish with Architect before application.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise
indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as
specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous
concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while

concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with
corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and
equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of
manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and
associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings.
Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.
3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive
cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and
with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces

if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h
(1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to
manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or
darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of

beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during
curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of
curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods:
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure

unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other
surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1 Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days
with the following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2 Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or
tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive floor coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor
coverings.
3 Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated
in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours
after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.14 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
1 Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints;
leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches
(50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of
joint after hardening.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency

to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete
placement according to requirements specified in this Article.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained

according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following
requirements:
1 Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each
concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m),
plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
2 Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd.
(76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
3 Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
4 Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM
C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each
composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mix.
5 Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and
one test for each composite sample.
6 Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete;
one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's
pour of each concrete mix.
7 Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one
set of four standard cube specimen for each composite sample.
a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cube specimen for each composite
sample.
8 Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimen at
7 days and two at 28 days.
a. Test two field-cured specimen at 7 days and two at 28 days.
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two
specimen obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
C. When strength of field-cured cube is less than 85 percent of companion

laboratory-cured cubes, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide
corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified
compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall
contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement,
name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in
Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and
materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-
day tests.
F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive

device may be permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for
approval or rejection of concrete.
G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of
concrete when test results indicate that slump, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing and
inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by
cored samples complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 03360
SHORTCRETE
PART-1 - GENERAL
A. Preparation of substrate surfaces
B. Shotcrete placement
C. Curing
1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. General: Measurement and payment for shotcrete will be either by the lump-sum
method or by the unit-price method as determined by the listing of the bid item for
shotcrete indicated in the Bid Schedule of the Bid Form.
B. Lump Sum: If the Bid Schedule indicates a lump-sum for shotcrete, the lump-sum
method of measurement and payment will be in accordance with Section 01 20 00
- Price and Payment Procedures, Article 1.03.
C. Unit Price: If the Bid Schedule indicates a unit price for shotcrete, the unit-price
method of measurement and payment will be as follows:
1 Measurement: Shotcrete will be measured for payment by the cubic yard of each
mix placed in the work. The quantity for payment will be the actual or indicated
square area placed multiplied by the thickness indicated on the Contract
Drawings, unless a diff
2 Payment: shotcrete will be paid for at the indicated Contract unit prices for the
computed quantities as determined by the measurement method specified in
Article 1.02.C.1
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1 ACI 506.2 Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete
2 ACI 506.3R Guide to Certification of Shotcrete Nozzlemen

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 ASTM C31
2 ASTM C33
3 ASTM C42
4 ASTM C94
5 ASTM C150
6 ASTM C494
7 3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. "Shotcrete" is defined as pneumatically placed concrete: A portland-cement
concrete mixture conveyed through a hose and nozzle, and shot onto a surface at
high speed by means of air pressure
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures, and Section 01 33 23 - Shop
Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, for submittal requirements and procedures
B. Submittals shall include the following requirements:

1 Mix design;
2 Methods of application and equipment;
3 Certificates of compliance for materials;
4 Affidavit of compliance with ACI 506.3R for nozzle operators;
5 Test results; and
6 Sample test panels.

A. Shotcrete work shall be performed by a firm or company regularly engaged in the
business of applying shotcrete materials, using nozzle operators and workers
skilled and experienced in the type of work specified
B. Shotcrete supervisor shall have not less than two years experience as a shotcrete
nozzle operator.
C. Nozzle operator shall have not less than one year experience and, upon request
of the Engineer, shall demonstrate ability to properly place shotcrete.
D. Proof of compliance with ACI 506.3R shall be furnished for each nozzle operator.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Shotcrete shall not be placed during inclement or windy weather.
B. Proper protective clothing shall be worn by operators, and any person in the area
shall wear a mask during shotcreting until operations are stopped and the dust
has cleared
1.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from overspray and damage due to shotcreting

operations. Prevent dust nuisance
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. Type III cement may be used, subject to
written approval of the Engineer
B. Aggregate: ASTM C33 normal weight aggregate with combined gradation of

coarse and fine aggregates conforming to ACI 506.2, Gradation No. 1 or
Gradation No. 2, as applicable to the work
1. Maximum aggregate size may be varied, subject to acceptance by the
Engineer.
2. Specific gravity of aggregate shall be not less than 2.50
C. Water: Clean and potable, free of impurities detrimental to shotcrete.
D. Admixture: ASTM C494, Type C or Type E, containing no water-soluble chlorides

or materials corrosive to steel or other properties that may cause cracking or
spalling (for wet-mix shotcrete only.)
E. Ground Wires: No. 18 or 20 gage steel annealed wire
F. Thickness Pins: Noncorrosive thickness-indication pins designed not to cause

infiltration of water through shotcrete
G. Reinforcing Steel: Comply with applicable requirements of Section 03 20 00 -

Concrete Reinforcing
2.02 MIX DESIGN
A. Design of shotcrete mix, whether dry-mix shotcrete or wet-mix shotcrete, including

recommended amounts of admixture and water to be used, shall be obtained by
the Contractor from a qualified independent testing laboratory or agency, or from a
mill or read
B. Shotcrete mix shall conform with the following requirements:
1 Proportion of cement to aggregate shall be as required to achieve the indicated or

specified strength.
2 Water content at time of discharge from nozzle shall not exceed amount required
to achieve the maximum permitted slump.
3 Compressive strength of shotcrete shall be not less than the indicated or specified
28-day compressive strength (pounds per square inch).
C. Upon receipt of acceptable shotcrete mix design and test results from the pre-
approved independent testing laboratory, agency, mill, or ready-mix plant,
conforming with specified requirements, the Contractor shall submit the accepted
mix design to the Eng
D. Shotcrete shall not be placed until the submitted mix design has been approved
by the Engineer in writing.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.03 EQUIPMENT AND MIXING
A. Equipment Standards: Equipment shall be appropriate and suitable for dry-mix or

wet-mix shotcrete, as applicable, in accordance with the requirements of ACI
506.2
B. Batching and Mixing Equipment: Materials shall be batched by weight and

machine mixed, and delivered to the site pre-mixed. For wet-mix shotcrete,
conform with the applicable requirements of ASTM C94 for ready-mixed concrete
C. Delivery Equipment: Conform with the applicable requirements of ACI 506.2.

Equipment shall be capable of discharging mixture into delivery hose under close
control and shall deliver a continuous stream of material at the proper volume to
discharge nozzl
D. Air Supply: System shall employ a properly operating compressor of ample

capacity to perform the work. Comply with capacity requirements specified in ACI
506.2, with modification for hose lengths and working heights.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION OF SUBSTRATE SURFACES
A. Examine earth, rock, concrete, and masonry substrate surfaces, as applicable,

and determine that such substrate surfaces have been properly prepared as
hereinafter specified under Article 3.02.
B. Inspect soil anchors, if required by the Contract Specifications, and determine that
they are of correct size and type, and properly located and installed.
C. Inspect reinforcing steel and determine that it is properly placed and tied, that
sufficient clearances have been provided, and that it is free of grease, oil, loose
rust, and other coatings that may impair bond with concrete.
D. Assure that sleeves and other items to be embedded in shotcrete are in place and
that provisions for penetrations have been made.
E. Proceeding with shotcrete placement shall imply acceptance of substrate surfaces

and conditions as satisfactory.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE SURFACES
A. Prepare earth, rock, concrete, and masonry substrate surfaces, as applicable, in

accordance with ACI 506.2
B. Rock faces shall be free of loose rock.
C. Absorptive substrate surfaces shall be evenly dampened before placing shotcrete
D. Formwork shall be designed and constructed to provide for escape of compressed

air and rebound during shotcrete placement. Coordinate with Section 03 11 00 -
Concrete Forming.
E. Drain any free-standing water away from shotcrete operations.
F. Provide ground wires to establish thickness and surface planes. Install vertically
and horizontally as required. Do not penetrate waterproof membranes
G. As an alternative to ground wires, thickness measuring pins may be used to

establish layer thickness and surface plane, provided such pins do not penetrate
waterproof membranes and do not detrimentally damage substrates. Install pins
on 5 foot centers in
3.03 SHOTCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Operation and Placement Standards: Shotcrete operations and placement shall

conform with the applicable requirements of ACI 506.2
B. Gunning/Nozzle Operation:
1 Build each layer by making several passes over the working area. Thickness of
each layer shall be governed by the requirement that sagging of shotcrete shall
not occur. Maintain top surface of thick layers at 45 degree slope. Each layer to
be covered by
2 Laitance, loose material, and rebound shall be removed by air-jetting. Laitance
that has taken a final set shall be removed by sandblasting and the surface
cleaned with air-water jet. All layers to be shot shall be damp
3 Unless otherwise permitted, begin application at the lowest elevation
4 Do not trowel or finish initial layers in anyway
C. Rebound: Any rebound or accumulated loose aggregate shall be removed from

the surface to be covered prior to placing succeeding layers. Rebound shall not
be salvaged for reuse
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
D. Construction Joints: Unfinished work shall not stand more than 30 minutes unless
construction joints are provided for. Construction joints shall be designed and
provided as specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. Entire joint
surface shal
E. Finishing: Bring shotcrete layers to within 1/4 inch of final finished surface. When
surface has taken its initial set, trim excess material with a sharp edge cutting
screed. Remove ground wires. Provide flash coat or finish coat as required for the
fin
3.04 CURING
A. Immediately following shotcrete finishing, surfaces shall be cured for not less than
seven days using an approved curing method as specified in ACI 506.2
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces and work site of rebound and waste materials, and remove from
the site.

A. Requirements: Conform with applicable requirements of Section 01 45 00 -
Quality Control. All tests, cores, and core tests shall be performed by an
independent testing laboratory or agency employed by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the District.
B. Inspections:
1 Visual inspection by the Engineer will be performed of the shotcrete work,
including equipment, materials, forms, reinforcement, embedded items,
placement, finishing, curing, and protection of the finished product.
2 Surfaces may be sounded with a hammer to locate drummy or hollow-sounding
areas resulting from rebound pockets or lack of bond.
3 Such hollow-sounding areas, voids, sags, and other defects shall be carefully cut
out and replaced
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Quality Control Tests:
1 Test Panels: From each 50 cubic yards of each shotcrete mix, or fraction thereof,
applied in the work by each crew in each shooting position, fabricate four
unreinforced test panels, each 18-inches square and 7-1/2 inches thick. Fabricate
test panels in
Test panels will be visually examined by the Engineer, and shall be tested by an
independent testing laboratory or agency employed by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the District. Strength of shotcrete shall be considered acceptable
when the avera
The Engineer will require, at no additional expense to the District, adjustments to
the mix proportions, requalification of the shotcreting crew, or additional curing of
the shotcrete if either of the following conditions occur
1) The average seven-day strength of any two specimens for the shotcrete mix is
less than 70 percent of the specified 28-day strength, (three days for High-Early
Strength Design); or
2) The average 28-day strength of any two specimens for the shotcrete mix is less
than 100 percent of the specified 28-day strength.
Should the test panels indicate that shotcrete not meeting the specified
requirements has been produced, the Engineer will require tests of cores, taken
from the areas represented by the test panels, to determine compliance of the in-
place shotcrete with
Test cores shall be 3 inches minimum diameters, obtained and tested in

accordance with ASTM C42
Three cores shall be taken for each determination of in-place strength. Shotcrete
in the area represented by the core tests shall be considered structurally adequate
if the average of the three cores is equal to at least 85 percent of the specified
desig
Fill core holes with low-slump concrete or mortar of same mix design as the
placed shotcrete
END OF SECTION 03360
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 03480
PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
To be read with Division 1 - General Requirements.
1 Precast architectural concrete units, for all elements of the project.
2 Precast wheelstops.
A. Structural Performance: Design precast architectural concrete units and
connections capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under
conditions indicated.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who assumes undivided

responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete units by employing a
qualified engineer with 10 years minimum experience in related field to prepare
design calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of precast architectural
concrete units. Indicate member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions,
shapes, cross sections, limits of each finish, and types of reinforcement, including
special reinforcement.
1 Indicate separate face and backup mix locations and thicknesses.
2 Indicate locations and extent and treatment of dry joints if two-stage casting is
proposed.
3 Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and cast-in
hardware, inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories.
4 Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in other
construction.
5 Comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed or certified by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation.
D. Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of precast
architectural concrete units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and
texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by
50 mm).
E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and
personnel.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed
projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of engineers
and owners, and other information specified.
G. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting
test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated:

1 Concrete materials.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2 Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons.

3 Admixtures.
4 Bearing pads.
5 Water-absorption test reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed precast

architectural concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated
for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements

and is experienced in manufacturing precast architectural concrete units similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.

C. Engineer Qualifications: Engineer with ten years minimum experience in related
field and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that
have resulted in the installation and successful in-service performance of
architectural precast concrete units similar to this Project in material, design, and
extent.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An acceptable independent testing agency

qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
E. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and the design
recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook--Precast and
Prestressed Concrete."
F. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing

requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for
types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for
Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products."
G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing
Steel."
H. Sample Panels: Before fabricating precast architectural concrete units, produce

sample panels to establish the approved range of selections made under sample
Submittals. Produce a minimum of 3 sets of full-scale sample panels,
approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high, to
demonstrate the expected range of finish, color, and texture variations.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 Locate panels where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.

2 In presence of Engineer, damage part of an exposed-face surface for each finish,
color, and texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair
of surface blemishes to match adjacent undamaged surfaces.
3 Maintain sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.

4 Demolish and remove sample panels when directed.
I. Mockups: Before installing precast architectural concrete units, build mockups to

verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1 Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer.
2 Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3 Obtain Engineer’s approval of mockups before starting fabrication.
4 In presence of Engineer, damage part of an exposed face for each finish, color,
and texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repairs to
match adjacent undamaged surfaces.
5 Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
6 Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
7 Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
A. Deliver precast architectural concrete units to Project site in such quantities and
at such times to ensure continuity of installation. Store units at Project site to
prevent cracking, distorting, warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so
markings are visible.
B. Lift and support units only at designated lifting and supporting points as shown on
Shop Drawings.
1.06 SEQUENCING
A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction

without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and
directions, as required, for installation.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MOLD MATERIALS

A. Molds: Provide molds and, where required, form-facing materials of metal,
plastic, wood, or another material that is nonreactive with concrete and
dimensionally stable to produce continuous and true precast concrete surfaces
within fabrication tolerances and suitable for required finishes.
B. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration
indicated.
2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 460), deformed.
B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
D. Supports: Manufacturer's bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for
spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in
place according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," PCI MNL 117, and as
follows:
1 For uncoated reinforcement, use CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, of same type, brand, and source.
1 Standard gray Portland cement may be used for nonexposed backup concrete.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33,
with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S; uniformly graded gradation.
C. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored
water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, nonfading, and alkali resistant.
D. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability,
setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL
117.
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be
compatible with other required admixtures.
F. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
G. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.
H. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
I. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
J. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.
K. Plasticizing Admixture: ASTM C 1017.
2.04 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS
A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Carbon-Steel Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold
finished; AWS D1.1, Type A or B, with arc shields.
C. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
D. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts; and flat,
unhardened steel washers.
E. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex
steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel
washers.
F. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized steel items, except
those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-
SP 3 and shop-apply lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer.
G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
H. Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic shims, and other accessories
required to install precast architectural concrete units.
2.05 BEARING PADS
A. Provide bearing pads for precast concrete units as follows:
1 Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent

polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded
sheet, 50 to 70 shore A durometer, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5
MPa) per ASTM D 412.
2.06 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete required.
1 Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to not exceed, in aggregate, 25 percent of
portland cement by weight.
B. Design mixes may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by
qualified precast plant personnel at precast architectural concrete fabricator's
option.
C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement
permitted by ACI 318 (ACI 318M).
D. Normal-Weight Concrete Face and Backup Mixes: Proportion mixes by either
laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with
materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the
following properties:
1 Cube compressive strength (28 Days): 45 MPa.
2 Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
E. Water Absorption: 12 to 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL
117.
F. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2
years.
2.07 MOLD FABRICATION

A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to
withstand pressures due to concrete-placement operations and temperature
changes and for prestressing operations.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide
solid backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concreting. Coat
form liner with form-release agent.
B. Maintain molds to provide completed precast architectural concrete units of
shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.
2.08 FABRICATION
A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware:
Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to
B. Furnish loose steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps,
hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast architectural concrete
units to supporting and adjacent construction.
C. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard
Practice" and PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
1 Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that
reduce or destroy the bond with concrete.
2 Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement
during concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal
support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces.
3 Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) minimum coverage.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in
position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed
concrete surfaces.
4 Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces
at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths
to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
D. Reinforce precast architectural concrete units to resist handling, transportation,
and erection stresses.
E. Mix concrete according to PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section. After
concrete batching, no additional water may be added.
F. Place face mix to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch
(25 mm) or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the
minimum reinforcing cover.
G. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of
weakness from forming in precast concrete units. Comply with requirements in
1 PCI
PlaceMNL 117 for
backup measuring,
concrete mixing,
to ensure bondtransporting, andconcrete.
with face mix placing concrete.
H. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without
dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items. Use equipment and
procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.
I. Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold-weather concrete placement.
J. Comply with ACI 305R recommendations for hot-weather concrete placement.
K. Identify pickup points of precast architectural concrete units and orientation in

structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop
Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each precast
architectural concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
L. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention

without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or
M. Discard precast architectural concrete units that are warped, cracked, broken,
spalled, stained, or otherwise defective unless repairs are approved by Engineer.
2.09 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate precast architectural concrete units straight and true to size and shape
with exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel
complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for
cast-in items.
2.1 FINISHES
A. Finish exposed-face surfaces of precast architectural concrete units to match

approved sample panels and mockups and as follows:
1 Smooth-Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks, and
honeycombs, with uniform color and texture. Surfaces shall be very smooth
B. Finish unexposed surfaces of precast architectural concrete units by float finish.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI

MNL 117 requirements.
B. Strength of precast concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to

comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements.
C. Testing: If there is evidence that the strength of precast concrete units may be
deficient or may not comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, Owner will
employ an independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled
from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C
42.
1 A minimum of three representative cores will be taken from units of suspect
strength, from locations directed by Engineer.
2 Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition.
3 Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if
the average compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of the 28-day
design compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of the 28-
day design compressive strength.
4 Test results will be made in writing on the same day that tests are performed,
with copies to Engineer, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test
reports will include the following:
a. Project identification name and number.
b. Date when tests were performed.
c. Name of precast concrete fabricator.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
d. Name of concrete testing agency.

e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit or units represented
by core tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength
at breaks, corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to
core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.
D. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply
with requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast
concrete mix that has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast
concrete surfaces.
E. Defective Work: Precast architectural concrete units that do not comply with
requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and finishes, are
unacceptable. Replace with precast concrete units that comply with
requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions
affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
B. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting concrete has attained
minimum design compressive strength.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting precast
architectural concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
B. Install precast architectural concrete. Provide temporary supports and bracing as

required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are being
permanently connected.
1 Install bearing pads as precast concrete units are being erected.
2 Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
progresses.
3 Remove projecting hoisting devices and use sand-cement grout to fill voids within
recessed hoisting devices flush with surface of concrete.
C. Anchor precast architectural concrete units in position by bolting, welding,

grouting, or as otherwise indicated. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and
spacers as soon as possible after anchoring and grouting are completed.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
D. Welding: Perform welding in compliance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4, with
qualified welders.
1 Protect precast architectural concrete units and bearing pads from damage by
field welding or cutting operations and provide noncombustible shields as
required.
2 Repair damaged steel surfaces by cleaning and applying a coat of galvanizing
repair paint to galvanized surfaces.
E. At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent

loosening of nuts.
F. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain

grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout
material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth,
level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for
not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from
exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens.
3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Install precast architectural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in
alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL
117, Appendix I.
A. Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

perform field tests and inspections.
B. Field welds and connections using high-strength bolts will be subject to tests and
inspections.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Engineer.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
3.05 REPAIRS
A. Repair exposed exterior surfaces of precast architectural concrete units to match

color, texture, and uniformity of surrounding precast architectural concrete if
permitted by Engineer.
B. Remove and replace damaged precast architectural concrete units if repairs do
not comply with requirements.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection to remove weld
marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.
1 Wash and rinse according to precast concrete fabricator's written
recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning
operations.
2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the
appearance of exposed concrete finishes.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

APPENDIX-1
SECTION 03480
HOLLOW CORE SLAB
CONTENTS

01 INTRODUCTION
02 AUTHORITY, RIGHTS
03 REFERENCE
04 DESIGN
4.1 Introduction to design of precast concrete structures
4.2 Loadings
4.3 Material properties
4.4 Expansion joints
4.5 Non structural cracks

4.6 Thermal conductivity

4.7 Fire rating

4.8 Noise resistance
05 MATERIALS
5.1 Concrete materials

5.2 Aggregates

5.3 Micro silica

5.4 Admixture

5.5 Water

5.6 Steel reinforcement
5.7 Repair materials

5.8 Mould release agent

5.9 Pigments in concrete

5.10 Retarders for exposed surface

5.11 Anti-corrosion protective paints – strands

5.12 Embedded items

5.13 Bitumen paint for footing & other sub surface elements

5.14 Mould materials

06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS
07 TESTING FREQUENCY, ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
08 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCE FOR PRECAST ELEMENTS
09 CURING
10 SURFACE FINISH
11 RECORDS
12 APPENDIX
NEB-P-17-1747 1/27 Civil Specs./Sec. 03480

MAIN WORKS

1. INTRODUCTION

The purpose of this document is to clearly and concisely define United Precast Concrete‟s (UPC) standard
specification for the design, manufacturing and installation of precast concrete elements. This standard specification
shall be considered in the estimation unless otherwise stated. Any additional requirements or deviations from this
specification or if the “client‟s project specification” is provided subsequent to UPC‟s offer, a deviation schedule will be
drawn up and additional costs for the additional requirements will be provided to client.

2. AUTHORITY, RIGHTS.

This document is the sole property of UPC and must not be copied partially or in whole and disseminated without the
expressed written approval of UPC. United Precast Concrete reserves the right to pursue any legal compensation,
should this occur.

This document will be reviewed annually or as and when required by QA/QC Manager, verified by the Chief Engineer and
approved by the General Manager.

This is not a controlled document for external users (client, consultant etc.) and any amendments may not be informed
or distributed to the one who received it earlier. If any “earlier issues” of this specification becomes part of the contract,
the same will be followed till the completion of the project unless and until it is mutually agreed.

3. REFERENCE

A. Aggregates

BS 812: Sec.103.1:1985 : Sieve analysis

ASTM C142-97 : Clay lumps & friable particles
BS 812: Part 117:1988 : Acid soluble chloride content
BS 812: Part 118:1988 : Acid soluble sulphate content
BS 812 Part 2:1995 : Bulk specific gravity (SSD)
BS 812 Part 2:1995 : Water absorption
BS 812: Section 105.1:1989 : Flakiness index
BS 812: Section 105.2:1990 : Elongation index
BS 812: Part 110:1990 : Aggregate crushing value

ASTM C88-05 : MgSO4 Soundness

ASTM C289-07 : Potential alkali reactivity of aggregate

BS 812: Part 109 :1990 : Moisture content

B. Cement

BS EN 197-1:2000 (OPC) : Composition, specification and conformity criteria for common cements

ASTM C150-09 Type II (MSRC) : Standard specification for Portland cement

BS 4027-1996 (SRC) : Specification for sulphate-resisting Portland cement.

MAIN WORKS

C. Micro silica

ASTM C1240:05 : Standard specification for silica fume used in cementitious mixtures

D. GGBS(Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag)

BS 6699:1992 : GGBS for use with Portland cement

E. Water

BS 3148:1980 : Water for making concrete

F. Admixture

ASTM C494/C494M-99a : Standard specification for chemical admixtures for concrete

BS 5075 – Part 1-1982 : Concrete Admixtures

BS EN 934-2: 2001 : Admixtures for concrete, grout, mortar

G. Concrete

BS 1881:1983 P 102 : Concrete slump

BS 1881:1983 P106 : Air content

BS 1881:1983 P 107 : Fresh concrete density

BS 1881:1983 P108 : Concrete cube making

BS 1881:1983 P 114 : Hardened concrete density

BS 1881:1983 P116 : Compressive strength of cube

BS 5328:Part 1 :1997 : Guide to specifying concrete.

H. Reinforcement

BS4449:1997 Grade 460B : Carbon steel bars for the reinforcement for concrete.

I. Strands

BS 5896:80 : Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand for the pre-stressing of
concrete.

ASTM A 416/A 416 M : Standard specification for steel strand, uncoated seven wires for pre-
stressed concrete.

J. Finishing works

Australian Standard for form work AS 3610 in concreting

K. Tolerances

PCI manual MNL 135-00 : Tolerance manual for precast and pre-stressed concrete construction
MAIN WORKS

K. DESIGN REFERENCES:

All design calculations are prepared according to a selection or a combination of the following standards and also in
line with the applicable local standards.

1. PCI Design Handbook, 6th edition. MNL 120-04

2. PCI Hollow Core Slab Design Manual, 2nd Edition

3. American Concrete Institute ACI 318M-08

4. Uniform Building Code, UBC 1997 Volume 2

5. International Building Code, IBC 2009

6. BS 8110-1: 1997 Code of Practice for Design and Construction

7. BS 8110-2: 1985 Code of Practice for Special Circumstances

8. BS 6399-2: 1997 Code of Practice for Wind Loads

9. BS 5950-1: 2000 Structural Use of Steelwork in Buildings

10. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, AASHTO - 2nd Edition

11. American Society of Civil Engineers, ASCE 07-05

12. American Institute of Steel Construction, AISC – 8th Ed.

(Note: Some of the above mentioned British standards for the testing of materials and concrete have been superseded by
“BS EN standards”. However the same old versions of British standards are followed by all accredited independent
laboratories in UAE, hence UPC also refers the same in this specification.)


MAIN WORKS

4. DESIGN

4.1 INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN OF PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES

PRE-STRESSED HOLLOW CORE SLABS (HCS):

The Hollow core slab is a pre-stressed element with hollow inside the concrete section. This cavity creating empty
portions defines the name - “Hollow Core Slab”.
• In principle these are series of small I-sections joined on its top and bottom flanges – optimizing the Moment of
Inertia with minimal concrete.

• Tendons are used as the reinforcements for hollow core slabs. Most commonly used tendons are stress-relieved
and low- relaxation wires with ultimate strengths, fpu =1770 or 1860 Mpa.

• Although the HCS is designed one-way with a standard width of 1.2m strip, design codes (ACI-318, and Precast
Concrete Institute - PCI) supports that “when the HCS are installed and grouted on its joints and keyways, the
individual slab become a system that behaves similar to a monolithic slab.” – PCI HCS Design Manual Section 2nd
Edition Chapter 3.

• Load distribution mechanism –”As load is applied to one slab in a system, the response of the slab system is to
deflect and twist if the load is not on the longitudinal center of the slab. As the loaded slab edges try to move down,
the interlock of the grout in the joints with the keyways formed in the slab edges forces adjacent slabs to deflect a
similar amount. The flexural and torsional stiffness of the adjacent slabs reduce the deflection of the loaded slab from
what might be expected if the slab were alone. Shear forces are developed along the keyways and the loaded slab
then gets some support from the adjacent slabs. As this effect trickles through the system, the keyways between
slabs force equal deflections for the slab edges at any given keyway.” – From the PCI HCS Design Manual 2nd
Edition Chapter 3.

• Composite design – Capacities and stiffness of pre-stressed sections such as HCS can be enhanced by increasing
the depth. A direct way of attaining this is to overlay a structural topping/screed over the pre-stressed member.
This additional composite section develops both an increased slab capacity for gravity loads and provides more
options on installing tie reinforcements for load transfer of diaphragm.

FULL FRAME PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURE:
A full frame Precast concrete structure is composed of precast strip footings, individual footings, external insulated load
bearing walls, internal load bearing and non-load bearing walls, precast columns, precast/pre-stressed beams, precast
parapets, precast stairs, pre-stressed hollow core slabs or pre-stressed single-tee slabs from ground floor to roof.

The overall lateral stability is secured by the load bearing precast walls that act as shear walls. The gravity loads are
primarily taken by the load bearing walls and columns. All the units are tied together by reinforcement in grouted joints,
transferring all the loads to the precast foundation.
Static System.

Vertical loads are transferred from the pre-stressed Hollowcore slabs or single-tee slabs to the load bearing precast
panels or beams then to the foundation.
Horizontal loads will be transferred through the diaphram action in the Hollowcore slabs and screed as sufficient
reinforcement will be provided. Usually, the 60mm structural screed reinforced with steel wire mesh will enhance the
diaphragm capacity. The horizontal load from the structural screed is then transferred to the shear walls with dowels,
transferring the load down to the foundation.
For the building stability in general the wind and seismic loads will be taken into account. The foundation is made of precast
inverted „T‟ strip footing or independent socket footing. UPC will provide the foundation loads and coordinate details to
ensure that the loads can be transmitted from the superstructure to the foundation.

MAIN WORKS

4.2 LOADINGS

Vertical Loads

Sl.No Category Imposed Live Loads (kN/m2) References
1 Residential (Villa, Apartments & Hotels) 2.00 Table 16-A (UBC 1997)
2 Offices 2.50 Table 16-A (UBC 1997)
3 Schools:
Class Rooms 2.00 Table 16-A (UBC 1997)
Reading Rooms 3.00 Table 1607.1 (IBC 2009)
Stack Rooms (Library) 7.00 Table 1607.1 (IBC 2009)

4 Hospitals:

Operating Rooms & Laboratories 3.00 Table 1607.1 (IBC 2003)

Private Rooms 2.00 Table 16-A (UBC 1997)

Wards 2.00 Table 16-A (UBC 1997)

5 Parking:

Light Vehicle 3.50 Section 1607.6 (IBC 2009)

Heavy Vehicle 9.30 (N/mm, Lane load) 3.6.1.2.4 (ASSHTO 2001)

35 kN (Front / Wheel) 3.6.1.2.3 (ASSHTO 2001)

145 kN (Center / Wheel) 3.6.1.2.3 (ASSHTO 2001)

145 kN (Rear / Wheel) 3.6.1.2.3 (ASSHTO 2001)
6 Restaurants & Dining Room 5.00 Table 1607.1 (IBC 2009)
7 Shopping Malls & Super Market 6.00 Table 16-A (UBC 1997)

8 Theatre 5.00 Table 16-A (UBC 1997)

9 Stairs & Bleachers 5.00 Table 16-A (UBC 1997)
10 Mechanical Room (light) 5.00 Table 16-A (UBC 1997)

11 Storage

Light 6.00 Table 16-A (UBC 1997)
Heavy 12.00 Table 16-A (UBC 1997)
12 Corridors & Balcony (for item# 1 & 2) 4.00 Table 1607.1 (IBC 2009)
13 Roofs
Promenade Purposes 4.00 Section 1607.11.2.2 (IBC 2009)
Gardens & Assemble Purposes 5.00 Section 1607.11.2.2 (IBC 2009)
Landscape Area 1.00 Section 1607.11.2.3 (IBC 2009)

MAIN WORKS

Lateral Loads – Earthquake Loads

(Reference: International Building Code, IBC-2009)

Seismic base shear : (1617.5.1)

1.2S DS
V= W (Equation 16-56)
R

Where

SDS = The design elastic response acceleration at short period as determined in accordance with section 1615.1.3

R = The response modification factor from Table 1617.6.2

W = The effective seismic weight of the structure including the total dead load and other loads listed below.

1. In areas used for storage, a minimum of 25% of reduced live load (floor live load in public garages and open
parking structures need not be included)

2. Where an allowance for partition load is included in the floor load design, the actual partition weight of 10 psf
of floor area, whichever is greater (0.48 kpa).

3. Total weight of permanent operating equipment.

4. 20% of flat roof snow load where flat snow load exceeds 30 psf (1.44 kpa)

MAIN WORKS

Reference : International Building Code, IBC-2009

Seismic base shear :(1630.2.1)

CvI
RT
The total design base shear need not exceed the following:
2.5CaI
RT
The total design base shear shall not be less than the following:

V = 0.11 Ca I W (Equation 30-6)

In addition,for Seismic Zone 4,the total base shear shall also not be less than the following:

0.80ZNv I W (Equation 30-7)
V=
R

3/4
T= Ct (hn ) (1630.2.2-Equation 30-8)

Where:
Ct = 0.035 (0.0853) for steel momemt - resisting frame
Ct = 0.030 (0.0731) for reinforced concrete momemt - resisting frame and eccentrically braced frames
Ct = 0.020 (0.048) for all other buildings

Lateral Force on Elements of Structures,Non structural (Section 1632)
Components and Equipmnet suported by Structures.

Design for Total Lateral Force: Where:
hx = Is the element or component attachment elevati
Fp = 4.0 Ca I p Wp (32-1) with respect to grade.hx shall not be less 0.0

Alternatively,Fp may be calculated using the following formula:
ap Ca I p hx hr = Is the structure roof elevation with respect to gr
Fp = 1 +3 Wp (32-2)
Rp hr ap = Is the in-structure Component Amplification Fac
Except that: that varies rom 1.0 to 2.5 (Table 16 -O)

Fp = shall not be less than 0.70 C a Wp Rp = (Table 16-O)
(32-2)
and need not be more than 4 C a I p Wp

Seismic Zone Classification in UAE

Very limited studies are available that describe the seismic activity and zoning in the area. An important report “Earthquakes
and Seismic Zones in the Middle East” by J.D Mortimer- Llyod, BRE (Building Research Establishment) Report No.CI/SfB,
1976(H16), published in 1983, provides an evaluation of seismic history from previous records. Based on seismic activity, Al
Ain has been grouped (UBC) under Zone 2A with a seismic zone factor, Z = 0.15.

MAIN WORKS

Reference: International Building Code 2003 (IBC 2009)

LATERAL LOADS – WIND LOADS

ps = l lw p s30(Main wind force-resisting system – Equation 16-34)

Where
ps= windward and leeward net pressure kN/m2
l = adjustment factor for building height-Table 1609.6.2.1 (4)
lw= importance factor as defined in section 1609.5 – (Table 1604.5)
ps30=simplified design wind pressure for exposure B at h = 9144 mm and for lw = 1.0 (Table 1609.6.2.1(1))
ps = l lw p net30(Components and cladding – Equation 16-35)

Where
pnet= net design wind pressure(sum of internal and external) kN/m2
l = adjustment factor for building height-Table 1609.6.2.1 (4)
lw= importance factor as defined in section 1609.5 – (Table 1604.5)
pnet30= net design wind pressure for exposure B at h = 9144 mm and for lw = 1.0 (Table 1609.6.2.1(2) & (3))

Reference : Uniform Building Code UBC 1997

WIND LOAD

p = C e C qqslwkN/m2 (section 1620 – Equation 20-1) – Primary Frames and Systems

Where
C e=combined height exposure and gust factor coefficient as given in Table 16-G
C q =pressure coefficient for the structure or portion of structure under consideration as given in Table 16-H
q s=wind stagnation pressure at standard height of10.00 meters as set forth in Table 16-F
lw= importance factor as set forth in Table 16-K
p = C e C qqslwkN/m2 (section 1622 – Equation 20-1) – Elements and Components of Structure

Where
q s=wind stagnation pressure at standard height of 10.00 meters as set forth in Table 16-F
p = C e C qqslwkN/m2 (section 1624 – Equation 20-1) – Miscellaneous Structure

Where
q s=wind stagnation pressure at standard height of 10.00 meters as set forth in Table 16-F

MAIN WORKS

Reference : British Standard – BS 6399-2 : 1997

Wind Load

Site wind speed , V s = V b S a S d S sSp(2.2.2.1)

Where Site in country terrain (3.2.3.2.2)
Vb= basic wind speed, m/sec Sb = Sc (1+(gt x St) + Sh) - Equation 28
Sa = altitude factor (2.2.2.2) Sc= fetch factor (table 22)
Sd= direction factor (2.2.2.3) St = turbulence factor (table 22)
Ss= Seasonal factor (2.2.2.4) gt= gust peak factor (3.2.3.3)
Sp= probability factor (2.2.2.5) Sh = topographic increment (3.2.3.4 table 24)

Effective wind speed, Ve = Vs x Sb(2.2.3.1) Pe = qsCpCa(kN/M2)
Dynamic Pressure, qs = (0.613Ve2)(kN/M2) Cp = pressure coefficient (2.4 & 2.5 table 5 & 21)
Ca = size effect factor (2.1.3.4 fig.4)
Notional Loads = 1.05 x characteristic dead weight of structure between mid height of the storey (section 3.1.4.2)


Basic load combinations : (section 1605.2.1)
1.4D (Equation 16-1)
1.4D + 1.60L + 0.5 (Lr or S or R) (Equation 16-2)
1.2D + 1.60(Lr or S or R) + (f1L or 0.80W) (Equation 16-3)
1.2D + 1.60W + f1L + 0.50(Lr or S or R) (Equation 16-4)
1.2D + 1.0E + f1L + f2S (Equation 16-5)
0.90D + (1.0E or 1.60W) (Equation 16-6)

Where :
f1 = 1.0 for floors in places of public assembly, for live loads in excess (4.79 kpa) and for parking garage live load.
f1 = 0.50 for other live loads.
f2 = 0.70 for roof configurations (such as saw tooth) that do not shed snow off the structure.
f2 = 0.20 for other roof configurations.

Notation:
D = Dead Load
L = Live Load
W = Wind Load
E = Earthquake Load
R = Rain Load
S = Snow Load
Lr = Roof Live Load

MAIN WORKS

Basic load combinations: (section 1612.2.1)
1.4D (Equation 12-1)
1.4D + 1.60L + 0.5 (Lr or S) (Equation 12-2)
1.2D + 1.60(Lr or S) + (f1L or 0.80W) (Equation 12-3)
1.2D + 1.30W + f1L + 0.50(Lr or S) (Equation 12-4)
1.2D + 1.0E + f1L + f2S (Equation 12-5)
0.90D ± (1.0E or 1.30W) (Equation 12-6)

Where :
f1 = 1.0 for floors in places of public assembly, for live loads in excess (4.79 kpa) and for parking garage live load.
f1 = 0.50 for other live loads.
f2 = 0.70 for roof configurations (such as saw tooth) that do not shed snow off the structure.
f2 = 0.20 for other roof configurations.
Notation:
D = Dead Load
L = Live Load
W = Wind Load
E = Earthquake Load
R = Rain Load

Reference : American Concrete Institute, ACI 318M-05

Required Strength: (Section 9.2)
U = 1.4 (D + F) (Equation 9-1)
U = 1.20(D + F + T) + 1.60 (L+H) + 0.50 (Lr or S or R) (Equation 9-2)
U = 1.2D + 1.6(Lr or S or R) + (1.0L or 0.80W) (Equation 9-3)
U = 1.20 + 1.6W + 1.0L + 0.50 (Lr or S or R) (Equation 9-4)
U = 1.2D +1.0E + 1.0L +0.2S (Equation 9-5)
U = 0.90D +1.6W + 1.6H (Equation 9-6)
U = 0.9D +1.0E + 1.6H (Equation 9-7)

Notation:
D = Dead Load
L = Live Load
W = Wind Load
E = Earthquake Load
R = Rain Load
S = Snow Load
H = Loads due to weight and pressure of Earth & Water
F = Loads due to weight and pressure of Fluids
T = Effect of Temperature, Creep, Shrinkage & Differential settlement
Lr = Roof Live Load

Note for dead load: To be specified and identified by client at time of tender.

MAIN WORKS

4.3 MATERIAL PROPERTIES

Concrete Property: Cylinder Cube
Pre-Stressed Hollowcore Slabs, beams and T-Beams f c = 48 N/mm2 f cu = 60N/mm2

External walls, Columns & beams f c = 32 N/mm2 f cu = 40N/mm2
Internal load bearing walls f c = 32 N/mm2 f cu = 40N/mm2
Stairs & Landing f c = 32 N/mm2 f cu = 40N/mm2
Parapet f c = 32 N/mm2 f cu = 40N/mm2
Concrete Density gconc= 25 kN/m3
Nominal Cover
Above ground minimum concrete cover 30 mm

Below ground minimum concrete cover 40 mm
Reinforcement Properties

Deformed steel reinforcement for reinforced concrete, T8 to T40 fy = 460 N/mm2 (min)
Wire rope 6 mm as per BS 5896 fpu = 1770 N/mm2
Pre-stressing strand :12.5 mm &9.3 mm as per BS 5896 fpu = 1770 N/mm2
12.7 mm &9.5 mm as per ASTM A 416, Gr.270 fpu = 1860 N/mm2

Steel Angle, Plate & Plain Bars

ASTM A 36 Fy = 248 N/mm2 Ft = 150 N/mm2

Threaded Bolt for Mechanical Connection

1. BS 5956 – 2000 pt= 240N/mm2 Ft = 190 N/mm2
2. ASTM A 36 Grade 4.6 pt= 240N/mm2 Ft = 150 N/mm2

Nomenclature:
fc = cylinder compressive strength of concrete at 28 days
f cu = cube compressive strength of concrete at 28 days
fy= yield strength of deformed steel reinforcement
fpu= specified tensile strength of pre-stressing steel
Fy= specified minimum yield stress of steel
pt= tension strength of bolt
Ft = allowable axial tensile stress of steel.

4.4 EXPANSION JOINTS

It is well known that almost all building materials expand or contract due to change in temperature and variation in moisture
content. The magnitude of such expansion or contraction depends upon the type of material used in construction and the
extent of variation in the temperature and moisture content. In a continuous structure, the cumulative effect of the dimensional
changes in the building elements on account of the above maybe considerable. In case the components of a structure are
not allowed free movement, internal stresses may result in the formation of cracks. This may in turn endanger the stability of
the structure. Such a problem gains special importance in tropical countries where large variations occur in the atmospheric
temperature and humidity.
A special provision should be made to control or isolate thermal and other movements to avoid danger to a structure. This
is achieved by breaking the continuity of the structure. The expansion joints sub-divide the building into smaller units and
also permit free movement of each unit.

MAIN WORKS

Recommended expansion joints spacing for Precast Concrete Buildings is generally based on experience. Evaluation of
joint spacing should consider the types of connection used and the column stiffness in simple span structures, the relative
stiffness between beams and columns in framed structure, location of lateral load resisting elements and the weather exposure
conditions. Non heated structures, such as parking structures, are subjected to much greater temperature changes
than enclosed structures, so the distance between expansion joints should consider the previously mentioned items.

The assessment of the use of expansion joints is done in accordance to the calculation method described in the
PCI Design Handbook (6th Edition) Figure 3.10.20.

Width of Expansion Joints can be calculated theoretically using coefficient of expansion of;

δ = 10 x 10 -6 mm/mm, oC Coefficient of expansion for normal concrete

Differential Temperature, Δdt = 30o

Δw = δ * Δdt * L

L = Building Length

Maximum Distance between Expansion Joints;

Basic length of an irregular building, L = 180 ft (54.87m), when the seasonal temperature change to 70 oF
(21oC). Increase due to constant indoor temperature, ε = 15% (sandwich panel).

Δ=Lxε

4.5 NON-STRUCTURAL CRACKS

GUIDE TO REASONABLE CRACK WIDTH
Reproduced from Table 4.1 ACI-318 224R-19

Exposure Condition Crack width (mm)

Dry air or protective membrane 0.41
Humidity, moist air, soil 0.30
Deicing chemicals 0.18
Seawater and seawater spray, wetting and drying 0.15
Water-retaining structures 0.10

Notes:

The above acceptable crack widths are not classified as structural cracks and do not affect the structural integrity of precast
elements nor the stability of the buildings.

Any vertical and horizontal joint connection between precast elements will tend to show hairline cracks due to inevitable
differential shrinkage between panels and joint material. The same will appear at connections between block walls and
concrete walls or dry walls and other materials.

The above-mentioned cracks need not be repaired. However, in some cases where the cracks may affect the aesthetic
view, a cosmetic repair is being executed as per UPC Standard Method Statement of Repair.

MAIN WORKS

THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY

A. HOLLOW CORE SLAB

THICKNESS U-VALUE
TYPE
HCS SCREED W /m2 K Btu / °F ft2 h
HCS 150 150 8.330 1.461
HCS 200 200 6.670 1.170
HCS 265 265 5.260 0.923
HCS 320 320 5.000 0.877
HCS 400 400 4.550 0.798
HCS 500 500 3.850 0.675

B. HOLLOW CORE SLAB + 60mm SCREED

THICKNESS U-VALUE
TYPE
HCS SCREED W /m2 K Btu / °F ft2 h
HCS 150 150 60 6.250 1.096
HCS 200 200 60 5.260 0.923
HCS 265 265 60 4.350 0.763
HCS 320 320 60 4.160 0.730
HCS 400 400 60 3.850 0.675
HCS 500 500 60 3.330 0.584

C. PRECAST INSULATED SANDWICH WALLS WITH EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE

SECTION THICKNESS U-VALUE

TOTAL INNER INSULATION OUTER W /m2 K Btu / °F ft2 h
200 mm 80 50 70 0.551 0.097

220 mm 100 50 70 0.548 0.097

250 mm 130 50 70 0.543 0.096

270 mm 150 50 70 0.540 0.095

300 mm 180 50 70 0.535 0.094
350 mm 230 50 70 0.527 0.093
400 mm 280 50 70 0.520 0.092

conc = 1.85 W/m2 K insu = 0.0283 W/m2 K

MAIN WORKS

4.6 FIRE RATING

MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER OF PRECAST ELEMENTS

FIRE RESISTANCE RATING (HOURS)
PRECAST ELEMENT CODE REFERENCE

1.5 Hrs 2 Hrs

Precast Columns 40 mm 40 mm Table 720.1 (1) IBC 2009

Precast Beams 20 mm 20 mm Table 9.3.7.1(3) PCI Design Handbook, 6th Ed.

Pre-stressed Beams 40 mm 40 mm Table 9.3.7.1(5) PCI Design Handbook, 6th Ed.

Precast Solid Slabs 20 mm 20 mm Table 9.3.7.1(1) PCI Design Handbook, 6th Ed.

Pre-stressed Hollow Core Slabs 20 mm 20 mm Table 9.3.7.1(2) PCI Design Handbook, 6th Ed.

Precast Walls 25 mm 25 mm Table 4.6 BS 8110-2 : 1985

4.7 NOISE RESISTANCE

The following guidelines are in accordance to BS 8233.
Noise travels through a building mainly in 4 different ways.
1. Sound transmission directly though the material. The thicker and heavier the more noise resistance can be achieved.

2. Flanking transmission. Means, through joints between walls and floor to floor joints. Again the more mass the better.

3. Through floor voids, loft spaces, service ducts and similar paths. Good workmanship, air tightness and insulation are
required.

4. Impact sound refers to sources which produce sound by impulsive excitation of part of a building e.g. footsteps, electric
light switches and slamming doors. Sound impacts from footsteps can be reduced by introducing a soft flooring layer. The
proper assessment of the impact sound should be, done by the consultant as he designs the complete floor construction.

5. For computation of slab vibration limits, please refer to section 9.70 of PCI Design Handbook 6th Edition where detailed
illustrations and procedures is shown.

Noise Resistance Directly Through a Concrete Plate

The determination of the value of noise resistance of a single leaf monolithic building material plate can be approximated
according to the “Mass Law”, which says that there is a relation between the mass per Square meter (kg/m 2) and the achievable
noise resistance.

The noise resistance is given as R‟w (dB). Precast concrete single leaf walls with a density of min. 2400 kg/m3 will have the
following noise resistance values. For light weight concrete walls or block walls the noise resistance values can easily be
calculated when knowing the density and thickness by comparing mass and R‟w.

MAIN WORKS

Normal single leaf concrete walls, density 2400 kg/m3

Wall 1 2 3 4 5 6 Units
60 90 120 150 180 250 mm
Mass 140 210 280 350 420 580 kg/m2
R'w 40 44 48 52 52 55 dB

Normal double leaf concrete walls, density 2400 kg/m3 (no continuing flanks allowed).
Wall 1+1 Units
100 Concrete + 50 gap +100 Concrete mm
Mass 460 kg/m2
R'w 60 dB

UPC Insulated Sandwich Panels Type I and Type II.
Wall Type I Type I Type I Type I Type II Type II Units
120-50-80 120-70-50 150-70-80 150-120-80 75-50-75 75-80-75
Thickness 250 270 300 350 200 230 mm
Mass 480 480 550 550 360 360 kg/m2
R'w 55 55 60 60 55 55 dB

Solid slabs.
Slab 120 mm 150 mm 185 mm 150mm + insulation + false ceiling Units
Mass 290 360 440 To propose to consultant kg/m2
R'w 51 53 55 60 dB

UPC HCS.
HCS HCS 150 HCS 200 HCS 265 HCS 320 HCS 400 HCS 500 Units
Mass 236 306 394 427 495 668 kg/m2
R'w 44 51 53 53 55 55 dB

UPC HCS with 60 mm leveling mortar, density 1800 kg/m3
HCS HCS 150 HCS 200 HCS 265 HCS 320 HCS 400 HCS 500 Units
Mass 344 414 502 535 603 776 kg/m2
R'w 53 53 55 55 55 55 dB

Higher values can be achieved when adding insulation and false ceilings or by building the floor construction in accordance
with BS8233 table E.3

Note:

Shop Drawings : Consist of precast general arrangement drawings, elevations, sections, connection details & typical
steel reinforcement.

Fabrication Drawings : Individual mould & detailed drawings that are issued to production.

MAIN WORKS

5. MATERIALS


5.1.1 Cement

UPC uses the following cement as required

5.1.1.1 Ordinary Portland cement (OPC)–Comply with BS EN 197: 2000 CEM I (Class 42.5N) or ASTM C-150,
Type-1
Unless otherwise specified, OPC will be used for all the pre-stressed and precast elements except precast
footings and other sub-surface elements.

5.1.1.2 Moderate Sulphate Resisting Portland cement - comply with ASTM C-150, Type II
Used for footings and other subsurface elements unless otherwise specified.

5.1.1.3 Sulphate Resisting Portland cement – comply with BS 4027-1996
Will be used only if specially requested or mentioned in the project specification.

5.1.1.4 White Portland cement – BS EN 197 CEM 1, 52.5N
Used for white / coloured concrete.

5.1.1.5 Ground Granulated Blast furnace Slag (GGBS) – BS 6699:1992
GGBS will be used only if specially requested or mentioned in the project specification. This will be used
in combination with OPC. The percentage of GGBS in the total cement content shall be maximum
55% and the grade of concrete shall be maximum 50N/mm 2.

GGBS will not be used for pre-stressed elements including hollow core slabs.

Projects with GGBS, the full specifications must be provided to UPC sales Department at the time of
tendering.

5.1.1.6 Cement will be received in bulk tankers and stored in covered silos. Each delivery will be
accompanied with mill certificates. The mill certificates will be verified by the QC Engineer to the
respective standards.

Once in six months, the cement will be tested in an independent laboratory to verify its compliance
with respective standards. Certificates will be available with UPC Quality Department.

Any additional tests required shall be arranged at the main-contractor‟s expense.

5.1.2 Aggregates

5.1.2.1 Coarse Aggregates

Ras Al Khaimah limestone aggregates are generally used in all the grey concrete elements.
Depending on the type of element and application, the sizes of aggregates may vary. The normal
sizes are 20-10mm, 10-15mm, 5-10mm crushed aggregates and 0-5mm crushed sand.

10-15mm crushed aggregate is using mainly for Hollow core slab with thickness 150mm and 200mm

MAIN WORKS

5.1.2.2 Crushed Washed Sand

In some of the concrete mixes, certain percentage of crushed washed sand may be used. The
sources are mainly from Siji,(Fujairah) and Sedra (Al Ain).

5.1.2.3 Dune Sand

Twenty to thirty percentage of dune sand is added to almost all grey concrete mixes. The sources are
from Sharjah and Al Ain. The grading size is 425- 150microns.

5.1.2.4 White or colored aggregates

White or colored aggregates are generally used for architectural concrete.

As the price of these materials vary a lot with respect to the type & source of aggregates, color of
aggregate, aggregate size, texture etc., Client/ contractor has to convey all the necessary
requirements to UPC sales department during the tendering stage. The final price will be decided only
after the “Tile Sample” is approved.

5.1.2.5 Washed beach sand

Washed beach sand is used for architectural white/colored concrete.

5.1.2.6 Upon receiving each load of aggregate; the following visual checks will be carried out.

- the particle shape as being rounded irregular, flaky or elongated
- surface texture (for white and coloured aggregates)
- fine powder or dusty material quantity in the aggregates
- Presence of clay, lumps and other friable particles
- color not varying much from the previous deliveries

5.1.2.7 Physical and chemical properties of these aggregates and the acceptance criteria are given in
“Appendix A1”.

These limits are not applicable for white and other colored aggregates using in architectural concrete.

5.1.3 Micro Silica (Silica Fume)

UPC uses micro-silica only for high grade concrete to achieve the durability results as stated in
“Appendix A2”.
Silica fume is conforming to ASTM C1240 with a minimum silica content of 85%. Silica fume is used as
additive in the concrete and the dosage may vary from 3 to 5% by weight of cement”.

Third party laboratory testing will be conducted once a year.

5.1.4 Admixture

UPC uses super plasticizing admixture complying to ASTM C494 and BS 5075 for almost all concrete mixes.
The permissible limit of dosage is shown in respective mix designs. The dosage varies with type of elements,
nature of casting, atmospheric conditions etc. However the dosage remains within the limits of manufacturers
recommendations.

Other admixtures like “air entraining admixtures, self-compacting admixtures, corrosion inhibitors etc. shall be
used only if mentioned in the specification and also agreed with UPC Sales department at the time of
tendering. Manufacturers certificates are accompanied with each delivery and, the Q.C Engineer verifies them
upon receiving it in UPC.

MAIN WORKS

5.1.5 Water

Both UPC Dubai and Abu Dhabi factories use potable water from DEWA/ADWEA sources respectively for the
mixing of concrete and shall comply with the requirements of BS 3148.

Once in six months the water will be tested in an independent laboratory to verify its compliances.

5.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

5.2.1 High Yield Reinforcement

High yield reinforcement using in the precast element complies to BS 4449 Grade 460 B, with a minimum
characteristic strength of 460N/mm2.

UPC generally does not use welded steel fabric (mesh), however for internal non-load bearing panels with
thickness less than (<100mm), steel mesh complying with BS 4483 may be used.

All the reinforcements are delivered with mill certificates and UPC does not conduct any third party testing
unless otherwise contractually agreed for a specific project.

Sources of the steel are generally from Turkey and Emirates steel, UAE.

Reinforcement will be stored in covered places in the factory and will be properly identified.

Epoxy coated, galvanized, stainless steel etc. can be used at additional cost or as contractually agreed.

5.2.2 Steel Strands

UPC uses steel strands complying to both “BS 5896 and ASTM A 416. If there is no specific requirement
from the client, ASTM strands will be used.

All the strands are receiving with mill certificates and are verified by the structural engineer for the various
parameters like breaking load, elongation, modulus of elasticity, cross-sectional area, mass per meter, chemical
analysis etc. .

Physical check will be conducted for the packing, damages, rusting, contamination with dust and oil etc.

Before introducing any new source in to production, strand samples will be tested in Independent Laboratory
to ensure its compliance.

Any further sampling and testing required during production shall be arranged by the main- contractor.

5.2.3 Tying wire

Tying wire used to prepare the cage is of minimum 1 mm thick galvanized steel wire.

5.2.4 Wire ropes (shear connection loops between panels)

6 mm diameter galvanized steel wire ropes is using for the shear connections used between the precast
panels.

5.3 REPAIR MATERIAL

The standard repair materials used in the factory and at site are as follows.

5.3.1 Repair mortar shall be “Rendroc TG” from Al Gurg Fosroc or equivalent.

5.3.2 Cementitious filler (surface finishing component) shall be “Rendroc FC” from Al Gurg Fosroc or equivalent.
MAIN WORKS

5.3.3 Bonding agent – “T-Bond PVA” from T-Con chemicals or equivalent.

5.3.4 For major structural repairs, the same approved mix for the respective precast element shall be used.

5.3.5 For white/coloured concrete, the materials and the repair procedures are different which will be separately
submitted to client upon request.

5.4 MOULD RELEASE AGENTS

UPC uses water based or oil based mould release agents or a combination of both in order to obtain the best
possible surface finish. “Darakote MRA3” from Emirates chemicals and “Reform-T” from Conmix or any
equivalent mould release agent will be used.

5.5 COLORS (PIGMENTS) IN CONCRETE

Pigments are using only for the architectural concrete as required. The dosage may vary as per the requirements
of the approved mix (sample) by the consultant / client.

The final mix price may vary depends on the dosage of the pigments.

“Bayrex” pigment from Germany or equivalent will be used

5.6 RETARDERS FOR EXPOSED SURFACE

Surface Retarders are used to make exposed aggregate surface finish and the suppliers are Emirates chemicals
or equivalent. Three different types of retarders are used to get different surface exposures namely“ light,
medium and deep ”.

Retarders are applied in two coats generally

5.7 ANTI-CORROSION PROTECTIVE PAINTS – (for the cut ends of strands)

“Hempatex Hi build 46410” from Hempal paints or equivalent paints will be used on the cut ends of strands in
Hollow core slabs and pre-stressed elements.

5.8. EMBEDDED ITEMS

5.8.1. Lifting anchor

Two hole lifting anchors from “Mago” (Germany) or equivalent are using for the lifting of the precast
elements. Capacities vary from 2.5 tones to 26 tones. Alternatively pre-stressing strands also will be used for
the lifting purpose. Number of strands in each lifting points are as per the shop drawing.

For cladding panels, stainless steel hanging fixing may be used if contractually agreed. In that case,
“FIXINOX” from Belgium or equivalent will be used.

5.8.2. Temporary fixings and bracing sockets

Sockets from “MAGO” Germany or equivalent are used.

5.8.3. Electric conduits, boxes

These items are generally supplied by the Main contractor. On the other hand, if it is under UPC scope, then,
“Deco duct brand” or equivalent will be used.

5.8.4. Couplers

Use of couplers if there is a requirement and the brand to be discussed with UPC sales during tendering
stage or before finalizing the contract.

MAIN WORKS

5.8.5. Embedded plates, angles

Unless otherwise instructed, mild steel plates & angles will be used in the precast elements as per the drawing.

5.8.6. Galvanized or stainless steel items

Galvanized or stainless steel items will be used in the precast element only if it is agreed in the contract.

5.8.7. Spacers

Both plastic and concrete spacers are using to get the required cover. Concrete spacers will be prepared in
UPC factory with the same concrete used for the element. Alternatively, locally manufactured plastic spacers
are also using.

5.9. BITUMEN PAINT FOR FOOTINGS & OTHER SUB-SURFACE ELEMENTS

Bitumen paint shall be applied on the footings and sub-surface elements if agreed in the contract. “Master Seal
420HB” from BASF, “Bituseal-X” from TECON or equivalent will be used. Application will be as per
manufactures recommendations.

5.10. MOULD MATERIALS.

Precast elements are cast in steel & timber moulds. In some special cases, GRP or rubber moulds may be used
to make some special surface features and shapes.

Hollow core slab is casting on a long steel casting beds.

5.11. INSULATION MATERIALS

Extruded polystyrene with density 32 to 35 kg/m3 will be used for insulation purpose.

6. CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS

Fresh concrete for the precast elements will be supplied by UPC‟s own batching plants situated in the factory. All the
batching plants are semi to fully computerized and calibrated every year by third party.

6.1 Mix Designs– UPC standard mixes, it‟s basic properties (ie W/C ratio, minimum cement content, maximum
aggregate size, strength, durability etc.) are given on the Appendix-A2.

UPC uses different type of mixes for various purposes to meet specific project requirements.

6.1.1 For Hollow core slabs - 60N/mm2 (OPC) semi-dry concrete mix with zero slump will be used. Hollow
core slab is a machine made product and mixes have been developed after a series of trials in order to
suit the proper functioning of the extruder machine as well as to attain a proper shape to the slabs. Hence
any requests for changes to the standard hollow core mixes are not acceptable.

For 150 and 200mm thick slabs, the maximum aggregate size shall be 15mm, whereas for
265mm,320mm,400mm & 500mm thick slabs, the maximum aggregate size shall be 20mm. De-stressing
strength shall be minimum 40N/mm2.

6.1.2 Pre-stressed elements other than Hollow core slab – All the pre-stressed elements will be cast
with 60N/mm2. Maximum aggregate size in the concrete shall be 20mm and the slump may vary from 100
– 200mm depends on the type of element, The de-stressing strength shall be 45N/mm2.

MAIN WORKS

6.1.3 For all the other elements, like column, precast beams, panels, stairs etc., 40 N/mm2 mix with OPC
will be used. The slump shall be 85 + 25mm and the maximum aggregate size shall be 20mm.

6.1.4 For boundary wall footings, 40 N/mm2 mix with MSRC will be used unless otherwise instructed. The
slump shall be 85 + 25mm and the maximum aggregate size shall be 20mm.

6.1.5 Architectural concrete – There is no standard mixes for white/ colored architectural concrete. Design
mixes will be prepared only after the approval of the surface finish, type & size of the aggregates, colour
of the concrete etc.

The concrete strength shall be 40N/mm2 @ 28 days. For exposed aggregate finish, the water cement ratio
will be 0.5 in order to get a better & uniform aggregate distribution. For sand blast finish, the W/C shall be
between 0.45 and 0.5.

The slump will vary from 70mm to 200mm depending on the type of elements and casting procedure.
(Elements having returns up to 300mm will be cast as one unit)

6.1.6. Grout mixes – Grout mixes are of 40N/mm2 strength non-shrink, having a flow between 400-800mm
(depends on the application). It is sand- cement mortar and the maximum particle size will be 5mm. This
can be used for the panel joint grouting and dowel grouting.

6.1.7 Tamping mixes – Tamping mixes are 40N/mm2 having zero slump. It is a sand- cement mortar and the
maximum particle size will be 5mm.

The grout mixes and Tamping mixes are taken to site in dry condition. Water and admixture are added at
site as per proportions given in mix designs.

6.2 Temperature control – As a standard practice, UPC doesn‟t use any concrete temperature control
measures unless, otherwise instructed. Any temperature control requirements shall be informed to UPC
Sales department at the time of enquiry or before placing the order.

7. TESTING, FREQUENCY, ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA.

7.1 Concrete sampling & testing (fresh concrete)

Basic fresh concrete tests are carrying out in UPC own laboratory. Slump and density tests for all mixes will
be taken during production on a daily basis. No fresh concrete tests will be conducted on hollow core slab
mix as the mix is semi dry in nature. As a minimum, one set of cubes (3 Nos.) will be taken from each
mix for every 50m3 / daily for compressive strength at 7 and 28 days.

For hollow core slabs and other pre-stressing elements, two additional cubes will be taken for each
casting bed to ensure the de-stressing strength.

In addition to the above, if any further tests are required, main contractor to arrange the third party
laboratories and UPC will provide the necessary assistance for sampling. On the other hand, if contractually
agreed, UPC will arrange the third party laboratory and perform the sampling and testing as per the project
specification or as agreed.

7.2 Hardened concrete tests

Compressive strength tests and density checks are carried out in UPC own laboratory for all the mixes. Out
of one set (3 Nos.) of cubes from each mix, one will be tested at 7 days and the other 2 will be tested for 28
days compressive strength.

MAIN WORKS

7.3 Cement tests

Once in six months, all the different type of cements from all sources are tested at an independent laboratory
for physical and chemical parameters according to respective standards.

7.4 Micro silica tests

Once a year, micro silica will be tested at an independent laboratory for physical and chemical
parameters to ASTM C 1240-05.

7.5 Water tests

Once in six months, the water used for concreting purpose will be tested at an independent laboratory to
verify its compliance to BS 3148.

7.6 Aggregate tests

Sieve analysis for all aggregates will be carried out in-house every two weeks. Once in four months all
the aggregates will be tested at an independent laboratory for full range of tests. The types of tests,
testing frequency etc. are referred in Appendix A3.

7.7 Strand Testing
UPC relies on the mill certificates from the manufacturers. Each delivery will be accompanied with a mill
certificate. However third party tests will be conducted for the new sources before UPC start using them
in production. Diameter, cross-sectional area, mass per meter, breaking load, elongation etc will be
tested.

7.8 Reinforcement testing

Mill certificates from manufacturers will be received with each delivery. No third party testing will be
conducted by UPC unless, otherwise contractually agreed.

7.9 UPC standard test schedule is attached in Appendix A3. Any further tests required shall be arranged by
the main contractor.

8. DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES FOR PRECAST ELEMENTS

UPC follows the production and installation tolerance as per PCI MNL – 135.

9. CURING

All the elements are covered with polythene sheet after casting. After de-moulding or de-stressing, the elements will
be taken to the stockyard; arranged in stacks and covered with polythene sheet. The element will be water cured for 5
days including the day of casting and delivery.

10. SURFACE FINISH

10.1 Hollow core slabs

Bottom surface is mould finish and top surface is broom finish.

10.2 Panels and other elements have mainly 3 types of surface finishes as follows.

Trowel finish / Mould finish (only for grey concrete)
Exposed aggregate
Sand blast finish
MAIN WORKS

Exposed aggregate and sand blast finishes are generally for architectural concrete. For structural concrete
one side will be mould finish and other side will be trowel finished. Troweled finish or mould finish are not
applicable for white/coloured concrete.

As the aggregates are natural materials, the color and texture may often vary with different loads
(deliveries). These changes in aggregate colour may result in the appearance of precast elements from the
original approved sample.

UPC follows the color variation and surface finish as per “Australian Standard AS 3610, Appendix B”

11. RECORDS

All the inspection records for production and installation will be available with UPC Quality Department and shall be
submitted upon request.

12. APPENDIX

A1. Physical and chemical properties of aggregates and the acceptance criteria.
A2. List of UPC standard mixes and its basic properties.
A3. Material testing schedule.

MAIN WORKS

Appendix A1. Physical & chemical properties of aggregates and the acceptance criteria.

FREQUENCY OF
ACCEPTANCE LIMITS

S/NO.
TEST
TEST DESCRIPTION STANDARD
FINE AGGREGATE
COARSE
AGGREGATE 5mm Crushed 5mm Crushed
Dune sand
sand wash sand

BS882:1992 BS882:1992
Once in 4 BS882:1992
1 Sieve analysis BS 812: Sec.103.1:1985 (Amd 89) Table-3
Table-4 Overall Table-4 Overall N/A
months limits limits

2 Clay lumps & friable particles (Maximum %) ASTM C142-97 “ 1 1 1 N/A

3 Material finer than 75 micron (Maximum %) BS 812: Part 103.1 Cl 7,2 “ 1.5 7-9 5 3

4 Acid soluble chloride content (Maximum %) BS 812: Part 117:1988 “ 0.03 0.06 0.06 0.06

5 Acid soluble sulphate content (Maximum %) BS 812: Part 118:1988 “ 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4

6 Bulk specific gravity (SSD) BS 812 Part 2:1995 “ ≥ 2.6 ≥ 2.5 ≥ 2.5 ≥ 2.5

7 Water absorption (Maximum %) BS 812 Part 2:1995 “ 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.5

8 Flakiness index (Maximum %) BS 812:Section 105.1:1989 “ 35 - - -

9 Elongation index (Maximum %) BS 812:Section 105.2:1990 “ 35 - - -

10 Aggregate crushing value (Maximum %) BS 812: Part 110:1990 “ 30 - - -

11 MgSO4 Soundness (Maximum %) ASTM C88-05 “ 12 12 12 -

12 Potential reactivity of aggregate ASTM C289-03 “ Innocuous Innocuous Innocuous Innocuous

April 2018 - R0

Volume 2 - Part B
MAIN WORKS

Appendix A2. List of UPC standard mixes and its basic properties.

STANDARD MIXES FOR STANDARD MIXES FOR STANDARD MIXES FOR WHITE/COLURED GROUT TAMPING
TYPE OF CONCRETE
PRECAST ELEMENTS PRE STRESSED BEAMS HOLLOW CORE SLABS MIXES MIX MIX
(60N SEMI DRY) (non shrink) (non shrink)

40/20 45/20 50/20 60/20 60/10 60/15 60/20 40N 40/5 40/5

GRADE OF CONCRETE (265, 320,
(150mm, 400 &
200mm 500mm thick
thick slab) slab)
S/N PROPERTIES

Compressive strength @ 28 days (Cube)
1 40 45 50 60 60 60 60 40 40 40
N/mm2
2 Maximum W/C ratio 0.45 0.40 0.38 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.5 0.35 0.40

OPC/MSRC OPC/MSRC OPC/MSRC OPC/MSRC OPC/MSRC
3 Cement type OPC OPC OPC WHITE OPC OPC
/SRC /SRC /SRC /SRC /SRC

4 Minimum cement content (kg/m3) 360 400 420 420 420 390 390 360 360 500 500

5 Micro silica (%) NIL NIL NIL 5 5 3 to 5 3 to 5 - - 4 NIL
6 Maximum aggregate size (mm) 20 20 20 20 10 15 20 20 20 5 5

7 Slump/flow (mm) 85 ± 25 85 ± 25 85 ± 25 125 ± 50 150 ± 50 N/A N/A 70 - 200 70 - 200 400 – 800 N/A
8 Density (kg/m3) 2425-2500 2425-2500 2425-2500 2450-2525 2450-2525 2500-2575 2500-2575 2375-2475 2375-2475 2350-2450 2300-2400

9 Air content. Maximum (%) 2 2 2 2 2 N/A N/A 2.5 2.5 N/A N/A

Rapid chloride permeability (RCP). High Moderate Low Low Low Low
10 High N/A N/A N/A N/A
Maximum (Col) (>4000) (>4000) (2000-4000) (1000-2000) (1000-2000) (1000-2000) (1000-2000)

Water penetration (DIN)
11 30 20 20 15 15 15 15 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Maximum ( mm)

Water absorption
12 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 N/A N/A 3.0 N/A
Maximum (%)

Initial surface absorption test (I.S.A.T)
0-.03 to 0-.03 to 0-.03 to 0-.03 to
13 0.04 0.04 0.04 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Maximum. [ml/(m2sec.)] 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04

Sulphate (by weight of cement)
14 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
Maximum.%

Chloride (by weight of cement
15 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Maximum %

April 2018 - R0

Volume 2 - Part B
MAIN WORKS

Appendix A3. Material testing schedule

TESTING AT
FREQUENCY
S/NO.
MATERIAL TEST
OF TESTING
United Precast Concrete Dubai Municipality
laboratory approved independent laboratory

1 Set (3 cubes) every day for
1 Concrete Compressive strength of concrete cubes each 50m3 concrete  -
-

2 Cement Full physical and chemical analysis Once in 6 months 
-

3 Micro silica Physical & chemical analysis Once in 12 months 
-

4 Water Chemical analysis Once in 6 months 
-

5 Aggregates Sieve analysis Once in a week 

a) Sieve analysis

b) Silt content
PHYSICAL

c) Clay lumps & friable particles

e)
f)
Specific gravity & water absorption
Flakiness index
Once in 4 months
- 
g) Elongation index
h) Aggregate crushing value
i) MgSO4 Soundness

CHEMICAL
j) Acid soluble chloride

j) Acid soluble sulphate
k) Potential alkali reactivity
Once in 4 months
- 

END OF SECTION

April 2018 - R0

Volume 2 - Part B
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 03520
LIGHTWEIGHT SCREED
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes lightweight concrete or low density concrete at the following
places.
1. At places as shown on drawings,
B. Related Work:
1. Section 03650 - Sand Cement Screed
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Low density screeds or lightweight screed is formed by entrapping air into a

prepared cement, sand aggregate (if required) slurry in the shape of discontinued
air bubbles to form a cellular structure throughout the mass. The cellular
structure significantly reduces the thermal conductivity and density of concrete
resulting in a lower dead load imposed on the structure.
1.03 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. The minimum low density screeds compressive strength to be 10 N/mm2.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include mixing and application
instructions for each type of lightweight concrete roof insulation.
B. Design Mixes: For each lightweight concrete mix.
C. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the

following materials complies with requirements:
Cement.
Aggregates.
Foaming agents.
Admixtures.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original undamaged packages or acceptable

bulk containers.
B. Store packaged materials to protect them from elements or physical damage.
C. Do not use cement that shows indications of moisture damage, caking, or other
deterioration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
B. Air Entraining Agent: ASTM C 869.
C. Water: Clean, potable.
2.02 DESIGN MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of lightweight concrete by either
laboratory trial batch or field-test data methods. For trial batch method, use a
qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix
designs.
B. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement

or cementitious material permitted by ACI 301.
2.03 LOW DENSITY SCREED
A. Mixing Screed: Insulating screed is mixed in the same equipment and by similar
methods as sand-cement screed, to assure correct screed properties and
adequate yield.
B. Transit Mixing: When transit mixing, follow manufacturer’s instruction.
C. Wet Density: The wet density shall be tested at continuous intervals to the
manufacturer’s recommendations and filed tests for wet density shall be within
the specified range.
D. Air Entraining Agent: The use of the correct amount of air entraining agent and
the proper concentration will be as per manufacturer’s instruction. The air
entraining agent produces countless tiny air bubbles in the screed which reduces
the density, increases the yield and contributes to the insulation factor of the dry
screed. Air entrained screed is also more resistant to water absorption.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. All concrete surfaces must be free from dust, loose concrete particles, etc. prior
to the pouring of the lightweight concrete to form the required slopes.
B. All intrusions, penetrations, mechanical and electrical pipings through the

concrete roof slab have to be fixed, installed by relevant contractors prior to the
C. All concrete/block upstands at all around roof openings if any have to be

completed as well.
D. Roof drains to be fixed in place to levels indicated on drawings. The drain

structure has to be strongly secured in position prior to the placing of lightweight
concrete.
E. Using leveling machine with the help of cement mortar spacers and aluminum
strips, assign the final level of the sloping light weight concrete to match the
levels indicated on drawings. The slopes shall be 0.75% to 1% towards the roof
drain.
F. Control Joints: Install control joints at perimeter of roof deck and at junctures with
vertical surfaces, including curbs, walls, and vents, for full depth of lightweight
concrete. Fill control joints with joint filler.
Provide 25 mm wide control joints for roof dimensions up to 30 mm in length, 38
mm wide control joints for roof dimensions exceeding 30 m.
3.02 MIXING AND PLACING
A. Mix and place lightweight concrete according to manufacturer’s written

instructions, using equipment and procedures to avoid segregation of mix and
loss of air content.
B. Deposit and screed lightweight concrete in a continuous operation until an entire

panel or section of roof area is completed. Do not vibrate or work mix except for
screeding or floating. Place to depths and slopes indicated.
C. Finish top surface smooth, free of ridges and depressions, and maintain surface
in condition to receive subsequent roofing system.
D. Begin curing operations immediately after placement, and air cure for not less
than three days according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
E. Maintain temperature recommended by manufacturer for 72 hours after

placement.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
materials, perform tests, and submit test reports evaluating lightweight concrete.
B. Determine compressive strength and oven-dry unit weight according to ASTM C

495. Make a set of at least 6 molds for each day’s placement, but not less than 1
set of molds for each 465 sq.m of roof area.
3.04 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Refinish, or remove and replace, lightweight concrete if surface are excessively

scaled or too rough to receive roofing, according to roofing membrane
manufacture’s written requirements.
B. Remove and replace lightweight concrete that fails to comply with compressive
strength and oven dry unit weight requirements.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 03530
CONCRETE SCREED/TOPPINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes concrete screeds or concrete topping with positive slope as
required as shown on drawings, particularly at driveways, walkways, insteps,
landing, kitchen and coolers areas.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit laying recommendations and procedures.
B. Provide a sample of concrete screed, for every type to be used.
A. Concrete screed, shall be laid to thickness as shown on drawing or as implied by

the situation.
B. The minimum cube strength of concrete must be 32/40 Mpa.
C. Concrete screed will act as a base to receive, any floor finishes such as, epoxy
material, self leveling screed, or similar finishes items.
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with
other components, and application.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects.
1.05 MOCK-UP
A. Lay sand cement screed for an area of 2 square metres, along with control joints at
places as directed by Engineer. Co-ordinate work along with other disciplines, to
have a final finish. Approved mock-up can remain as part of final work.
NEB-P-17-1747 1 of 5 Civil Specs./Sec. 03530

MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I and Type II
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates

from a single source for exposed concrete.
1 For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain
substances that cause spalling.
2 Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce
concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may
be used when acceptable to Engineer.
3 Aggregates shall be hard, durable and free of material that reacts with cement or
causes staining.
C. Water: Portable water as per ASTM Standards.
D. Ready mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94.
E. Mesh reinforcement: shall confirm to ASTM A 185
A. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin
with share ‘A’ hardness of 80 as per ASTM 22AO.
B. Epoxy Adhesive: As per ASTM C 881.
2.03 CONCRETE SCREED MIXES

A. Comply with ACI standard 211.1 or BS 8110-85. Assume responsibility for
strength, consistency, water/cement ratio, and handling of concrete cement fine
aggregate and various sizes of coarse aggregate shall be measured by weight.
2.04 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for
application to fresh concrete.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-

polyethylene sheet.
C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,

Class B, 25 percent solids content, minimum.

MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, for conditions affecting performance of screed. Proceed with
application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify that base slabs are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary
moisture by the plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and

unsound concrete. Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified
surface profile with an amplitude of 6 mm.
1 Prepare and clean existing base slabs. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base
slabs.
2 Mechanically remove contaminants from existing concrete that might impair bond
of screed.
3 Saw cut existing contraction and construction joints to a depth of 1/2-inch (13 mm)
and fill with epoxy joint filler.
B. Install joint-filler strips where screed abuts vertical surfaces, such as column
pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1 Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with screed
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2 Terminate full-width joint-filler strips 1/2 inch (13 mm) below screed surface where
joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3 Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one
length is required, lace or clip sections together.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Existing Concrete: Apply bonding agent, mixed according to manufacturer's written

instructions, and scrub into dry base slabs to a thickness of (1.5 to 3 mm), without
B. Completely cover the wet substrate surfaces with grout, applied with force and
brushed in to assure full coverage.
C. Apply bond coat not less than 16 mm thick immediately after application of grout
and bring to true lines, levels and profiles. Thoroughly compact and roughen the
bond coat to form a key for the topcoat.
D. Before the bond coat has set, apply the topcoat to such thickness that the total of
the work measured from substrate to finished surface will be shown less only
thickness of finish covering.

MAIN WORKS
E. Place screed continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to achieve

tight contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop
within pour strip.
1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated.
3 Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured surface
plane free of humps or hollows.
F. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as soon as screed can

support equipment and operator. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low
spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform,
smooth, granular texture.
1 Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and consolidate
screed by power-driven trowel so no blisters develop. Continue troweling passes
and restraighten until surface is smooth and uniform in texture.
2 Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between screed surface and an
unleveled freestanding 3-m- long straightedge, resting on two high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 6.4 mm.
3 Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to driveways and ramp immediately after float
finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom
perpendicular to main traffic route. Co-ordinate required final finish with Engineer
before application.
G. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface
plane of screed, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1 Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where screed is
placed against hardened or partially hardened screed.
H. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws

equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades.
1. Cut (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or
otherwise damage surface and before screed develops random contraction cracks.
2. Form joints in screed over contraction joints in base slabs, unless otherwise
indicated.
3 Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of screed thickness, but
not less than 13 mm deep.

MAIN WORKS
3.04 PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed screed from premature drying and excessive cold
or hot temperatures.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to screed surfaces in hot, dry, or
windy conditions before and during finishing operations. Apply according to
manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or
darbying screed, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing immediately after finishing screed. Cure by one or a combination of
the following methods, according to screed manufacturer's written instructions:

1 Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days
with water or absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover
screed surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive
covers.
2 Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends
lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during
curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3 Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2 years.
3.05 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install epoxy joint filler, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, once screed has fully cured.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints;
leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install epoxy joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim joint
filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.06 REPAIRS
A. Repair and patch defective screed areas, including areas that have not bonded to
concrete substrate.
END OF SECTION

MAIN WORKS
SECTION 03535
SAND CEMENT SCREED
PAR GENERAL
1.01 WORKS INCLUDED
A. Sand cement screed .
A. Control Sample
Complete a sample of the work in an approved location and obtain Engineer's
1 approval before proceeding.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit laying recommendation.
B. Allow 14 days for Engineer's approval.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements
Provide facilities for reducing excessive temperature and humidity which may
1 prevent proper drying of screed.
Maintain continuous adequate ventilation commencing one week prior to laying
2 operations and continue throughout the laying period.
1.05 PRODUCT STORAGE
A. Storage
Cement and sand shall be stored separately off the ground in a dry, well
1 ventilated space.
2 Use cement in rotation within three months of delivery.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01 GENERALLY

A. Sulphur Resistant Cement.
1 As per section 03001.
B. Sand
1 Washed dry sand, ASTM C 144.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Water
1 Clean, potable and not detrimental to screed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Generally:
1 Thoroughly clean and ensure that surfaces is dry and structurally sound.
2 Mechanically hack surface to create bond if necessary.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Screed
1 Mix in the ratio of 1:4 (Cement : Sand)
To be laid in bays to thickness as shown on the drawings in one layer and shall
2 be trowelled twice with a steel trowel to produce a smooth and level surface.
Apply to thickness as shown on the drawings in one layer, trowelling smooth top
3 surface.
B. Joints
Joints in structural sub-floor should be continued through full depth of screeds at
1 same centers.
C. Remixing
No mix shall be reconstituted after completion of laying and then only light traffic
1 for a further 10 days.
D. Protection
Allow no traffic on screed until 4 days after completion of laying and then only
1 light traffic for a further 10 days.
2 Lay suitable protection in areas where other trades are working.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 03600
GROUT
PART 1- GENERAL
A. This section specifies requirements for grouts and includes, but is not limited to,
the following.
1 Cementitious Grouts.
2 Chemical Grouts
3 Anchoring Grouts
4 Bedding Mortars
A. CONTROL SAMPLE:
1 Complete a sample of the premixed and site mixed work in an approved location
and obtain Engineer or Engineer's Representative's approval before proceeding.
Additive Manufacturer's representative to be present to supervise control sample.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall pertain to works or phrases as utilised in this

Section.
1 “Cementitious Grout” is a mixture of cementitious materials and water,
proportioned to produce a pourable (fluid) consistency without segregation of the
constituents.
2 “Chemical Grouts” are two or more chemical components which when mixed
together producers a fluid consistency which later hardens into a solid or semi-
solid material.
3 “Anchoring Grouts” are grouts specifically materials designed for anchoring
purposes.
4 “Mortars” are cementitious or chemical materials proportioned to produce a
trowelable consistence for vertical and overhead repairs or bedding purposes.
1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Product manufacturer, testing and installation shall comply with the following
requirements, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer:
1 Cementitious grout shall typically be used where it is necessary to eliminate
shrinkage when filling the void between a base plate and a substrate such as the
grouting of stanchion bases.
2 Chemical grouts shall generally be used to support rotating machinery or other
equipment subject to dynamic loadings.
3 Anchoring grouts shall be used to secure anchor bolts, rebar, or fill in tie rod
holes.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
4 Grout manufacturer shall operate under a certified ISO 9000 Quality System.
1.05 SUBMISSIONS:

A. SAMPLES:
1 Submit sample of any proposed additives before delivery of material generally.
2 Submit sample of any proposed premixed grout before delivery of material

generally.
B. PRODUCT DATA:
1 Submit name of manufacturer of premixed grout and additives and specific brand
name.
2 Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical data.
3 Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended mixing and placing instructions.
C. METHODS:
1 Prior to commencing work submit details of methods and techniques proposed
for the design and execution of the work.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery:
1 Cement: Deliver in the original sealed and branded bags.
B. Storage:
1 Cement: Store off the ground.
2 Aggregates:
a. Store in suitable bins with a canopy cover, on a self-draining concrete base.
b. Segregate with suitable dividers.
3 Chemical Curing Compounds: Store in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
C. Handling:
1 Grout: Use grout within 30 minutes of mixing or in the time recommended by the
manufacturer of the additives.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CEMENTITIOUS GROUTS
A. Cementitious grout shall comply with the following requirements, unless

otherwise noted by the Engineer.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 Cementitious grout shall be supplied by a reputable company as a single pack

special purpose product which requires only the addition of water at site and shall
comply with the following:
Non-shrink
Non-metallic
Chloride free
Minimum Compressive Strength.
a. 60 N/mm2 at 28 days (fluid consistency)
b. 80 N/mm2 at 28 days (flowable consistency)
2 Cementitious grouts shall comply with the following Standards:

a. ASTM C230 for workability
b. ASTM C232 for bleed water
c. ASTM C878 for expansion
2.02 CHEMICAL GROUTS
A. Chemical grouts shall comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
1 Chemical grouts shall be supplied by a reputable company in pre-measured
components for easy site mixing and shall comply with the following:
Non-shrink
Resistant to repetitive dynamic loads
Pot life (approximately) : 40 min. at 400C
Min. Compressive Strength: 80 N/mm2 at 7 days (BS 6319)
Min. Flexural Strength: 25 N/mm2 at 7 days (BS 6319)
Min. Tensile Strength: 12 N/mm2 at 7 days (BS 6319)
2.03 ANCHORING GROUT
A. Grout for anchoring rebar, bolts or other anchors shall be a pre-measured two
pack polyester or epoxy resin specifically developed for anchoring purposes.
1 The resin must be non-expansive and tolerant to wet or damp surfaces.
2 Minimum compressive strength
3 Minimum flexural strength
4 Minimum tensile strength
2.04 BEDDING MORTARS

1 Bedding mortars for pre-cast elements shall be pre-bagged cementitious
products requiring only the addition of water at site.
2 Minimum compressive strength at 28 days: 40 N/mm².
3 Site mixed sand / cement mortars are not allowed.
2.05 CEMENT:
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. CEMENT GENERALLY:
1 Portland cement as specified in Section 03300 : Concrete
2.06 AGGREGATES:
A. GENERALLY:
1 To be as specified in Section 03300 : Concrete.

2 Selected to reduce bleeding to a minimum.
B. FINE AGGREGATE:
1 Washed dry sand.
C. COARSE AGGREGATE:
1 Rounded and evenly graded, 10mm nominal size except where pumping is
employed when 6mm nominal size to be used.
2 Percentage passing No.16 sieve not to exceed 5%.
D. ADDITIVES:
1 To the approval of the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.
E. WATER:
1 As specified in Section 03300 : Concrete.
2.07 MIXES:
A. Select the mix proportions and workability for each type of grout to produce the
required performance.
B. Grout for filling uncongested areas over 50mm wide:

1 Mix proportions - 1:1.25:1.75 (cement / fine aggregate/course aggregate) by
weight. or adjusted to meet B above
2 Workability - slump 100-200mm.
C. Grout for filling narrow areas less than 50mm wide:

1 Mix proportions - 1:2 (cement:fine aggregate) by weight.
2 Workability - slump to be kept to a minimum to allow placing.
D. Dry packing for area over 75mm wide:

1 Mix proportions - 1:1:2 (cement/fine aggregate/course aggregate 10mm nominal
size) by weight.
2 Workability - Slump not to exceed 5 mm.
E. Dry packing for areas less than 75mm wide:

1 Mix proportions - 1:2 (cement:fine aggregate) by weight.
2 Workability - slump not to exceed 5mm.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
F. Alternative mixes incorporating additives to be used with the Engineer's prior

approval.
G. Premixed grout to voids of small widths and apertures of limited accessibility.
2.08 FORMWORK:
A. As specified in Section 03300 : Concrete
B. For smaller areas to manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and conditions to which the work of this Section is to be

applied to ensure that they are adequate to provide a satisfactory application.
B. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Engineer or Engineer's

Representative.
3.02 PREPARATION:
A. Scabble concrete surfaces to provide key.
B. Ensure spaces to receive grout are clean and free from debris.
C. Thoroughly wet surfaces and allow free water to disperse prior to application of
grout.
3.03 FORMWORK:
A. Fix edge formwork where necessary.
B. Edge formwork to baseplates to be to the level of the plate. Clearance between

formwork and plate normally 75mm.
C. Strike formwork within 24 hours of filling.
3.04 APPLICATION - PREMIXED GROUT
A. Mix non shrink grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in

relationship to temperature and workability conditions.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Basically in all conditions, materials shall be applied in a plastic or trowelable

workable condition, firmly pressed, rodded into place or hand trowelled. Should
conditions be such that flowable condition be considered more practical, obtain
Engineer or Engineer's Representative's prior approval. Flowable application
must allow for high points to be adequately vented to allow entrapped air to
escape, and an approved method of containing grout until set.
C. Strike edges clean and compress to conditions as indicated on the drawings.
D. Materials shall be applied in position within one hour of mixing (unless

manufacturer's literature states otherwise). After half an hour discard any grout
mix that shows signs of stiffening.
E. As soon as grout sets, cure exposed surfaces with curing compound applied in
strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.05 APPLICATION - SITE MIXED GROUT

A. MIXING:
1 Mix grout by mechanical mixer (colloidal type) for large quantities or by hand for
small quantities (one quarter of cubic metre or less) on a clean, level banker
board.
2 Thoroughly mix grout so that all individual constituents are incorporated early.
3 Do not over mix.
4 Use grout as soon as possible after mixing, maximum period 1 hour.
5 Do not use grout after commencement of initial set.
6 Do not re-mix or re-temper grout after commencement of initial set.
B. GENERALLY:
1 Pour grout into recesses or formwork and work into position to completely fill the
void.
2 Ram dry packing to ensure optimum compaction.
3 Work from one side to avoid formation of air pockets or voids.
4 Preferably bolt pockets shall be filled at same time as packing to baseplates.
If separate operation, fill bolt pockets to within 50mm of the level of the
foundation before main filling.
5 Do not vibrate grout
6 Form neat chamfered edge to packing under plates.
7 Do not place grout when concrete temperature is less than 5 Deg. C. or more
than 35 Deg. C
8 Cure grout by covering with moist hessian for not less than 5 days.
3.06 CLEAN-UP
A. Promptly, as the Work proceeds and upon completion, scrape off and remove all
grout materials from adjacent surfaces. Clean up and remove any surplus
material and rubbish resulting from the work of this Section.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment, and perform all service and
operations necessary for the complete installation of the concrete unit masonry
system including all mortar, reinforcing, solid mortar infill, expansion joints,
anchors, accessories reinforced concrete column and tie beams and components
as indicated on the drawings, details and schedules.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers Literature: Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s printed literature

indicating product specification and installation instructions for each product
required by this Section.
B. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s certification that the

following comply with the requirements specified:
1 Portland Cement.
2 Hydrated Lime.
3 Mortar Aggregates
4 Concrete Masonry Units (all types specified).
5 Reinforcing Bars.
C. Samples: Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents, and following the submittal of manufacturer’s literature and
data, 3 samples of each unit masonry hereinafter listed. Samples will be
reviewed for colour and/or texture only. Compliance with all other requirements,
is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Samples to be submitted as
follows:
1 Hollow concrete blocks; one of each size.
2 Solid Concrete blocks; one of each size.
D. Shop Drawings:
1 Submit Shop Drawing indicated details of anchors, inserts, joints, connections to
adjoining work or materials. Also include elevations indicating setting out and
placement of all joints, openings, cut-outs.
2 In addition to above submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending and placement
of reinforcement bars for unit masonry work. Comply with ACI 315. “Manual of
Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures” unless more
stringent requirements are specified. Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent
bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as
required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Testing Agency Qualification: An independent testing agency, acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E548.
B. 3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform

quality, including colour for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each
cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills
with waterproof sheeting at end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed
masonry when construction is not in progress.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated
loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
1.05 MOCK-UP
A. Prior to the installation of unit masonry work, and preceding pre-installation

conference, provide a sample wall mock-up for all types of masonry units.
B. Provide each sample wall panel using materials, together with bond and joint
tooling, shown or specified for final work. Provide special features as directed for
caulking and contiguous works.
C. Build each sample wall panel mock-up at the site, as directed, of full thickness
and approximately 1 m high x 1.5 m long, unless otherwise shown, indicating the
proposed range of colour, texture and workmanship to be expected in the
completed work.
D. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of visual qualities of each sample panel before

proceeding with the final work.
E. Retain each sample panel mock-up during construction period as a standard for
judging completed masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until
work is completed.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes,
contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not install
until they are in an air-dried condition.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry

location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be

maintained and contaminated avoided.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and

accumulation of dirt and oil.
1.07 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be the existing
relevant standards including but not limited to the following:
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).

ASTM A 82 - Specification for Cold Drawn Steel wire for Concrete
Reinforcement.
ASTM A 116 - Specification for zinc coated (galvanized) steel woven
wire fence fabric.
ASTM A 615 - Specifications for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM C 31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
ASTM C 33 - Specification for Concrete aggregates.
ASTM C 39 - Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
ASTM C90 - Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
ASTM C114 - Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
ASTM C140 - Testing Masonry Units.
ASTM C145 - Specification for Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
ASTM C150 - Specification for Portland Cement.
ASTM C207 - Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
ASTM C270 - Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
ASTM C279 - Specification for Chemical Resistant Masonry Units.
ASTM C331 - Specification for lightweight aggregates for structural concrete.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Load Bearing Hollow Concrete Blocks: ASTM C 90, or BS 6073, Part 1 (loading-
bearing) using concrete aggregates complying with ASTM C 33 or BS 882, with
dry net concrete weight or not less than 2000 kg/cu. M (125 lb. per cu. ft.) Grade
N or the equivalent grade of BS 6073 Parts 1 and 2. The minimum compressive
strength 12.5N/mm2.
B. Non-Load Bearing Hollow Concrete Blocks: ASTM C 129, or BS 6073 Part I

using concrete aggregates complying with ASTM C 33 or BS 882, with dry net
concrete weight of not more than 2000 kg/cu.m (125 lb. per. cu. ft). Type 1 or the
equivalent grade or BS 6073 Parts 1 and 2. The minimum compressive strength
to be 7.5N/mm2.
2.02 DELETED
2.03 MATERIALS - MORTARS
A. Portland Cement for Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 150, Type I, or BS 12,
ordinary, non-staining, without air entrainment, natural colour or white as required
to produce the required colour of mortar or grout.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S or BS 890.
C. Aggregates: ASTM C 144 or BS 1200 except for joints less than 6mm use
aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve (1.18mm).
1 White aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
2 Coloured aggregates: Ground granite, marble or other stone as required to match
Engineer’s sample.
D. Water: Clear and free of deleterious materials salts, etc. which would impair the
work.
E. Water Retaining/Reducing Admixtures: BS 5075 Part I or ASTM C 499 Type B,

free from chlorides and compatible with cement. Do not use without prior
approval of Engineer.
F. Plasticisers: BS 4887, free from Chlorides and compatible with cement. Do no

use without prior approval of Engineer.
2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES, LOAD-BEARING MASONRY
A. Measurement: Use methods which will ensure that proportions are controlled and
accurately maintained. Measure aggregate materials in a damp, loose condition.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Motor: Comply with the proportion and physical requirements of ASTM C270 for
the following type:
1 Type S.
C. Grout: Comply with the proportion requirements of ASTM C 476 for the following
types, as applicable:
1 Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2
years.
2 Course Grout.
D. Do not use mortar or grout which has begun to set or if more than 1 ½ hours
have elapsed after initial mixing.
E. Do not add plasticisers or other admixtures to mortar or grout materials specified.
2.05 MORTAR MIXES, NON LOAD-BEARING MASONRY
A. Unit Masonry Mortar: ASTM C270, except limited to the mix materials herein
before specified and the following cement/time rations by volume; wherein sand
(in damp condition) equals 2 ¼ to 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and
lime.
1 Type M: Not more than ¼ part lime per part Portland Cement.
2 Type S: Not more than ½ part lime per part Portland Cement.
3 Type N: Not more than 1 part lime per part Portland Cement.
2.06 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (BLOCKS)
A. General: Provide blocks as shown, complying with type classifications, weights,

grades and curing requirements as hereinafter specified and the following
general requirements:
1 Do not use blocks which have chips, cracks, voids, streaks, iron spots or other
substances which might stain exposed finished surfaces.
2 Obtain blocks from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform
texture and colour, for each type required, for each continuous area and visually
related areas.
3 Face Dimensions: Manufacturer’s standard, nominal 400 mm long x 200 mm
high unless otherwise shown.
4 Provide special shapes wherever shown and wherever required to build corners,
lintels, jambs, control joints and expansion joints, and for other uses where
necessary to provide a complete installation in accordance with the highest
standard of workmanship.
B. Load Bearing Hollow Concrete Blocks: ASTM C 90, or BS 6073, Part 1 (load-
bearing) using concrete aggregates complying with ASTM C 33 or BS 882, with
dry net concrete weight of not less than 2000 kg/cu. M (125 lb. per cu. ft). Gr. N
or the equivalent grade of BS 6073 Parts 1 and 2.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Non-Load Bearing Hollow Concrete Blocks: AST C 129, or BS 6073 Part I using
concrete aggregates complying with ASTM C 33 or BS 882, with dry net concrete
weight of not more than 2000 kg/cu. m (125 lb. per. cu. ft). Type I or the
equivalent grade of BS 6073 Parts 1 and 2.
D. Moisture Controlled Curing:

1 Cure blocks by low pressure steam curing at a pressure of 0.7 kg/cm2. Raise the
curing temperature uniformly at not more than 0.56oC per minute from 30oC to
66oC and allow the masonry units to cure for approximately 3 ½ hours from initial
set period. Thereafter keep the units most for a period of 7 days by means of a
fine spray of water and then allow to air dry for 14 days. Allow an interval of not
less than 3 hours between the forming of the units and the curing process.
2 Cure blocks in a moisture-controlled atmosphere at normal temperature and

pressure, and limit moisture absorption to 35% of saturation at time of delivery
and until time of installation. Comply with ASTM Type I classification.
E. Finishes: Standard finish: Provide concrete block units with exposed faces of the
manufacturer’s standard colour and texture, unless otherwise shown or specified.
F. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent

materials.
2.07 METAL TIES, ANCHORS AND JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: Truss type welded wire units of 3 m (10 ft) lengths
with prefabricated corner and tee units. Fabricate from ASTM A 82 or BS 4482
cold drawn steel wire with deformed side rods and plain 9 gauge truss rods,
crimped if used in cavity wall construction. Provide width of between 37 and
50mm (1 1/2 “ and 2”) less than wall thickness.
1 Fabricate with 9 gauge (3.7mm) side rods, unless otherwise shown.
2 Provide units with a single pair of side rods, unless otherwise shown.
3 For use in interior partition walls fabricate from mill galvanised wire.
4 For use in exterior walls, hot dip galvanize after fabrication, with 458 g/sq.m. (1.5
0z.), zinc coating; ASTM A 153, Class B-2 or BS 729, Table 1.
B. Reinforcing Bars: Steel reinforcing bars for vertical reinforcement complying with
ASTM A 615, intermediate grade, size as shown or specified herein, free from
mill scale and excess or loose rust deposits. Provider two 12 mm diameter bars
in each block.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Concrete Inserts.
1 Unit Type: Furnish unit-type inserts of the type and size shown, of cast iron or
malleable iron, or fabricated from not less than 2.6mm (12 gauge) steel with 458
g/s.q.m hot-dip zinc coating after fabrication (ASTM A 153, Class B-2 or BS 729
Table 1).
2 Dovetail Strap Type: Furnish dovetail slots with 22mm wide flat bar anchors
formed from 1.5mm (16 gauge) galvanized steel, with 6 mm upturned end of 12
mm dia. Hole located within 12 mm of end. Anchor to extend to within 37 mm of
face of masonry units.
3 At Contractor’s option, 3.7 mm (No. 9 gauge) galvanized wire triangular tie-backs
with metal tabs for insertion into dovetail slots may be provided in lieu of flat bar
anchors.
D. Anchoring Devices: Provide bolts, straps, bars and rods of the type and size
shown, but fabricated from less than 1.5 mm (16 gauge) sheet metal or 9mm
diameter rod stock unless otherwise shown.
1 Fabricate devices from steel with mill galvanised or hot-dip zinc coating.
E. Lateral Support for Wall Heads: Provide continuous 50 x 50 x 3 mm thick metal

angle on both sides as wall head lateral support.
F. Vertical Restraints: Blockwork to be restrained at vertical abutments with

concrete with stainless steel wall starters with integral ties for building in.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS METERIALS
A. Wall Control Joint Filler: Provide compressible control joint filler of closed cell
PVC, either solid or tube type, of proper dimension to serve as back-up for joint
sealant at face of masonry, (Do not use control joint filler a building expansion
joints).
1 Provide solid rubber “key section” in control joint filler (60 to 80 Shore A
durometer hardness) designed to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall.
B. Wood Nailers: For wood nailers and similar items to be set into the masonry work
see other relevant sections of these specifications.
C. Reglets and Flashings: For masonry reglets and flashings see other relevant
sections of these specifications.
D. Joint Fillers: Use approved material to meet the required fire rating and as
specified in Section Joint Fillers and Gaskets.
E. Sealants: Use approved sealant to meet the required fire rating (if any) and as
specified in Section 07920 SEALANTS.
F. Fire Stopping: Install fire stopping materials to control Joints and edge condition
sand separations in masonry work as required by the local Fire Brigade. Fire
stopping to mechanical and electrical penetration shall be as specified.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - AAC - CONCRETE BLOCKS
3.01 MATERIALS:
A Tha Joint Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC) Common Blockwork to external

and internal walls.
3.02 BLOCKS:
A. Manufacturer : Refer NEB suppliers List
B. Product Reference : Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Blocks

C. Configuration : Solid
D. Main Compressive strength (minimum) : 3.2 N/mm2 Category: 1
E. Thermal Conductivity (maximum : 0.13 to .14 W/mk
F. Work sizes (length x width x height) :
1. 600 x 250 x 100 mm
2. 600 x 250 x 150 mm
3. 600 x 250 x 200 mm
4. 600 x 250 x 250 mm
5. 600 x 250 x 300 mm
G. Special shapes : None
H. Dry Density : 480 - 600 kg/m3
J. Fire Rating : 4 hours for block of 200mm thickness
3.03 THIN LAYER MORTAR : TO BS 998 - 2
A. Manufacturer : Refer NEB suppliers List

or Equivelant subject to Engineer's approval
B. Product Reference : Propriety pre-mixed thin bed mortar suitable for autoclaved
areated concrete blocks.
C. Supplied Locally by : Refer NEB suppliers List

or Equivelant subject to Engineer's approval
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine Surfaces: Inspect existing surfaces and ensure that they are
satisfactory for work to proceed as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to
Engineer and do not proceed until rectified to satisfaction of Engineer.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP GENERAL
A. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Comply with the manufacturer’s printed

instructions and recommendations for the installation of each type of masonry
product, unless otherwise shown or specified.
B. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except for
single width masonry walls which may be built to the actual thickness of the
masonry units, using blocks of nominal thickness shown.
C. Chases: Form chases and recesses as shown and as may be required for the
work of other trades. Do not chase hollow blocks. Do not cut horizontal or
diagonal chases in load bearing work. Provide not less than 200mm of masonry
between chases or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases
and recesses.
D. Construction Openings: Leave openings for equipment as shown or required to

be installed at later date. Complete masonry work after equipment is in place
using material identical with those immediately adjacent to the opening.
E. Construction Joints: Step back unfinished work for joining with new work;
toothing will not be permitted. Before new works is started clean exposed
surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove
loose blocks and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
F. Cutting Blocks: Use motor driven saw designed to cut blocks with clean sharp
corners. Cut blocks as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining
work neatly. Use full blocks without cutting wherever possible. Avoid the use of
less than half size blocks at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other
locations. Do not use chipped or broken blocks.
G. Age of Blocks: Do not build in concrete blocks until at least 28 days after
manufacture and until they are fully cured.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.03
A. Mortar Types, General:
B. Bond: Use running bond for all single-width masonry walls unless otherwise
shown. In multiple-width walls, bond widths together with header blocks
wherever possible, unless otherwise shown. Where widths cannot be masonry
bonded, use wire ties of the type and spacing shown, unless horizontal joint
reinforcing provides the tie between widths. Where type and spacing of wire ties
is not shown provide either continuous or individual type ties, installed so that
double wires will be spaced not more than 600mm centers both horizontally and
vertically.
C. Laying Procedure for Walls:

1 Lay solid blocks with completely filled bed head and collar joints. Butter ends
with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and push into place. Do not slush head
joints.
2 Lay up walls plumb and true with courses level and accurately spaced and co-
ordinated with other work. Variations from plumb, true or level of more then
1/800 in any direction are unacceptable.
3 Build bearing plates, masonry anchors, flashings, sleeves, door frames and other
miscellaneous items into masonry as work progresses. Fill hollow metal frames
adjoining masonry work solidly with mortar.
4 Provide anchoring devices of the type shown, or of standard type if none are
shown. Anchor masonry work to all abutting structural members. Space anchors
600mm centers at vertical and overhead support locations, and 600mm centers
both ways behind masonry veneer work, unless otherwise shown.
5 Maintain uniform joint width except for minor variations to maintain bond
alignment. Except for cavity wall construction leave no voids between blocks.
Slush and grout back joint against other work as blocks are pushed into place.
6 Finish masonry walls which are concealed or to be covered with other materials
with flush joints, unless otherwise shown.
7 Tool exposed wall joints slightly concave, unless otherwise shown.

8 Provide horizontal joint reinforcement and vertical reinforcement in all masonry
walls, unless specifically noted or specified to be omitted. Space horizontal
reinforcement 600mm centers for interior walls and 400mm centers for exterior
walls unless otherwise shown on specified. Lap reinforcement a minimum of
150mm at ends and do not bridge control and expansion joints with
reinforcement except at wall openings. Use matching prefabricated “T” and “L”
sections of reinforcement at corners and wall intersections to provide continuity.
Centre reinforcement in wall to provide a minimum mortar cover of 15mm at side
rods.
D. Control Joints: Install control joints in masonry walls where shown. Rake out
mortar in preparation for application of sealant.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Control Joint Spacing: If control joint locations are not shown, place joints
vertically, spaced at each structural column or joint between bays of the building
but in no case spaced more than 6.0m. Also, place vertical joints at points of
natural weakness in the masonry work, including the following locations:
1 At locations where masonry wall height changes by more than 20%.
2 Above expansion or control joints in the supporting structure.
3 Where end of masonry wall butts against supporting structure.
F. Control Joint Construction: Form continuous control joints 10mm wide across
which build-in 40mm wide x 200mm long galvanized mild steel flats minimum
1.6mm (16 gauge) thick at each alternate course. Fill vertical joints with mortar
except where wall is f fire compartment wall when it shall be filled as required to
Fire Brigade or fire stoppers as specified.
G. Grouting:
1 Use fine grout for filling spaces less than 100mm in both horizontal directions.
2 Use coarse grout for filling spaces 100mm or larger in both horizontal directions.
3 At the Contractor’s option, use either low-lift or high-lift grouting techniques

subject to the following requirements.
4 Place vertical reinforcing before grouting and either before or after laying blocks,
as required by job conditions. Support vertical reinforcing at intervals shown.
Where individual bars are placed after laying masonry, place wire loops
extending into cells as masonry is laid and loosen before mortar sets. After
insertion of reinforcing bar, pull loops and bar to proper position and the free
ends.
5 Prior to grouting, clean and inspect grout spaces and close cleanout holes.
Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign
materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper position as
required. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure
bond. After all final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace
closures as required to resist grout pressures.
6 Do no place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar
bond. Install shoes and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations.
7 Limit grouts pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with
not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place pour in lifts
which do not exceed 1.2m. Allow not less than 30 minutes and not more than one
hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring
operating.
8 When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry,
extend reinforcing beyond as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 37mm of
top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and
place reinforcing for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if
more pours are required.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
9 Low-Lift Grouting
a. Place vertical reinforcing prior to laying of masonry. Extend above elevation of
maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing. Support in position.
b. Lay masonry to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 1.2m.
c. Pour grout using container with spout of chute. Rod or vibrate grout during
placing. Place grout continuously, do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than
one hour. Terminate grout pours within 37mm of top course of pour.
10 Provide cleanout holes in first course at all vertical cells which are to be filled with
gout.
a. Construct masonry to full height of maximum grout pour specified, prior to placing
grout.
i. Use units with one face shell removed and provide temporary supports for units
above, or use header units with concrete brick supports, or cut openings in one
face shell.
b. Construct masonry to full heights recommended by the National Concrete
Masonry Association (NCMA) for the type of blocks, reinforcing and grout used in
the work, but in no case exceed 3m height.
3.04 LINTELS AND CONCRETE SUPPORT
A. Provide masonry lintels and cast-in-place concrete columns and tie beams
wherever shown and required and wherever openings in the masonry of more
than 300mm are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Unless
otherwise shown provide one reinforcement for each 100mm thickness of wall,
and use bars of adequate size in relation to openings width. Provide minimum
lintel bearing at each jamb of 100mm for openings which do not exceed 1.8m
width. Precast lintels, or form lintels in place with adequate temporary support.
Cure precast lintels thoroughly before handling and installing.
1 In walls of concrete masonry units, provide specially formed U-shaped lintel
units, with reinforcing bars placed as shown. Fill with Type M mortar or concrete
grout.
B. Steel Lintels: Steel lintels may be used with the approval of the Engineer.
Contractor to provide sizes as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Concrete Columns and Tie Beams: shall be provided as detailed generally ±

4.5m spacing horizontally to long masonry runs of concrete block walls. Provide
tie beams for walls over 3.0m in height as detailed on the drawings and as
required. Submit layout and reinforcing to the Engineer for approval.
3.05 LAYING EXTERIOR WALLS
In addition to requirements herein before specified the following shall apply to the
installation of exterior masonry walls:
1 Space horizontal joint reinforcing 400mm centres in exterior walls, unless
otherwise shown.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2 Install reglets and nailers for flashings and other related work where shown to be
built into masonry work.
3 Provide flashings in masonry work as shown and extend details to corners and
intersections to provide complete waterproofing.
4 Provide weep holes in the exterior width of masonry work, located immediately
above flashing, shelf angles, Lintels and other structural elements supporting the
masonry. Space weeps 600mm centres unless otherwise shown. Place a length
of 8mm cotton sash cord each weep as the work progress, and withdraw cord to
clear the hole after the work has been completed.
5 Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings in cavity wall construction. Strike mortar
joints flush as the work progresses.
6 Place wall ties in cavity work as the work proceeds and set with slope to outer
width. Do not raise one width more than 1350mm above the other where wire
ties are used or 450mm above the other where any other type of tie is used.
Close cavities at openings and top.
7 Provide ties 150mm long for cavities up to 50mm wide and 200mm long for
cavities 56-100mm wide.
8 Space ties in cavity as follows:
Widths Cavity Spacing of Ties
(one or both) Width Horz. Vert.
mm mm mm mm
90 or more both widths 50-75 900 450

3.06 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Replace blocks which are chipped, broken stained or do not match adjoining
units as intended, or are otherwise damaged; provide new blocks promptly to
match adjoining blocks, pointing up mortar or grout joints to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
B. Cleaning: During the completion of masonry installation and the tooling of joints,
enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints at
corners, openings and adjoining work to provide a uniform, neat appearance,
properly prepared for the application of sealant compounds and other work to
follow. Clean the exposed masonry surfaces as follows.
1 All exposed work shall be cleaned without the use of acid. Cleaning shall not be
done until mortar is thoroughly set and hard.
2 Before wetting wall, remove large particles of mortar by means of wood scraper,
or if necessary, by means of chisel or wire brush.
3 Pre-soak the wall, saturating the masonry with clean water and flush off all loose
mortar and dirt.
4 Using a stiff fibre brush only, scrub down the wall with a solution of 0.25 litre
household detergent and 0.25 litre of tri sodium phosphate dissolved in 4 litres of
clean water.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
5 Thoroughly wash off all cleaning solution, dirt and mortar crumbs using clean
pressurised water.
6 If after this cleaning procedure is completed, the wall or portion of the wall is not
clean, in the judgement of the Engineer, the Contractor shall clean with an acid
solution by means and methods acceptable to the Engineer. If cleaned with an
acid solution, all sash, metal lintels and other material shall be thoroughly
protected.
7 Particular case shall be taken to prevent smearing mortar on surfaces of concrete
masonry units. If mortar smearing occurs, it shall be removed while soft, when
possible, if dry and hard, it shall re removed by rubbing with a small piece of
concrete masonry. All mortar smears, drippings, etc., on expanded faces of
concrete masonry units shall be removed.
3.07 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of all unit masonry installation leave work in perfect condition.
As the work proceeds remove daily form the site all debris resulting from the work
of this section.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from any damage or splatters caused by the work of
this section.
C. The unit masonry installer shall remove all masking, protection, equipment,
materials and debris from the work area and storage areas and leave those
areas in clean, undamaged and acceptable condition,
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labour, materials, plant, tools, and equipment and perform all
operations and services necessary for the complete installation of all structural
steelwork as scheduled and as indicated on the drawings.
A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of

withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory
indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thickness, and types of cold-
formed metal framing, fabrication, and fastening and anchorage details, including
mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing,
supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories,
connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
1 For cold-formed metal indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Mill certificates signed by steel producer indicating steel complies with

requirements.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the
following complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current
products:
1 Expansion anchors.
2 Power-actuated anchors.
3 Mechanical fasteners.
4 Vertical deflection clips.
5 Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare

design calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal
framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
D. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer indicating steel sheet complies
with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile
strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and galvanized coating
thickness.
E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the
testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, “Structural
Welding Code-Steel”, and AWS D1.3, “Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel”.
G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire-

resistance-rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested
for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600, “Fire
Resistance Design Manual”, or by design designations for UL’s “Fire Resistance
Directory”, or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other

damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproofing covering, and

ventilate to avoid condensation.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - MATERIAL
2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL & STEEL PRODUCTS
A. Structural Steel Fabrication work shall comply with the following codes and
specification mentioned below or equal approved BS Standards or similar
standards.
B. ASTM A36
ASTM A53 - Welded or seamless pipe, black or galvanized
ASTM A500 - Cold-formed welded or seamless tubing in round, square,
rectangular; or special shapes.
ASTM A529 - Carbon steel plates and bars ½ in. thick.
ASTM A570 - Hot rolled steel carbon steel sheets in coils or cut lengths.
ASTM A611 - Carbon steel sheets, cold rolled.
ASTM A242 - Corrosion Resistant High Strength Low Alloy Steel.
ASTM A588 - Corrosion Resistant High Strength Low Alloy Steel.
C. Rivets
ASTM A502 - Grade 1 Carbon steel rivets for general purposes.
D. Structural Bolts and Washers

ASTM A307 - Ordinary bolts
ASTM A325 - High strength bolts
E. Connection and Joints

AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Loads & Resistance Factor Design, Part 5
Connections.
Bolted and riveted connections - as above.
Welds, welded joints and welded connections as above
Welding materials:
 electrodes for shielded metal arc welding: to AWS A5.1 and AWS A5.5
 electrodes for submerged metal arc welding: to AWS A5.23
 electrodes shall be selected to comply with the steel elements to be welded.
F. Test of welds:
ASTM E709 Magnetic Particle Inspection
AWS D.1.1 and ASTM E94 Radiographic Inspection
ASWS D.1.1 Ultra-sonic inspection
G. Dimensional and frame tolerances:

AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, Section 6.
Fabrication and Delivery, Clause 6.4 Dimensional Tolerances, and Section 7
Erection, Clause 7.11 Frame Tolerances.
ASTM A6 Mill Tolerances.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to
line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer’s written
recommendations and requirements in this Section.
1 Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
2 Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3 Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding. Wire tying of framing
members is not permitted. Comply with AWS D.1.3 requirements and
procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in
correcting welding work.
4 Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as
standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures fro welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw
penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.
5 Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw
fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery,

and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or
permanent distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a

maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as
follows:
1 Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening
requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
2 Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum
out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL FABRICATOR PLANT
A. Structural Steel Elements shall be produced in the Structural Steel Fabricator

Plant, under the plant controlled conditions. Steel fabricator plant shall possess
and utilize for the production of Structural Steel Elements all facilities and
accessories necessary for producing, quality control, handling, storage,
transportation, finishes and erection of Structural Steel Elements.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Contractor shall submit all necessary information about the Structural Steel
Fabricator Plant, including performance data of all relevant facilities and
accessories, relevant track records, engineering personnel qualifications, etc.,
and shall allow the Structural Steel Fabricator Plant inspection, for the approval
by the Authorized Engineer’s Representative.
3.02 PRODUCING STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS
A. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2

years.
B. Contractor shall store the steel material in the open store area or covered store
provided as follows:
1 No direct contact of steel material with soil, mud, free water, chlorides or any
other origin of dirt, dust, stains, excessive corrosion, etc. shall be permitted.
2 The steel material in the open store area shall be covered with the adequate
impermeable membrane and protected against rain and the wind blown dust, etc.
C. Each consignment of the steel material shall be accomplished with the Mill
Certificate. Steel material elements shall have the manufacturer’s identification
mark and/or shall be accomplished with the original manufacturer’s tag or other
appropriate mean of identification indicating the manufacturer, material/product
standard and grade and reference to the relevant Mill Certificate.
D. Samples from the consignments of the steel materials shall be taken and tested
by Independent Testing Agency according to the approved Quality Control Plan,
or as requested by Engineer on his discretion. Contractor shall allow for these
E. Contractor shall execute all cutting, bending, drilling, threading, provision of slots,
connecting, welding, assembly of structural steel elements, finishes, application
of primer, paint, etc., in accordance to the approved Method Statement and to
the approved Shop and Erection Drawings. No painting shall be applied on the
surfaces that will be covered by concrete.
F. Welding: Pre-qualified Weld Joints as AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges, Section 5. shall be applied.
Welders: Certified as AWS qualification within previous 12 months.
Testing of Welds: shall be provided as required by Engineer, regarding

suspected substandard work on his discretion. Contractor shall allow for these
tests in critical areas as directed by the Engineer.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
G. Contractor shall control the quality of materials and works in course of the
production of structural steel elements according to the approved Quality Control
Plan. Contractor shall control the quality of the produced structural steel
elements according to the approved Quality Control Plan and shall establish the
Quality Control Record Book. The Contractor’s Quality Control Record Book
shall be available to Supervision, for information, on their discretion.
H. Contractor shall store the finished steel elements in the way that will prevent any
damage to the finishes, element parts and entire elements. Contractor shall
store the finished steel elements in the way that will not result in corrosion of
exposed parts of the steel elements.
I. Contractor shall submit the Request for Inspection and Approval for each finished
steel element or for each group of finished steel elements before shipment to the
site.
3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Inspection and approval of places intended to receive the structural steel

elements:
1 Contractor shall control the status of place that shall receive the structural steel
elements: geometry, cleanness, cast-in items, provision for bearing pads, etc.,
according to the approved Quality Control Plant.
2 Contractor shall submit the Request for Inspection and Approval for places
intended to receive the structural steel elements. Installation of the structural
steel elements at the not approved place will not be permitted.
3 Contractor may transport the structural steel elements for the not approved place
on his own risk.
B. Transportation and Delivery:

1 Structural steel elements intended for transportation shall pass quality control
and inspection as this Section.
2 Elements shall be fixed on the transportation vehicle to avoid relative movement
and damages to the finishes, paint, element parts and entire elements. In course
of transportation, elements shall not be exposed to the shocks or to the load that
causes element section damage or bending.
C. Installation:
1 Structural steel elements shall be erected and fixed according to the approved
Method Statement and to the approved Shop and Erection Drawings. Frame
tolerances shall not exceed the limits as this Section.
2 Contractor shall control the overall compliance of the erected structural steel
elements: geometry, frame tolerances, conditions of finishes and paint, bearing
pads, etc., according to the approved Quality Control Plan.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3 Contractor shall submit the Request for Inspection and Approval for the erected
and fixed structural steel elements.
4 Contract shall supply and fix all support devices, such as neoprene pads, as
indicated on the drawings and shall coordinate installation of these with the Cast-
in-place Concrete works or other works, as appropriate. Material and standard of
the support devices shall be as indicated on the drawings or as detailed on the
sop drawings submitted.
3.04 COMPLIANCE OF ERECTED AND FIXED STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Contractor shall establish the Register System for the Quality Records of Erected
and Fixed Structural Steel, as the separate part of the Contractor’s Quality
Control Record Book. The Contractor’s laboratory reports on 7-days strength of
cube samples, 28-days strength of cube samples and Contractor’s internal quality
control reports on general compliance of the installed concrete shall be
incorporated into this register system. Contractor shall record all cases of
concrete noncompliance and shall incorporate these records into the Contractor’s
Quality Control Record Book.
B. Contractor shall submit for information the Weekly Reports on Noncompliance of

Erected and Fixed Structural Steel. Contractor shall include in these Reports all
cases of the noncompliance known to him and not reported previously.
C. Supervision will issue the Structural Steel Noncompliance Notice to Contractor,
based on their own records and inspections, independent test results and and/or
based on Contractor’s Weekly Reports on the Noncompliance.
D. Contractor shall clear the Structural Steel Noncompliance Notices on time, to
prevent delays of progress by others. In case of failure to timely clear the
structural steel Noncompliance Notices, Contractor shall bear all related
consequences.
3.05 WELDING STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Structural Steel: All shop and field welding shall conform to AISC manual
requirements and AWS ‘Structural Welding Code’ or BSCA ‘the use of welding in
steel structures’. All welders shall be certified to current Kuwait regulations.
B. Testing: Shop and field testing of welds shall be as follows:
1 Ultrasonically test 100% of all full penetration welds.
2 Check 100% of continuity plate fillet welds by magnetic particle for final pass.
3 An independent structural steel-testing laboratory approved by the Engineer shall
perform all shop and filed inspection as outlined above.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.06 FINISHES
A. General:
1 Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC Standards.
2 Shop prime all structural steel members except where steel is to be galvanized
and where contact surfaces of welded connections/bolt connections/milled
surface/and top surface of steel shear connectors and metal deck and metal
curbs.
3 Fully galvanize steel materials exposed to weather, including connection
materials and inserts. Where galvanizing process distorts the members, submit
procedures for review by the Engineer and make good to tolerances noted in the
contract documents.
4 Grind all burrs smooth from cut sections and grind all welds to a clean finish.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment, and perform all services and
operations necessary to execute the work of this section to install all
miscellaneous metal components and accessories, anchorings and fastenings
and performing all operations in connection with metal fabrication work.
B. This section establishes requirements for miscellaneous metal fabrication

anchors and supports as required and gratings not detailed elsewhere.
C. Metal fabrication work is defined as including any items shown on the Drawings
and/or specified herein, fabricated from steel and iron shapes, plates, bars,
pipes, tubes, casting and roll-formed shaped which are not a part of an overall
system specified in any other Section of these Specifications.
D. This Section includes all metal fabrications not covered under other section; but
not limited to the following:
1 Rough hardware.
2 Steel and Stainless Steel Ladders.
3 Edgings.
4 Trench Covers.
5 Miscellaneous trims.
6 Gratings.
7 Steel support system for service equipments fixation.
8 Miscellaneous framing and supports.
9 All metal work in the project.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for different products including paint products, and grout.
B. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication

indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications
and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates
for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
C. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested

by Engineer.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural

Welding Code-Steel," AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code-Aluminium," and
AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel."
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to

which metal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before
fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FERROUS METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed
Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and
freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786/A 786M.
D. Galvanised steel sheet: ASTM A 653, structural quality, grade 33, with G90
coating.
E. Expanded metal, galvanised: ASTM F1267, Class 2, Grade A.
F. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:
1 Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.

2 Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
a. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot-dip
galvanised coating per ASTM A 53.
G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise
indicated, or another weight required by structural loads.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
H. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated

from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load
imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
I. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for
the metal alloy to be welded.
2.02 ALUMINUM
A. Aluminium Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T6.
2.03 STAINLESS STEEL
Stainless steel bars and shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316
Sheet, strip, plate and flat bars: ASTM A666, Type 316.
2.04 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal
modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664,
selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with
finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for
field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
B. Galvanising Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanising welds in
galvanised steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12,

except containing no asbestos fibers.
D. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or preformed dielectric

separators, which will prevent galvanic action.
2.05 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25
for electrodeposited zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior
walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F
568, Property Class 4.6), with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M), and,
where indicated, flat washers.
C. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.7M.
D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1 (ANSI B18.2.3.8M).
E. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ANSI B18.6.1.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI B18.22.1 (ANSI B18.22M).
G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B18.21.1.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below
with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed
when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when
installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
2.06 GROUT
A. As per Section 03006.
2.07 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated
but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements
indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using
proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or
specified for various components of each metal fabrication.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and
straight sharp edges.
C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from maximum change (range) in ambient
temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal
D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless

otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without
causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1 Use materials and methods that minimise distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2 Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3 Remove welding flux immediately.
4 At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated
or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints
where least conspicuous.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; co-ordinate with supporting structure.

Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in
place and to support indicated loads.
J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to

minimise field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value
of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and co-ordinated installation.
K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish
hardware, screws, and similar items.
L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or

provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.08 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Furnish bent, or otherwise custom-fabricated, bolts, plates, anchors, hangers,

dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing
and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete
or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are
specified in Division 6 Sections.
B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-
iron washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections, and
furnish steel washers elsewhere.
2.09 TRENCH COVERS
A. Fabricate chequered floor plates from rolled-steel floor plate complying to ASTM
A786 of 5-mm minimum thickness.
B. Include steel angel stiffeners and fixed and removable sections. Provide flush
steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each end of each
section.
C. Flooring plates and frames shall be galvanised after fabrication.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.1 GRATINGS
A. Fabricate gratings as per details on drawings.

B. Steel Gratings: Shop primer applied according to manufacturer’s standard
practice and hot-dip galvanized with a coating of not less than 550 g/sq.m of
coated surface.
C. Stainless steel gratings shall be pressure-locked rectangular bar type grating with
bearing bars at 30mm o.c., and crossbars at 102mm o.c.
2.11 LADDERS
A. General: Fabricate steel ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions,
spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of
ANSI A14.3.
B. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material
metallically bonded to the rung by a proprietary process.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates,
and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed
edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices wherever possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required to co-ordinate assembly

and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding
in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 150 mm from each
end, 150 mm from corners, and 600 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.13 STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes at locations
indicated.
B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one
twelfth of clear span, but not less than 200mm, unless otherwise indicated.
2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanising: For those items indicated for galvanising, apply zinc coating by the
hot-dip process complying with the following requirements:
1 ASTM A 153 for galvanising iron and steel hardware.

2 ASTM A 123 for galvanising both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel
products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and
strip 0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) thick or thicker.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to

comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of
1 Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2 Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanised finishes or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or
masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1
"Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates,

instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts,
sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are
to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of
such items to Project site.
B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect
sleeves from water and concrete entry.
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners

where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place
construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts,
toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as
required.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true,
and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built
into concrete masonry or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld

connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanised after fabrication and are intended
for bolted or screwed field connections.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1 Use materials and methods that minimise distortion and develop strength and
3 Remove welding flux immediately.
4 At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface
matches those adjacent.
5 Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminium that will come into
contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy
coat of bituminous paint.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted

connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with
same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements
for touching up shop-painted surfaces. Apply by brush or spray to provide a 2.0-
mil (0.05-mm) minimum dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted

connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is
specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. For galvanised surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas,
and apply galvanising repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 05521
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY

1 Steel pipe and tube handrails and railings.
A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings

complying with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance, based
on testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide handrails and railings that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by

insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible
materials.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:

1 Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected handrails and railings.
2 Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings.

Include plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other
Work.
C. Samples : For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components

indicated below and of same thickness and metal indicated for the Work. If
finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing
the full range of variations expected.
1 150-mm- long sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including
handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.
2 Fittings and brackets.
3 Assembled sample of railings, made from full-size components. Show method of
finishing members at intersections.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.04 STORAGE
A. Store handrails and railings in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.


A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field

measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
1.07 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed

walls. Do not support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural
performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METALS
A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
All components shall be hot dip galvanized.
B. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated, complying with the
following requirements:
1 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:
a. Hot-dip galvanized finish.
b. Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another
grade and weight are required by structural loads.
2 Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing, ASTM A 500, Grade A, unless another
grade is required by structural loads.
3 Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
4 Iron Castings: Malleable iron complying with ASTM A 47,
C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material
and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.02 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS
A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and
electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required
for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select

fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for
anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and
capable of withstanding design loads.
1 For steel handrails, railings, and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Handrail and Railing Components: Use fasteners

fabricated from same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated.
Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
1 Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting handrail and railing components
and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
2 Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless
D. Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below,

fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry
and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.
1 Cast-in-place anchors.
2.03 PAINT
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers to comply with applicable requirements in
Division 9 Section "Painting."
2.04 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,

noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout
specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink,

nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with
water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting
compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure
without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is
recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.05 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated

for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and
anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.
B. Assemble handrails and railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to

minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined
pieces.
C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:

1 As detailed.
D. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members

by welding. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide
close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously
to comply with the following:
1 Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
3 Remove flux immediately.
4 At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of
adjoining surfaces.
E. Nonwelded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings by connecting

members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline
joints.
1 Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive
where this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.
F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members
to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings
to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of
withstanding loads imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage
devices with supporting structure.
H. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel not less than
(150 mm) long with inside dimensions not less than (12 mm) greater than outside
dimensions of post, and steel plate forming bottom closure.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
I. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed
cut edges.
J. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless

causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work.
K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
L. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections
of handrail and railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from
condensation or other sources.
M. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a watertight manner.
N. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end
fittings.
O. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise

indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of railing and
wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
2.06 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent

pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved
Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations
in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.07 STEEL FINISHES
A. For galvanized handrails and railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets,

fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Thoroughly Clean handrails and railings and treat
dirt, oil flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic- phosphate process.
C. Painting: Painting shall be as per Section 09910 - Painting.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set
handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured
from established lines and levels and free from rack.
1 Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that have
been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection
by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
C. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at

abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required
by structural loads.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads
to in-place construction.
3.02 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently

connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent
damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking
screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of handrails and railings.
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication"
Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.
3.03 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts.
After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and
sleeve with the anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring
material manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20
mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose
material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with the
following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions:
1 Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post as
follows:
1 Welded to post after placing anchoring material.
D. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave
1/8-inch (3-mm) build-up, sloped away from post.
E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as
required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as
follows:
1 For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
3.04 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS
A. Anchor railing ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to
railing ends and anchored into wall construction with postinstalled anchors and
bolts.
B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.
1 Weld flanges to railing ends.
3.05 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
A. Attach handrails to wall as indicated.
B. Locate flanges at spacing required to support structural loads
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction
period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer.
B. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no
evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in
the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide
new units.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 05700
ORNAMENTAL METALWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
A. The Section includes
1 All ornamental works shown in the Scope of this Bid Pack.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product used in cladding, including finishing materials
and methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of work. Include plans,
elevations, component details, and attachments to other Work. Indicate
materials and profiles of each ornamental metal member, fittings, joinery,
finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
C. Samples for Verification: For each profile and pattern of fabricated metal and for
each type of metal finish required, prepared on metal of same thickness indicated
for the Work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include
sample sets, consisting of two or more units, showing the full range of variations
expected.
1 Include 300mm square samples of sheets and fabric panels.
A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of ornamental metal specified in
this Section by the same firm that fabricated it.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing ornamental metal
similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of other construction by field
Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METALS
A. General:
1 Metal Surfaces: For the fabrication of all metal work, use only materials, which
are smooth and free of surface blemishes. Do not use materials, which have
stains and discolorations including welds, which do not match material, or do not
match the Engineer’s samples in color and grain characteristics.
2 Surface Flatness and Edges: For exposed work, provide materials which have
been cold-rolled, cold-finished, cold drawn, extruded, stretcher leveled, machine
cut and otherwise produced to the highest commercial standard for flatness with
edges and corners sharp and true to angle or curvature as required.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3 Alloys and Tempers: Wherever alloys or tempers of metals are not shown or
specified, or are shown or specified only by series or other general designation,
provide the specific alloy to match the Engineer’s sample and other work in the
same area, which is shown or specified to have the same finish. Use the temper
or hardness, which will provide the greatest strength and durability, consistent
with necessary forming, fabrication and finish processes.
4 All ornamental metal work shall be of consistent finish and color and should be a
single alloy composition capable of being formed, extended rolled into shapes as
indicated on the drawings.
B. Aluminum: Provide the forms and types shown and specified for each item of
work. Provide in standard commercial tempers and hardness, as required for
fabrication, strength and durability. Finish designation shown on the drawings
are NAAMM standards:
1 Prefinished Aluminum Screens:

a. Extruded Bars
b. Mold Castings
c. Structural Shapes
C. Copper Alloys, Bronze & Brass

1 Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 455

3 Seamless Tubes: ASRM B 135
D. Stainless Steel
1 Tubing: ASTM A 554
2 Pipe: ASTM A 312/A
3 Bars & Shapes: ASTM A 376, Type 304
4 Wire Rope: ASTM A 492
E. Steel and Iron: All components shall be hot dip galvanized
1 Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A 500
2 Steel Plate, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 492
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes
as recommended by producer of metal to be welded, complying with applicable
AWS specifications, and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility
in fabricated items.
B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of same basic metal as fastened metal, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with
materials joined.
1 Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting ornamental metal components
and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Form to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines, and angles. Provide
components in sizes and profiles indicated, but not less than that needed to
comply with requirements indicated for structural performance.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.04 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements indicated for conditions affecting performance of metal panel walls.

A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing work to
in-place construction.
B. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from
established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork
for items to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where
indicated, with uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where
cutting, welding, and grinding are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of
ornamental metal, restore finishes to eliminate any evidence of such corrective
work.
D. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field.
Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by
complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.
E. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or
installation. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of
damage from other work yet to be performed at same location.
1 Retain protective coverings intact; remove coverings simultaneously from
similarly finished items to preclude non uniform oxidation and discoloration.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of ornamental metal from damage during construction period with
temporary protective coverings approved by ornamental metal fabricator.
Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no
the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide
new units.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 05720
ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
1 Stainless steel railings.
2 Glass balustrades.
3 Stainless steel wire rope and fittings.
A. General: In engineering handrails and railings to withstand structural loads
indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of materials based on the
following:
1 Stainless Steel: ASCE 8, "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless
Steel Structural Members."
2 For glass in glass-supported handrails and railings, use a safety factor of 4
applied to the applicable modulus of rupture listed in "Mechanical Properties" in
AAMA Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12, "Structural Properties of Glass."
B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Comply with requirements of
ASTM E 985 for structural performance based on testing performed according to
ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
C. Glass-Supported Handrails and Railings: Provide glass-supported handrails and
railings capable of withstanding loads indicated. Support each section of top rail
by a minimum of three glass panels or by other means so top rail will remain in
place if any one panel fails.
D. Thermal Movements: Provide handrails and railings that allow for thermal
movements resulting from maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by
insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible
materials.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For manufacturer's product lines of handrails and railings
assembled from standard components.
1 Include Product Data for grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components
indicated below and of same thickness and metal indicated for the Work.
1 300 mm long sections of each different linear railing member, including
handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.
2 300 mm square samples of glass.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3 Fittings and brackets.

4 Connections.
5 Assembled Samples of railings, made from full-size components, including top
rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections.
Samples need not be full height.
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally
qualified where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as
those performed for installations of handrails and railings that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Mockups: Before installing handrails and railings, build mockups to verify
selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1 Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.
2 Build mockups as shown on Drawings.
3 Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail,
infill area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less
than 600 mm in length.
constructed.

1.06 STORAGE
A. Store handrails and railings in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.
A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field
Work.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish Setting
Drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.09 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed
walls. Do not support temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METALS
A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
B. Stainless Steel:
Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316L

Pipe: ASTM A 312, Grade TP 316L
Plate: ASTM A666, type 316 L
Castings: ASTM A 743.
Wire Rope: 1-by-19 wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492, Type
316.
C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material
and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 GLASS PRODUCTS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glass: Type and thickness as indicated on drawings.
B. Comply with Section 08800 for manufacturers and glazing requirements.
2.03 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select
fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for
anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and
capable of withstanding design loads.
1 For stainless-steel handrails and railings, use fasteners fabricated from Type 304
or Type 316 stainless steel.
2 For steel handrails, railings, and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
B. Fasteners for Interconnecting Handrail and Railing Components: Use fasteners
fabricated from same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated.
Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
1 Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for
attaching them to other Work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are
standard fastening method for handrail and railing indicated.
C. Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry
and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 Cast-in-place anchors.
D. Wire-Rope Fittings: Connectors of types, fabricated from stainless steel, and
with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking
strength of wire rope with which they are used.
2.04 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout
specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Assemble handrails and railings in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping
and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Form changes in direction of railing members as indicated.
C. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce
uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain profile of
member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise
deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
D. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members
by welding. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide
close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously
to comply with the following:
1 Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
3 Remove flux immediately.
4 At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of
adjoining surfaces.
E. Mechanical Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings by connecting

members with railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners
and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to
produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1 Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where
this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.
F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall
brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to connect handrail and
railing members to other construction.
G. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices to connect handrails and railings to
concrete or masonry. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding
loads imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with
supporting structure.
H. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel not less than 6
inches (150 mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm)
I. larger
Shear than
and outside dimensions
punch metals of post,
cleanly and steel plate
and accurately. formingburrs
Remove bottom closure.
from exposed
cut edges.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
J. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless

causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work.
K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
L. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections
of railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation
or other sources.
M. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a watertight manner.
N. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
O. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise
indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of railing and
wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
P. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with
fittings machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for
dimensional adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire
ropes. Tag wire-rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and
orientations for coordinated installation.
2.06 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION

A. Glass Panels: Cut glass to final size and shape before heat treatment; provide
for proper edge clearance and bite on glass. Provide thickness indicated, but not
less than that required to support structural loads.
2.07 FINISHES
Stainless Steel: To match Engineer’s sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free
from rack.
1 Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated
or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by
mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
2 Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.
C. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure alignment at abutting
joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by
structural loads.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads
to in-place construction.
3.02 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently
connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication"
Article whether welding is performed in shop or in field.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.03 ANCHORING RAIL ENDS

A. Anchor rail ends to concrete and masonry with sleeves concealed within rail ends
and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
B. Anchor rail ends to concrete and masonry with flanges connected to rail ends
and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
C. Anchor rail ends to concrete and masonry with brackets on underside of rail
connected to rail ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
D. Anchor rail ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.
3.04 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 38-mm
clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads.
3.05 INSTALLING GLASS PANELS
A. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2
years.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and
rinsing with clean water.
B. Clean and polish glass.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period
with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove
B. protective coverings
Restore finishes at the time
damaged of Substantial
during Completion.
installation and construction period so no
field to shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new
units.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 05810
EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular
A. Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
1 Expansion joint cover assemblies as shown on drawings.
General: Provide factory-fabricated architectural joint systems capable of

withstanding the types of loads and of accommodating the kinds of movement,
and the other functions for which they are designed including those specified
A. below, without failure.
1 Exterior Joints: Maintain continuity of weather enclosure.
Joints in Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Maintain fire-resistance ratings of
2 assemblies.
3 Joints in Smoke Barriers: Maintain integrity of smoke barrier.
4 Joints in Acoustically Rated Assemblies: Inhibit passage of airborne noise.
Other Joints: Where indicated, provide joint systems that prevent penetration of
water, moisture, and other substances deleterious to building components or
5 content.
Joints in surfaces with Architectural Finishes: Serve as finished architectural joint
6 closures.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Product data for each type of expansion joint cover assembly specified, including
manufacturer's product specifications, installation instructions, details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles,
A. and finishes.
Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of expansion joint cover

assembly including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joints,
B. splices, and attachments to other units of Work.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's colour charts,
actual units, or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and
patterns available for each exposed metal and elastomeric material of expansion
B. joint cover assembly indicated.
Samples for verification purposes in full-size units of each type of expansion joint
cover assembly indicated; in sets for each finish, colour, texture, and pattern
C. specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics.

Source Limitations: Obtain architectural joint systems through one source from a
single manufactures. Coordinate compatibility with adjoining joint systems
A. specified in other Sections.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide joint systems

incorporating fire barriers that are identical to those of assemblies tested for fire
resistance per ASTM E 119 and ASTM E 814 / UL 2079, including hose-stream
test vertical wall assemblies, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
B. authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Aluminium: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-
A. T6, sheet and plate.
B. Expanded Rubber: ASTM D 1056.
Silicone Extrusions: Classified according to ASTM D 2000, 4GE, 709, UV

C. stabilised and does not propagate flame.
Preformed Seals: Single or multicellular extruded elastomeric seals designed with
or without continuous, longitudinal, internal baffles. Formed to be installed in
frames or with anchored flanges, in colour, as selected by Engineer from
D. manufacturer’s standard colours.
Strip Seals: Elastomeric membrane or tubular extrusions with a continuous

longitudinal internal baffle system throughout complying with ASTM E 1783; used
E. with compatible frames, flanges and molded-rubber anchor blocks.
Compression Seals: Preformed, elastomeric extrusions having internal baffle

system complying with ASTM E 1612 in sizes and profiles indicated or as
F. recommended by manufacturer.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws,

spacers, flexible moisture barrier and filler materials, drain tubes, lubricants,
adhesive, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated
G. or required for complete installations.
Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling
H. designated to resist passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint
I. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751, asphalt saturated cellulosic fiber.
2.02 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
General: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies with elastomeric infill of

design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Provide units
comparable to those indicated or required to accommodate joint size, variations
in adjacent surfaces, and dynamic structural movement without material
degradation or fatigue when tested according to ASTM E 1399. Furnish units in
longest practicable lengths to minimise number of end joints. Provide hairline
mitered corners where joint changes directions or abuts other materials. Include
closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, corners, curbs, cross-
connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint cover
A. assemblies.
Joint Cover Assemblies with Elastomeric infill: Provide continuous cover joint
assemblies consisting of elastomeric fill factory-bonded to extruded aluminium
frames of profile indicated or required to suit types of installation conditions
shown. Provide frames for floor joints with means for embedding in or anchoring
to concrete without using exposed fasteners and that will result in exposed
surfaces of sealant and aluminium frames finishing flush with adjacent finished
B. floor surface without exposing anchors.
Compression Seals: Preformed, elastomeric extrusions having internal baffle

system in sizes and profiles shown or as recommended by the manufacturer.
Provide lubricant and adhesive for installation recommended by the
C. manufacturer.
2.03 METAL FINISHES
General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations
and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes
to products in factory after fabrication. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces
A. before shipment.
Aluminium Finishes: Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer’s
B. specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.
C. Color: To Engineer’s approval.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
Manufacturer's Instructions: In addition to requirements of these specifications,
comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for phases of
Work, including preparing substrate, applying materials, and protecting installed
A. units.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, templates, and instructions
for installation of expansion joint cover assemblies to be embedded in or
anchored to concrete or to have recesses formed into edges of concrete slab for
B. later placement and grouting-in of frames.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners

where necessary to secure expansion joint cover assemblies to in-place
construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in expansion shields for
masonry and concrete where anchoring members are not embedded in concrete.
Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated
C. and provide for secure attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies.
3.02 INSTALLATION
Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to
install expansion joint covers. Install joint cover assemblies in true alignment and
proper relationship to expansion joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured
from established lines and levels. Allow adequate free movement for thermal
expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling. Set floor covers at
elevations to be flush with adjacent finished floor materials. Locate wall, ceiling,
roof, and soffit covers in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. Securely
attach in place with required accessories. Locate anchors at interval
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 75mm from each end and not
A. more than 600mm on center.
Continuity: Maintain continuity of expansion joint cover assemblies with a
minimum number of end joints and align metal members mechanically using
splice joints. Cut and fit ends to produce joints that will accommodate thermal
expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames. Adhere flexible
filler materials (if any) to frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as
B. recommended by manufacturer.
Elastomeric Sealant Joint Assemblies: Seal end joints within continuous runs
and joints at transitions according to manufacturer's directions to provide a
C. watertight installation.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.
When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply
A. with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
To be read with Division 1
A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment, and perform all operations and
services necessary for the complete installation of all the work of this section.
The work shall include but will not necessarily be limited to the following:
1 Framing carpentry rough hardware and accessory items.

2 Permanent and temporary bracing.
3 Roof curbs and fillets as required.
4 Grounds in openings.
5 Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.
6 Backing material for waterproofing and insulation at external walls.
7 Preservative treatment of wood.
8 Preservative treatment of marine timber decking.
9 Fire retardant treatment of wood.
10 Temporary and permanent grounds, blocking and supports required by other
trades.
11 Wood grounds, blockings, nails, fasteners, connectors, furrings and the like.
12 Blocking and backing for washroom accessories, including Employer supplied
equipment, fixtures, mechanical and electrical equipment and other items as
required including fastenings and hardware as shown or where required.
13 Provide wood or plywood backing at windows and doors as detailed and to wood
base skirtings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for Miscellaneous Lumbers.
B. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment manufacturer's

instructions for handling, storing, installation, and finishing of treated material:
1 For each type of preservative treated wood product include certification by
treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net
amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2 For water-borne treated products include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site.
3 For fire-retardant-treated wood products include certification by treating plant that
treated material complies with specified standard and other requirements.

4 Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood
products with requirements indicated.
5 Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. WOOD PRODUCTS
1 National Forest Products Association (USA)
(Specifications for Wood Construction)
2 Western Wood Products Association
(Western Lumber Grading Rules)
3 ASTM D-245 Methods of Establishing Structural Grades and Related
Allowable Properties for Visually Graded Lumber.
4 ASTM D-4442 Test Methods for Moisture Content of Wood.
5 B.S. 4978 Timber Grades for Structural use.
B. WOOD PRESERVATIVES
American Wood Preservers Bureau (LP-22 Standards)
B.S. 4261 Glossary of terms relating to timber preservation.
C. FASTENERS AND SUPPORTS

1 American National Standards (ANSI) USA
a. B 18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws. (ANSI/ASME B 18.2.1)
b. B 18.5 Round Head Bolts (ANSI/ASME B 18.5)
c. B 18.6.1 Wood Screws (ANSI/ASME B 18.6.1)
2 ASTM D 1761 Methods of Testing Metal Fasteners in wood.
3 Federal Specifications (USA) FF N-105 Nails, Staples and Spikes.
4 British Standards
a. BS 1202 Nails
b. BS 1210 Wood screws
c. BS 4190 Black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against
exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as
well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around
stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar
materials.
1 For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place
spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMBER, GENERAL
. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20

"American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of
inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's
(ALSC) Board of Review.
A. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp
of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and
identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing,
and mill.
1 Any species and grade that complies with the following requirements for species
group as defined in Table 8.1a of N.F.P.A National Design Specification, for
extreme fiber stress in bending "Fb" for single and repetitive members, and for
modulus of elasticity "E":
a. Group II species, "Fb" of 1200 psi for single member use and of 1400 psi for
repetitive member use, and "E" of 1,600,000 psi.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction

including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers,
blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members.
B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and

into shapes shown.
B. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive
wood preservative treatment.
C. Grade: "Standard" grade light-framing-size lumber of any species or board-size

lumber as required. "No. 3 Common" or "Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or
WWPA rules or "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. TIMBER GENERALLY
1 Timber shall be well seasoned and free from decay, insect attack except
pinhole borers, and knots wider than half of the width of the section.
F. SOFTWOOD
1 To be
a. Douglas Fir (Standard Grade).
b. Pine
c. Spruce
d. Approved substitution coniferous timbers
G. HARDWOOD
1 To be
a. Redwood
b. Approved substitution timbers.
H. MOISTURE CONTENT
1 Timber shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 8% by weight.
2 Timber required to be treated with preservatives or fire retardent shall be
seasoned and kiln dried before treatment, and redried after treatment.
2.03 PLYWOOD
Provide marine grade plywood. All plywood shall used on the job shall be made
with exterior quality waterproof and non-staining glue.
2.04 FASTENERS
A. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

B. Power Driven Fasteners.
C. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1.
D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.
D. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex
nuts and where indicated, flat washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry
construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with
minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to
line and cut and fitted.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for
accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar
D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as

indicated.
E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish
work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite
side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight
connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood;
predrill as required.
3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS AND BLOCKING
A. Install wood grounds, nailers and blocking where shown and where required for
screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as
required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with
B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts
and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry
during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before
concrete placement.
C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-bevelled lumber

not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground
to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when
no longer required.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 06402
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment and perform all services and
operations necessary for the complete installation of all requirements for finish
carpentry.
The work shall include but will not necessarily be limited to the following:
1 This section establishes requirement for providing architectural joinery or custom

joinery works as indicated in the drawings and similar exposed custom wood
works.
2 This Section includes all required hardwares, necessary fixtures, anchors,
adhesives and related accessories and installation of finish hardware.
3 Contractor shall provide all light metal and miscellaneous metal which is shown
on or implied by the drawings and required for the work.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each type of product and process specified, including details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles,
textures, and colors.
B. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's

instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material:
C. For each type of preservative-treated wood product include certification by
treating plant stating type of preservative solution and process used, net amount
of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards.
D. Samples of each wood species:

Lumber, 300 mm long
Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used.
Wood-veneer - faced panel products, 300 x 300 mm.
E. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood
products with requirements indicated.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS


AHA A135: Basic Hardboard
ANSI A208.1: Particleboard
ANSI A 208.2 Medium density Fiberboard (MDF).
ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials
AWI: Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.
HPVA HP-1: Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
DOC PS 1: U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood
Limits on Formaldehyde emission from wood products: As mentioned in the

standards for each material.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance, for a period of 10 years.
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against
exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber,
plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks
and under temporary coverings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until

building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and
nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and
relative humidity at occupancy levels through the remainder of construction
period.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Field Measurements: Where wood work is indicated to be fitted to other

construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field
measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings. Co-ordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1 Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support
woodwork by accurate filed measurements before being enclosed. Record
measurements on final shop drawings.
1.07 CO-ORDINATION
A. Co-ordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other

related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior
architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
1.08 MOCK-UP
A. Construct a mock-up in an area as directed by the Engineer, to a level of

workmanship reached that is approved by the Engineer. Material improperly
installed shall be removed and replaced to approved standards. Mock-up will be
type of work to show standard of acceptance for finished work at typical location.
The extent of mock-up will be directed by the Engineer.
B. Mock-up may remain as part of the work, but to be in the direction of the
Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS. GENERAL
A. Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for

Construction and Industrial Plywood."
B. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: Comply with HPVA HP-1, "Interim
Voluntary Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood." At meeting rooms
wall paneling will be beech wood veneer finish on 18mm thick MDF.
C. Wood materials shall be preservative treated.
D. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue.
E. Hardwood: Class 1 teakwood.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.02 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: Comply with NWWDA I.S. 4

and the following for items indicated to receive water-repellent preservative
treatment.
1 Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation
containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC) as its active ingredient.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION
A. Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of AWI Sections.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Construction: As detailed on drawings. For wood paneling provide necessary

framework required consisting of furring channels complying to ASTM C 645 ,
with minimum 0.84mm thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Matching of adjacent veneer leaves: To Engineer’s approval.
E. Wood Generally:
1 Timber shall be properly seasoned and planed square, straight and true.
2 Timber shall be free from:
Sapwood, splits, ring shakes and soft pith.

Check which:
Exceed 300-mm in length
Exceed 0.25-mm in width
Exceed one quarter of the timber thickness in depth.
Knots of the following types:
Knots of any description in timber to be stained or polished.
Knots over 20-mm mean diameter or one half the width of the surface.
Loose knots, or knot holes, unless cut out and plugged.
Decay and insect attack, including pinworm holes.
Moisture content (maximum)
For interior work - 8%.
Wood Species: As indicated on drawings.

years.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Fasteners: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material,
and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,
concealed where possible.
B. Adhesives : To B.S 1204
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for
secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and
inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion
resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place
anchors.
D. Glass: Refer Section 08800.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood work to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing and hardware application to

maximum extent possible before shipment to project site. Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary
for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming and fitting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance
of work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing
arrangements.
B. Install work plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where required for alignment.
1 Scribe and cut to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by
manufacturer.
2 Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable.
C. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing.
3.04 PANELING INSTALLATION
A. Paneling: Select and arrange panels for best match of adjacent panels where
grain character or color variations are noticeable. Install with uniform tight joints
between panels.
1 Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and
fasteners. Space fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer.
2 Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent.
3 Arrange panels with grooves and joints over supports, and fasten to supports with
nails of type and at spacing recommended by panel manufacturer. Use fasteners
with prefinished heads matching groove color.
3.05 ADJUSTING
Repair damaged or defective paneling where possible to eliminate functional or

visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace paneling. Adjust joinery for
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean paneling on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-

applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure work is without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 07130
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section includes the modified bituminous sheet waterproofing for torch-
applied applications at below grade level and at roof areas.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for type of waterproofing specified, including manufacturer’s written

instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and
tested physical and performance properties.
B. Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of waterproofing, including details
for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, tie-ins with
adjoining construction, and other termination conditions.
C. Samples, 75-by-150-mm minimum size, of each waterproofing material required
for Project.
D. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing
compliance of waterproofing with requirements and other physical properties
reported by manufacturer based on comprehensive testing of products according
to current standard test methods within previous 5 years.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage specialist with 5 years experience in

waterproofing works similar to that indicated for this Project and who is
acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer.
A. Below-grade Waterproofing
1 Below -grade Waterproofing System to be capable of resisting ground and

surface water pressures from the sides and underneath the building by providing
a continuous and impervious membrane which excludes the visible penetration of
water and provides a vapour seal and to be suitable for Middle East situations.
2 Membrane to consist of a minimum of 2 layers of flame bonded membrane, 4 (

0.2) mm thick.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Roof Areas
1 Roofing membranes shall be installed with ply loose laid, mopped or torched to a
sloped sand cement screed sub-base sloped to cast-in-place roof drains as per
manufacturer’s instruction or as directed by Engineer. Membrane shall be lapped
up walls and up over all parapets. Lap membrane minimum of 50mm down
outside face. Install all flashings as detailed.
2 Membrane to consist of a minimum of 1 layer of flame bounded membrane, 4 ((
0.2) mm thick.
A. Environmental Conditions: Apply waterproofing within range of ambient and

substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not
apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by waterproofing

manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does
not meet requirements or that does not remain watertight during the specified
warranty period.
1 Warranty Period: 10 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER OR PRODUCT
A. Refer NEB List of Approved Suppliers
B. Primer: As recommended by the manufacturer of waterproofing membrane.
C. Protection Board: As recommended by the manufacturer of sheet membrane

waterproofing.
The thickness of protection board should not be less than 6mm.
D. Substitutions: To be demonstrated as equal to or greater than those specified

and to the approval of the Engineer. Alternative products must be only those that
offer full technical literature, test certificates and other documentation and on site
visits by technical representatives of those products.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.02 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. Membrane for Roof: A polymer - bitumen modified with elastomers and

plastomers. The reinforcement is a non-woven fabric of continuously extruded
spun bound polyester which is rot proof. The compound is a mixture of distilled
bitumen to give excellent durability and flexibility at low temperature. Membrane
to have following characteristics
a. Thickness
b. Tensile Strength L/t
c. Elongation
d. Resistance to tear
B. Membrane for Basement: Membrane to be a composite waterproofing membrane

where the reinforcement is impregnated with SBS (Styrene Butadiene Co-
polymer) bitumen at the bottom and with APP (Atactic Polypropylene) bitumen on
the upper face. The membrane must have the following characteristics:
a. Elongation to break
b. Tensile strength L/T
c. Resistance to static puncture
d. Resistance to tear
e. Thickness
f. Weight kg/sq. m.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems

will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1 Do not proceed with installation until after minimum concrete curing period
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
2 Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer’s written

instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing
application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage
affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating
contaminants from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate
pockets, holes, and other voids.
Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and
penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer’s printed

instructions except as hereinafter specified.
B. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.
C. Follow the recommended technique of the membrane manufacturer for cleaning,
seam, lap and splice areas, for the method and sequence of forming filed joints in
D. Flash all pipes, conduits, sleeves, and other projections passing through
membrane waterproofing and provide tight construction throughout. Install
accessories where required as per recommendations of the manufacturer.
E. Upon completion of any portion of water proofing, immediately cover that portion
with protective covering.
3.04 SEAM INSTALLATION
A. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement and in-seam sealant, and firmly roll
side and end laps of overlapping sheets according to manufacturer’s written
instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal
exposed edges of sheet terminations.
3.05 SHEET FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install UV stable thermal and ozone resistant sheet flashings and preformed
flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to waterproofing
manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Extend deck waterproofing sheet to form wall flashings.
3.06 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install protection course over waterproofing membrane according to
manufacturer’s written instructions and before commencing subsequent
construction operations. Minimize exposure of membrane.
A. Test each area (including area’s below ground level) for leaks after waterproofing
and before protection course and overlaying construction are placed. Plug or
dam drains and fill with water to a depth of 50 mm or to within 75 mm of top of
sheet flashings. Maximum water depth shall not exceed 100 mm. Flood each
area for 24 hours.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with

requirements, repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet
flashings.
1 After flood tests, repair leaks and make further repairs until waterproofing
installation is watertight.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.08 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during application and remainder of
construction period according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2

years.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 07140
LIQUID APPLIED WATER PROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section includes liquid applied waterproofing at fountain areas, wet areas at
places as shown on drawings.
B. Related Sections
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for type of waterproofing slurry specified, including manufacturer’s

written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical
data, and tested physical and performance properties.
B. Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of waterproofing slurry, including

details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, tie-ins with
adjoining construction, and other termination conditions.
C. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing

compliance of waterproofing with requirements and other physical properties
reported by manufacturer based on comprehensive testing of products according
to current standard test methods within previous 5 years.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer who has completed waterproofing

similar to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to waterproofing
manufacturer.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled
with manufacturer’s name, product, date of manufacture, and directions for
storage.
B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected

location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by waterproofing

manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does
not meet requirements or that does not remain watertight during the specified
warranty period.
1 Warranty Period: 10 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
B. Slurry-Coat Aggregate: ASTM C 144, sand.
C. Trowel-Coat Aggregate: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Liquid applied Waterproofing (Non-toxic): A blend of portland cement, specially
treated sand, and active chemicals formulated to penetrate by capillary action
into concrete or masonry and to chemically react with free lime in the presence of
water to develop crystalline growth within concrete or masonry capillaries.
F. Patching Compound: Ready-mixed cementitious waterproofing and repair mortar
for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections.
2.02 MIXING
A. Mixing shall be in accordance with the written recommendations of the

manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems

will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1 Do not proceed with installation until after minimum concrete curing period
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
2 Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer’s written

instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing
application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage

affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating
contaminants from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate
pockets, holes, and other voids.
E. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and
penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply cementitious waterproofing to both horizontal and vertical surfaces as per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
1 Surfaces: Uniformly apply waterproofing on vertical and horizontal surfaces in no
less than two slurry coatings at a rate as recommended by the manufacturer.

2 Vertical construction joints: Apply two slurry coatings of waterproofing
immediately prior to placing contiguous concrete.
B. Moisture cure all cementitious waterproofing for a minimum of two (2) days as
recommended by the manufacturer. After waterproofing has aged for at least two
(2) weeks, neutralize all waterproofed surfaces that will remain exposed.
C. Form a continuous waterproof envelop which will prevent leakage. Take

immediate remedial measures to stop water infiltration during the construction
and guarantee periods.

A. On completion of installation make preparation for testing in the presence of the
MEW.
B. Flood with clean water. After 48 hours, check for leaks.
C. If leaking is found, patch using new waterproofing materials; repeat flood test.
Repair damage to building.
D. When area is proved wateright, drain water and obtain MEW approval.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during application and remainder of
construction period according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1- GENERAL
To be read with Division 1.
1 Extruded Polystyrene boards for roof, and wall insulation.

2 Batt Insulation as indicated on drawings.
3 Vapour barriers.
4 Pre-fabricated drainage sheet.
A. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS:
1 The installer shall be experienced in handling rigid insulation materials and shall
be fully conversant with current manufacturer's published data.
1.03 PRODUCT DATA:
A. Submit:
1 Complete list of all items proposed to be installed under this Section.
2 Manufacturer's Specifications and other data necessary to demonstrate
compliance with the Specification.
1.04 DELIVERY AND PROTECTION
A. GENERALLY
1 Protect insulation board against damage during delivery and storage, also
against deterioration by ultra violet light.
1.05 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RIGID INSULATION
A. The insulation shall be a non-absorbent, foam extruded, closed cell polystyrene
board specifically manufactured for use in roofing and as wall insulation as per
BS 3837 Grade Type Part II:1990.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Edges of boards shall be rebated.
C. Physical properties:
1 Thermal conductivity
(K Value)
2 Coefficient of thermal
expansion
3 Water Absorption
4 Capillary reaction
5 Density
6 Compressive strength
7 Combustion Characteristics:
8 Thicknesses
unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
D. Vapour barrier shall be 10mil (0.25mm) thick clear polyethylene conforming to

ASTM C171 lapped and taped 100mm on sides and ends. Physical properties for
materials shall conform to ASTM E154.
E. BATT Insulation
1 The insulation shall be mineral fibre batt.
2 Physical properties:
(i) Thermal insulation (k-value) : 0.026k/mk
(ii) Density : as required.
F. Prefabricated drainage sheet:

1 Prefabricated sheet drainage must be a composite system consisting of
permeable geo textile and three dimensional polymeric core providing equal flow
in two perpendicular directions.
2 Drainage sheet to have the following characteristics:
i. Material: Polypropylene
ii. Weight: 200gm/mw
iii. Thickness: minimum 11mm
iv. Compressive strength: 1025KN/m2
2.02 ADHESIVE
A. As recommended by insulation manufacturer for specific application with
demonstrated capacity to bond insulation securely to substrate indicated without
damaging insulation and substrates.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation Fasteners: Impale clip type of plain finished steel; of type to be
adhered to surface to receive rigid insulation; length to suit insulation thickness;
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.04 BATT INSULATION
A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C-665, Type I (blankets with acoustic glass tissue facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers and with density
40kg/cu.m.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. SURFACES TO RECEIVE INSULATION:

1 Ensure that surfaces to receive insulation are clean, dry, and suitable to provide
a complete and satisfactory installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION
A. General : Apply insulation units to substrates, complying with manufacturer’s

written instructions. Bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical
anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. RIGID INSULATION BOARDS

1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and staggering joints
in both directions.
2 Cut clearly to fit closely around projections, upstands, rainwater outlets etc.
3 Protect from damage after installation.
C. BATT INSULATION
1 Install batt insulation without gaps or voids in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
2 Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage.
3 Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
4 Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical
services within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids.
D. INSULATION FASTENERS
1 Apply fasteners to surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Check
for compatibility of adhesive with any concrete form release agent used.
2 Provide minimum of four fasteners per 600mmx1200mm board, allowing for a
maximum load per fastener of 1.5kg.
E. Install separation fabric according to manufacturer’s written instruction,
overlapping sides and ends.
F. Where there is return air movement allowed through, the insulation shall be
provided with suitable black fabric covering to avoid glass fibers mixing with
return air.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL AND PROTECTION
A. Protection:
1 Protect all insulation from unnecessary construction traffic after installation.

Protection shall be approved and shall prevent any damage likely to result in a
decrease in the efficiency of the insulation.
2 Protect from long periods of exposure before being concealed, by proper
sequencing of the work.

years.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 07260
VAPOUR RETARDANT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labour, materials, plant, tools and equipment, and perform all
operations and services necessary for the supply and installation of vapour
retardants to areas as detailed and scheduled.
The work shall include but will not necessary be limited to:
1 Air vapour barriers to insulated areas concealed from view,

2 Foamed in place polyurethane insulation to air gaps and voids as detailed to
provide sound air/vapour barriers and continuation of vapour retardant systems.
B. This section establishes all requirements for Vapour Retardants for vertical walls
all around the building, also referred as elastomeric waterproofing.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance

criteria, limitations and compatibility with adjacent materials.
B. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation

requirements and techniques.
C. Vapour Retarder: A material or assembly of materials that resists water vapour

diffusion through it.
A. Materials and installation methods to provide continuity of vapour retarder:
1 In conjunction with materials related to roof and stone cladding.

2 To seal gaps between enclosure components and opening frames.
3 To act as vapour retardant for vertical walls.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Liquid applied water proofing membrane, cold applied based on modified

polyurethane or elastomeric, water based acrylic coating
B. Colour to be black or white but should be UV resistant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Commencement of the work will apply acceptance of proved conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose foreign matter which might impair adhesion.
B. Clean and prime substrate to receive vapour barriers adhesive or sealants in

accordance with manufacture’s instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Apply primer as per manufacturer’s request.
C. Coating to be applied by means of spray or brush in two layers
D. Vapour Retarder For Wall/Roof Junction: Lap sheet barrier from wall retarder
onto roof vapour retarder continuously. Seal edges and ends with sealant or
adhesive. Caulk with sealant to ensure complete seal. Position laps over firm
bearing.
E. Vapour Retarder for Openings: Install sheet barrier between window and
doorframes and adjacent vapour retarder and seal with sealant adhesive. Caulk
with sealant to ensure complete seal. Position laps over firm bearing.
F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult

manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges or
where compatibility with adjacent materials may be in doubt.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 07410
PREFINISHED METAL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDES
A. Fixing of pre-finished aluminum panel to vertical profiles as detailed on drawing at
exterior and interior areas, aluminium coating etc. as indicated on drawings.
B. All supporting system, anchoring, adhesives and related accessories of the
manufacturer.
C. The extent of work is as shown on drawings or as implied therein.
A. General: Provide wall panel assemblies complying with performance
requirements indicated and capable of withstanding structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or
infiltration of water into the building interior.
B. Water Penetration: Provide wall panel assemblies with no water penetration as
defined in the test method when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum
differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting, wind-load design pressure of
not less than 6.24 lb/sq. ft. (300 Pa) and not more than 12.0 lb/sq. ft. (575 Pa).
C. Structural Performance: Provide wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding
design wind loads indicated under in-service conditions with deflection no greater
than the following, based on testing manufacturer's standard units according to
ASTM E 330 by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
1 Maximum Deflection: 1/140 of the span.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's product specifications, standard details,
certified product test results, and general recommendations, as applicable to
materials and finishes for each component and for total panel assemblies.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of panels, details of corner conditions, joints,
panel profiles, structural supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and
special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.
C. Samples: Provide sample panels (300 mm) long by actual panel width, in the
profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, caps, battens, fasteners,
closures, and other exposed panel accessories.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed
metal wall panel projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Before installing wall panels, construct mockups for each form of
construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and
execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using
exposed and concealed materials indicated for the completed Work.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
2 Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3 Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4 Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before proceeding with construction of
wall panels.
a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work.
A. Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed.
Package panels for protection against damage during transportation or handling.

B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall panels to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable
weathertight and ventilated covering. Store panels to ensure dryness. Do not
store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or
other surface damage.

A. Field Measurements: Verify location of structural members and openings in
substrates by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Finish Warranty: Submit a written warranty, signed by manufacturer,
covering failure of the factory-applied exterior finish on metal wall panels within
the specified warranty period and agreeing to repair finish or replace wall panels
that show evidence of finish deterioration. Deterioration of finish includes, but is
not limited to, color fade, chalking, cracking, peeling, and loss of film integrity.

C. Special Weathertight Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by
manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace metal roof panel assembly that fails to
remain weathertight within the specified warranty period.
D. Weathertight Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.08 MOCK-UP
A. Construct a complete mock-up for a 15.0 square meter wall panel. Assemble to
illustrate component assembly including through wall flashings, attachments,
anchors and perimeter sealants.
If approved by the Engineer mock-up can remain as part of the Works.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Products and manufactures specified hereinafter are specified for the proposes
of establishing minimum quality standards. Products which are equal to or better
than those specified and which conform to the design requirements and colour
selections may be acceptable subject to the Engineer’s approval.

Refer volume - I
2.03 PANEL EXTERIOR SHEET MATERIAL

A. Precoated aluminium panel sheet, of 4mm thickness, with 3 mm polyethylene
insulation and min. 0.5mm aluminium sheet on both sides, mill finished. Weight
of the sheet min. 5.5 kg/m2. Sheet having a dB rating of 26. Colour will be as
B. Aluminium sheet 0.5mm thick on each face will have the following properties:
1 Alloy PERALUMAN
2 Tensile Strength
3 0.2% proof stress
4 Elongation
5 Modulus of elasticity
C. Thermal conductivity of the core material (K-valve) will be 0.29 w/mk.

D. Panel when tested to fire behaviour must have results as per BS 476.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Aluminium Channel: Aluminium channel of standard manufacturer’s size or as

detailed in drawings, Engineer to select the sizes from manufacturers standard
size.
B. Steel Brackets: Steel brackets of manufacturer’s standard size and thickness as

required.
C. Pins: Steel pins of 10mm thickness, with spring washers on either side.
D. Gasket: Manufacturer’s standard type suitable for use with panel system,
permanently resilient.
E. Sealants: Refer Section 07920.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-
welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1 Use stainless-steel fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized steel
fasteners for interior applications.
2 Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of panel by means of
plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
3 Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of exposed fasteners
located on weather side of panels.
B. Accessories: Unless otherwise specified, provide components required for a
complete wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fascia, mullions, sills,
corner units, clips, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure
strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of panels.
1 Closure Strips: Closed-cell, self-extinguishing, expanded, cellular, rubber or
cross-linked, polyolefin-foam flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match
configuration of panels. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to
ensure weathertight construction.
2 Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound
sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,
nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
3 Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone-rubber
sealant as recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded
for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur
components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest
extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as
necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by
laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and
structural requirements.
B. Apply bituminous coating or other permanent separation materials on concealed
panel surfaces where panels would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate
materials that are noncompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of
either materials or finishes.
C. Fabricate panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight
seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise
from movements within panel assembly.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.07 SECONDARY FRAMING

A. Panel Supports and Anchorage: Provide grits, furring channels, angles, plates,
bracing, and other secondary framing members as recommended by the
manufacturer.
1 Grits: C- or Z-shaped sections fabricated from 0.0598 inch (1.5mm) thick, shop-
painted, roll-formed steel.
2 Flange and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8 x 1-5/8 inch (41 x 41mm) angles, fabricated from
0.0598 inch (1.5 mm) thick, shop-painted, roll-formed steel.
3 Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick, cold-formed,
galvanized steel sections.
4 Secondary structural members shall be manufacturer's standard sections
fabricated from 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick, cold-formed galvanized steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements indicated for conditions affecting performance of metal panel walls.

1 Panel Supports and Anchorage: Examine wall framing to verify that grits, angles,
and other secondary structural panel support members and anchorage have
been installed to meet requirements of panel manufacturer.
2 Do not proceed with wall panel installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate metal wall panels with rain drainage work; flashing; trim; and
construction of soffits, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.
B. Promptly remove protective film, if any, from exposed surfaces of metal panels.
Strip with care to avoid damage to finish.
C. Secondary Structural Supports: Install grits, angles, and other secondary
structural panel support members and anchorage according to the Light Gauge
Structural Institute's "Guide Specifications," for "Manufactured Roof and Wall
Panels."
3.03 PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with panel manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and
supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1 Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted.
2 Install panels with concealed fasteners.
3 Locate and space exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment.
Use proper tools to obtain controlled, uniform compression for positive seal
without rupture of neoprene washer.
B. Accessories: Install components required for a complete wall panel assembly
including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, seam covers,
flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and
where required for weatherproof performance of wall panel assemblies. Provide
types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,
types recommended by panel manufacturer.
1 Install weatherseal to prevent air and moisture penetration. Flash and seal
panels at ends and intersections with other materials with rubber, neoprene, or
other closures to exclude weather.
2 Seal panel end laps with a bead of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side
joints where recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Panels: Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill
angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as necessary for waterproofing. Handle and
apply sealant and back-up according to sealant manufacturer's written
instructions.
1 Align bottom of wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with
self-tapping screws.
2 Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to
compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or
panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.
3 Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior
walls.
E. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with
a bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
F. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2
years.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the Work that have
been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup
or similar minor repair procedures.
B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as
soon as each panel is installed. On completion of panel installation, clean
finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer and maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools appliances and equipment, and perform all
operations and services necessary for the complete installation of Flashing and
all related components as indicated and detailed on the drawings.
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without
failing.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation
instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material
and fabricated product.
B. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of
joining, and anchorage details.
C. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified
finish. Where finish involves normal colour and texture variations, include
Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations
expected.

sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Prior to installing sheet metal flashing and trim, construct mockups
indicated to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution.
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper
sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance,
durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher
for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and
durability of alloy and temper designated below:
1 Mill-Finish Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003-H14, with a
minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1.0 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2 Anodized Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5005-H14, with a
minimum thickness of 0.050 inch (1.2 mm).
3 Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003-H14, with
a minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1.0 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
4 Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T52, with a
minimum thickness of 0.080 inch (2.0 mm) for primary legs of extrusions that are
anodized, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, Type 304, soft annealed, with No. 2D finish,
except where harder temper is required for forming or performance; minimum
0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90 (ASTM A 526M, Z 275), commercial
quality, or ASTM A 527, G 90 (ASTM A 527M, Z 275), lock-forming quality, hot-
dip galvanized steel sheet with 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where
indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ-50 coating,
Grade 40 (ASTM A 792M, Class AZ-150 coating, Grade 275) or to suit project
conditions, with 55 percent aluminum, not less than 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 COUNTER FLASHING
A. Provide to secure fixing of waterproofing membrane to the parapets and

upstands.
2.03 COPINGS
B. Provide copings in shapes and sizes indicated, with shop-fabricated corners.

Include anchor plates, cleats or other attachment devices, concealed splice
plates; and trim other accessories indicated or required for complete installation,
with no exposed fasteners. Provide exposed coping components fabricated from
extruded aluminum in thickness indicated, but not less than 0.060 inch (1.5 mm).
C. Finish : Powder organic coating in accordance with BS 6496, colour to match

sample board.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.04 GUTTERS
A. Provide gutters in shapes and sizes indicated, with mitered and welded corners.
Include steel straps formed from at least 0.028-inch- (007-mm-) thick, galvanized
steel sheet; hangers or other attachment devices, screens, end plates; and trim
and other accessories indicated or required for complete installation. Provide
gutters fabricated from extruded aluminum in thickness indicated, but not less
than 1.5mm.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet.
B. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux.
C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, used with an acid flux of
type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer; use a noncorrosive
rosin flux over tinned surfaces.
D. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as

recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with
material being fastened.
E. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of

sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry
film thickness per coat.
F. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying,

nonmigrating sealant.
A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to
comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item
indicated.
B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit
substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once
installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges
folded back to form hems.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
D. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating

concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners

are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
2.07 FINISHES
A. Exposed aluminum surfaces: Powder coated to finish to BS 6496. Color to

Engineer’s approval
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are
to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges
folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates
and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes
and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
B. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates
by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or
other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion
of metal or deterioration of finishes.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing
and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than
natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 07720
ROOF HATCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This Section includes access roof hatches in the slab.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for type of access panel assembly specified, including details of
construction relative to materials, individual components, profiles and finishes.

1 Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, and ceiling
construction details, locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
B. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of access panels and frames,
including anchorage, and accessory items.
C. Samples, 75mm x 125mm minimum size, of panel face material showing factory-
finished colour and texture.
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access panels needed to
gain access to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified under
"Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminium: ASTM B 221.
2.02 ROOF HATCHES
A. Door and frame: Aluminium
B. Hinge: Continuous aluminium piano hinge, set to open 180 degrees.
C. Latch: flush screw driver operated cam latches.

D. Finish: Powder coated, white colour.
E. Size: 600x600 mm.
F. Roof hatches shall be provided wherever required to serve the maintenance for
electro-mechanical services.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access

panel installation, including sizes of openings to receive access panel and frame,
as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. Coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access panels.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING
PART-1 - GENERAL
To be read with Division 1 – General Requirements

A. This Section includes fire stopping for the following
1 Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls, partitions, floor and roof
construction including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes,
ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items including curtain walls
2 2. All openings in slabs at Mechanical Rooms including spaces leftover in the shaft
after installation of ducts shall be sealed with non-combustible materials to
maintain the required fire-rating continuity of the floor construction
3 Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing
compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings and openings containing
penetrating items
4 Sealant joints in fire-resistance construction
5 Fire safing behind insulated glass spandrel panel, and at places as shown on
drawings
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 719: Test method for adhesion and cohesion of elastomeric joint sealants
under Cyclic Movement.
B. ASTM C 920:Specification for elastomeric joint sealants
C. ASTM C 1193:Guide for Use of joint sealants
D. ASTM E 84: Test method for surface burning characteristics and building materials
E. ASTM E 119: Test Methods for fire tests of building construction & materials.
F. ASTM E 136: Test method for behaviour of materials in a vertical tube furnace at
750'C
G. ASTM E 814: Test method for fire tests of through-penetration fire stops
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to
adjoining construction for each through-penetration firestop system, and each kind
of construction condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop
design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing
compliance with requirements for each condition indicated
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that

their products comply with specific requirements
D. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and
inspecting agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based
on comprehensive testing of current products.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects
with project names, addresses, names of Engineers and Owners, and other
information specified.
F Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local
regulations controlling use of volatile organic components (VOCs) and are non-
toxic to building occupants.

A. Installer qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is certified, licensed,
or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary
experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the
Contractor or to an installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer
qualification on the buyer.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop system for each
kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single
manufacturer.
C. Field-Construction Mock-up: Prior to installing firestopping, erect mock-ups for
each different through-penetration firestop system indicated to verify selections
made and to demonstrate qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-ups
using materials indicated for final installations.
D. Co-ordination Work: Co-ordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to
ensure that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per
specified requirements.
1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the
spread of fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and
other gases.
B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration
firestop system with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not
less than that equalling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction
penetrated.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C.
T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration
firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM
D. E 814, where indicated and where systems protect penetrating items to exposed to
contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T-rated assemblies are
required where the following conditions exist:
1 Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities.
2 Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft
enclosure.
3 Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing
doors required to have a temperature-rise rating.
4 Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 100mm dia nominal
pipe or 262 square centimetres in overall cross-sectional area.
E. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings
indicated, as determined per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equalling or
exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs.
F. Fire stopping expose to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide
products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
1 For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide
moisture-resistance through-penetration firestop systems.
2 For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of
supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other
means.
3 For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop
systems not requiring removal of insulation.
G. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flamed-spread values of
less than 25 and smoke-developed values of less than 450, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
H.
Provide firestopping system(s) of sufficient thickness, with and density to provide
and maintain all required fire resistance rating, in accordance with local authorities.

A. Deliver firestopping products to project site in original, unopened containers or
packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, if applicable; qualified
testing and inspecting agency classification marking applicable to Project; curing
time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage
due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
C. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behind
other construction until Owner's inspection agency and authorities having
jurisdiction, if required, have examined each installation.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of
establishing minimum quality standards. Products which are equal to or better than
those specified, and which conform to the Engineer’s design requirements and
colour selections, may be acceptable subject to the Engineer’s approval. Engineer
reserves the right to select any product from the full range of acceptable
manufacturers.
2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURER
Refer NEB Approved List.
2.03 Firestopping components and accessories.

A. All firestopping materials shall be as approved by Local authorities.
B. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible
with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any,
penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
C. Fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems.
1 Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place
concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent
strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to
concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
2 Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-
emulsify during exposure to moisture.
3 Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and
lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
4 Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no
solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
5 Flexible Fire Seal: Compressible fire retardant foam faced either side with an
intumescent sheet.
6 Non-shrink putty: One part intumescent non-setting compound, which will expand
in volume when exposed to high temperatures.
7 Silicone Sealants: Moisture curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-
curing elastomeric sealants.
D. Accessories: Use only approved components specified by the firestopping
manufacturer for the designated fire-resistance - rated systems. Accessories
include but are not limited to the following items:
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following:
a. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2 years.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent
leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated formboard.
d. Joint fillers of joint sealants.
2.03 FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Type of Fill Materials for firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items: One or more
of the following:
1 Latex sealant.
2 Silicone sealant.
3 Intumescent putty.
Type of Fill Materials Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: One
B. or more of the following:
1 Latex sealant.
2 Silicone sealant.
Type of Fill Materials for Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing
C. : One or more of the following:
1 Latex sealant.
2 Silicone sealant.
4 Firestop device.
D. Type of Fill Materials for Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables: One or more of the
following:
1 Latex sealant.
2 Silicone sealant.
4 Non-shrink putty.
E. Type of Fill Materials for Firestop Systems for Cable Trays: One or more of the
following:
1 Latex sealant.
3 Non-shrink putty.
F. Type of Fill Materials for Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes: One or more of the
following:
1 Latex sealant.
3 Non-shrink putty.
G. Type of Fill Materials for Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:
One or more of the following:
1 Latex sealant.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
H. Type of Fill Materials Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrations:

One or both of the following:
1 Latex sealant.
I. Type of Fill Materials for Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrations: One or
more of the following:
1 Latex sealant.
2 Firestop device.
J.
Use flexible fire seal separation in raised floor areas where indicated on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Examination
A. Examine substrates and conditions with installer present, for compliance, with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other
conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 Preparation
A. Surface cleaning: clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing
firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the
1 Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and
from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.
2 Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound
surface capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3 Priming: prime substrate where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using
the manufacturers recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas
of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
4 Masking Tape: use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining
surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as
soon as it impossible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.03 Installation
A. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to

support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce
the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of
designated through-penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials,
remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as
permanent components of firestop systems.
B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants application and at position required
to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-
resistance rating required.
C. Install sealant by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and
fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint
configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative
to joint width that provide optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at
the same time joint fillers are installed.
D. Tool nonsag sealant immediately after sealant application and prior to the time
skinning or curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated
or required to produce fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and
to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess
sealant from surface adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolour
sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
E. Cleaning
1 Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work
progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of
firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur.
2 Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes
so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion.
If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated firestoppping immediately and install new materials to
produce firestopping complying with specified requirements.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those
specified by reference to this Section:
B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:

1 Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a. Control joints in cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete units.

b. Control joints in unit masonry.
c. Joints between different materials listed above.
d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and
windows.
e. Other joints as indicated.
2 Exterior joints horizontal traffic surface:
a. Control and expansion joints in pavers.
3 Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete
walls and partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows, and elevator entrances.
f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
g. Other joints as indicated.
4 Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Control joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Control joints in tile flooring.
c. Other joints as indicated.

A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and
airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants
in 13-mm- wide joints formed between two 300-mm- long strips of actual material
the sealant to be with. To be inspected for staining one week and 4 weeks after
the sample is done.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use
indicated.
D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating
the following:
1 Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2 Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants
comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product
formulations.
F. Submit a detailed schedule of sealant usage for all locations. List each sealant
material, joint fillers, colour and product data for each location of use.

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing
joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of
B. Manufacturer of sealants shall provide a qualified technical representative who
will visit the site for the purpose of advising the Installer of the proper procedures
and precautions in the application of the materials.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a
single manufacturer.
D. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows
to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and qualities of materials and execution:
1 Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to
receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this
Section.

A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with
labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration
date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi component materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions
to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low
temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants
under the following conditions:
1 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint sealant manufacturer.
2 When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where
joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint
substrates.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Contractor agreeing to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1 Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that
are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: To match adjacent surfaces and to Engineer’s
approval.
C. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other
requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant.
D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: For sealants to be nonstaining to porous
substrates such as marble, limestone, granite etc, provide products that have
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint
substrates indicated for Project.
E. Continuous-Immersion-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric
sealants will be immersed continuously in water, provide products that have
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247.
2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone sealant: One part, non-sag, silicone sealant; capable of +50% movement
as measured in compliance with ASTM C 719; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, use 'O' related to joint substrate for vertical joints.
B. Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: One part, non-sag, elastomeric silicone
sealant formulated with fungicide for mildew resistance; ASTM C920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, for use around plumbing fixtures and ceramic tile joints in
wet areas and counter tops to walls.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Two-component, urethane - based elastomeric sealant, self-leveling, capable of

+25% movement as measured in compliance with ASTM C719, ASTM C920,
Type M, Grade P, Class 25, use T. for use in typical exterior and interior
horizontal traffic joints.
D. Single component, urethane elastomeric sealant, capable of +25% movement as
measured in compliance with ASTM C719, ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, use T for use in exterior traffic joints where slopes occur.
2.03 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT

A. Latex Sealant : One part nonsag, mildew resistant, acrylic-emulsion sealant
complying with ASTM C834, formulated to be paintable and recommended for
exposed applications on interior locations involving joint movement of not more
than plus or minus 5%.
2.04 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant where indicated on drawings: Provide manufacturer's
standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C
834 and the following:
1 Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints
and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
2.05 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field
experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control
sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing
complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of
remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C).
Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a
secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum
sealant performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by
sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-
filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result
in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from
preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to
manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or
other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent
nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of
sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint
sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and
other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint
sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the
1 Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective
coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces like concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces
of ceramic tiles etc by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or
a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining
from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air.
2 Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
3 Clean nonporous surfaces like metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of
ceramic tile etc with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint
sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or
prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage
or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant
with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged
by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions

for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements
apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193
for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions
indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of
ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to
materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated or required to support sealants during
application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability.
1 Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2 Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3 Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
E. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2
years.
F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the
same time backings are installed:
1 Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2 Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3 Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified
1 Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2 Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3 Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless
4 Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated.
5 Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess

depth and at locations indicated.
a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration.
Any sealant found out of plumb or cracking or any work otherwise defective shall
be taken out and replaced to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer, at no
additional cost to the Project.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work
progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by
manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with
contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction
operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at
time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants
immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the
original work.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment, and perform all services and
operations necessary for the supply and installation of the pressed steel frames
and hollow metal doors to all interior locations throughout as indicated on the
drawings, detailed and as scheduled.
The work shall include but not necessarily limited to:
1 Standard and custom made hollow metal doors and frames as detailed.
2 Insulated hollow metal doors and frames all exterior locations and to interior
mechanical rooms and any locations as scheduled with acoustical provisions.
3 All pressed steel frames shall be formed to profiles indicated on the drawings.
4 Fire rated doors as scheduled on drawings, with local fire department approval.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door
designation, type, level and model, material description, core description,
construction details, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and
finishes.
B. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and
frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types,
conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation
requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of
joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepare a sample not less
than 75 by 125 mm and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of
Work.
D. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in
preparing schedule for doors and frames.
E. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated
and exceeding limitations of labelled assemblies, submit manufacturer's
certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform
to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labelled
construction.
A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed
and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to local authorities, for
fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain units from one source and by a single

manufacturer.
D. Mockups: Prior to fabrication of systems, construct mock-ups for each form of
construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials
and execution. Simulate all types of surrounding finish materials for mock-ups.
Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for final unit of work.
Locate mock-up in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Engineer's approval of mock-ups before start of final unit of work.
Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as
a standard for judging the completed work.

A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection
during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage
to finish of factory-finished doors and frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be
repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to
Engineer. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as
directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum
100-mm high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters
that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove
cartons immediately. Provide minimum 6-mm spaces between stacked doors to
permit air circulation.

1.05 WARRANY
A. Provide warranty of 5 years from manufacturers and suppliers for doors and
hardware from the date of substantial completion of works.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET
A. Sheet steel to be cold rolled, commercial quality, galvanized with a Zinc coating
of 107 gm/m2 and conforming to BS 729 standards.
2.02 FLUSH STEEL DOORS AND PANELS
A. Leaf: Door leaf shall be hollow section, factory fabricated with two sheets of 18
gauge, stretch leveled wipe coat galvanized steel sheets. The leafs shall be
reinforced on the side with continuous steel stiffeners channels, 1.3mm thick. (18
gauge) spot welded to face sheets, and to provide level and rigid faces.
Continuous vertical formed steel sections 6” apart, shall be spot welded to both
face sheets.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Core: The doors shall be reinforced on the side with continuous, steel stiffeners
to provide level and rigid faces. Door face panels shall be securely fixed to the
C. steel reinforcing
Provide members. resilient rubber, fitted into predrilled holes and where
sound-deadening
required fire resisting material continuously throughout cores of doors.
D. Provide all other necessary and proper reinforcing for locksets, closers, butts and
all other ironmongery. Reinforcing shall be factory tapped for all screws.
2.03 PRESSED STEEL FRAMES

A. Door frames shall be minimum 14 gauge 3mm thick zinc coated steel to profiles
and section size as scheduled and indicated on drawings. Frames shall be press-
formed or break-formed cold-rolled and annealed steel.
B. Corners of all frames shall be continuously welded together with outside corners
mitred and with all welds ground smooth on exposed surfaces.
C. Door frames shall be mortised and provided with reinforcement for all
ironmongery including hardware door checks hinges and closers. Reinforcement
plates shall be at least 6mm thick.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Silencers: Resilient bumpers to be round, black rubber for stud mounting.
B. Fasteners: To be cadmium plated steel, recessed, flat or oval lead Philips screws
where concealed and satin stainless steel where exposed.
C. Hinges: Three (3) per door.
D. Weather Stripping: Drop thresholds shall be as specified under ‘Specifications
for Hardware’
2.06 PROTECTIVE PAINTING

A. Primer to be of zinc rich primer to be brush or spray applied.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frames as welded unit to profiles as detailed and where applicable for
drywall slip-on type. Construct panel and flush doors without face seams,
including fire-rated, non-insulated and on sound rated doors. Minimum face
thickness for fire rated doors to be in accordance with local Fire Brigade
requirements.
B. Provide for glass or louvers and closely fitted glass stops square or rectangular in
profile with mitred corners, set flush and true with concealed fastenings.
C. Doors and frames drilled and tapped to receive mortised hinges, locks, latches,
electro-magnetic locks and readers and sensors and all electrical devices in
accordance with door hardware Schedule.
D. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single rubber silencers for single door
on strike side and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without
mullion.
E. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door unit as scheduled.
F. Close top edge of exterior doors and fire rated doors flush with inverted steel
channel closure. Seal joints watertight.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
G. Finishes:
1 Doors and frames at exterior locations to get a coat of galvanized and prime
painted.
2 Doors and frames at interiors to be shop degreased, phosphatized and prime
painted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop
Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove
temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
1 Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before
construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
2 In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install
adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike
jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped
anchors.
3 In existing concrete or masonry construction, provide at least three completed
opening anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at
4 In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install
adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike
jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
5 For in-place gypsum board partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on frames.
6 Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

7 For openings 2286 mm or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge
and strike jambs.
C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in
frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to
comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G.
1 Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80.
2 Smoke-Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105.

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective
wrappings from doors and frames.
C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel
doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 08120
ALUMINUM WORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment and provide all services and
operations necessary for complete design fabrication and installation of all glass
and aluminium storefront entrance, windows, as indicated on the drawings, as
specified and scheduled herein.
B. The work of this section shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to:
1 Aluminium tube system and doors with vision glass.
2 Standard flush glazed stops and caps with entrance adapters.
3 Aluminium glazed doors square and all other shapes as indicated on drawings.
4 Aluminium windows, with vision glass as scheduled.
5 Aluminium curtain walls (stick and mullion type). As detailed on drawing for
external elevations.
6 Perimeter sealants.
7 Aluminium profiles to be powder coated.
A. Supply and install aluminium framing to glazed doors, windows and interior areas
as indicated and detailed on the drawings.
B. Aluminium Stick Type System: The self supporting glazed aluminium curtain wall
system shall consist of individual members erected separately. Major
components consist of aluminium vertical mullions, horizontal rails, and glazed.
Mullions shall be flush glazed with on protruding stops.
C. Provide offset points to all entrance doors.
1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum door systems capable of withstanding loads and

thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based
on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated
for this Project. Failure includes the following:
1 Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits.
Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movement, to glazing units.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.

C. Wind Loads: Provide door systems, including anchorage, capable of
withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7,
"Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical
Procedure," whichever are more stringent.
1 Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to
1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is smaller, unless otherwise
indicated.
2 Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide door systems that do not evidence
material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function
normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2
percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330.
D. Dead Loads: Provide members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce
glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.
1 Provide a minimum 3.18-mm clearance between members and top of glazing or
other fixed part immediately below.
2 Provide a minimum 1.59-mm clearance between members and operable doors.
E. Live Loads: Provide door systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the
supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live
loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation.
F. Air Infiltration: Provide door systems with permanent resistance to air leakage
through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3
L/s/sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-
pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75.2 Pa).
G. Water Penetration: Provide door systems that do not evidence water leakage
through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at
minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting wind-load design
pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures," but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa).
H. Thermal Movements: Provide door systems, including anchorage, that

accommodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint
sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to
function properly, and other detrimental effects.
I. Structural-Support Movement: Provide door systems that accommodate

structural movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
J. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminium windows with an integral,

concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials
and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct
metal-to-metal contact.
1 Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three
years and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance
2 and condensation
Provide and to tested
thermal barriers show adequate
accordingstrength
to AAMA and security
505; of glass
determine theretention.
allowable
design shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505.
3 Provide hardware with low conductivity or non-metallic material for hardware
bridging thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each system required, including:

1 Construction details and fabrication methods.
2 Profiles and dimensions of individual components.
3 Data on hardware, accessories and finishes.
4 Recommendations for maintaining and cleaning exterior surfaces.
B. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type required

including information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard Product Data
and the following:
1 Layout and installation details, including anchors.
2 Full-size section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement
and stiffeners.
3 Location of weep holes.
4 Panning details.
5 Hardware, including operators.
6 Glazing details.
7 Accessories.
8 Metal thicknesses.
9 Arrangement of components.
10 Jointing.
11 Details of site connections.
12 Fastenings.
13 Flashings.
14 Metal finishes.
15 Weather stripping.
16 Subframing.
17 Sealants.
18 Other pertinent information.
C. Hardware Schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule organized into sets

based on hardware specified. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, windows
and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish.
Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete designations of
every item required for each door opening.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
D. Samples: Submit pairs of samples of each specified color and finish on 300mm
long sections of extrusions or formed shapes.
E. Samples for Verification: Submit typical finished panels of minimum 600 mm x

600 mm size made from full-size components and showing details of joinery,
Submit panels for each type of glass indicated on drawings.
Finish of frames shall be as specified.
Hardware items.
F. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing
laboratory showing that aluminum door systems have been tested in accordance
with specified test procedures and comply with performance characteristics
indicated.

installation of aluminium works similar in material, design, and extent to those
required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing aluminium work similar

to that indicated for this project with a record of successful in-service
performance and sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminium doors from one source and by a

single manufacturer.
D. Mockups: Prior to fabrication of systems, construct mockups for each form of

construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample
and execution. Simulate all types of surrounding finish materials for mockups.
Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for final unit of work.
Locate mock-up in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before start of final unit of work.
Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as
a standard for judging the completed work.
E. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated

and exceeding limitations of labelled assemblies, submit manufacturer's
certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform
to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labelled
construction.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
F. Smoke Seal Doors: Comply with requirements of local authorities. Provide

necessary electrical control/mechanisms for the doors to remain closed in case of
fire/smoke in the zone. Doors shall remain in closed position and shall be
connected to and operable from fire alarm panel.
A. Deliver components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging.
B. Store components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or

concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene
sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air.
A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before

fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work.
1.08 Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2
years.
A. Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer or contractor, that the work

involving glazed aluminium works are of good quality, free from defects and in
conformance with the requirements of the contract documents and further
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for
strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with
ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate,
and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire.
B. Steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM A 36
for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and
strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip.
C. Steel Sub-frames: Hot rolled steel to ASTM A569 and galvanized.

D. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing".
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc

plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive
and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other
components.
1 Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less
than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic
stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard non-corrosive
pressed-in splined grommet nuts.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and

reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic
stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.
G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide hot-dip galvanized steel inserts
complying with ASTM A 123.
H. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable

compressible weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with
ASTM D 2000.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Doors & Windows: Provide doors and windows with minimum 3.2mm thick
extruded tubular frame members and panel members, fabricated with mechanical
joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts.
1 Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without
disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing
stops, with exterior stops anchored for non-removal. Refer to Section 08800 for
details
B. Door Louvers: Provide louvers for doors where indicated with blades formed of
extruded aluminum set into the frame.
1 Louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades.
2.03 HARDWARE
A. All hardware shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation.
B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as required or specified for operation of each

door, including the items of sizes, number, and type recommended by
manufacturer for service required to the approval of the Engineer. Finish
exposed parts to match door finish, unless otherwise indicated. Co-ordinate with
Section 08710 for Master Keying.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.04 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted
joints with ends coped or mitred to produce hairline joints free of burrs and
distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in
Project according to Shop Drawings.
B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application,

and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site.
Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
1 Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and
grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete
these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes.
2 Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation
at project site.
3 Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible.
C. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or
deformations, before finishing.
D. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection

devices.
E. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and

moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.
F. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for

performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.
G. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or
tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will
contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous paint.
H. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of
contacting members.
I. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
J. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping at

fixed stops.
1 Provide EPDM or neoprene-blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail,
adjustable for contact with threshold.
2 At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene
silencers on stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.05 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating
finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent

pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved
Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations
in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Exposed Aluminium Finish: Powder organic coating of minimum 60 micron

thickness in accordance with BS 6496, colour as per approved mock-up; color to
be permanent and free from "banding" or "streaking" and to the approval of the
Engineer.
D. Stainless Steel Finish: To match approved sample.
E. Colour: Light Grey and Dark Grey as selected.
2.06 STEEL PRIMING
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying primer.
B. Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to

remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond.
Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel.
C. Priming: Apply manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer immediately

after surface preparation and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with
requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect
installation of aluminum doors. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before
proceeding with the installation.
1 Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash.
Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
B. Set sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or
gaskets, as shown on Shop Drawings, to provide weathertight construction.
Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for compounds, fillers, and gaskets to
be installed concurrently with window units. Coordinate installation with wall
flashings and other components of the Work.
C. Verify dimensions of openings by field measurements so those units will be

accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure.
D. Coordinate with the work of other trades and provide items to be placed during
the installation of other work. Check the location of such items and verify that
they have been set accurately in relation to the final location of windows.
E. Erect the units, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations. Employ only experienced erectors.
F. Erection Tolerances: Erect within the following tolerances:

1 Variation from plumb: 3mm maximum.
2 Variation from level: 3mm maximum.
G. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the
manufacturer or fabricator and in accordance with his recommendations. Do not
cut through reinforcing members. Restore finish completely to protect material
and remove all evidence of cutting and trimming. Remove and replace members
where cutting and trimming have impaired strength or appearance.
H. Do not erect members which are observed to be warped, bowed, deformed or

otherwise damaged or defaced to such extent as to impair strength or
appearance. Remove and replace members damaged in the process of erection,
as directed.
I. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints. Support on metal
shims and secure in place by bolting to clip angles and similar supports anchored
to supporting structure. Use only the tapes of equipment, ropes, wedges,
spacers, shims and other items during erection which will not stain or mark the
finish of units.
J. Paint concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials with a heavy coating of

bituminous paint, or provide other separation as per manufacturer's
recommendations.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
K. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of material

being welded, and in accordance with appropriate recommendations of the AWS.
Use only methods which will avoid distortion or discolouration of exposed faces.
Grind exposed welds smooth, using only clean wheels and compounds which are
free of iron or iron compounds. Restore finish of component parts after welding
and grinding.
L. Solder and braze only to fill or seal joints (not to form structural joints), and in
accordance with component part manufacturer's recommendations. Grind
smooth and restore finish.
M. Paint clip angles and other ferrous metal parts, which will be concealed, with zinc
chromate paint.
N. Seal joints in a concealed manner, unless exposed sealant is shown.
O. Adjust hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at weather stripping.
Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without

binding, and for weathertight closure.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation,
exercising care to avoid damage to coatings.
B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in

the "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess
glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum
surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the

construction period to ensure that system will be without damage or deterioration,
other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 08140
WOODEN DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK
A. Finish hardware.
B. Steel doors and frames.
A. Unless otherwise specified, all products provided for this project shall be
produced by a single manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer of wood doors shall have not less than ten years
successful production of the quality of wood doors specified.
C. Wood doors shall comply with AWI Quality Standards of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute, Premium Grade, Section 1400, Eighth Edition,
Version 2.0.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, specifications, installation
instructions, warranty form and other data to indicate compliance with
specified requirements.
B. Submit shop drawings which shall include:
1. Door schedule indicating opening identification number, door type,
grade, size, thickness, swing, and undercuts.
2. Door elevations indicating type of construction.
3. Use same reference numbers for openings and details as on the
Contract Drawings.
4. Indicate pre-fitting and pre-machining requirements including hardware
locations.
A. Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent
damage, soiling and deterioration. Replace doors damaged from any
cause before final inspection.
B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and with "On-Site-Care"
requirements of AWI pamphlet "Care and Finishing of Wood Doors."
C. Deliver wood doors to site after wet construction operations are completed
and dry, and building has reached average prevailing relative humidity.
D. Deliver pre-finished components in manufacturer's original unopened
protective covering or container, clearly marked with manufacturer's name,
brand name and identifying number on the covering.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Store in clean, dry, well-ventilated area protected from sunlight. Avoid

extreme heat, cold, dryness or humidity; relative humidity in storage area
shall be not less than 30% nor greater than 60%. Store flat over level surface
above floor on wood blocking. Under bottom door and over top of stack,
provide plywood or corrugated cardboard for protection.
F. Do not drag doors across one another or across other surfaces.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide the manufacturer's written warranty, agreeing to repair or replace
wood doors for one year after Date of Material Completion which have:
1. Delaminated in any degree
2. Warped or twisted 1/4" or more in plane of door face
3. Telegraphed stile, rail or core through the face to cause surface variation
in excess of 1/100"
in any 3" span
4. Any faulty workmanship
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD DOORS

A. Wood doors shall be 5 or 7–ply and have solid particleboard core, except
where fire rating requires a different core, meeting or exceeding the
requirements of ANSI A208.1, CS236, type 1 Density C. Class 1, AWI
Specification Symbol PC-5/PC-7. AWI1300 PC-5/PC-7 prefinished /
premachined.
B. Stiles and rails shall be securely bonded to the core by non-mechanical
method, and shall be minimum 1-3/8" vertical stiles, 1-1/8" top and 1-1/2"
bottom rails. Stiles shall match face veneer of doors in appearance.
C. Adhesive shall be Type 1.
D. Face veneer shall be AWI Premium Grade Veneer with the quality
characteristics of AW1200-S-8 Panel Products, and shall match existing.
The minimum thickness of face veneer shall be 1/40" before sanding.
E. Labeled wood fire doors shall be AWI Type FD, flush panel, with face
veneers matching those specified for regular wood doors, with non-
combustible mineral core. Provide fire retardant treated matching hardwood,
minimum 5/8" after trimming at top rail, 1/2" minimum after trimming at stiles
and 1-1/2" minimum after trimming at bottom rail. Fire ratings shall be as
indicated on the Door Schedule.
F. Provide metal frames and removable glazing beads at glazed openings.
Prefinished in color as approved by the Architect from the manufacturer’s
standard colors. Frames shall provide rating protection indicated.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Face veneer and cross band shall be glued to the core in a hot press. The
face veneer shall be center balanced on all doors.
B. Unless otherwise required to match hardware bevel, provide 1/8" standard
bevel at strike side stiles.
C. Fabricate and trim doors to size at the factory to coordinate with approved
shop drawings and to accommodate floor finishes indicated on the finish
schedule. Pre-fit doors as specified below to receive specified hardware
conforming to requirements of the hardware suppliers. Provide cut-outs to
receive glazed panels and door louvers.
D. Doors shall be factory-finished as specified below after pre-fitting,
conforming to requirements of Section 1500 AWI Standards. Submit
samples of stained finish to Architect for approval before beginning work.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Pre-finish all wood doors at factory to match manufacturer’s standard
color approved by the Architect.
B. Finish shall consist of stain and clear top coats consisting of:
1. Highly pigmented wiping filler/stain, hand-applied to provide grain depth
and definition.
2. Coat of clear vinyl sealer, oven-dried and sanded.
3. Clear top coat, oven-dried.
4. Final clear topcoat, oven dried.
C. Top and bottom edges shall be sealed.
D. Pre-finished doors shall be individually packaged.
2.4 PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE

A. Pre-machine all wood doors at factory.
B. Pre-machine doors in accordance with final approved hardware and frame
schedule.
C. Pre-machine doors within industry tolerances. A plus or minus 1/32" will be
allowed on all hardware locations. A plus 1/32" minus 0" tolerance will be
allowed on hinge cutouts. A plus 1/64" minus 0" tolerance will be allowed on
lock front preparation cutouts.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors within openings in hollow metal frames. Provide shims and
blocking as required to maintain proper positioning.
B. Protect new doors after hanging. Protection shall prevent gouges in faces,
stains, dirt, or damage.
C. Replace pre-finished doors damaged prior to Date of Material Completion.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check each door to ensure operation and function requirements.
B. Replace or rehang doors which are hinge bound and do not swing or operate
without binding.
C. Remove and replace doors which do not meet requirements specified under
WARRANTY above.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 083100 – ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes general requirements for access doors.
B. Provide doors where required for access to work of other divisions and other locations required.
Provide fire-rated door assemblies in fire-rated wall assemblies.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA : National Fire Protection Association

1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data. Include manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80 and are labeled and listed by
UL, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities
B. Provide label from acceptable testing and inspecting organization on each fire-rated access door
assembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: As listed below.
B. General: Provide access doors manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts and
ready for installation.
C. Steel and Stainless Steel Access Doors and Frames:

1. Steel Fire-Rated Units: Fabricate in a manner similar to steel access doors and frames,
except provide manufacturer’s standard insulated flush panel doors with self-closing
mechanism.
a. Masonry and Concrete Walls: Exposed flange not over 1-inch wide will be
allowed.
NEB-P-17-1747 1/2 Civil Specs./Sce.083100

MAIN WORKS
b. Veneer Plaster (and Gypsum Wallboard) Walls: Nystrom “APFR-WP” or equal

with recessed “Drywall” beads, UL and WH listed. Exposed flanges will not be
allowed.
2. Stainless Steel Fire-Rated Units: Fabricate in a manner similar to stainless steel access
doors and frames, except provide manufacturer’s standard insulated flush panel doors
with self-closing mechanism.
a. Masonry and Concrete Walls: Exposed flange not over 1-inch wide will be
allowed.
b. Veneer Plaster (and Gypsum Wallboard) Walls: Nystrom “APFR-WP” or equal
with recessed “Drywall” beads, UL and WH listed. Exposed flange will not be
allowed.
3. Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction, unless otherwise shown. Grind
welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
4. Provide attachment devices and fasteners of the type required to secure access doors to
the types of supports encountered.
5. Non-Rated Frames: Fabricate from 16-gage steel (stainless steel at stainless steel door).
a. Where installed in masonry or concrete, provide frame with exposed flange not
less than 1 inch wide around perimeter of frame, Milcor Style M, Nystrom TM, or
equal; except where fire rated type is required.
b. Where installed in gypsum wallboard surfaces, provide drywall trim, similar to
Milcor Style DW, Nystrom Style WB, or equal.
6. Steel Non-Rated Flush Doors: Fabricate from 14-gage steel with concealed spring hinges
or concealed continuous hinge, set to open to 175 degrees.
7. Stainless Steel Non-Rated Flush Doors: Fabricate from 16-gage stainless steel with
concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous hinge, set to open to 175 degrees.
8. Finish steel with manufacturer’s factory-applied baked enamel prime coat applied over
phosphate protective coating on steel. Finish stainless steel with a #4 finish.
9. Locking Devices: Provide flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks of the number required
to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. Where shown or scheduled, provide
one 1.125 inch mortise cylinder keyed lock per access door. Provide two keys per lock
and key locks alike.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PART 4 - INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation. Coordinate installation with work of
other trades.
B. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb in
relation to adjacent finish surfaces; and horizontal surfaces level.
A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
NEB-P-17-1747 2/2 Civil Specs./Sce.083100

MAIN WORKS
SECTION 08 51 13
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Aluminum windows for new construction work.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Sealing Joints: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
B. Window Screen: Section 08 56 66, DETENTION WINDOW SCREENS.
C. Glazing: Section 08 80 00, GLAZING.
D. Color of finish: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.
1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. Comply with references to extent specified in this section.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Associations (AAMA):
1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-11 - Windows, Doors, and Skylights.
2. AAMA 505-09 - Dry Shrinkage and Composite Performance Thermal Cycle Test
Procedures.
3. AAMA 2605-13 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing
Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
4. AAMA TIR A8-08 - Structural Performance of Composite Thermal Barrier Framing
System.
C. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (ASCE/SEI):
1. 7-10 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):
1. 90.1-13 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
E. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. B209-14 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2. B209M-14 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric).
3. B221-14 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
4. B221M-13 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and
Tubes (Metric).
5. E283-04(2012) - Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

MAIN WORKS
6. E331-00(2009) - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain

Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Conduct preinstallation meeting at project site minimum 60 days before beginning Work of this
section.
1. Required Participants:
a. Contracting Officer's Representative.
b. Architect/Engineer.
c. The Employer Representative.
d. Inspection and Testing Agency.
e. Contractor.
f. Installer.
g. Manufacturer's field representative.
2. Meeting Agenda: Distribute agenda to participants minimum 3 days before meeting.

a. Installation schedule.
b. Installation sequence.
c. Preparatory work.
d. Protection before, during, and after installation.
e. Installation.
f. Transitions and connections to other work.
g. Other items affecting successful completion.
3. Document and distribute meeting minutes to participants to record decisions affecting

installation.
1.5 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit according to Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
B. Submittal Drawings:
1. Indicate window types required for project.
2. Identify window unit components by name and type of metal or material, show construction,
locking systems, mechanical operators, trim, installation and anchorages.
3. Include glazing details and standards for factory glazed units.

MAIN WORKS
C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Description of each product.
2. Installation instructions.
3. Warranty.
D. Sustainable Construction Submittals:
1. Recycled Content: Identify post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content percentage by
weight.
E. Samples:
1. Window Frame: 150 mm (6 inch) long samples showing finishes, specified.
F. Test reports: Indicate each product complies with specifications.
1. Windows.
2. Operating hardware.
G. Certificates: Indicate each product complies with requirements (window characteristics may be
on window schedule or other drawings).

A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Regularly manufactures specified products.
2. Manufactured specified products with satisfactory service on five similar installations for
minimum five years.
a. Provide contact names and addresses for completed projects when requested by
Contracting Officer's Representative.
B. Quality Certified Labels or Certificates:
1. AAMA Label affixed to each window indicating compliance with specification.
2. Certificates in lieu of label with copy of test report maximum 4 years old from independent
testing laboratory and certificate signed by window manufacturer stating that windows
provided comply with specified requirements and AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for
type of window specified.
1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect windows from damage during handling and construction operations before, during and
after installation.
B. Store windows under cover, setting upright.
C. Do not stack windows flat.
D. Do not lay building materials or equipment on windows.

MAIN WORKS
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Construction Warranty: FAR clause 52.246-21, "Warranty of Construction."
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Warrant windows against material and manufacturing defects.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Design windows complying with specified performance:
1. Load Resistance: ASCE/SEI 7 Design criteria as indicated on Drawings.
a. Performance Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 required to resist maximum
positive and negative wind load.
2. Thermal Transmittance: Maximum U-value W/sq. m/degree K (Btu/sq. ft./hr./degree F).
a. Insulating Glass Windows: U-2.8 (U-0.5).
b. Dual Glazed Windows: U-4.0 (U-0.7), or as required by ASHRAE 90.1.
3. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): NFRC 500 Minimum CRF of C 45 , C 50 , C 55.
4. Water Resistance: ASTM E331; No uncontrolled penetration at // 220 Pa (4.50 psf) // 390 Pa
(8.00 psf) //, minimum, pressure differential.
5. Air Infiltration Resistance: ASTM E283; // 1.5 // 0.5 // L/s/sq. m (// 0.3 // 0.1 // cfm/sq. ft.),
maximum at // 75 Pa (1.57 psf) // 300 Pa (6.24 psf) //, minimum, pressure differential.
B. Provide the following operation types for locations indicated on the Drawings.
1. Hung Windows: // Single // Double // Triple // hung.
a. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, minimum
// CW-30 // AW-40 //.
b. Provide units with tilt-in feature permitting both sides of both sash to be cleaned from
interior.
1) Restrict sash tilting without use of maintenance release mechanism and removable
locking handle.
2) Finger operated tilt latches not acceptable.
2. Casement Windows:
// CW-30 // AW-40 //.
3. Projected Windows:

MAIN WORKS

// CW-30 // AW-40 //.
b. Operation:
1) Awning Sash: Project-out and slide down from top.
2) Hopper Sash: Project-in from top and slide up from bottom.
4. Dual Horizontal Sliding Windows:
// CW-30 // AW-40 //.
5. Single Sash Horizontal Sliding Windows:
// CW-30 // AW-40 //.
6. Fixed Windows:
// CW-30 // AW-40 //.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221M (ASTM B221); 6063 alloy, T5 temper.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209M (ASTM B209); 5005 alloy, H15 or H34 temper.
2.3 PRODUCTS - GENERAL

A. Basis of Design: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.
B. Provide windows from one manufacturer.
C. Sustainable Construction Requirements:
1. Aluminum Recycled Content: 80 total recycled content, minimum.
2.4 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

A. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions, AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
B. Thermal-Break Window Construction:
1. Manufacturer’s Standard.
2. Low conductance thermal barrier.
3. Capable of structurally holding sash in position and together.
4. Thermal Break Assemblies: Tested according to AAMA TIR A8 and AAMA 505.
5. Design location of thermal break so that, in closed position, outside air does not come in
direct contact with interior frame of window.
C. Mullions: Match window units.
D. Provide anchors and other related accessories required for installation.

MAIN WORKS
2.5 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, GLAZING.
1. Factory glaze windows.
2. Weep holes through glazed areas are not acceptable.
2.6 INSECT SCREENING

A. Screen Mesh: 18 by 18, AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1. Screen Cloth: Aluminum / Vinyl clad aluminum.
B. Frame: Aluminum, match window unit finish type and color, unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 HARDWARE
A. Locks: Two position locking bolts or cam type tamperproof custodial locks with a single point
control located not higher than 1500 mm (60 inches) from floor level. Locate locking devices in
vent side rail. Provide concealed or nonremovable fastenings for locks and keepers.
B. Locking Device Strikes: Locate adjustable strikes in frame jamb. Fabricate strikes from Type 304
stainless steel or white bronze.
C. Fabricate hinges of noncorrosive metal. Hinges may be either fully concealed when window is
closed or semi-concealed with exposed knuckles and hospital tips. Surface mounted hinges are
not acceptable.
D. Guide Blocks: Fabricate guide blocks of injection molded nylon. Install guide block fully
concealed in vent/frame sill.
E. Hardware for Emergency Ventilation of Windows:
1. Provide windows with hold open linkage.
2. Provide hold open hardware for maximum 150 mm (6 inches) of window opening with
adjustable friction shoe to provide resistance when closing window.
3. Handles: Removable type.
F. Hardware for Maintenance Opening of Windows: Opening beyond limit stop position
accomplished by maintenance key captured by release device when window is in open position.
1. Design operating device to prevent opening with standard tools, coins or bent wire devices.
G. Pole Operators:
1. Provide pole operator and pole hanger where operable windows have hardware more than
1500 mm (60 inches) above floor, but not over 3000 mm (10 feet) above floor.
2. Fabricate pole of tubular anodized aluminum with rubber cap at lower end and standard
push-pull hook at top end to match hardware design.

MAIN WORKS
3. Provide sufficient length for window operation without reaching more than 1500 mm
(60 inches) above floor.
4. Provide one operating pole and one pole hanger in each room or space where pole operation
of windows is required.
H. Weather Stripping: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440; leaf type weather-stripping is not
acceptable.
I. Provide wrenches, keys, or removable locking operating handles, as specified to operate
windows.
1. Provide one emergency ventilating operating handle for every four windows.
2. Provide maintenance or window washer operating handles as required.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate windows to comply specified performance class and grade.
1. Assemble frame and sash so fasteners are concealed when window is closed.
2. Attach locking and hold-open devices to windows with concealed fasteners.
3. Where extrusion wall thickness is less than 3 mm (0.125 inch) thick, provide backup plates
or similar reinforcements for fasteners.
4. Use stainless steel fasteners to secure Venetian blind hanger clips, vent guide blocks, friction
adjuster, and limit opening device.
B. Aluminum Trim:
1. Trim includes casings, closures, and panning.
2. Fabricate to shapes shown, minimum 1.6 mm (0.062 inch) thick.
3. Extruded or formed sections, straight, true, and smooth on exposed surfaces. Curved sections
true to line.
4. Exposed external corners mitered and internal corners coped; fitted with hairline joints.
5. Reinforce 1.6 mm (0.062 inch) thick members with minimum 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick
aluminum.
6. Except for strap anchors, provide reinforcing for fastening near ends and spaced maximum
300 mm (12 inches) on center.
7. Design to allow unrestricted expansion and contraction of members and window frames.
8. Secure to window frames with machine screws or expansion rivets.
9. Exposed screws, fasteners or pop rivets are not acceptable on exterior of casing or trim cover
system.
C. Aluminum Subsills and Stools:
1. Fabricate to shapes shown, minimum 2 mm (0.080 inch) thick extrusion.

MAIN WORKS
2. One piece full length of opening with concealed anchors.

3. Sills turned up back edge minimum 6 mm (1/4 inch). Front edge provide with drip.
4. Sill back edge behind face of window frame. Do not extend to interior surface or bridge
thermal breaks.
5. Do not perforate for anchorage, clip screws, or other requirements.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Finish window units according to NAAMM AMP 500 series.
B. Anodized Aluminum:
1. Clear Anodized Finish: AA-C22A41; Class I Architectural, 0.018 mm (0.7 mil) thick.
2. Color Anodized Finish: AA-C22A42 or AA-C22A44; Class I Architectural, 0.018 mm
(0.7 mil) thick.
C. Aluminum Paint finish:
1. Fluorocarbon Finish: AAMA 2605; 70 percent fluoropolymer resin, 2-coat system.
2. Color: Refer to Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.
D. Hardware: Finish hardware exposed when window is in closed position to match window.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440; non-magnetic stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine and verify substrate suitability for product installation.
1. Verify openings are within acceptable tolerances.
B. Protect existing construction and completed work from damage.
C. Remove existing windows to permit new installation when replacement window is available, and
ready for immediate installation.
1. Remove existing work carefully; avoid damage to existing work indicated to remain.
2. Perform other operations as necessary to prepare openings for proper installation and
operation of new windows.
3. Do not leave openings uncovered at end of working day, during precipitation or
temperatures below 16 degrees C (60 degrees F).

A. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions and approved submittal drawings.

MAIN WORKS
1. When manufacturer's instructions deviate from specifications, submit proposed resolution

for Contracting Officer's Representative consideration.
B. Where type, size or spacing of fastenings for securing window accessories or equipment to
building construction is not shown or specified, provide expansion or toggle bolts or screws, as
best suited to construction material.
1. Provide bolts or screws minimum 6 mm (1/4 inch) in diameter.
2. Sized and spaced to resist tensile and shear loads imposed.
3. Do not install exposed fasteners on exterior, except when unavoidable for application of
hardware.
4. Provide non-magnetic stainless steel Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners,
where required, or special tamper-proof fasteners.
5. Locate fasteners to avoid disturbing window thermal break.
C. Set windows plumb, level, true, and in alignment; without warp or rack of frames or sash.
D. Anchor windows on four sides with anchor clips or fin trim.
1. Do not allow anchor clips to bridge thermal breaks.
2. Use separate clips for both sides of thermal breaks.
3. Make connections to allow for thermal and other movements.
4. Do not allow building load to bear on windows.
5. Use manufacturer's standard clips at corners and maximum 600 mm (24 inches) on center.
6. Where fin trim anchorage is indicated build into adjacent construction, anchoring at corners
and maximum 600 mm (24 inches) on center.
E. Sills and Stools:
1. Set in bed of mortar or other compound to fully support, true to line shown.
2. Do not extend sill to inside window surface or past thermal break.
3. Leave space for sealants at ends and to window frame unless indicated otherwise.
3.3 MULLIONS CLOSURES, TRIM, AND PANNING

A. Cut mullion full height of opening and anchor directly to window frame on both sides.
B. Closures, Trim, and Panning: External corners mitered and internal corners coped, fitted with
hairline, tightly closed joints.
1. Secure to concrete and solid masonry with expansion bolts, expansion rivets, split shank
drive bolts, or powder actuated drive pins.
2. Toggle bolt to hollow masonry units.
3. Screw to wood and metal.

MAIN WORKS
C. Fasten except for strap anchors, near ends and corners and maximum 300 mm (12 inches) on
center.
D. Seal units following installation to provide weathertight system.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust ventilating sash and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points, and at
weather-stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
3.5 FIELD TESTING

A. Field Tests: Performed by testing laboratory specified in Section 01 45 29, TESTING
LABORATORY SERVICES.
B. Test Method: AAMA 502.
C. Test Specimen:
1. Include window assembly and construction. Affix test chamber to interior side of test
specimen and the conduct testing using positive static air pressure (Test method A).
2. Test specimens to be selected by the Contracting Officer's Representative after windows
have been installed according to the drawings and specification.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
B. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds.
C. Clean exposed aluminum and glass surfaces. Remove contaminants and stains.
D. Keep windows locked except while adjusting and testing.
--END--

MAIN WORKS

SECTION 08 70 00 – FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions of Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are
required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique
hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they
are installed.

B. This Section includes the following, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. Door Hardware, including electric hardware.
2. Storefront and Entrance door hardware.
3. Gate Hardware.
4. Digital keypad access control devices.
5. Hold-open closers with smoke detectors.
6. Wall or floor-mounted electromagnetic hold-open devices.
7. Power supplies for electric hardware.
8. Low-energy door operators plus sensors and actuators.
9. Thresholds, gasketing and weather-stripping.
10. Door silencers or mutes.

C. Related Sections: The following sections are noted as containing requirements that
relate to this Section, but may not be limited to this listing.

1. Section 08 14 00 Wood Doors.
2. Section 08 30 00 Specialty Doors and Frames.

1.3 REFERENCES (USE DATE OF STANDARD IN EFFECT AS OF BID DATE.)
A. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association
B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.

C. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.

1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives
2. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies

D. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.

1. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware
NEB-P-17-1747 1/10 Civil Specs./Sce. 087000

MAIN WORKS

E. WHI - Warnock Hersey Incorporated

F. SDI - Steel Door Institute

1.4 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS

A. General: Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification sections.

B. Submit product data (catalog cuts) including manufacturers' technical product
information for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of
operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with
requirements.

C. Submit six (6) copies of schedule organized vertically into “Hardware Sets” with
index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required
for each door or opening. Include following information:

1. Include a Cover Sheet with;
a. Job Name, location, telephone number.
b. Architects name, location and telephone number.
c. Contractors name, location, telephone number and job number.
d. Suppliers name, location, telephone number and job number.
e. Hardware consultant's name, location and telephone number.

2. Job Index information included;
a. Numerical door number index including; door number, hardware heading
number and page number.
b. Complete keying information (referred to DHI hand-book "Keying Systems
and Nomenclature"). Provision should be made in the schedule to provide
keying information when available; if it is not available at the time the
preliminary schedule is submitted.
c. Manufacturers' names and abbreviations for all materials.
d. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes used in the schedule.
e. Mounting locations for hardware.
f. Clarification statements or questions.
g. Catalog cuts and manufacturer’s technical data and instructions.

MAIN WORKS

3. Vertical schedule format sample: (See Section 3.6 for Schedule.)

Heading Number 1 (Hardware group or set number – HW -1)

(a) 1 Single Door #1 - Exterior from Corridor 101 (b)90° (c) RH

(d) 3' 0"x7' 0" x 1-3/4" x (e) 20 Minute (f) WD x HM

(g) 1 (h) (i) ea (j) Hinges - (k) 5BB1HW 4.5 x 4.5 NRP (l) ½ TMS (m) 626 (n) IVE
2 6AA 1 ea Lockset - ND50PD x RHO x RH x 10-025 x JTMS 626 SCH

(a) - Single or pair with opening number and location. (b) - Degree of opening (c) - Hand
of door(s) (d) - Door and frame dimensions and door thickness. (e) - Label requirements
if any. (f) - Door by frame material. (g) - (Optional) Hardware item line #. (h) - Keyset
Symbol. (i) - Quantity. (j) - Product description. (k) - Product Number. (l) - Fastenings
and other pertinent information. (m) - Hardware finish codes per ANSI A156.18. (n) -
Manufacture abbreviation.

D. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Substitution requests
must be made prior to bid date. Include product data and indicate benefit to the
project. Furnish samples of any proposed substitution.

E. Wiring Diagrams: Provide product data and wiring and riser diagrams for all
electrical products listed in the Hardware Schedule portion of this section.

F. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the
Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

G. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the
installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply
with indicated requirements.

H. LEED Certification Points: Submit information and certifications necessary to
achieve maximum points for LEED certification; coordinate and cooperate with
Owner and Architect in providing information necessary for required LEED rating.


A. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, exit devices, etc.)
from a single manufacturer.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with
warehousing facilities in the project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-
service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality
to that indicated for this project and that employs an experienced architectural
hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at
reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.

1. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.

MAIN WORKS

2. Meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in
writing. Stock parts for products supplied and are capable of repairing and
replacing hardware items found defective within warranty periods.

C. Hardware Installer: Company specializing in the installation of commercial door
hardware with five years documented experience.

D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies
with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock
Hersey for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching
hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the
Hardware Schedule or not.

1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with
supplementary marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped
with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit
Hardware".

E. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or
special knowledge or effort.


A. Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations (shop
or field) for installation.

B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers,
complete with proper fasteners. Clearly mark packages on outside to indicate
contents and locations in hardware schedule and in work.

C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint,
chemicals, etc.

D. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and
hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranties of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale from day of
final acceptance as follows:

1. Locksets: Seven (7) years.
2. Electronic or VIP Locks: One (1) year.
3. Closers: Ten (10) years, except electronic closers shall be two (2) years.
4. Exit devices: Three (3) years.
5. All other hardware: Two (2) years.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

MAIN WORKS

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment,
maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to beginning work of
this section.

B. Attendance: Architect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security Contractor,
Hardware Supplier, Installer, Key District Personnel, and Project Inspector.

C. Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation procedures and
coordination required with related work. Review District's keying standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Item Manufacturer Acceptable Substitutes

A. Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley, McKinney

B. Locks, Latches
& Cylinders Schlage None

C. Stops Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI

D. Thresholds National Guard Pemko, Zero

E. Seals & Bottoms National Guard Pemko, Zero

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Hinges: Exterior out-swinging door butts shall be non-ferrous material and shall
have stainless steel hinge pins. All doors to have non-rising pins.

1. Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following:
a. Height:
1) Doors up to 41" wide: 4-1/2" inches.
2) Doors 42" to 48" wide: 5 inches.
b. Width: Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door swings 180 degrees.
c. Number of Hinges: Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" in height. Add one for
each additional 2 feet in height.

B. Residential Duty Locks and Latches: Schlage "F" Series as scheduled with "Jazz"
design, fastened with through-bolts and threaded chassis hubs.

C. Deadlocks: Rotating cylinder trim rings of attack-resistant design. Mounting plates
and actuator shields of plated cold-rolled steel. Mounting screws of ¼” diameter
steel and protected by drill-resistant ball bearings. Steel alloy deadbolt with

MAIN WORKS

hardened steel roller. Strike alloy deadbolt with reinforcer and two 3” long screws.
ANSI A156.5, 2001 Grade 1 certified.

D. Door Stops:

1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide wall type with appropriate
fasteners. Where floor type cannot be used, provide wall type. If neither can be
used, provide overhead type.
2. Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from the face of the wall or
partition (CBC Section 1133B.8.6).

E. Thresholds: As Scheduled and per details.

1. Thresholds shall not exceed 1/2" in height, with a beveled surface of 1:2
maximum slope.
2. Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant
complying with requirements in Division 7 “Thermal and Moisture Protection”.
3. Use ¼” fasteners, red-head flat-head sleeve anchors (SS/FHSL).
4. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 1133B.2.4.1.

F. Seals: Provide silicone gasket at all rated and exterior doors.

1. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C Classified, Category “J” listed seals
complying with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252 Standards. Coordinate with selected door
manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers' requirements.
2. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer.
Category “G” furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full
compliance with NFPA 252. Where required, intumescent seals vary in
requirement by door type and door manufacture -- careful coordination required.
3. Smoke & Draft Control Doors, Provide Category “H” listed seals complying with
NFPA 105 for use on “S” labeled Positive Pressure door assemblies.

G. Door Shoes & Door Top Caps: Provide door shoes at all exterior wood doors and
top caps at all exterior out-swing doors.

H. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for
pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door
assemblies.

2.3 KEYING

A. Furnish a Proprietary Schlage masterkey system as directed by the owner or
architect. Key system to be designated and combinated by the Schlage Master Key
Department even if pinned by the Authorized Key Center, Authorized Security Center
or a local authorized commercial dealer.

1. Furnish 2 cut change keys for each different change key code.
2. Furnish 1 uncut key blank for each change key code.
3. Furnish 6 cut masterkeys for each different masterkey set.
4. Furnish 3 uncut key blanks for each masterkey set.
5. Furnish 2 cut control keys cut to the top masterkey for permanent I/C cylinders.

MAIN WORKS

6. Furnish 1 cut control key cut to each SKD combination.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Generally to be satin chrome US3 (605 on bronze and 632 on steel) unless
otherwise noted.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, countersunk type,
provide machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood.

B. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type.

C. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts
and spray painted to match closer finish.

D. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry.
E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head.
F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work.

G. All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of
sex bolts or through bolts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and
dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of
DHI.

B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

C. Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by the Door and Hardware
Institute. Operating hardware will to be located between 30" and 44" AFF.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the
attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

MAIN WORKS

F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber sealant.

G. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in
hardware at no additional cost.

H. Hardware Installer shall coordinate with security contractor to route cable to connect
electrified locks, panic hardware and fire exit hardware to power transfers or electric
hinges at the time these items are installed so as to avoid disassembly and
reinstallation of hardware.

I. Hardware Installer shall also be present with the security contractor when the power
is turned on for the testing of the electronic hardware applications. Installer shall
make adjustments to solenoids, latches, vertical rods and closers to insure proper
and secure operation.

J. All wiring for electro-mechanical hardware mounted on the door shall be connected
through the power transfer and terminated in the interface junction box specified for
in the Electrical Section.

K. Conductors shall be minimum 18 gage stranded, multicolored. A minimum 12 in. loop
of conductors shall be coiled in the interface junction box. Each conductor shall be
permanently marked with its function.

L. If a power supply is specified in the hardware sets, all conductors shall be terminated
in the power supply. Make all connections required for proper operation between the
power supply and the electro-mechanical hardware. Provide the proper size
conductors as specified in the manufacturer’s technical documentation.


A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to
operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.

B. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation.

C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month
prior to acceptance or occupancy, return to that work area and make final check and
adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as
necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door
control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
equipment.

D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware
finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.

E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the completion of
the project, the Contractor accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant,
shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper
functions of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in
recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items

MAIN WORKS

which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of
hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of
substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.

3.4 HARDWARE LOCATIONS

A. Conform to ADAAG and the drawings for access-compliant positioning requirements
for the disabled.


A. Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to inspect installation and certify that
hardware and it's installation have been furnished and installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein.

3.6 SCHEDULE

A. The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the requirements of the
foregoing specifications.

B. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each
door.

Manufacturers Abbreviations (Mfr.)

IVE = Ives Hinges, Pivots, Bolts, Coordinators, Dust Proof
Strikes, Push Pull & Kick Plates, Door Stops &
Silencers
JOH + Johnson Bi-Pass Sets
SCH = Schlage Lock Company Locks, Latches & Cylinders

SPEXTRA: 27998
HW 01

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 1011 3.5 X 3.5 632 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK F40 JAZ 605 SCH
1 EA DOOR STOP 060 F3 IVE

HW 02

3 EA HINGE 1011 3.5 X 3.5 632 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET F10 JAZ 605 SCH

HW 03

MAIN WORKS


1 EA TRACK 100SM AL JOH

HW 04

3 EA HINGE 3PB1 4.5 X 4 632 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET F10 JAZ 605 SCH
1 EA SGL CYL DEADBOLT B660R 605 SCH
1 SET GASKET PER SELECTED DOOR MFGR
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
1 EA DOOR VIEWER 698 605 IVE

END OF SECTION

MAIN WORKS
SN Item Code Description Finish Size Unit Qty.
APPENDIX-1
SECTION 087000
Hardware Set No. 01
Door Type - D1 - Single Leaf Wooden Door.
Location: EXECUTIVE ROOM.
TESA Stainless steel double ball bearing butt hinges, 102x76x3mm

CE Marked in Grade 304 and Satin Stainless Steel Finish. Fire rated
1 BISCFCEM433IS S.S.S. No. 4
120min for Timber Door and 240min for Steel Door as per Warrington
Certifire Certificate of Approval No. CF5525
TESA CT2500 Overhead Door Closer with V arm, Valve with Adjustable Sweep
Speed, Reversible, Second Valve for latch Speed Adjustment, Back Check
Valve, Suitable for Door Weights Upto 80kg and up to 1100mm width.
2 CT250034PL Silver No. 1
Certified to EN 1154A. Fire rated 120min for Timber Door and 240min
for Steel Door as per Warrington Certifire Certificate of Approval No.
CF5528.
TESA Euro Profile Mortised Lock 50mm Backset, 85mm C/C, Reversible Latch,
8 mm Follower, With Anti Thrust Security Pin & Anti Saw Dead Bolt, Anti-
3 4030E5SAI friction latchbolt for smoother operation. Fire rated 120min for Timber S.S.S. No. 1
Door and 240min for Steel Door as per Warrington Certifire Certificate of
Approval No. CF5092 .Tested to performance EN1303. Stainless steel finish.
TESA "SENA" type Lever Handle on Rose, Stainless Steel Levers, 130mm
Long, 55mm Projection on 53mm Diameter, 11mm Thick Rose.
4 MS5RBOMMIS S.S.S. Pair 1
Grade AISI 304L Stainless Steel.
Approved for Fire Doors. (No Plastic Component inside).
TESA High Security TK6 Thumbturn Cylinder 35x35mm. 6 Spring Loaded

Antipick Pins + 1 SENSOR in the key. Certified according to EN1303. Supplied
5 AK63B3535NAM S.N.P. No. 1
with 3 PATENTED Sawn Steel Keys.
Satin Nickel Finish. Group Masterkeyed.
TESA Door Viewer. Satin Chrome Plated

6 MIRILLACM S.C.P. No. 1
180° Door Viewing Angle.
TESA Floor Door Stop, Half-dome, Satin Stainless Steel finish.

7 TOPINOX45IS S.S.S. No. 1
Supplied with fixing screws.
TOTAL FOR DOOR Set 1

TOTAL FOR SETS Set 1

MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 02

Location: BMS/SECURITY ROOM, QUARANTINE AND MEDICAL ROOM.

CF5528.




MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 03

Location: EXECUTIVE ROOM TOILET, QUARANTINE ROOM TOILET.

TESA Mortice Lock 2030 Series with Latch and Deadbolt. Reversible, with
50mm backset and 85mm between axes. 8mm Lever Spindle Hole. Supplied
2 403050AI with Europrofile Cylinder Hole, Antisaw Deadbolt. S.S.S. No. 1
Certified according to UNE 97-320-88 Grade A.
Forend and Strike Plate Finish in Stainless Steel.
TESA Security TE5 PRIVACY Double Cylinder 35x35mm with Thumbturn &
4 50347SBLN Emergency release, 70mm length. S.N.P. No. 1
Made to DIN V 18254. Satin Nickel Finish.
5 TOPERCHAIS TESA Stainless steel Coat hook with rubber buffer. 2.5mm Thick S.S.S. No 1
TESA Wall Door Stop, Cylindrical with rubber head.

Satin Stainless Steel finish, Supplied with fixing screws.


MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 04

Door Type - D3 - Single Leaf Aluminum Door.
Location: TOILET CUBICLES.
1 Hinges for aluminum door to be supplied by door specialist. No. 4
TESA 2210DE Series Euro Profile Mortised Lock for Aluminium Profile Doors,
Sliding Deadbolt, 35 mm Backset, 85mm C/C, Reversible Latch.
2 4210DE355AI S.S.S. No. 1
8 mm Follower, Tested to performance EN1303.
With faceplate and strike plate in ANSI304 SSS.
TESA "SENA" type Lever Handle on Oval Rose, Aluminium Levers, U Shape,
148mm Long, 55mm Projection on 31mm width,
3 MS5OBOMIS S.S.S. Pair 1
12mm Thick Rose. Stainless steel Finish.
With TESA Narrow Stile Escutcheons for Narrow Profiles, Stainless Steel finish
TESA Security TE5 PRIVACY Double Cylinder 35x35mm with Thumbturn &
4 50347SBLN Emergency release, 70mm length. S.N.P. No. 1
Made to DIN V 18254. Satin Nickel Finish.
5 TOPERCHAIS TESA Stainless steel Coat hook with rubber buffer. 2.5mm Thick S.S.S. No 1



MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 05

Door Type - DG1, GD2, GD3 - Double Leaf Frameless Glass Door (Aluminum powder coated frame
& Frameless Glass Leaf ).
Location: MAINENTERANCE, SERVICE HALLWAY, RECREATIONAL AND MULTIPURPOSE HALL.
TESA Floor Spring with Double Action Facility for Installation on Double Action
Doors. For Heavy Duty doors up to 300 Kg. and 1.4m width. Adjustable Size
from EN2 to EN6. Two independent Valves for Sweep and Latching Speed
1 CTSU300SRST S.S.S. No. 2
Adjustments. In-Body Mechanical Back Check. Closing Speed is controlled
from 175° of opening.
Certified according to EN 1158.
TESA Stainless Steel cover plate for CTSU300SRST.

2 TACTSU300IM IM No. 2
Stainless Steel Finish.
TESA Standard Square Spindle for CTSU300.

3 MA0340S0 S.N.P. No. 2
Nickel finish.
TESA Bottom Hinge for Glass Double Action Door.

4 BVI565VIM S.S.S. No. 2
Spindle Centerline at 55-65m, with +/-3mm adjustment.
TESA Top Hinge for Glass Double Action Door.

5 BVS565VIM S.S.S. No. 2
Spindle Centerline at 55-65m, with +/-3mm adjustment.
TESA Type 3 Top Pivot for Glass Double Action Doors. Pivot Position at 55/65
6 PV3565VIM S.S.S. No. 2
mm. Adjustment +/- 3mm.
TESA Deadlock for Glass door, strike included in Satin stainless steel finish
7 CVESUELOIS S.S.S. No. 4
Grade 304L. Applicable for Glass door fitting.

TESA Designer Pull Handle, Size 450x 30AISI304, Back-to-back Fixing.

9 DTSRL450IS S.S.S. Set. 2
Fixing screws included. AISI 304 Stainless Steel finish.



MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 06

Door Type - GD4 - Double Leaf Glass Sliding Door.
Location: OPEN TARRACE.
1 Sliding door and its accessories to be supplied by door specialist. No. 0

Hardware Set No. 07

Door Type - SD1 - Single Leaf Steel Door.
Location: EXECUTIVE ROOM.

CF5528.




MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 08

Location: STAIR 01, 02, 03.

TESA CT3000 Overhead Door Closer body, Valve with Adjustable Sweep
Valve, Suitable for Door up to 1.4m and weighs Upto 160kg.
CT300036PL Adjustable size EN2-EN6.
2 + Certified to EN 1154A and Approved for heavy duty Fire Doors. Fire rated Silver No. 1
BN3000PL 120min for Timber Door and 240min for Steel Door as per Warrington
+
TESA Standard arm BN3000PL for CT300036PL
3 SOP3000PL TESA Parallel arm bracket for CT3000 Door closer Silver No. 1
TESA TOP Series Rim Touch Bar Exit device for up to 800mm width door,
reversible, One Lateral Locking Point. According to UNE-EN 1125. Applicable to
Fire Doors. SS orbital latch.
4 TOP1S808GG Silver No. 1
Touch Bar and Supports in Silver Finish. Certified by AENOR. Fire rated
Certifire Certificate of Approval No. CF5527.
TESA Outside Modular Lever Handle with europrofile for panic device. Silver
5 MMODMBSCGR Silver No. 1
finish RAL 9006
TESA Security TK6 Half Cylinder 40mm. 6 Spring Loaded Antipick Pins. Made
6 AK6353010NAM to EN-1303. Supplied with 3 PATENTED Sawn Steel Keys. S.N.P. No. 1
Nickel Finish. Group Master Keyed



MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 09

Location: STAIR 01, 03.

TESA CT3000 Overhead Door Closer body, Valve with Adjustable Sweep
Valve, Suitable for Door up to 1.4m and weighs Upto 160kg.
CT300036PL Adjustable size EN2-EN6.
2 + Certified to EN 1154A and Approved for heavy duty Fire Doors. Fire rated Silver No. 1
BN3000PL 120min for Timber Door and 240min for Steel Door as per Warrington
+
TESA Standard arm BN3000PL for CT300036PL
3 SOP3000PL TESA Parallel arm bracket for CT3000 Door closer Silver No. 1
finish RAL 9006


MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 10

Door Type - SD4 - Double Leaf Steel Door.
Location: STAIR 02.

CF5528.
3 SOP2500PL TESA Parallel arm bracket for CT2500 door closer. Silver finish. Silver No. 2
reversible, Two Top & Bottom Locking Points. According to UNE-EN 1125.
5 TOP3S808GG Applicable to Fire Doors. SS orbital latch. Silver Finished. Certified by AENOR. Silver No. 1
Fire rated 120min for Timber Door and 240min for Steel Door as per
Warrington Certifire Certificate of Approval No. CF5527.
finish RAL 9006
TESA SELTELCIER closing sequence selector for Door closers.

8 SELTELCIER S.N.P. No. 2
Telescopic arm for doors up to 1600mm door width. Nickel plated finish.



MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 11

Location: COMMON TOILET AND BATHROOM.

CF5528.
TESA 2030 Series Dead Lock for EuroProfile Cylinder. Reversible. Cylinder
3 4031U50AI Operates an Antisaw Dead Bolt. 50mm Backset. Unified Box Format. Certified S.S.S. No. 1
According to UNE 97-320-88 Grade A.
TESA High Security TK6 Double Cylinder 35x35mm. 6 Spring Loaded Antipick
Pins & Drill protection grade 1. Conforms to EN-1303 regulation. Supplied with
4 AK6353535NAM S.N.P. No. 1
3 PATENTED Sawn Steel Keys with Security Sensor.
Nickel Silver Finish. Group Master Keyed.
TESA Europrofile Cylinder Rose Escutcheons, 10mm Thick, 53mm Diameter.

5 MB0RBOMSSIS S.S.S. Pair 1
Grade AISI 304L Satin Stainless Steel Finish.
TESA Push Plate.

6 PCCIEGAIS305100 S.S.S. No. 2
Satin Stainless Steel Finish. 305x100x1.5mm
TESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 305x22mm Size, Including M8x70mm Screw Thru-
7 TR22305SSIS bolt Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape. S.S.S. No. 2
Fixing screws included. Stainless Steel finish.
Tesa Manual lever action flush bolt with adjustible extended rod extension.
8 DB3/4LSS8IS S.S.S. Pair 1
Satin Stainless Steel Finish. 203x19mm.
TESA Dust excluding socket.

9 GUARDAPOLIS S.S.S. No. 1
Satin Stainless Steel Finish. 25x38x13.5mm Dia.
TESA Kick Plate.

10 PCCIEGAIS100020 S.S.S. No. 2
Satin Stainless Steel Finish. 1000mmx200mmx1.5mm



MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 12

Location: ELEC. ROOM, MDF ROOM, TEL. ROOM, GARBAGE CHUTE.

CF5528.
TESA Euro Profile Mortised Lock 50 mm Backset, 85mm C/C, Reversible Latch,
8 mm Follower. Anti Saw Dead Bolt, Fire rated 120min for Timber Door
and 240min for Steel Door as per Warrington Certifire Certificate of
3 4030F5DAI/IAI S.S.S. No. 1
Approval No. CF5092, Tested to performance EN1303. PANIC FUNCTION
that allows lever to withdraw latch and deadbolt. HANDING - D - RIGHT
& I - LEFT
4 CD2030S8M TESA Double square spindle, 8-8/8-8. - No. 1



MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 13

Location: ELEC. CABINET.

CF5528.
& I - LEFT




MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 14

Location: LIFT MACHINE ROOM, WATER HEATER AND PUMP ROOM.

CF5528.
& I - LEFT


Hardware Set No. 15

Door Type - SD9 - Single Leaf Seel Door.
Location: FIRE HOUSE CABINET.
1 Fire house cabinet and its accessories to be supplied by door specialist. No. 0


MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 16

Door Type - AL1, AL3 - Bi-Folding Aluminum Louvered Door.
Location: SUBSTATION ROOM, GENERATOR ROOM.
Sliding folding track and hinges for aluminum door to be supplied by door
1 No. 0
specialist.
TESA 2240BE Series Euro Profile Mortised Lock for Aluminium Profile Doors,
4241BE255SI + Reinforced hook, 25 mm Backset, 85mm C/C.
2 S.S.S. No. 1
C2240BEAI Tested to performance EN1303.
Faceplate and strike plate in ANSI304 SSS.
3 MOVABOMF6 TESA Narrow Stile Escutcheons for Narrow Profiles, Stainless Steel finish S.S.S. Pair 1

TESA Solid Cranked Pull Handle, Size 300x30mm Size.

5 DTSC300IS S.S.S. No. 2
Back-to-Back Fixing. AISI304 Stainless Steel finish.
7 Extersion rob for flush bolts to be supplied by door specialist.




MAIN WORKS
Hardware Set No. 17

Door Type - AL2 - Doub Aluminum Louvered Door.
Location: MAIN GARBAGE ROOM, L.V. ROOM, E.T.S. ROOM.
Sliding folding track and hinges for aluminum door to be supplied by door
1 No. 0
specialist.
CF5528.
TESA 2240BA Series Euro Profile Mortised Lock with PANIC FUNCTION for
Aluminium Profile Doors, with Latch and Hook. 30 mm Backset, Right
3 4240BA30ED3AI S.S.S. No. 1
Handed. Tested to performance EN1303.
Faceplate and strike plate in ANSI304 SSS.
4 CDFUEGO8M TESA Split spindle for 4240 Narrow Stile Locks. - No. 1
TESA "SENA" type Lever Handle on Oval Rose, Aluminium Levers, U Shape,
148mm Long, 55mm Projection on 31mm width,
5 MS5OBOMIS S.S.S. Pair 1
12mm Thick Rose. Stainless steel Finish.
With TESA Narrow Stile Escutcheons for Narrow Profiles, Stainless Steel finish
8 Extersion rob for flush bolts to be supplied by door specialist.




MAIN WORKS
PREAMBLE
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE ABOVE SCHEDULE
BT BOLT THROUGH FIXING

FF FACE FIXING
S.S.S. Satin Stainless Steel
AI Stainless Steel
IM Stainless Steel
S.N.P. Satin Nickel Plated
S.C.P. Satin Chrome Plated
PL Silver
EV1- Silver
Black Black finished
L.T. Natural Brass
H.Z. Zinc plated
ALL THE ABOVE PRODUCTS CONFORM TO BRITISH STANDARD EUROPEAN

NORMS AND REGULATIONS AND ARE CERTIFIED ACCORDINGLY
HINGES BS EN 1935 GRADE 13

DOOR CLOSERS BS EN 1154
ELECTRICALLY
POWERED HOLD
BE EN 1155
OPEN DEVICES AND
POINT MAGNETS
DOOR SELECTOR BE EN 1158
LOCKS AND
BE EN 12209
LATCHES
CYLINDERS FOR
BE EN 1303
LOCKS
PANIC EXIT
BE EN 1125
DEVICES
EMERGENCY EXIT
BE EN 179
DEVICE
NOTES:
1. CYLINDER PROPOSED IS TESA TK6 PATENTED (ANTI COPY SYSTEM) MASTER KEY CYLINDER.
2. ALL KICKING PLATES AND PUSH PLATE SIZES ARE APPROXIMATE AND SIZE NEEDS TO BE
COFIRMED BEFORE SUPPLY
3. ALL KICKING PLATES AND PUSH PLATE WILL BE DRILLED AND COUNTERSUNK WITH RADIUS
CORNERS.

MAIN WORKS
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications,
including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are
specified by reference to this Section:
Doors and Windows.
Glazed entrances.
Skylights.
Curtain walls
B. Glazing shall be executed by an approved specialist sub-contractor.
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal

movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure,
including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective
manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing
only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service
conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses
indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat
treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1 Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E
1300, according to the following requirements:
Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project
from basic wind speed, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on
mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
2 Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically
or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
3 Maximum Lateral Deflection: Provide thickness required that limits center
deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch
(25 mm), whichever is less.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements

resulting from the maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures
acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering
calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance

properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data.
E. Air Penetration Tests

1 Testing Method: In accordance with BS 5368: Part 1. Measure air velocity by
means of a directionally sensitive hot wire pyrometer used as an anemometer, or
other suitable instrument.
2 Wind Exposure: Limits specified for resistance to air penetration shall apply
under the following conditions:
a. 3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a

b. Pressure Difference: 321 N/m2.
c. Test Pressure: 30 mm water gauge.
3 Velocity of air penetration any part of a window, door or curtain wall shall not
exceed 1.4 m/s measured at a distance 150 mm from source.
F. Water Penetration Tests

1 Testing Method: In accordance with BS 4315: Part 1 and Agreement Board
MOAT No. 1.
2 Wind Exposure: Limits specified for water penetration shall apply under the
following conditions:
a. Wind Speed: 45 m/sec
b. Pressure Difference: 321 N/m2.
c. Test Pressure, No Leakage 30 mm water gauge.
d. Test Pressure No. Gross Leakage: 50 mm water gauge.
3 There shall be no leakage or gross leakage, as defined in BS 4315, at the
unexposed face of a window or door subjected to a flow of water and exposure to
test conditions specified.
G. Resistance to Wind Pressure

1 Elements shall resist sporadic pressure from wind gusts under specified
exposure conditions. There shall be no fracture or permanent deflection of any
part, or any deterioration except as noted below of subsequent performance.
2 Exposure Conditions:
a. Wind Speed: 45 m/sec
b. Pressure Difference: 2.300 N/ms.
c. Test Pressure: 250 mm water gauge.
3 The deflection/span ratio of any part of a window or door shall not exceed 1/175
or 10 mm when exposed to pressure or suction.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. Products shall comply to the referenced standards. Following are the

international standards that are acceptable provided that the contractor
substantiates their equivalence and ensures their compatibility with other
components of the system. Furnish copies of the current version if the
referenced standards for comparison if so required by the Engineer. The
Engineer reserves the right to insist on the named product complying to the
specified standard:
1 British Standards
2 American Standards
3 U.S. Federal Specifications
4 French Government Standards
5 West German Standard DIN
6 Canadian Specifications - C.P.
7 Japanese Industry Standards
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Samples: 300-mm- square Samples for glass types and of 300-mm- long
Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material
representative in color of the adjoining framing system.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products

certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant

manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and
glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing
materials.
E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the products
comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
F. Certification of Guarantees: Provide the manufacturer's certification or guarantee

of performance of the following glass types supplied for the designed and
specified performance required:
Insulating Glass Units.
Tempered/Toughened Glass.
Coated Glass.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. Glazier Qualifications: An experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in
"Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass
products.
1 Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the
experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
C. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for
product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based
1 on testing
Sealant currentAgency
Testing sealantQualifications:
formulations within a 36-month period.
An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented
2 Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
D. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric
glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glass
type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will
contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants.
1 Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and
other specific preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum
adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing
channel substrates.
2 Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing
members and each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic,
laminated, and insulating units) as well as one sample of each glazing accessory
(gaskets, tape sealants, setting blocks, and spacers).
3 Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
4 For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
E. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed
and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to local authorities for
fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
F. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16
CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.
G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organizations, unless more stringent requirements are
indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in
this Section or in referenced standards.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or

on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the
following inspecting and testing agency:
Insulating Glass Certification Council.
Associated Laboratories, Inc.
National Accreditation and Management Institute.
I. Mockups: Before glazing, build mockups for each glass product indicated to
verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1 Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
constructed.
3 Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting fabrication.
5 Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion subject to the approval by the Engineer.

A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as
needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation,
temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes,
comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting
and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
1.08 Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2
years.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and
substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material
manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost,
condensation, or other causes.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Section shall not deprive
Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
B. Provide a warranty of 10 years from the date of substantial completion certificate.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2
2.01 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing
select); class as indicated below.
1 Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
2 Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing, and light-reducing) where indicated.
2.02 TEMPERED /TOUGHENED GLASS
A. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat), quality Q3.
B. Sizes and Cutting: Prior to tempering/toughening or heat treating, cut glass to

required sizes as determined by accurate measurement of openings to be
glazed, making allowance for required edge clearances. Cut and process edges
in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. Do not cut or treat
edges in the field.
C. Tempered/Toughened Glass: Provide glass tempered/toughened to increase

flexural strength 4 - 5 times its strength before treatment. Wherever possible
locate tong marks along an edge which will be concealed in the glazing system.
2.03 Fire Rated Glass: Fire resisting glass in aluminum, steel or wood frames, for
thickness confirming to ASTM-3-152, labeled and listed by UL or as per B.S>
standards. Glass to provide fire resistance rating of 60 minutes.
2.04 INSULATING GLASS
A. Fabrication: Fabricate units at factory with sheets of glass hermetically sealed at

all edges with a permanent elastomeric sealant and a protective metal edge strip
of aluminium or stainless steel separated by dehydrated air-space complying
with ASTM E 774. Glass shall be hermetically sealed double glazed units as
indicated on drawings and as herein specified for each type.
B. Low-e coated glass: All insulated glass units shall have low- e coating on glass
surface or low-emissivity coated film suspended in the interspace (for heat mirror
glass).
C. Tinted glass color: As per sample board.
D. Manufacture: Manufacturers of insulating glass units shall have been in the

business of producing units of similar size and configuration for not less than ten
(10) years.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Guarantee: Insulating glass units shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a

period of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works not
to develop materials obstruction of vision as a result of dust, moisture, or film
formation on the interior surfaces of glass as a result of the failure of the
hermetic seal. In addition provide the manufacturer's standard guarantee valid
for ten (10) years from date of shipment to the Project Site.
2.05 ACID-ETCHED GLASS
A. Texture and Pattern : As indicated and to engineer’s approval.
B. Acid-etching Process : Fabricate acid-etched glass with hydrofluoric and

hydrochloric acid according to manufacturer’s standard process.
2.06 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Laminated glass : Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass
indicated and other requirements specified.
B. Interlayer : Interlayer material of 1.5mm thick polyvinyl butyral sheets, with a

proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor or lose physical and mechanical
properties after laminating glass lites and installation.
C. Laminating Process : Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign

substances and air or glass pockets.
D. Guarantee: Laminating glass units shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a

period of 10 years from the date of substantial completion of the works not to
develop obstruction of vision as a result of film deterioration. In addition provide
the manufacturer’s standard guarantee valid for 10 years from the date of
shipment to the project site.
2.07 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following

requirements:
1 Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and
with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-
2 Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions
existing at time of installation.
3 Color of exposed glazing sealant: To Engineer’s approval.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other
requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant in the
Glazing Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM
C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in

test assembly to obtain fire-protection rating.
2.08 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape

with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with
nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by
tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a
release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for
products indicated below:
1 AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
2 AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to
continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated
with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting
adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1 Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2 Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full
bead of liquid sealant.
2.09 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated

into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM
C 542, black.
B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated

below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated
below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
EPDM, ASTM C 864.
Silicone, ASTM C 1115.
C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned

gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black;
and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
EPDM.
Silicone.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with

referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other
glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of
compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket

manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85,

plus or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer

hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for
installation indicated.
`
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral
movement (side walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material),

of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce
optimum glazing sealant performance.
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test

assembly to obtain fire-resistance rating.
2.11 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings
indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface
conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer
and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
PART 3
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1 Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,

and offsets at corners.
2 Presence and functioning of weep system.
3 Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4 Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately
before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.03 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,

gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are
indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite

on glacs, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses,
with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during
installation.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove
damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose off Project site. Damaged
glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed,
could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
DM – Dubai Municipality
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as
determined by pre-construction sealant-substrate testing.
E Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing

glass lites.
F Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50
inches (1270 mm) as follows:
1 Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of
glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances,
unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to
maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance
requirements.
2 Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness
equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final
compressed thickness of tape.
G Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from
moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass
manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
H Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar
characteristics.
3.04 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed
edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not
stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads
and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these
joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together,
not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape
manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is
installed.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by
inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place
against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work
toward centers of openings.
3.05 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer

to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is
securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft
compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket
applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets
to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.06 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,

between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to
prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems
until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in
position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for
optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete
wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from

glass.
3.07 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions.
Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.
3.08 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching
crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to
glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from

construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection,
contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them
immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other

masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once
a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or

damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during
construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four
days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial
Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 08 9100
LOUVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Exterior wall, drainable blade stationary louver assemblies with removable bird
screens.
A. Use products of a company specializing in the manufacture of AMCA certified

louvers that bear the AMCA certified rating seal for air performance and water
penetration.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 3300,

Submittal Procedures.
1. Catalog data describing materials and finish, and product criteria.
2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3. Samples or color charts of standard colors for metal and screen.
4. Shop drawings indicating component details, framed openings, bearing,

and anchor location of fasteners and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Alternate products may be accepted; follow Section 01 2500, Substitution

Procedures.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Dowco Corporation
B. Construction Specialties, Inc.
C. Industrial Louvers, Inc.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5.

MAIN WORKS
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for
forming.
C. Fasteners: Use aluminum or 300 series stainless steel fasteners. Provide other
accessories as required for complete and proper installations.
D. Bird Screen: Standard expanded aluminum mesh, maximum ¾ inch.
E.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Use flashings of same material as louver frame.
B. Use sealants as specified in Section 07 9200.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate with nominal frame depth of 6 inches.
B. Provide louvers of sizes indicated on the Drawings.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Use submittal-approved finish and colors for exterior and interior metal surfaces
and screens.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work, and
openings are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install louver in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Install louvers level and plumb.
C. Secure louvers in opening with fasteners that are removable for maintenance
purposes.
D. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from
flashings and diversion of moisture to the exterior.

MAIN WORKS
E. Install bird screen to interior of louver, removable for access.
F. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 9200.
END OF SECTION

MAIN WORKS
SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1 Portland cement plaster system.
2 Render Plaster.
3 Render accessories.

A. Allowable Tolerances:
1 Generally: Maximum permissible gap between a 3 m straight edge and any point
on the surface shall be 3 mm.
B. Mockups: Prior to installing plaster work, construct panels 3mx3m minimum of
finish and application required to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as
qualities of materials and execution, mock-up shall not be part of permanent
works.

A. Deliver cementitious materials to Project site in original packages, containers, or
bundles, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name, and lot number.
B. Store materials inside, under cover, and dry, protected from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction
traffic and other causes.
C. Cement and lime shall be stored separately, by different types, off the ground in a
dry, well ventilated space.
D. Use cement in rotation within three months of delivery.

A. Environmental Requirements:
1 Maintain continuous adequate ventilation commencing one week before starting
plastering and continuing until plaster is cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer
or Engineer's Representative.
2 Illuminate internal surfaces during the work and inspection to closely resemble
that provided by the permanent installation.
B. Protection:
1 Existing work and approaches: protect with boards, dust sheets or the like.
Immediately clean off all droppings onto finished work.
2 Use independent scaffolding to avoid putlog holes and other breaks in surfaces.
C. Sequencing:
1 Do not commence plastering work until
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
a. Openings, chases or other apertures required for services are formed.

b. Fixings for pipes, fixing pads and plugs have been fixed.
c. 3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a

d. Making good has been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS GENERALLY
A. Portland Cement: .
B. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S.
C. Sand: To ASTM C897; Grading:
Sieve size No
4 (4.75mm)
8 (2.36mm)
16 (1.18mm)
30 (600 um)
50 (300 um)
100 (150 um)
200 (75 um)
D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932 and as approved by the Engineer.

E. Water: Quality to be from a potable water supply only.
2.02 MIXES
A. General: All mix proportions are suggestive only, variations to meet local
conditions and achieve the desired finish are permitted within the limits specified
in ASTM C926.
B. Interior Plastering (15 mm thick)
1 Scratch Coat:
a. On masonry or concrete: Portland cement, sand and coarse aggregate (3/18”)
1:1:1/4
2 Brown Coat:
a. Portland cement, hydrated lime, sand, 1:1/4: 3.
3 Finish Coat (Skim Coat)
a. Type N hydrated lime in putty as ASTM C 206.
4 Sand:
Proportions of mixes given are for damp, loose sand.
C. Exterior Plastering (20 mm thick)

1 Provide galvanized metal lath of heavy duty type weighing 1.84 kg/m2 for all
plastering area.
2 First coat (scratch coat) consisting of sand and cement, in the ratio of 1:1.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3 Second coat (brown coat) consisting of 350 kgs of Portland cement mixed to 1m3
of sand with adding lime slurry (1:0.25:3 cement, lime, sand).
4 Third coat (final coat) consisting of 300 kgs of Portland cement mixed to 1m3 of
sand with adding lime slurry (1:0.25:3.25 cement, lime, sand).
5 Each coat of plaster to be kept wet with water spray, 3 times a day for 4 days for
curing. Final coat to be left to dry for 30 days after curing period before
proceeding with paint application.
D. Render plaster finish coat for application over plastered surfaces shall be as
follows for the final coat.
1 Manufacturer’s Standard Factory - Packaged mix consisting of white portland

cement, hydrated lime, graded marble chips, non-fading iron-oxide color
pigments and chemical agents.
2.03 MIXING
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for base- and finish-coat mixes as applicable
to plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated.
B. Gauge Boxes:
1 Measure constituents by volume, using clean gauge boxes made to size to suit
volume required.
2 Overfill gauge boxes and strike off excess material with a straight edge.
C. Mix:
1 Before adding water, thoroughly mix materials until uniform in appearance.
Add water and mix to a consistency suitable for the work.
D. Mechanical Mixers:
1 Do not allow batches to remain in mixer longer than 3 minutes.
2 Wash out mixer four times daily if in continuous use, and after each batch if
mixer used intermittently or if a different constituent is used.
E. Initial Set:
Do not use plaster after initial set has taken place.
Do not retemper or reconstitute mixes.
F. Render Finish Coat: Add water only, comply with manufacturer’s written
instructions.
2.04 LATH
A. At intersections of different backing materials.

B. Self-Furring Diamond Mesh:
1 Expanded galvanized steel sheets, mesh weight not less than 1.84 kg/m2.
C. Corner Lath:
1 Diamond mesh lath bent to form two 75mm wide wings
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
D. Strip Lath:
1 Diamond mesh minimum 150mm wide
E. Tying Wire:
1 1.16mm (18 U.S. Std) galvanized mild steel wire.
F. Wire Clips:
1 4.11mm (8.U.S.Std) galvanised copper bearing steel hairpin clips.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements
indicated below; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of
plaster coats required.
B. Materials in General:
2 Internal use: galvanized steel.
3 External use: zinc, painted with zinc rich epoxy primer.
C. Corner Beads:
1 0.45mm (26 U.S Std.) with maximum 4.8mm bead and minimum 63mm wide
expanded metal wings.
D. Edge Beads (Casing/Stop Beads):
years.
E. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large-mesh, diamond-metal lath
fabricated from zinc-alloy or welded-wire mesh fabricated from 1.2-mm- diameter,
zinc-coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners
of portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster
encasement.
F. Control Joints One-Piece Type: Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in M-
shaped configuration, with expanded flanges.
G. Control Joints Two-Piece Type: Pair of casing beads with back flanges formed to
provide slip-joint action, adjustable for joint widths from 3 to 16 mm.
H. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for
installations indicated.
I. Tying Wire: 16mm (18 U.S Std) galvanized mild steel wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and the conditions under which the work is to be installed,
and do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work has been corrected.
B. Acceptance of Background:
1 Before applying plaster ensure that backgrounds are:
a. Adequately true and level to achieve specified tolerances.
b. Adequately fixed.
c. Free from contamination and loose areas.
d. Adequately prepared to give a good bond.
C. Beads, Lath and Accessories:
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 Ensure that they are properly fixed and accurately located before applying
plaster.
Ensure any which are rusted, improperly set or otherwise defective are replaced.
3.02 METAL LATH INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer’s Recommendations:
1 To be strictly followed for all products and materials, and selection of type of
lathing suitable for function indicated.
B. Tension:
1 Fix lathing from the centre outwards so that it is taut.
C. Direction:
1 Fix lath with long dimension and ribs at right angles to support.
D. Same Plane Junctions:

1 Extend lathing not less than 150mm onto adjacent concrete or masonry surfaces
which are to be plastered.
E. Laps:
1 Do not lap lathing within 100mm of angles or curves.
2 Diamond mesh/self-furring lathing: lap side edges 13mm and secure with wire
ties at not more than 150mm centres.
3 Ribbed lathing: lap side edges by nesting ribs or selvedge and secure with wire
ties at not more than 150mm centres.
4 End laps: make supports wherever possible. Lap ends 50mm and secure with
wire ties at
a. not more than 150mm centres for diamond mesh lathing, and
b. each rib for ribbed lathing.
F. Angles:
1 Diamond mesh/self-furring lathing: form by bending into internal angle and
lapping at least 150mm onto adjoining lath, or butt jointing lathing at internal
angle and covering with corner lath.
2 Ribbed lathing: butt joint at internal angle and cover with corner lath.
G. Wire Ties:
1 Twist ends tightly together, cut off surplus and bend ends of wire away from face
of coating.
H. Concrete And Masonry Backgrounds:
1 Plain lathing: fix with 38mm clout nails or staples, driven into fixing blocks or
plugs at not exceeding 300 x 300mm staggered centers.
2 Ribbed lathing: fix with 38mm clout nails driven through each rib into fixing
blocks or plugs at not exceeding 400mm centres.
3 Self-furring lathing: fix with 38mm galvanised self-furring nails at 150 x 150 mm
centres.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
I. Corner Lath:
1 Fix at internal angles of all surfaces to be plastered, except where otherwise
indicated.
2 Fix with wire ties or 38mm nails, as applicable, at not exceeding 300mm centres
along each outer edge.
J. Strip Lath:
1 150mm wide lath: fix over cracks in concrete or masonry walls and over joints
between dissimilar backgrounds.
2 Fix with galvanised masonry nails at not exceeding 300mm centres along outer
edges.
3.03 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for
provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope
accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach
accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and in
alignment during plastering.
B. Beads Generally:
1 Fix plumb, square and true to line and level.
2 Concrete/Masonry backgrounds: fix bead on each side of trim with galvanized
masonry nails at not exceeding 300mm centres.
3 Metal lathing: fix bead with tying wire at not exceeding 600mm centres.
4 Cut edges of metal beads: paint with black tar-based paint.
C. Corner Beads:
1 Fix at all external angles in plasterwork.
D. Edge Beads:
1 Fix where plasterwork terminates or abuts against dissimilar surfaces other than
frames.
E. Control Joint Beads:
1 Fix control joint beads with galvanised nails at not exceeding 300mm centres.
2 Locate Control Joints:
a. Where indicated on approved shop drawings;
b. Where joints or natural breaks occur in backgrounds;
c. At no more than 6m centres.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.04 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING
A. Generally:
1 Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing
loose material and substances that may impair the Work.
2 Cut off projections and concrete fins.
3 Remove efflorescence, laitance, dirt and other loose material by thoroughly dry
brushing.
4 Remove all traces of mould oil, paint, grease, dirt and other materials
incompatible with coating by scrubbing with water containing detergent and
washing off with plenty of clean water.
B. Ferrous Surfaces:
1 Treat with rust-inhibitive paint where plaster will be in direct contact.
C. Hacking for Key:

1 Roughen concrete surfaces thoroughly and evenly to a depth of 3mm by sand
blasting, bush hammering or abrasive blasting.
2 Clean surfaces by washing and brushing.
D. Adjust Suction:
1 Wet hacked concrete masonry backgrounds immediately before applying
coatings.
3.05 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to

comply with ASTM C 926.
B. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
C. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 3 mm in 3 m
from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 3-m
straightedge placed at any location on surface.
D. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that
neither will be damaged by installation of other.
E. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that
act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not
terminated at metal frame by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal frame
before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
F. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush
with corner beads on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior
work.
G. Accuracy: Finish surface to a true plane to correct line and level, with all angles
and corners to a right angle unless otherwise specified and with walls and
reveals plumb and square.
H. Irregular Surfaces:
1 Curved surfaces, splayed surfaces and other irregular surfaces shall be true to
profile.
2 Check with accurate metal forms and templates.
I. Frames:
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 Bring plaster out flush with wood and metal frames and grounds and finish each
coat with a small, neat V joint where plaster finishes against frames.
J. Vertical Surfaces:
1 Plaster shall extend full height from floor to 10 cm above the soffit of
ceiling/structural soffit, unless otherwise indicated.
2 Suspended ceiling: finish plaster flush with system bead or angle, or 75 mm
above ceiling soffit where there is a perimeter bead or angle.
K. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush
with corner beads on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior
work.
L. Moist-cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926.
M. Scratch Coat:
1 Apply with sufficient force and cement slurry (1:1) to form a good key, cure for 3
days.
N. Brown Coat:
1 Apply the second coat, scratch the surface, cure for 3 days and allow to dry for at
least 24 hours.
2 Adjust suction by wetting immediately before applying finish coat.
O. Skim/Finish Coats:
1 Apply the finish coat and finish with a steel trowel to a smooth, hard finish.
2 Cure with a light fog spray of water for 4 days, commencing 12 hours after
completion of application.
3 Protect against rapid drying until thoroughly cured.
4 Final coat to be left to dry for 30 days after curing period before proceeding with
paint application.
P. Render Finish Coat:

1 Apply render plaster finish in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations
Q. DM – Dubai Municipality
1 Make good defective or damaged plaster before starting decoration. Cut or rake
out defective work, moisten background and fill with finish coat mix and finish to
match adjacent work.
2 Repair, point, cut, and patch plaster around work abutting, setting into or
extending into plastered surfaces on completion of such work.
DEWA
R. Exposed blockwork to receive paint finish shall be applied with cement mortar
slurry, rubbed over blockwork to fill joints.
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate
other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster
surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or
replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs,
efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as
necessary to comply with required visual effects.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of
plaster on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and
other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise
damaged during plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove
unused materials, containers, equipment, and plaster debris.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and Installer, that ensure plaster work is without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Particular
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceramic tiles for floors and walls of the wet areas, at main
entrance fountain area at places as scheduled in drawings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit to the Engineer, manufacturers' specifications and

installation instructions for materials specified. Include certifications and other
data to show compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer samples of each type, class and colour of tile,
not less than 300mm square on plywood backing, and grouted as required.
Sample submittal and Engineer's approval thereof shall be for colour, pattern,
texture and joint width only. Compliance with all other requirements is the
exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings showing layout (scale 1:20) of all
field tiles and trim shapes, jointing pattern, etc. Provide 1:2 details of expansion
joints, control joints, special tiles, frame and service abutments, etc.
A. Obtain each material required for any type and colour of tile work from a single
source, so as to minimise variations in appearance and quality.
B. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Before installing tile, erect mock-ups for each form
of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample
and execution. Build mock-ups using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for
labelling sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter,

and other causes.

C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent
coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these
precautions coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from
bonding surfaces before setting tile.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with EN176 for types, compositions, and
grades of tile indicated.
B. Colours, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are

indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface
textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific
products or materials compiling with the following requirements:
1 Match Engineer's sample.
2 Provide tile trim and accessories that match colour and finish of adjoining flat tile.
C. Technical Features: Fully vitrified tile (glazed, unglazed and non-skid) products
to comply with EN176 and as follows:
Water absorption -- Less than 0.03%
Resistance to bending - 27 N/mm2
Co-efficient of thermal expansion - 9MK-1
Resistance to staining: Class 2 minimum
D. Allow for required percentage of wall tiles to be edge glazed for use on exposed
corners. Identify boxes containing such tiles accordingly.
2.02 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Vitrified Stoneware tiles : Provide tile units that comply with requirements of EN
121 (BS 6431 Part 3 Group A1).
B. Ceramic Tiles: Provide tile units that comply with the requirements of BS 6431
Part 7 for glazed and unglazed tiles.
C. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units selected from manufacturer's standard shapes
to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.03 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:

1. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive for thick bed application: Mixture of
prepackaged dry-mortar mix and liquid-latex additive as Laticrete 3701 or
approved equal.
2. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive for thin-set application: Mixture of
prepackaged dry-mortar mix and liquid-latex additive as Laticrete 4237 or
approved equal (adhesive based).
a. Use of the above is required for all thin set applications and as slurry bond coats
at mortar and bed applications.
B. Adhesive: Adhesives formulated for tile and recommended by their manufacturer

for the application indicated.
1. Organic adhesives: ANSI A136.1, Type I.
2.04 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Grout shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the type of tiles.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-
2.4, composed as follows:
1. Factory-Prepared, Dry-Grout Mixture: Factory-prepared mixture of portland
cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients
to produce the following:
Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2mm) and narrower.
Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2mm) and wider.
2. Mixture of Dry-/grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared, dry-
grout mix and latex additive complying with the following requirements.
Unsanded Dry-Grout Mix: Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for materials
described in Section H-2.3, for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and narrower.
Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
C. Water-cleanable, Tile Grouting epoxy where specified, shall be as recommended
by the tile manufacturer: ANSI A118.3.
2.05 CONTROL JOINTS MATERIAL
A. Extruded with PVC (elastomeric ) with internal baffles, co-extruded with elastic
PVC insert.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present,
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy
films and curing compounds.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and
mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been
completed before installing tile.
B. Allowable Variations in Substrate Levels:

1. Mortar Set Floors: 1/500 distance and 9mm total maximum variation from levels
shown.
2. Mortar Set Walls and Ceilings: 1/400 distance and 6mm total maximum variation
from planes shown.
C. Thin-Set Work: Same as allowable variation in finished work.

D. Grind or fill concrete, masonry and plaster substrates as required to comply with
allowable variations. For fill and underlayment of concrete, masonry and plaster
substrates, utilise one (1) part Portland cement, three (3) parts sand and
sufficient Laticrete 3701 or approved equal to provide workable mortar mix.
E. Examine the substrates and adjoining construction, and the conditions under
which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work have been corrected.
F. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Blending: For tile exhibiting colour variations within the ranges selected during
sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged
accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in
colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not
factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before
installing, up to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Etch substrate with 10% solution of muriatic acid as may be required to remove
curing compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of
specified mortar for tiles. Rinse with water to remove all traces of acid.
C. Seal substrate with sealer as recommended by manufacturer of mortar.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Standards: Unless otherwise shown or specified comply with applicable

requirements of ANSI A 108.1 through A 108.6, ANSI 137.1 and
recommendations of TCA, "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation".
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for the

installation of each material required.
C. Allowable Variations in Finished Work: Do not exceed the following deviations

from level and plumb, and from elevations, locations, slopes and alignments
shown:
1. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2
years.
2. Walls: 1/800 run any direction; +/- 3mm at any location; 0.8mm offset at any
location.
3. Joints: +/- 0.8mm joint with variation at any location; 1/600 run for deviation from
plumb and true; and for other variations in alignment of joints.
D. Lay out tile work in pattern shown using field tile and trim shapes as shown.
Center tile fields both directions in each space or on each wall area, and adjust to
minimize tile cutting. Do not use cut tiles smaller than 2/3 of the dimensions in
both directions. Use uniform joint widths for ceramic tile and for quarry tile unless
otherwise shown or approved. Cut field tile, not trim shapes, unless otherwise
shown.
E. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures in the spaces
shown or scheduled to receive tiles. Form a complete covering without
interruptions except for control and expansion joints as shown and as required to
comply with requirements. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and
corners without disruption of pattern or joint alignments.
F. Liquid Latex Mortar Thin-Set Installation: Use liquid latex mortar for thin-set tile
work, unless otherwise shown.
G. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to
form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown.
Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting
pattern or joint alignments.
H. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile
without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim,
finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical
outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers
overlap tile.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
I. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and
centre tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to
minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.
J. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
K. Grout tile joints to comply with the manufacturer's recommendation.
L. Provide control joints or expansion joints where shown, or required by ANSI or

TCA standard or by job condition for proper workmanship. Install removable
divider strip of proper width and depth of the tile and setting bed. Remove strips
after grouting tiles and properly curing the work. Install joint fillers and sealants,
in control joints and expansion joints, of type as recommended by the tiling
manufacturer.
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile
surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and
grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after
installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from
effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after
cleaning.
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating
manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and
remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked,
chipped, broken, unbounded, and otherwise defective tile work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral
protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work
with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent
staining, damage, and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is
completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner
from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 09505
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
To locations indicated on the drawings and finish schedule, the following:

1 Metal stud wall framing and wall furring support.
2 Metal suspension system with furring channels.
3 Gypsum board (to types specified).
4 Related accessories.
5 Insulation including acoustical sealants and gaskets.
6 Gypsum board partitions as indicated on drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each type of product specified.
B. Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and

expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, locations of access panels,
details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.
C. Samples:
1 Trim Accessories: Full size sample in 300mm long length.
A. Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with five years
experience.
B. Mock-ups: Install mock-ups of at least 15 Sq.m in surface area in an approved
location to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of material and execution.

1 Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
1.04 REFERENCES

1 ASTM C36
2 ASTM C840
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3 ASTM C1002
Gypsum board.
4 ASTM C645
Runners, and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw
Application of Gypsum Board.
5 ASTM C754
Members to receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard.
6 ANSI/ASTM E90
7 ANSI/ASTM E119
Mineral Fiber: Mineral Fiber batts for sound reduction.
8. GA-201 (Gypsum Association U.S.A.)- Gypsum Board for walls and

Ceilings.
9. GA-216 (Gypsum Association U.S.A.) - Recommended Specifications
for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
British Standard Specifications
1 BS 1230 Gypsum Plasterboard.
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand

name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against
damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion,
construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent
sagging.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system
with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition
assemblies.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL BOARD MATERIALS
A. Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard and Ceiling Board to ASTM C36.

Type: Regular for vertical surfaces.
Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Edges: tapered and bevelled.
Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
Thermal resistance: 0.09m2k/w
Thermal conductivity: 0.16 w/mk
Cement Board units: ANSI A118.9.
2.02 METAL STUD SYSTEM
A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754.
B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C-645 requirements for metal and
with hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
C. Non-Load bearing steel studs with top and bottom tracks 0.9mm (20 gauge) steel
studs shall be roll formed, and rigid furring channels, conforming to ASTM C-645.
D. Furring Channels: ASTM C-645, flanges not less than 38mm edge to be bent
back 90 degrees and doubled to form a 5mm minimum return, faces knurled
and webs provided with suitable knock-out, pass-through holes. Floor and
ceiling runner channels to be fabricated from same material as studs.
E. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
F. Shaftwall Framing Materials

1 Shaftwall assemblies including studs, channels, runners, struts and fasteners as
required by C-T stud types of size indicated, as required by fire rating and air
resistance, and as approved by the Engineer. Members shall conform to
applicable provisions of ASTM C645.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2 Assembly shall meet the following requirements:

a. Deflection of the shaftwall shall be limited to L/240 of the span in height.
3 Leakage of Air (Shaftwall): Shaftwall construction shall be airtight and free from
whistling and other noise. Meeting such requirements shall be the responsibility
of this Section, whether or not it becomes necessary to use additional material
and labor to accomplish this result. Such additional materials and labor
(materials as specified or other proposed materials) shall be included by this
Section at no additional cost.
2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Generally:
1 To comply with the requirements of ASTM.
B. Hangers:
1 Shall be 5mm diameter mild steel rods, coated with rust inhibitive paint.
2 Inserts shall be suitable and approved metal inserts designed to carry out less
than 5 times the hanger design load. Inserts shall be protected by galvanising.
C. Channels:
1 Shall be cold-rolled steel and galvanised as per ASTM.
2 Shall be 38mm deep for main runners and 19mm deep for cross furring screwing
(Hat) channels weighing 0.707 kg/m and 0.455 kg/m respectively.
3 Tie Wire: Soft annealed steel minimum two loops of 18 gauge wire.
D. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2

years.
1 Shall be 1.20m between main runners and maximum 400mm between cross
furring screwing (Hat) channels, first runner no more than 150mm from wall.
2 Hangers shall be set a 900mm along main runners.
2.04 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that
effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints as
B. Steel Screws
1 Screws for use with furring channels to ASTM C-1002 to be self-tapping, type,
case hardened, with socketed counter-sunk heads No. 6 (U.S. gauge) x 25 mm
for single layer application.
2 Screw type types S (for 26 gauge) and G (for gypsum board to gypsum board
framing).
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Trim: Comply with ASTM C 1047.

1 Material: Galvanized steel sheet.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

LC - Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
Expansion (Control) Joint: Provide as indicated.
2.06 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation

standards.
B. Steel Screws: Screws for use with furring channels to ASTM C-1002 to be self-
tapping, type, case hardened, with socketed counter-sunk heads.
C. Joint treatment materials: Comply with ASTM C 475.
D. Other Materials
1
Metal corner beads, casing beads and stops shall be for drywall application,
and shall be manufactured from .55 mm (No. 25 U.S. gauge) galvanized sheet
metal with perforated flanges, one piece length per location where practical.
2 Tape to be 50 mm wide, perforated type, and approved by manufacturer of
gypsum wallboard products.
3 Jointing compounds to be either case in vinyl or latex, slow setting, bedding and
finishing compounds of type approved by manufacturer of gypsum wallboard
products. Fast setting joint fillers shall not be used.
4 Sound seal gaskets for use between top track and suspended ceilings (or other
surfaces) to be a closed cell vinyl foam self-adhering sealant tape 6mm x 25mm
wide.
5 Other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
operable installation of the work in this Section, shall be first quality and to
approval.
D. Sound Alternation Blankets (Batt Insulation): ASTM C-665, Type I (blankets with
acoustic glass tissue facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with
mineral fibers and with density 40 kg/cu.m.
PART -3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencement ensure that work of other trades is complete to the

point where installation of work under this Section may properly commence.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Verify that gypsum board may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes
and regulations, manufacturers' approved recommendations, and the original
design.
C. DISCREPANCIES
1 Do not commence installation of system board until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.02 METAL STUD INSTALLATION
A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to
framing installation.
B. Install runner channels at floor (or top of wall) and ceiling accurately, align
according to partition layout.
C. Install steel studs vertically at 400mm to centres indicated on drawings and fix
studs to runners by screwing or crimping.
D. Splice studs where necessary by nesting and lap a minimum of 200mm, fix
with minimum of one (1) screw per stud flange.
E. Where openings occur in metal stud walls, reinforce and frame openings to
adequately carry loads. Studs on each side of openings shall be extended from
the floor to ceiling. Erect track at head (also sills, if required) to accommodate
intermediate studs. At end of each horizontal trim track, cut out flanges, turnup
web and screw to studs. Provide and install double steel studs at door openings,
double steel studs shall be replaced by steel U channel as indicated on drawing
for Doors 2600m and higher.
F. Deflection spaces between drywall partitions and the structural framing

components are essential to allow for deflection of the framing components.
Such spaces shall be provided in drywall partitions at top at underside of
structural members, by use of movement joints .
G. Blocking: Nail wood blocking to studs. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs.
H. Co-ordinate installation of anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work

placed in or behind partition framing.
I. Stiffen stud walls over 2100 mm in height at a maximum 1200mm (or equal
spacing otherwise) with one (1) horizontal 19mm bracing channel wire tied
inside to each metal stud or secured as recommended by stud manufacturer.
J. Partition Heights: as detailed either to suspended ceilings or full height floor to
roof construction above.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.03 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete block and concrete walls.
B. Erect furring channels horizontally and/or vertically as indicated on drawings.
C. Space furring channels maximum 400 mm on center, not more than 100 mm
from floor and ceiling lines, and abutting walls.
3.04 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Place batt insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind
and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight
to items passing through partitions.
B. Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
C. Seal joints between sound insulated wallboard partitions and floor, and joints
where partitions abut walls or vertical surfaces of other materials, with
acoustical sealant to prevent noise transmission.
D. Extrude a full 12mm diameter bead into each joint to effectively block airborne
sound transmission.
E. Use sound seal gasket between partition and ceilings.
F. At electrical boxes in all wallboard sound rated partitions, provide and install
incombustible glass fibre insulation around each box and fill joint between box
with insulation. Similarly fill joints around pipes, ducts and other penetrations
through wallboard sound rated partitions with insulation to prevent airborne
sound transmission.
G. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at:

1 Base Layer.
Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, ductwork, rough-in boxes.
3.05 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless

blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact
at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between
panels. Do not force into place.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against
cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
G. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining
gypsum panels.
H. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed
spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1 Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or
smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq.
ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.
2 Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3 Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other
structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut
gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural
members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
I. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board
application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.

J. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 203.2 mm o.c.
3.06 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS

A. Single-Layer Application:
1 On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically otherwise indicated, and
minimize end joints. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing
member in alternate courses of board.
B. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for
base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base
layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least
one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or
required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of
partitions.
C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel
drill screws.
D. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face
layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners.
E. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly
adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of
gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written
recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening
adhesive has set.
F. Tile Backing Panels: Cementitious Backer Units, ANSI A108.11 where indicated.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.07 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with
same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific
locations approved by Engineer for visual effect.
3.08 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to
prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint
compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or bevelled edges, and damaged areas using setting-
type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories
having flanges not requiring tape.
D. Fill openings around cutouts with compound or acoustical sealant as
recommended by manufacturer.
E Fill all joints, fastener heads, trim recesses, cracks and other depressions with
joint compound. Finish smooth and flush so that joints, screws and other items
will not be visible after painting.
3.09 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 3 mm in 3M in any direction. (Non
accumulative)
3.1 CLEAN-UP
A. Promptly, as the Work proceeds and upon completion, clean up and remove
away from job site any surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the Work of
this trade. In particular, scrape off and remove all cement and joint filler from
adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 09677
FLOOR FINISHES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes all floor finishes:
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 Section 03300 - "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete substrates to receive
flooring.
2 Section 03300 - Concrete Toppings.
3 Section 03300 - Sand Cement Screeds.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's
technical data, installation instructions, and recommendations for each epoxy
flooring component required.
B. Samples: Of each flooring system required, 150 mm square, applied by Installer
for this Project to a rigid backing, in color, texture, and finish indicated.
C. Maintenance Data: For epoxy flooring to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has specialized in
installing flooring similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary epoxy flooring materials, including primers,
resins, hardening agents, and sealing or finish coats, through one source from a
single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill
material, joint sealant, and repair materials of type and from source
recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
C. Field Samples: On floor area selected by Engineer, provide full-thickness flooring
system samples that are at least 1200 mm square to demonstrate texture, color,
thickness, chemical resistance, cleanability, and other features of each flooring
system required. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place field
samples.
1 If field samples are unacceptable, make adjustments to comply with requirements
and apply additional samples until field samples are approved.
2 After field samples are approved, these surfaces will be used to evaluate epoxy
flooring.
3 Obtain Engineer’s approval of field samples before applying flooring.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
4 Final approval of colors will be from field samples, not samples submitted for
verification.

A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken,
bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage
and mixing with other components.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental
effects.

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with epoxy flooring manufacturer's written
instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture,
ventilation, and other conditions affecting epoxy flooring installation.

C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring application and for not less than 24 hours
after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall furnish written guarantees for not less than five (5) years
against all defects in materials and workmanship covering all work under this
section from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works. State in
guarantees that the Contractor agrees to replace all failures in work, and to
correct all defects in material or workmanship during this guarantee period.
B. Guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities, which
manufacturers and the Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Hardener CFS-1: Consists of selected and graded dynagrip aggregate, Portland
cement and special additive, which helps in easy trowel the wet concrete:
Concrete must give the following values

1 Aggregate abrasion valve:
2 Aggregate Impact valve:
3 Aggregate Proshing valve:
B. Epoxy Coating - EP
Two component solvent based epoxy resin coating applied by spray coating to be
applied in two coat’s with dry film thickness of 90 microns.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to flooring manufacturer's
written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral
substrate for epoxy flooring application.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze,
efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and
other contaminates incompatible with epoxy flooring.
1 Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturer's written
instructions are more stringent.
2 Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to flooring manufacturer's
written recommendations.
C. Mix components and prepare materials according to flooring manufacturer's
written instructions.
D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from
reflecting through epoxy flooring according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply components of flooring system according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface.
1 Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of flooring
system to substrate and optimum intercoat adhesion.
2 Cure flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
3 At substrate expansion and isolation joints (if any), provide joint in flooring to
comply with flooring manufacturer's written recommendations.
a. Apply joint sealant to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading
rate.
C. Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness required. Hand or power
trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured, sand to remove trowel marks and
roughness.
D. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces. Round internal and
external corners. Install cove base according to manufacturer's written
instructions and details including taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and
topcoating of cove base.
E. Apply sealing or finish coat(s), including grout coat, if any, of type recommended
by flooring manufacturer to produce finish indicated. Apply in number of coats
and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Protect epoxy flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of
construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary
covering, recommended in writing by epoxy flooring manufacturer.
B. Clean flooring not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each Project area. Use
cleaning materials and procedures recommended in writing by epoxy flooring
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 09910
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed items
and surfaces.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the
surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a
surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as
similar adjacent materials or surfaces.
1 Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts
(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces
of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final
finish.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces,
operating parts, and labels. Do not paint over UL or other code-required labels or
equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1 Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel.
2 Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture
to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1 Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review.
Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2 Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label
each Sample for location and application.
a. Concrete: Provide two 100mm square samples for each color and finish.
b. Concrete Unit Masonry: 100x200mm samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the
center, for each finish and color.
c. Wood: 300 mm square samples for each color and material on hardboard.
d. Stained or Natural Wood: 100x200mm samples of natural- or stained-wood
finish on representative surfaces.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
e. Ferrous Metal: Two 100mm square samples of flat metal and two 200mm long
samples of solid metal for each color and finish.
C. Submit a detailed "Painting Schedule" for review by the Engineer. Prepare this
schedule on the basis of surfaces, types of paint materials, types of primers and
sealers, number of coats and list the brand name of the products/manufacture for
each use.
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and
coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from
the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components,
duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at
least 30 sq.m. of surface until required sheen, color, and texture are obtained;
simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work.
1 The Engineer will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and
conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in
this room or surface according to the schedule or as specified. After finishes are
accepted, this room or surface will be used to evaluate coating systems of a
similar nature.

A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages
and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following
information:
1 Product name or title of material.
2 Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3 Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4 Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5 Thinning instructions.
6 Application instructions.
7 Color name and number.
8 VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at
a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage
containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials

that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various

coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by
manufacturer for application indicated. Paint material containers not displaying
manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
C. Colors: Match Engineer’s sample.
2.02 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS
A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory formulated high performance latex
block fillers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for
compliance with requirements for paint application.
1 Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2 Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to
ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request,
furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of
compatible primers.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined
surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the
item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items
removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of
substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and
grease before cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other
contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted
surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as
specified.
1 Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2 Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry and cement
plaster surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease,
oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or
sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface
preparation.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3 Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,
mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view
smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white
shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming,
fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler.
Sand smooth when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet
wall construction occurs on back side.
e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
4 Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been
shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign
substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with
SSPC's recommendations.
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash
coat before priming.
c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch
up with same primer as the shop coat.
5 Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based
solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove
pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by
mechanical methods.
D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1 Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
2 Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,
remove surface film and strain material before using.
3 Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended
limits.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being
applied.
1 Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or
conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
2 Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3 The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in
fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to
maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
4 Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind
permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
5 Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible
through registers or grilles.
6 Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
7 Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned,
pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after
preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1 The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured
as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth,
even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between
applications.
2 Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup
painted.
3 If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give
special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed
fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4 Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or
feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat
of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or
other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1 Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of
appropriate size for surface or item being painted.
2 Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
3 Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as
recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than
manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness
indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended
by manufacturer.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is

limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
1 Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 for Schedule of colour coding and
identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit.
2 Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical
and electrical components and paint separately.
3 Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and
exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are
prefinished.
4 Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when
painted accidentally.
5 Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
6 Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone
equipment before installing equipment.
7 Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to
finishing.
8 Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, that are visible through grilles and louvers with
one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind
louvers, grilles.
F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure
complete coverage with pores filled.
G. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended
by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that
has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where
evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a
finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
H. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2
years.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and
other discarded paint materials from Project site.
1 After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent
finished surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from
painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing
painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others
to protect their work. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 09967
INTUMESCENT PAINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of fireproof paints
(intumescent paint) to exposed structural steel work, including prime and finish
coats, to provide 1 hours fire rating or as indicated at Places as shown on
drawings.
B. Protective decorative finish (top seal).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For fireproof paint system indicated. Include fillers and primers.
1 Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required fireproof paint materials.
Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and
application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general
classification.
2 Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information,
including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying
fireproof paint materials.
3 Certification: By the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local
regulations controlling use of VOCs.
B. Samples : For each color to be applied, with texture to simulate actual
conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.
1 Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including primers, and
finish coats. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review.
Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2 Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each finish sample.
Label each sample for location and application.
3 Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Engineer's review of color
and texture only:
a. Ferrous Metal: Two 300mm square samples of flat metal, and two 300mm long
samples of solid metal.
A. Applicator Qualifications: An experienced applicator who has completed fireproof
painting applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for the Project
and whose work has resulted in application with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers, and undercoat materials for each fireproof
paint system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fireproof paint materials with the

surface-burning characteristics as per requirements of Civil Defence.
D. Bench Mark (Mockups): Provide a full-coat finish sample for each type of coating
and substrate required. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.

1 The Engineer will select one typical area to receive fireproof paint to represent
surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating.
2 Notify the Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when benchmark
samples will be applied.
3 Apply according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting
and other environmental services have been activated.
4 Obtain the Engineer's approval of mock-up before starting fireproof paint
application.
5 Maintain mock-up during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard


1 Product name or title of material.
2 Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3 UL label, indicating tested fire rating.
4 Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
5 Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
6 Thinning and mixing instructions.
7 Application instructions.
8 Color name and number.
9 VOC content.
10 Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at
a minimum ambient temperature recommended by the manufacture. Maintain
containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
1 Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take
necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.

A. Temperature and Weather Conditions: Apply coatings only when the
temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are as
recommended by the manufacturer.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Include coverage for fireproofing to remain free from cracking,
checking, dusting, flaking, spalling, separation, and blistering. Reinstall or repair
failures as per the instructions of the Engineer. Provide a warranty for a period of
5 years.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes
of establishing minimum quality standards. Products which are equal to, or better
than those specified, and which conform to the Engineer’s design requirements
and colour selections, may be acceptable subject to the Engineer’s approval.
2.02 COATINGS
A. Intumescent Coating: Solvent based intumescent coating for both internal and
external steelwork. Coating must have the following characteristic.
1 Specific Gravity:
2 Flash Point:
3 Hardness:
4 Surface burning characteristics flame spread: 15 - 20
5 Fire rating:
B. Top Seal: Semi glossy modified acrylic top seal, to be used on Intumescent
Coating (based coat) having the following characteristics:
1 Specific gravity:
2 Flash Point:
3 Spread of flame:
C. Prime Adhesive: Of type recommended by fire proofing manufacturer.
D. Provide all accessory items required for fixing or applying fire proofing materials
and as recommended by manufacturers of the fir proofing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that clips, hangers, supports, sleeve, and other items required to penetrate
fire proofing, are in place.
C. Verify ducts, piping, equipment, or other items which would interface with
application of fire proofing are not positioned until fire proofing work is complete.
D. Verify that voids and cracks in substrate are filled, and projections are removed
where fireproofing is exposed to view as a finish material.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which
affect bond of fire proofing. Clean backgrounds as necessary following
B. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond by scraping, brushing,
scrubbing, or recommendations.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply fire proofing strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions,
using recommended equipment, installing all necessary background
reinforcements, fixings, restraints, or other accessories required to comply with
the performance requirements of this section and as indicated on drawings.
B. Apply primer adhesive and fire proofing in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
C. Mix and apply fire proofing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Apply intumescent coating and top seal only by spray application.
E. Apply top seal to structure, where structure is not covered by false ceiling or
wherever indicated on drawings.
F. Provide ventilation as required by manufacturer for installation in enclosed areas.

A. Inspect the installed fire proofing after application for integrity of fire protection,
prior to concealment of work.
B. Re-inspect the installed fire proofing for integrity of fire protection, after installtion
of subsequent work.
C. Have the completed work in all aspects, as per requirement of local inspectors
and provide approval certificate from Fire Department.

A. Leave all work clean following installation. The Contractor shall be responsible
for protecting the complete work from excessive dirt, misuse and damage. Any
damage shall be repaired/replaced as directed by the Engineer and in
accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Remove excess material, overspray, dropping, and debris.
C. Remove fire proofing from materials and surfaces or required to be fire proofed.
Protect surfaces not scheduled to receive fire proofing and equipment from
damage by overspray, fall-out and dusting.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 10155
TOILET PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
To be read with Division 1 – General Requirements.
A. This Section includes solid phenolic toilet compartments and screens. Doors
shall be integral with the partition system including door hardware.
1 Compartment Style: Wall supported.
2. Screen Style: Wall hung.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen
specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and
installation. Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and
screen assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
C. Samples: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required, prepared

on 150mm square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field
Work.
B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other
work for installation of toilet compartments and related items. Coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Provide 3 years warranty against any defects in materials and workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes of

establishing minimum quality standards. Products which are equal to, or better
than those specified, and which conform to the Engineer’s design requirements
A. Reference to a specific manufacturer or product in the project specification or
shown on drawings are given to establish type, quality, material or size and grade
that meets the project requirements.
Refer NEB approved list of suppliers
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.03 TOILET PANELS

A. Toilet panels shall be water resistant, solid phenolic core, constructed of
solidly fused plastic laminate with matte-finish melamine surfaces, with coloured
face sheets and black phenolic resin core that are integrally bounded. Panels
shall be 6 mm thick or as indicated on drawing with warranty against breakage,
corrosion and delamination. Trims will be covered by aluminium profiles as
indicated on drawings.
B. Toilet door shall be integral part of the system, made of same material.
2.04 HARDWARE
Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design or U-brackets for attaching
panels and screens to walls and pilasters of either chrome-plated, nonferrous,
A. cast zinc alloy.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of
stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with
theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications.
For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-
coated steel.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated

for compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive
compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment-mounted
hardware, and accessories as required.
Wall‑Supported Compartments: Provide corrosion-resistant anchoring
assemblies with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at
B. pilasters for connection to structural support as indicated on drawings.
Wall-Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and
C. finish as compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with
ANSI A117.1 for handicapped accessibility and as follows:
Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90
degrees. Provide gravity type, spring‑action cam type, or concealed torsion rod
1 type to suit manufacturer's standards.
Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit, designed for emergency access, with
2 combination rubber‑faced door strike and keeper.
Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface‑mounted latch unit,
designed for handicapped accessibility, with combination rubber‑faced door
3 strike and keeper.
Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and rubber‑tipped
4 bumper, sized to prevent door hitting mounted accessories.
Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit for out‑swinging doors. Provide pulls on
5 both faces of handicapped compartment doors.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.04 FINISH
A. Color: To match Engineer’s sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units

rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 13 mm
between pilasters and panels and not more than 25 mm between panels and
walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring
A. devices
Wall-Supported Compartments: Secure divider panels to build-in anchorage

devices using concealed fasteners. Level, plumb, and tighten installation with
devices furnished. Hang doors and adjust so that bottoms of doors are level with
B. bottoms of pilasters when doors are in closed position.
Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and to suit supporting structure. Use continuous (full-height)
brackets for attaching screens to walls and pilasters. Set units level and plumb
C. and to resist lateral impact.
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to
manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-
swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when
unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing doors in entrance
screens to return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet
compartments and screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
Appendix 1
TOILET CUBICLES
PANEL
12 mm HPL (High Pressure Laminate)
FITTINGS
Anti-vandal / Eloxal, anodised aluminium.
TECHNICAL DETAILS
Cubicle height is standard.
Panel height - 183 cm.
Header profile thickness - 2 cm.
Leg - 15 cm. Short legs ( 10 cm) leg can be used to construct 195 cm height cubicles.
Standard width of the cubicle is 90 cm, minimum width is 80 cm.
Door width is 55-65 cm and minimum 90 cm for the disabled door. Door normally open inward, in
disabled wc door outward.
Depth has to be minimum 130 cm and standard is 154 cm. Depth of the cabin depends on the type of
the lavartory pan.
Cubicles dimensions can be changed regarding to place of the installation and design.
COLOR
Subject to Engineer’s approval at site.
END OF SECTION

MAIN WORKS
SECTION 10210
METAL LOUVERS
PART 1 ‑ GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Fixed metal louvers, at places as shown on drawing.
2. At grand canopy as detailed.
Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install metal wall louvers to

withstand the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal
movement without evidencing permanent deformation of louver components
including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver
A. blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for type of product specified.
Shop drawings of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations,

sections, and details showing profiles, angles, and spacing of louver blades; unit
dimensions related to wall openings and construction; free areas for each size
indicated; profiles of frames at jambs, heads, and sills; and anchorage details
B. and locations.
Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's colour charts showing
C. the full range of colors available for units with factory‑applied colour finishes.
Samples for verification of each type of metal finish required, prepared on

samples of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where
finishes involve normal colour and texture variations, include sample sets
D. showing the full range of variations expected.
A. Field Measurements: Check actual louver openings by accurate field

measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 ‑ PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S

Refer NEB List of Approved Suppliers
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminium Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063‑T5 or T‑52.
Aluminium Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper
as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer to
B. produce required finish.
Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series
stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive
C. or incompatible with joined materials.
Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for type of loading and
installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot‑dip galvanized anchors and
inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion
resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled‑in‑place
D. anchors.
Assemble louvers in shop to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble

units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for
A. reassembly and coordinated installation.
Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and
B. frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.
C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated,

with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances of louvers,
adjoining construction, and perimeter sealant joints.
D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated but not more than
recommended by manufacturer, 1830 mm o.c., whichever is less. At horizontal
joints between louver units, provide horizontal mullions except where continuous
E. vertical assemblies are indicated.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers where
indicated or required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to
F. interior.
Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades as follows, unless
otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections
G. between frame members necessary:
1 With fillet welds, concealed from view.
2.04 FIXED, EXTRUDED‑ALUMINUM WALL LOUVERS
Horizontal, Drainable, Fixed‑Blade Louvers: Extruded‑aluminium frames and

louver blades, designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of
gutters in front edges of blades and channels in jambs and mullions, complying
A. with the following requirements:
1 Louver Depth: 100 mm, unless otherwise indicated.

2 Frame Thickness: 2mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3 Blade Thickness: 2mm, unless otherwise indicated.
4 Blade Angle: 45 degrees, unless otherwise indicated.
5 Free area: Minimum 50%.
Horizontal, Non-drainable-Blade Louver: Extruded aluminium frames and louver

B. blades complying with the following:
1. Louver depth: 100mm.
2. Frame and blade thickness: 2mm.
3. Free area: 50%.
For the operable type louver, provide insulated metal panel using CFC free
polyurethane core in between aluminium sheet facings 0.8mm thick. Provide
C. suitable hardware for the operation indicated.
2.05 FINISHES
Finish: Powder organic coating in accordance with BS 6496 as per approved

sample and mock-up; colour to be permanent and free from "banding" or
A. "streaking" and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
PART 3 ‑ EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for

installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry
A. construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.02 INSTALLATION
Locate and place louver units plumb, level, and at indicated alignment with
A. adjacent work.
Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted
to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weather tight
B. connection.
Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and
C. secured.
Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint
D. fillers, as indicated.
Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding operations

required for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of
corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop,
E. make required alterations, and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
Protect metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy

coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete,
F. masonry, or dissimilar metals.
Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver

installation progresses, where required to make louver joints weather tight.
Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during
G. installation of louver.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
Protect louvers from damage of any kind during construction period including use
of temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver
A. manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.
Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction period, so that no

evidence remains of correction work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful,
B. as judged by the Engineer, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air‑dried coating that
matches colour and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory‑applied finish
1 coating.
Test operation of adjustable wall louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully
C. functioning units that comply with requirements.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.04 CLEANING
Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected
by temporary covering to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period.
A. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.
Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or
B. detergent not harmful to finishes. Rinse surfaces thoroughly and dry.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 10240
METAL GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes powder coated aluminum grilles at places as shown on
drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For grille units. Include plans; elevations; sections; and
details showing profiles, angles, spacing and attachment to adjacent work. Show
unit dimensions and anchorage details and locations.
C. Samples: Of type of metal finish required, prepared on Samples of same
thickness and material indicated for final Work.
A. Mockups: Before installing, build mockups to verify selections made under

sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials
and execution. Build mockups using materials indicated for the completed Work.
A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5.
B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series
stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are
incompatible with joined materials. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation
conditions.
C. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and
installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and
inserts as needed for corrosion resistance. Use stainless steel or lead expansion
bolt devices for drilled-in place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work
A. Provide grilles of design, materials, sizes depth, arrangement, and metal
thickness as required for optimum performance with respect to strength;
durability; and uniform appearance.
B. Assemble grilles in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete
assembly.
D. Join members to one another with fillet welds concealed from view, unless
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.03 FINISHES
A. Aluminum Finish: Powder coated finish to BS 6496, color as approved by
Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and
directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in steel
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent
work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible.

D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding.
Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that
cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and
refinish entire unit or provide new units.
E. Protect nonferrous-metal surfaces by applying a heavy coating of bituminous
paint on surfaces that will be in contact with dissimilar metals.
3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING
A. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or
detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
B. Protect components from damage during construction. Use temporary
protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer.
Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion.
C. Restore components damaged during installation and construction so no

evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful,
as determined by Engineer, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that
matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 10260
WALL & CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include physical characteristics, such as durability, resistance to
fading, and flame resistance, for corner guard’s system component indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, extent, and installation details of corner guard’s
system component. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.

C. Samples: Samples of type of corner guard component required, showing the full
range of color and texture variations expected for corner guard’s system
component. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation
of impact-resistant wall protection system components similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing impact-
resistant wall protection system components similar to those required for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain color, grade, finish, and type of corner guard’s
system component from a single source with resources to provide components of
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

A. Store wall surface-protection materials in original undamaged packages and
containers inside a well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling,
extreme temperatures, and humidity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Rubber Corner Guards: Manufactured from impact resistant
rubber and fixed to the substrate using epoxy adhesives or proprietary fastenings
recommended by the manufacturer.
1 Shore A Hardness:
2 Tensile Strength:
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate corner guards to comply with requirements indicated for

design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including thickness of
components.
B. Pre assemble components in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting members to other
construction.
D. Provide inserts and other anchoring devices for connecting components to
concrete or masonry. Fabricate anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.
Coordinate anchoring devices with the supporting structure.
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions in which corner guards components are fixed.
1 Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing corner guards’
system components.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose
particles.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install system components level, plumb, and true to line without distortions.
1 Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might
be visible in the finished Work.
3.04 CLEANING
A. General: Immediately on completion of installation, clean components according
to the manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended by the
manufacturer.
C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris, resulting from installation, on
completion of work and leave installation areas in neat, clean condition.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 10270
ACCESS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes access (raised) flooring systems, scheduled in
drawings.
1.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Structural Performance: Provide manufacturer’s standard access flooring system

which, when installed complies with the following minimum requirement for
structural performance.
1. Floor Panels:
a. Concentrated load: 4.5KN with a deflection under load and a permanent set
not to exceed 2.0mm.
b. Uniformly distributed load: 5 KN/m2
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Complete layout of access flooring based on field-verified dimensional
relationships to adjoining work and installation tolerances.
2. Details with descriptive notes indicating materials, finishes, fasteners, typical
and special edge conditions, accessories, understructure, and other data to
permit a full evaluation of entire access flooring system.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of floor covering and exposed finish
indicated, in sizes indicated below.
1. One complete full-size floor panel, pedestal, and understructure unit for each
type of access flooring system required.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of access flooring system indicated,
signed by product manufacturer.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Laboratory Testing:
1. The access floor system manufacturer at no extra cost will supply the results
of independent laboratory testing performed on the system and accessories
supplied at the request of the Engineer.
2. Test shall be performed to certify compliance to relevant standards of CISCA.

G. Comply with UK, Department of Environment (PAS) Document MOB.01.891-
Performance Specification for Platform Floors, test as follows:
Test T-7.00 Square Loading Test
Test T-0.00 Point Loading Test
Test T-10.00 Uniformity Distributed Load Test.
Test T-11.00 Failure Load Test
Test T-12.00 Soft Body Impact Test
Test T-13.00 Hard Body Impact Test
Test T-15.00 Pedestal Strength Horizontal Load Test
Test T-16.00 Pedestal Strength Vertical Load Test
Test T-17.00 Effect of Temperature Test.
Test T-18.00 Effect of Humidity Test
Small Scale Fire Test
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

1.04 professional registered Civil Engineer in Dubai and/or approved by the Owner.
Design the system according to applicable procedure in Ceilings and Interior
System Construction Association (CISCA) “Recommended Test Procedures for
A. Access Floors”.
B. Raised Access Floor:
1. The system shall allow for panels to be secured directly to the pedestal to
provide a rigid floor fixing connection.
2. The access floor system shall consist of a series of interchangeable

removable metal faced rigid panels supported from the structural floor at the
corners only by adjustable steel pedestal fixed with adhesive to a prepared
concrete floor surface. Necessary support stringers shall be provided where
required to sustain the design loads specified. The system shall be 150 mm high
or as indicated in drawings measured from the structural floor to top floor panel.
The void shall accommodate and permit the free distribution of electrical conduit
and mechanical service lines as required and various floor finish thickness.
3. Floor Panel Size: 600mm x 600mm to take carpet tiles, flooring. Oversized
panels for perimeters and mitred intersections could be used as approved by the
Engineer on site.
4. Earth Bonding: The system should be complete with earth bonding to all
metal parts and continuity in lightning protection system, to be connected by
others.
5. Electrical Grounding Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm

acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction and approved by the Engineer.
6. The complete access floor system shall comply current Standards.
1.05 UALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain access flooring through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Provide floor panels that are clearly and permanently marked on their
underside with panel type and concentrated-load rating.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals

and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
1.06 COORDINATION
Coordinate location of mechanical and electrical work in underfloor cavity to
A. prevent interference with access flooring pedestals.
B. Mark pedestal locations on subfloor by use of a grid, to enable mechanical

and electrical work to proceed without interfering with access flooring pedestals.
C. Proceed with installation only after completion of other construction within
affected spaces.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.07 SPARE MATERIALS
A. Deliver spare materials to Owner. Furnish spare materials as described in

Bill of Quantities that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with label describing contents.
1.08 WARRANTY
Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer and contractor, that the work
involving access floor panels are of good quality, shall be free from defects and in
conformance with the requirements of the contract documents and further
promising to repair or replaced defective work during a 5 year period following
A. completion of that portion of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the

purposes of establishing minimum quality standards. Products, which are equal
to, or better than, those specified and which conform to the design requirements
2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Refer NEB list of approved suppliers
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate panels with steel bottom panel. Completed panels to be filled with
high density chipboard standard. Panels to be cleaned and phosphate coated to
resist corrosion prior to applying a semi conductive enamel paint finish.
B. Fabricate panels 600mm x 600mm x 32mm minimum thickness or as
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Provide oversize panels, cut to suit on site
condition to avoid small cuts in non orthogonal areas. Oversize or undersize and
at the building perimeter where curved panels may be required. The installed
finished access flooring height shall be 150 mm when measured from the top of
the sub-floor. Adjustable adjacent to areas of stone flooring to make final finish
level flush.
C. Panel Removable: All panels with the exception of cut panels are to be
removable and fully transferable in both position and direction. The removable
panels shall be such that they are easily removed and replaced without damage
and without the use of undue force by the lifting devices supplied by the
manufacturer. In case of the cut panels which are not capable of being lifted
from one side without jamming, the lifting devices supplied by the manufacturer
shall be marked with the instruction “LIFT PANEL VERITCALLY’.
D. Provide manufactures standard pedestal assembly including base, column
with provision for height adjustment, and head cap, made either of steel or
aluminum or a combination of both.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Provide square or circular base with not less than 100mm 2 of bearing area.
F. Provide vibration proof mechanism for making holding firm adjustments in

height for leveling purposes over a range of not less than 50mm. Include means
of locking leveling mechanism at a selected height, which requires deliberate
action to change height setting and prevents vibratory displacement.
G. Construct pedestal adjusting rod of 20mm solid steel, and vertical column of
maximum 22 mm square steel tubing. All steel components to be zinc placed
passivated and precision resistance welded.
H. Pedestal base shall be stamped or embossed on its underside, and shall be
adhered to sub-floor with an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer.
I. Prior to fabrication and final submittal of shop drawings, verify dimensions of
supporting structure at Project Site by accurate field measurement. Notify the
Engineer in writing of dimensions found to be different than shown.
J. Fabricate raised flooring as shown and as detailed on final approved shop
drawings.
K. Provide factory cut-outs for required electrical cable openings with necessary
stainless steel grommets and steel enclosure box. No field cutting will be
permitted for outlet boxes. The Contractor may only be authorized to field cut
these cut-outs if approval is given by the Engineer on site on a make-up
submission.
L. Provide necessary steel structural supporting system as required for flooring.

M. In all locations where access flooring is in contact with structural elements
such as wall, column, edges, will be made air tight by use of flexible gasket,
capable of accommodating tolerances.
N. Carpet Tile: shall be installed to panel surface following installation of access
for flooring panels as specified elsewhere.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Base Glue: One component conductive polyurethane glue guarantees a
perfect gluing between the structure steel base and the concrete floor.
Application: by dipping the base directly into the (well-mixed) glue.
B. Anti-dust Primer: Used to harden the concrete sub-floor surface, in order to
avoid undesired emission of dust of any other title fragments of material. Such a
primer is applied to the concrete sub floor after a careful cleaning and vacuuming
of the sub floor surface and before starting with the floor installation. Dust
sealant and pedestal glue must be compatible.
1. One component polyurethane primer
a. Application: by roll or brush
b. Coverage: 1 kg per 3 m2.
c. Package: 10 kg tins.
d. 2 layers recommended.
e. Minimum temperature allowed during application: 5 oC.
2. One component water base vinyl primer:
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
c. Package: 10 kg tins.
3. Two components epoxy primer:
c. Package: 2.5 kg tins.
C. Compensation Gasket (Terodaem): Semi-rigid self-adhesive strip generally
used for small intervention of compensation between panel and structure,
between panel and perimetral wall, and whenever a small spacer is required.
Dimensions: 500 x 20 x 1mm. Package: strips or similar to manufacturer’s
recommendation.
D. Airtight Gasket: Elastic and spongy self-adhesive tape generally used to seal
the underfloor partition or for small finishing and sealing touches. Also to be
Section: 13 x 8 mm. Package: rolls.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site measurements are as shown on shop drawings.
B. Verify required services are available and properly located.
3.02 REQUIRED SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to the installation programme in the contract and allow for co-ordination
with other finishing trades in the building.
B. Conditions on site for installation and storage shall be such that in the areas
where flooring is to be installed or stored, the building will be dry, watertight, and
sufficiently ventilated to ensure that there are no excessive variation in
temperature and humidity. Humidity levels should not exceed 65%.
C. The sub-floor temperature should not be below 5 oC in order to allow the
adhesive to cure.
D. The areas where the floor is being installed should be completely free of other
trades and completely available to the workers of this section. No traffic should
be allowed on the floor for 48 hours after installation, whilst the pedestal adhesive
is curing.
E. Any type of work such as painting or plastering shall be complete at least one
day prior to commencement of the work.
F. Loose laid floor covering should installed in atmospheric conditions which

ensures no moisture being trapped between the floor covering and the panels.
3.03 SUB-FLOOR CONDITION
A. The sub-floor should be reasonably flat and smooth for satisfactory seating of
the pedestal support base plates. Discrepancies in level of sub floor shall not
exceed the standard tolerance adjustment provided by the pedestal support.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.04 GENERAL
The following facilities/services will be provided to the Contractor.
A. All necessary ‘common’ datums and setting out point for use with other
trades.
B. Adequate power supply at the machines.
years.
D. Removal and disposal of all installation rubbish and debris from central points
on each floor level and maintaining cleanliness of the underfloor void if required.
E. Protection of materials and works as required.
3.05 SETTING OUT
A. Marking Out: The access flooring Contractor will mark out the position of
pedestal prior to the actual installation. This will facilitate the setting out of
services.
B. Survey: When it is deemed necessary to carry out a level survey the Access
Flooring Contractor shall provide this service if required.
3.06 PREPATION
A. Vacuum clean substrate, to clear debris, after applying dustproof paint to the
concrete surface.
3.07 INSTALLATION – ACCESS FLOOR
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Secure pedestal base plate to floor with mechanical fasteners or with
adhesive.
C. Install additional pedestals where grid pattern is interrupted by room
appurtenances and a cutouts.
D. Install stringers and floor panels solidly on pedestal. Maximum out-of –level
tolerance 1.6mm in 3 m.
E. Seal filed cuts of floor panels for moisture protection.
F. Allow for minor on site cutting of holes in floor panels for installation of
equipment. Include cable cut out protection.
G. Provide electrical earth grounding of entire access floor assembly.
H. Adjust pedestals to ensure floor is level and adjacent panels are flush.
I. In locations where floors cross the structural expansion joints a rubber filler
aluminum expansion strip of required finish shall be incorporated.
3.08 TESTING OF PANEL ACCESS FLOOR

A. Testing electrical resistance in completed installation by measuring
resistance between each of five panels and earth connection. Select panels at
random and include two most distant from earth connection.
B. Carry out tests in presence of the Engineer.
C. Provide test reports tabulating results.
3.09 USE AND MAINTENANCE – RAISED ACCESS FLOOR
A. The system is designed for panels to be lifted vertically with the lifting device
provided. ‘Removed’ panels should be replaced as soon as possible.
B. Only the minimum number of panels should be removed at any one time.
Long lines of panels or large areas of flooring should not be removed
simultaneously. ‘Islands’ of panels or pedestals should not be created, especially
when moving equipment in or around an area.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Any bridging beams or stringers removed should be refitted in the original

positions before replacing the panels.
D. When cleaning surface of panels or cavity, as little water or liquid as possible
should be used. It is advisable to wipe panel edges occasionally.
E. Heavy items of office equipment, furniture, mechanical units should have
spreader plates positioned under their feet/supports. Suitable precautions should
be taken not to overload the floor installation when such items are brought into
the area of moved to a different location.
F. Care should be taken to avoid applying shock impact loads to the floor
installation.
3.10 GENERAL ITEMS
A. It is deemed to be the responsibility the Contractor to obtain any necessary
local Authority/District Surveyors approvals, or licenses, that may be required for
the proposed work.
B. Finished Floor Height (F.F.H) is the measurement from the highest point of
the existing sub floor to the top of the raised floor, excluding carpet or other
finishes. Reference to 150mm height are to F.F.H. unless otherwise specified.
C. If carpet tiles are to be fixed with tackifier adhesives, care must be taken to
ensure that excess quantities are not used.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Thoroughly clean, using cleaning materials recommended for the purpose by
the manufacturer.
B. Cover cut-outs with material to support loads likely to be encountered.
C. Protect work with non-staining plastic sheets until end of project.
D. Clean out and vacuum void of debris, prior to hand over.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLES
PART 1: GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Particular

A. Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
This Section includes: Supply and installation of ground set, cone tapered
A. vertical flagpoles.
B. Related Sections:
1 Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

2 Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and

A. Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data and installation instructions for each type of flagpole required.
Shop drawings of flagpoles and bases, showing general layout, jointing, and
C. anchoring and supporting systems.
Samples of finished metal for flagpoles and accessories as requested by

D. Engineer.
A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit produced by

a single manufacturer, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage
devices.
B. Design Criteria: Provide flagpoles and installations constructed to withstand a

90‑mph wind velocity minimum when flying flag of appropriate size.
C. Pole Construction: Construct pole and ship to site in one piece if possible. If
more than one piece is necessary, provide snug‑fitting, precision joints with
self‑aligning, internal splicing sleeve arrangement for weather‑tight, hairline field
joints.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy Kraft paper or other weather‑tight
wrapping and prepare for shipment in hard fiber tube or other protective
A. container.
Deliver flagpoles and accessories completely identified for installation procedure.

B. Handle and store flagpoles to prevent damage or soiling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 GROUND SET VERTICAL FLAGPOLES
A. Flagpole Type: Internal hallyard with shoe base.

Furnish pole with internal halyard system consisting of a manually operated
geared winch with control stop device and removable handle. Provide stainless
steel braided aircraft-type cable and concealed revolving truck assembly with
plastic-coated counter balance and sling. Provide reinforced, flush access door,
1 secured with cylinder lock.
Aluminum Flagpoles: Fabricate from seamless extruded tubing complying with

ASTM B 241, alloy 6063-T6, having a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch
(0.1875 inch), tensile strength not less than 30,000 psi, and a yield point of
B. 25,000 psi. Heat-treat and age-harden after fabrication.
1 Provide cone-tapered aluminium flagpoles.
Foundation: Cast aluminium shoe base with four (4) galvanized steel anchor
C. bolts and galvanized steel hexagonal nuts.
D. Finish: Provide medium satin polish finish as follows:

1 Color anodized finish complying with AA-C22A42, Class I (0.7 mil)
E. Fittings:
1 Finial: satin finish spun aluminium ball with flush seam.
Truck: Double metal sheave cast aluminium revolving with stainless steel
2 bearing.
Cleats: Two 220mm cast aluminium, each attached with 2-8mm stainless steel
3 screw.
4 Collar: Spun aluminium flash collar, finished to match pole.
2.03 FLAGPOLE MOUNTING
Provide manufacturer's standard base system for the type of flagpole installation
A. required.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
Base Plate: For anchor‑bolt mounting, furnish manufacturer's standard cast

metal shoe base of same material as flagpole. Furnish and install anchor bolts
B. as required.
C. Provide manufacturer's standard flash collar, finished to match flagpole.
3.01 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION
General: Prepare and install flagpoles where shown and in compliance with
A. accepted shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 10431
SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular
Conditions and Div-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Pylon Signs
B. Interior Signs
C. Door Graphics
1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Division 15 Section ‘ Mechanical Identification’.
B. Division 16 Section ‘ Electrical Identification’.

A. All text, font, profile, and color to comply with “The Volkswagen Color and
Materials Concept” Manual.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs with a record of

successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce all
units required without causing delay in the work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of sing, and cast metal plaques, including details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions, of individual components, profiles
and finishes. As indicated in the drawings.
B. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans,
elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components.
Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories and installation details.
Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of working
and lettering layout. Furnish full size rubbings for cast metal plaques. Wiring
diagrams from the manufacturer for illuminated sign units.
C. Wiring diagrams from the manufacturer for internally illuminated signs.
D. Samples: For each sign component materials showing finishes, colors, and
surface texture.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. Delivery all components to project site completely identified. Store in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, protected from weather, construction
activities and other possibility of damage and loss.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES
2.02 GENERAL
A. Aluminum Sheet or Plate: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the
aluminum producer or finisher for the type of use and finish indicated and with not
less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 209 for 5005-
H15.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the aluminum

producer or finisher for the type of use and finish indicated and with not less than
the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5.
C. Steel Tubing: Provide cold-formed steel tubing conforming to ASTM A 500,
Grade B, hot-dipped galvanised after fabrication with a minimum of 2.0-oz. Zinc per
sq. ft. of surface area conforming with ASTM A 123.
2.03 SIGNS AND LOGO
A. Construction as detailed on drawings.
2.04 GRAPHIC IMAGE PROCESS

A. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy to comply with the requirements
indicated for sizes, styles, spacing, content, positions, materials, finishes, symbols
and other graphic devices and colors.
2.05 FABRICATION
Fabrication panel signs to comply with the requirements indicated for materials,
A. thickness, finishes, colors, design, shapes, sizes and details of construction.
Procedure smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under
B installed conditions within a tolerance of 1.5-mm measured diagonally.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.06 ILLUMINATED UNITS
A. Provide internal illumination as indicated using standard lighting components.

Provide an accessible concealed internally wired fluorescent strip fixture system to
illuminate message panels uniformly with minimum halation and without light leaks.
Make provisions for servicing and concealed connection to electric service. Co-
ordinate electrical characteristics with those of the power supply provided.
1. Fluorescent tubes: Provide the number of tubes indicated or required by the
sign panel size.
2. Ballasts: Provided low-temperature, high power factor, low-energy, exterior-type
fluorescent lamp ballasts that comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers
Association Standards and carry the CBM label.
3. Provide transformers, insulators, and other components necessary for
operation.
B. Illuminated Emergency Signs: As per MEW’s standard fitting type A, connected

to a spare circuit of nearest distribution board.
2.07 FINISHES
A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection
of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics
related to appearance; provide color matches indicated.
B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish
designations and applications recommendations.
2.08 SCHEDULE & MATERIAL

A. Pylon Signs: Pylon sign made of 20mm glass panels, with 50mm routed
aluminium letters applied with appropriate fastening technique on to the glass
panels and finished to metallic silver. The sign is fixed to the back wall by
aluminium framework. The back wall and the base of the pylon is composed of
stone to match with the existing fascia of the building.
The sign is illuminated by 250W metal halide lamps.
B. Parking Signs: Parking sign made of 3mm aluminium powder coated to
Pantone 321 C green with Silver strip above the panel. The graphics are by 3M
high performance white reflective vinyl. The sign is mounted on a 76mm G Post
complete with foundation and anchor bolt.
C. Toilet Signs: Toilet signs made of 8mm thick clear Acrylic mounted on
aluminium bracket finished to metallic silver. Graphics are applied by 3 M frosted
vinyl film and the fasteners are to be polished silver.
D. Door Signs: The sign is made of 3 mm thick clear acrylic mounted of 3mm thick
aluminium brackets formed to shape and the graphics are by 3 M. Frosted glass
vinyl films. The fasteners are to be by polished silver.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Door Signs: The sign is made of 2mm thick aluminium formed to shape
finished to metallic silver and the graphics by high performance white vinyl.
Fasteners are to be polished silver.
F. Door ID for heads of Department: Signs made of 10mm glass with etched
eagle logo and the graphic are by 3M vinyl graphics. The signs are non illuminated
and mounted on 8mm dia stainless steel rod slat system.
G. Wall mounted Director Signage: The sign is made of 10mm glass with etched
eagle logo and the graphic are by 3M vinyl graphics. The signs are non illuminated
and mounted on 8 mm dia stainless steel rod slat system.
H. Wall mounted Main Guidance Directory: The sign is made of 10mm thick glass
with etched logo and 3M vinyl graphics. The sign is mounted with 8mm thick
stainless steel rods and brackets.
I. Door Graphics: The graphics are applied to the double glass door by 3M high
performance vinyl.
J. Ceiling Mounted Directional Sign: Sign made of 10mm glass with etched logo &
vinyl graphics. The sign is mounted on ceiling with the road slat system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where shown or schedule, using
mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturers
instructions.
B. Install sign units level, plumb and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free
from distortion or indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects
in appearance.
C. Recessed Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs back to wall surfaces using
the methods indicated below:
1. Recessed Mounted Units: Fastened sign to back face of metal panels with
concealed fastening devices to comply with the manufacturer’s direction.
D. Illuminated Emergency Signs: Install illuminated emergency signs at locations

and height as indicated or stipulated by the Engineer and in accordance with sign
manufacturer’s written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure
the illuminated emergency signs fulfill the requirements.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. Upon completion of installation of illuminated emergency sign, apply electrical
energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Test
illuminated emergency signs to demonstrate operation under emergency
conditions. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at Site, then retest to
demonstrate compliance, otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and
proceed with retesting.
A. At completion of the installation, clean, soiled sign surfaces in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 10500
LOCKERS AND BENCHES SPECIFICATIONS
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 LOCKERS:
Material: Lockers are made from solid compact laminate.

Size: Over all size 300/365/460mm (W) x 490mm (D) x 1690mm (H)
Construction: Lockers side panel, divider, top and bottom panels are made of
13mm HPL panel in colour white. Lockers back panel is made of 6mm MDF finish:
film faced (both side white). Lockers door panel is made of 13mm HPL panel in
standard colours.
All fixing screws are stainless steel. Standard hardware includes:

a. Hanger Road (19mm Dia Chromium plated steel).
b. Cylinder Lock with Latch.
c. Recessed Handle (chrome plated).
d. Engraved Number System.
e. Aluminum Coat Hook
Lockers shall have a permanent engraved numbering system
1.02 BENCHES:
Material: Benches are plastic laminate tops and poly vinyl edging to match lockers
with powder coated tri legs in stainless steel connected with stainless steel rod.
Size: Over all size 400mm (W) x 1200mm (L) x 450mm (H)
All fixing screws are stainless steel.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION-10536
AWNINGS
READ AS SECTION 133123

TENSIONED FABRIC STRUCTURES (TFS) SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 133123 - TENSIONED FABRIC STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

Supplementary
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Tensioned Fabric Structure: Cable and/or frame supported tensioned membrane-

covered fabric structure; incorporating a fabric with low elongation characteristics
under tension and capable of an anticlastic configuration. Fabric structures in which
fabric is applied as flat or mono-axially curved configurations are not acceptable.
1.3 SUMMARY
1 Section includes a tensioned fabric canopy system as shown on Drawings and

specified in this Section.
2 Architect’s drawings indicate design intent with respect to sizes, shapes,
and configurations of the tensioned fabric canopy. Provide all components and
accessories required for complete tensioned fabric canopy system, whether or not
specifically shown or specified.
3 The tensioned fabric structure will assume bolted/pinned connections for field
assembly. No field welding will be permitted.
B. The tensioned fabric structure Subcontractor shall be responsible for the structural
design, detailing, fabrication, supply, and installation of the Work specified herein.
The intent of this specification is to establish in the first instance an undivided, single-
source responsibility of the Subcontractor for all of the foregoing functions.
C. Subcontractor’s Work shall include the structural design, supply, fabrication,

shipment, and erection of the following items:
1 The architectural membrane as indicated on the drawings and in these
specifications.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2 Cables and fittings.

3 Perimeter, catenary, and sectionalized aluminum clamping system.
4 Structural steel, including masts, trusses, struts, and beams as indicated on
the drawings.
5 Fasteners and gaskets.
D. Related Requirements:
1 Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete footings for posts of
tensioned fabric structure.
2 Division 05 Sections "Structural Steel Framing" and “Architecturally Exposed
Structural Steel" for steel structure supporting tensioned fabric structure.
E. This Project is a US Green Building Council LEEDTM – CI project:
1 Select materials to maximize use of recycled steel.

2 Select locally or regionally fabricated products wherever possible.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. General: Except as otherwise shown or noted, all work shall comply with the
requirements of the following codes and standards:
1 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
a. Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel

for Buildings.
b. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
c. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings – Allowable Stress Design and
Plastic Design.
d. Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-angle Members.
e. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings.
2 American Society of Civil Engineers.

a. ASCE 19: Structural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings.
3 American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
a. ASTM A586: Standard Specifications for Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Strand.

b. ASTM A603: standard specifications for zinc-coated steel structural wire rope.
c. ASTM D4851-88: Standard Test Methods for Coated and Laminated Fabrics
for Architectural Use.
d. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
e. ASTM E108: Standard Test Methods for Fire Test and Roof Coverings.
f. ASTM E136: Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube
Furnace at 750 degrees C.
g. ASTM C423: Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound
Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
h. ASTM E424: Standard Test Method for Solar Energy Transmittance and Reflectance
of Sheet Materials.
4 American Welding Society (AWS).

a. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code.
b. AWS 2.4: Symbols for Welding and Nondestructive Testing.
5 Aluminum Association
a. Specifications for Aluminum Structures.
6 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
a. NFPA 701: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and
Films.
7 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
a. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volumes 1 and 2.
1.5 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide a tensioned fabric structure system that complies with

requirements specified herein by testing the Subcontractor’s corresponding
membrane system in accordance with the indicated test methods.
B. Building Code Criteria: The tensioned fabric structure shall comply with the
International Building Code, 2010 edition.
C. Comply with local building codes and respective loading criteria for Snow Loads, Live
Loads, Dead Loads, Wind Speed, and Seismic Loads.
D. Life Safety: Tensioned fabric structure shall be detailed so that no life safety issue
is created in the event of a loss of a part of the membrane. The tensioned fabric
structure shall not rely on the membrane for structural stability.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1 Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, fabrication details,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, fittings, mounting
accessories, features, and finishes for tensioned fabric structures.
2 Include rated capacities, light transmissions, and operating characteristics of
furnished specialties and accessories.
B. LEED Submittals:
1 Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled
content.
2 Product Certificates for Credit MR 5.1 [and Credit MR 5.2]: For products and
materials required to comply with requirements for regionally manufactured
materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured
material.
a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to Project for
each regionally manufactured material.
C. Design Drawings:
1 Include plans, elevations, sections, mounting heights, and frame assembly details.
2 Preliminary member sizes with wall thickness TBD.

3 Preliminary footing layout and foundation design with final depth TBD.
4 Show intended fabric attachment hardware and details.
5 Identify direction, details and locations of fabric seams.
6 Show details of fabric membrane dimensions including length of spans, sag in
curvature and actual shaded area.
D. Engineered Drawings (submit after Design Drawings have been approved):
1 Calculations with Wet Stamp seal of a Professional Engineer with a license in the
same state as the project location.
2 Engineering Drawings with Wet Stamp seal of a Professional Engineer with a license
in the same state as the project location.
3 Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Dubai for a period of 2 years.
4 Provide frame member sizes and required wall thicknesses.

5 Identify all welding requirements.
6 Detail all bolted and/or pin connections for frame assembly.
7 Identify required sizes of bolts, pins, plates and tubing.
8 Verify the fabric meets minimum engineering requirements.
9 Detail fabric attachment methods and identify thickness of all membrane plates,
clamps and other attachment components.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
10 Call out all cable sizes and pretension requirements.

11 Submit anchor-bolt plans before foundation work begins. Include location, diameter,
and projection of anchor bolts required to attach the tensioned fabric structures
to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: Electronic file of available frame finish colors.
F. Samples for Verification: For the following:

1 Fabric: Qty. (4) 8 ½” x 11” samples of fabric as selected by the architect.
2 Frame Finish: Qty. (4) Sample chips, not less than 2” x 3” in size.
G. Provide a Schedule of Values within (2) weeks of project award.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and professional engineer.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Sample Warranty: For fabric warranty.
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For tensioned fabric structures to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1 Include the following:
a. Methods for maintaining tensioned fabric structure fabrics and finishes.
b. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
fabrics, finishes, and performance.

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate
tensioned fabric structures similar to those required for this Project and whose
products have a record of successful in-service performance.
1 Fabricator is a Master Fabric Craftsman certified by the Industrial Fabrics

Association International.
2 Fabricator's responsibilities include fabricating and installing tensioned fabric
structures and providing professional engineering services needed to assume
engineering responsibility.
3 Fabricator’s engineering services must utilize Finite Element Analysis software
that performs fabric form finding and takes into account fabric material properties
and pre-stress characteristics.
4 Fabricator must have proven record of at least (5) successful projects of similar size
and similar specified fabric material.
5 Fabricator must have been in continuous operation as a professional tensioned
fabric structure manufacturer for minimum of (10) years prior to contract.
6 Fabricator must have an in-house Made-in-America manufacturing facility for both
frame and fabric membrane components.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1 AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.1 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit installation of tensioned fabric structure in exterior
locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and
warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements: Where tensioned fabric structure installation is indicated to fit

to other work, verify dimensions of other work by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for
fenestration operation throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of
discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delaying the Work.
1.1 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and fabricator agree to repair or replace

components of tensioned fabric structures that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion.
1 Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including framework.
b. Deterioration of fabric including seam failure.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2 Warranty Period, Fabric: Reference the manufacturer’s limited warranty for the
specified fabric manufacturer and product.
3 Warranty Period, Cables, Securement Devices and Accessories: One year from date
of Substantial Completion
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Refer NEB Approved List

A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide tensioned fabric canopy system complying
with requirements and limitations of authorities having jurisdiction that are within
Contractor's control.
B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design tensioned
fabric canopy system. Delegated design engineering requirements include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1 Prepare structural design drawings defining the precise interface geometry
determination, reaction loads imposed on structural steel framing, anchoring loads,
connection details, interfaces and seam layouts.
2 Structural calculations for the tensioned fabric canopy system shall include:
a. Large deflection numerical shape generation that will insure a stable,
uniformly stressed, three dimensionally curved shape that is in static equilibrium with
the internal pre-stress forces and is suitable to resist all applied loads.
b. Large deflection finite element method structural analysis of the membrane
system under all applicable wind and seismic loads.
c. Connection design including bolt, weld and ancillary member sizing.
d. Biaxial fabric test specification, interpretation and fabric compensation determination.
e. Accurate generation of the two dimensional compensated fabric templates required

to generate the three dimensional equilibrium shape.
C. In engineering tensioned fabric canopy system fittings and accessories to

withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of
railing materials based on the following:
1 Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
2 Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
3 Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum
ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95.
D. Structural Performance: Tensioned fabric canopy system shall withstand the effects
of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7:
1 Wind Loads: To be determined by Subcontractor’s Engineer of Record.
2 Live Loads: To be determined by Subcontractor’s Engineer of Record.
3 Snow Loads: To be determined by Subcontractor’s Engineer of Record.
4 Seismic Loads: To be determined by Subcontractor’s Engineer of Record.
E. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine

allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum

ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95.
2 Copper Alloys: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
3 Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
4 Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes.
1 Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
G. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by

insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
2.3 CANOPY FABRIC

A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fabric as called out and
specified by the Architect in the bid drawings.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide canopy fabric with the fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products
according to test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1 Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.
C. Fabric properties:
1 Fabric thickness and tensile strength: Must meet engineering requirements with a
safety factor of five.
2 Color: White
D. Fabric Substitutions
1 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) woven mesh fabric may be substituted for non-
waterproof applications only. HDPE fabric substitutions are only allowed when
the architectural drawings specifically call out fabric as “Shade Fabric” or “HDPE
Fabric” or “Non-waterproof Fabric” or “Fabric Mesh”.
2 Acceptable manufacturers of HDPE fabrics are Polyfab and Coolaroo.
3 Color: To be selected from the manufacturer’s range of available colors.
4 HDPE fabric membranes shall be designed to avoid contact with any PVC material.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.4 CANOPY FRAME, CABLES, FITTINGS ND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide accessories as standard with tensioned fabric canopy system

fabricator and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to
greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes.
Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
C. Frame material shall be shall be constructed of cold rolled carbon steel unless
otherwise specified by the architect in the bid drawings.
D. Steel and Iron:
1 DEWA
2 Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
3 Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572 per engineering
requirements.
E. Stainless Steel (when applicable);
1 Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316L.

2 Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316L.
3 Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8M or CF 3M.
4 Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 316L.
5 Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L.
F. Aluminum (when applicable):
1 Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type
of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each
aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.
2 Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
G. Cables and Fittings shall be constructed of galvanized steel unless otherwise

specified by the architect in the bid drawings:
1 All cables in contact with PTFE fabric shall be PVC coated.
2 Any cable in contact with HDPE fabric shall never have PVC coating.
4 Galvanized Cables:
a. Cable: 7-by-19 galvanized steel structural wire rope made from wire complying
with ASTM A 603.
b. Cable Fittings: Connectors of types indicated or required, fabricated from hot
dip galvanized steel, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal
to minimum breaking strength of cable with which they are used.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
5 Stainless Steel Cables:
a. Cable: 7-by-19 wire rope made from wire comply with ASTM A 492, Type 316
b. Cable Fittings: Connectors of types indicated or required, fabricated from
stainless steel, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to
minimum breaking strength of cable with which they are used.
H. Metal Battens for Securing Canopy Fabric to Structural Steel Frame: Extruded
aluminum.
I. Frame Finish shall be polyester powder painted unless otherwise specified by the
architect in the bid drawings.
1 Powder Coat Finish:

a. Commercial blast clean surface in accordance to SSPC-SP 10.
b. Apply polyester powder coat paint to a minimum of 3 mils thick.
c. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s available stock colors.
2 Paint Finish for marine or other corrosive environments:

a. Commercial blast clean surface in accordance to SSPC-SP 10.
b. Primer Material properties – (1) coat of PPG/Ameron’s Dimecoat 9 at 2.5-4.0 mils
MDFT.
c. Paint Material properties – (2) coats of PPG/Ameron’s PSX 700 at 3.0-7.0 mil MDFT
per coat.
d. Minimum thickness – 8.5-18 mils TDFT.
e. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s available stock colors.
3 Galvanizing (only if architect indicates requirement on bid drawings):

a. Comply with either ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip
galvanizing, as applicable.
b. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated
to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine structural steel framing and other substrates, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections.
B. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Proceed with installation of tensioned fabric structure only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with
B. Erect frame and fabric in accordance with the procedures of the approved
manufacturer.
C. Adequate pre-stress shall be applied to eliminate fabric wrinkles and excess cable
sag.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of

Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual
occupied conditions. Provide up to one visit to Project during other-than-normal
occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust cable and fabric tension and to clean and maintain canopy
fabric.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 10650
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. To be read with Division 1, General Requirements
1.02 SUMMARY
2. Co-ordination of interface with compatible ceiling system.

3 Manufacturer shall furnish operable walls complete with hardware, jambs and all
necessary mechanisms to provide complete operation. The operable walls
hereinafter specified shall be installed by qualified factory trained craftsmen
skilled in this trade. Partitions will be manually operated.
1 Operable Wall consisting of 100mm thick individually movable elements,
suspended from a top track only, each panel to have top and bottom operable
pressure seals and concave/convex interlocking magnetic profiles. Each element
must be suspended on two multi-directional rollers. The closed wall must appear
flush with no exposed aluminium / plastic trims.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, finishes, installation
details, and operating instructions for each type of operable panel partition,
component, and accessory specified. Include data on acoustical performance,
surface-burning characteristics, and durability.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of operable panel partitions.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other construction,
and accessories. Indicate dimensions; weights; conditions at openings and for
storage; and required installation, storage, and operating clearances. Indicate
location and installation requirements for hardware and track, and direction of
travel. Show blocking to be provided by others. Include the following:
1. Calculations: Calculate requirements for supporting operable panel partitions

and verify capacity of carriers and track components to support loads; indicate
deflection limits for partition and adjacent construction.
C. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work,
including support beam punching template.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full
range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared
on Samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated
for the Work. If finishes involve normal color variations, include sample sets
showing the full range of variations expected.
1. Veneer: Full width by not less than 36-inch- (1000-mm-) long section of
veneer used for the Work, with specified treatments applied.
2. Panel Face Material: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3
inches (75 mm) square.
3. Panel Edge Material: Not less than full width by 3 inches (75 mm) long.
4. Chair Rail: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, 6-inch (150-mm) length.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of operable panel partitions

certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects and owners, and other information specified.
H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
I. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each
operable panel partition complies with requirements, based on comprehensive
testing of current products.
J. Maintenance Data: For the following to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1
1. Panel face finishes and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include
precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
finishes and performance.
2. Seals, hardware, track, carriers, and other operating components.
3. For electric operator.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified in writing by
the operable panel partition manufacturer as qualified to install the
manufacturer's partition systems for work similar in material, design, and extent
to that indicated for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an
NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the
testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. NVLAP-accredited
laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of
Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide operable panel partitions with

the following fire-test-response characteristics, as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.

b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
2 Fire Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings complying with the acceptance
criteria of UBC Standard 8-2.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly

mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do
not use permanent markings on panels.
A. Field Measurements: Verify operable panel partition openings and storage

arrangements by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, establish opening and storage dimensions and
proceed with fabricating operable panel partitions without field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to
established dimensions.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. submit a written warranty signed by Manufacturer and Contractor, that the work
involving demountable wall panels are of good quality, free from defects and in
conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents for a period of 5
years following Substantial Completion of the Works.
PART 2 - RODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of
establishing minimum quality standards. Manufacturers which are equal to, or
better than those specified, and which conform to the design requirements and
colour sections, may be acceptable subject to the Engineer’s approval. The
operable partition system must be fully compatible with the suspended acoustic
ceiling system.
B. The operable partition manufacturer/supplier and ceiling system must have a
complete integrated package to assume logistics of co-ordination and required
sound insulation values unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Frame: Aluminum frame not less than 1.5-mm.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; ASTM B 221
(ASTM B 221M) for extrusions; manufacturer's standard strengths and
thicknesses for type of use.
1 Frame Reinforcing: Manufacturer's standard aluminum.
C. Wood: Final finish will be wood veneer, as directed later.
C. Particleboard: Panels are made of 13 mm three-ply quality chip board, as per
ANSI A 2081.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.03 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS

A. Construction:
Elements must be constructed of a non-deflecting steel tube fram and aluminium
profiles, bolted together. The frame must be clad either side with 16mm 3-ply
quality chipboard panels hung in acoustic isolation from the frame and allowed to
vibrate independently of the frame. The facia panels must also be easily
removable. The panel must be filled with high density mineral wool in
accordance with the specified sound insulation requirements.
B. Automatic Function
When opening and closing the operable wall the telescope elements as well as
the horizontal seals (retractable seals) of the units must automatically (via an
electric motor) extended and/or retract. Contact pressure 800 N. Seals must be
constructed of aluminium with flexible rubber at the contact points. Seals must
also be fully inter-locking. Power supply from unit to unit via plug-ready power
unit and central switch. To ensure operation during a power cut all units to be
fitted with emergency release mechanisms.
C. Connection between Elements

The elements must be inter-connected by means of positive locking
concave/convex covered aluminium profile with an integrated magnetic strip. No
visible metal part when wall is opened or closed.
D. Telescopic Closure Element
The Telescopic Element must open and close 120mm and must be operated by
a single mechanism for both the top and bottom seals and the travel of the
telescopic sleeve and must close overlapping with the other elements (adjustable
pressure from 0 – 100 kp). The telescopic element must maintain all the same
quality criteria as the other elements.
E. Pass Door Elements
Thickness of the element needs to be 100mm with a portal frame consisting of

rigid steel profiles and two side post’s with pressure tubes/
Additional interlocking and contring of doors stiles via automatically operated floor
pins.
Door leaf to be flush with face of wall. Door leaf consisting of steel frame and
automatically operated retractable floor seal. Sealing mechanism (top seal and
floor plugs) to be operated at the edge of the element with integrated door leaf
mechanism (no additional manual operation).
F. Element Suspension
Each element must be suspended on two ‘maintenance free’ multi-directional

rollers which must run on steel wheels. The rollers must be connected to the
element via a shock absorbing mechanism.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
The individual element must be adjustable in height without opening of the

ceiling.
In case of damages to the finish the face panel must be removable without taking
down the element.
G. Track System
The ceiling track is to be constructed of aluminium with a powder coated finish.

Where there are ‘T’ points, cross points and corners in the layout, the track must
have supporting bearings to lift the rollers through the intersections. The tracks
must be fixed to an adjustable, corrosion protected steel suspension.
H. Sound Baffle
Sound Baffle must be installed above the track of the Movable Partition acc. To
the enclosed drawing.
I Niche Doors
Where indicated on plans shall be manufactured of the same materials as the

panels. Hinges shall be standard butt-type.
J. Construction of Operable Wall

Operable Wall as described below for conference area:
1. Opening Width As shown on drawings
2. Opening Height As shown on drawings
3. Consisting of Full wall Elements equal numbers
4. Roler Suspension 2 point system
5. Ceiling Void 500 mm max.
6. Finish Surface Panels to be prime finish
for onsite decoration
7. Sound Insulation R’w 52. dB (=STC/ Rw 56 dB)
8. Thickness of Elements 100.mm
9. Weight of Wall/sqm 52kg
10 Construction of Frame Steel
11. Track System Steel
12. Parking Layout As per drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of operable panel partitions. Proceed with installation only
after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557, operable panel partition manufacturer's
written installation instructions, Drawings, and approved Shop Drawings.
B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing
operations, including painting, have been completed.
years.
D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not
acceptable.
A. Testing Methodology: Testing of the installed operable panel partition for
noise isolation shall be performed according to ASTM E 336, determined by
ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the NIC indicated. Partitions are to be
adjusted and fitted to comply with NIC test method requirements.
B. Testing Extent: Within each area indicated on Drawings, testing agency shall
randomly select an operable panel partition installation for testing.
C. Repair or replace operable panel partitions within areas where test results
indicate partitions do not comply with requirements, and retest partitions.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed

to determine compliance of repaired, replaced, or additional work with specified
requirements.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operable panel partitions to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free
from binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement,
disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Lubricate
hardware [electric operator] and other moving parts.
B. Pass Doors: Adjust to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or
warping. Check and readjust operating hardware. Confirm that latches and locks
engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and Installer, that ensure operable panel partitions are without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved by
Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.
1. Test and adjust seals, hardware, carriers, tracks, [pass doors] [operators,]
[controls,] [safety devices,] and other operable components. Replace damaged
or malfunctioning operable components.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for
starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and
schedules.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 10810
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 ‑ GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet accessory items as indicated on the drawing.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction
details relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method,
A. specified options, and finishes.
Samples of each toilet accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish
requirements. Acceptable full‑size samples will be returned and may be used in
B. the Work.
Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room)
C. for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project.
Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including templates,
substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and
D. installing anchorage devices.
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and

anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate
A. delivery with other work to avoid delay.
A. Co-ordination: Co-ordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing

with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation,
operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 ‑ PRODUCTS

Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 316, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034‑inch
A. (22‑gage) minimum thickness.
Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro‑deposited on base metal,

B. ASTM B 456, Type SC 2.
Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class
1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electro‑plated copper coating, and protective
C. organic coating.
D. Steel channels, ASTM A 36 for vanity counter support.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit,
E. or of galvanised steel where concealed.
2.02 SCHEDULE OF TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. As indicated on Drawings to the approval by the Engineer.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General: Only a maximum 37 mm diameter, unobtrusive stamped

manufacturer logo, as approved by the Engineer, is permitted on exposed face of
toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or
back surface, provide additional identification by either a printed, waterproof label
or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model
number.
B. Surface‑Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise

indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled.
Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permit
C. rigid, tamperproof, and theft proof installation.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.01 INSTALLATION
Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using

fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install
A. units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with plywood backing,

special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at
locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate
B. involved.
Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function
A. smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.
Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's

B. recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
THE TECHNOLOGY THAT EXPERTS

DEMAND.
OUR INNOVATIONS WILL SATISFY ALL DEMANDS AS THEY INCORPORATE ALL THE LATEST
TECHNICAL ADVANCES. THAT’S WHY WE’RE CONTINUOUSLY INNOVATING OUR CERAMICS,
FITTINGS, AND TECHNOLOGIES. SOME OF OUR LATEST INNOVATIONS INCLUDE:
CERAMICS:
DIAMATEC – OUR NEW CERAMIC MATERIAL THAT ENABLES THE RODUCTION OF SUPER-THIN YET
SUPER-STRONG BASINS
FITTINGS:
CERAMIC DISC - OUR VALVE TECHNOLOGY INVENTED IN 1974 THAT PUT AN END TO DRIPPING TAPS,
REVOLUTIONIZED THE INDUSTRY AND IS USED UNTIL TODAY.
FIRMAFLOW – OUR MOST DURABLE CARTRIDGE MEETS AND EXCEEDS THE STRICTEST EUROPEAN
STANDARDS
TECHNOLOGIES:
BLUE – A UNIQUE NICKEL-AND LEAD-FREE TECHNOLOGY THAT SAVES WATER, ENERGY, AND
EXCEEDS NEW EUROPEAN DRINKING WATER DIRECTIVES
AQUABLADE – THE MOST SIGNI CANT DEVELOPMENT
IN ITS CATEGORY SINCE THE INVENTION OF THE USH TOILET IN THE 19TH CENTURY

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
EXECUTIVE ROOMS TOILETS
ITEM:
SPACE LAVATORY BASIN
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm) WxDxH:

550 x 450 x 852
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
Space lavatory basin 55x45 cm, with one punched &

two semi- punched faucet holes.

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
TOILETS AREA, EXECUTIVE ROOMS
TOILETS
ITEM:
SPACE CLOSE COUPLED BOWL

365 x 652 x 770
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
Space close coupled bowl S-trap without integrated

douche spray.

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
TOILETS AREA
ITEM:
ANDRIA 3 SQUAT CLOSET

505 x 600 x 215
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
Andria 3 squat closet 50x60cm, back inlet.

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
TOILETS AREA
ITEM:
MINI WASHBROOK URINAL

370 x 320 x 635
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
Mini Washbrook urinal - top inlet, concealed outlet.

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
WASHBASINS AREA, EXECUTIVE ROOMS
TOILETS
ITEM:
STREAM BASIN MIXER

X x 140 x 136
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
Stream basin mixer with 35 mm cartridge, Easy- x,
aerator M24x1, flexible hoses G3/8’’ and plastic pop-up
waste, chrome.

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
SHOWERS AREA, EXECUTIVE ROOMS
TOILETS
ITEM:
RAIN S1 SHOWER KIT
(OPTION 1)

110 x 305 x 609
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
Rain S1 shower kit with a 600 mm slide rail Ø21 mm,
handspray holder, 1F handspray with 80 mm diameter
and 8lt/min ow regulator, 1750 mm metal double
clenched hose, transparent SD, chrome

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
TOILETS
ITEM:
STREAM SHOWER EXPOSED MIXER
(OPTION 1)

150 x 147 x 104
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
Stream shower exposed mixer with a maximum

8lt/min ow rate, 35 mm cartridge, S-connectors and
integrated check valve, chrome.

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
TOILETS
ITEM:
STREAM SHOWER BUILT-IN MIXER
(OPTION 2)

163 x 64 x 163
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
Stream shower built - in mixer with 47 mm Click

cartridge, round escutcheon, chrome. Both KIT 1 &
KIT 2 are included.

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
TOILETS
ITEM:
RAIN S1 ROUND RAIN SHOWER
(OPTION 2)

X x 172 x X
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
S1 round rain shower with Ø100 mm diameter, 1

function, 12lt/min ow regulator, with easy clean nozzles
to prevent lime scale build-up, high performance spray
pattern, Slim design, combined with angled arm,
chrome.

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
TOILETS AREA , EXECUTIVE ROOMS
TOILETS
ITEM:
SPRAY TRIGGER SPRAY SET, WHITE

75x X x 96.5
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
spray shower set consisting of ABS (plastic) trigger

spray, with maximum 7,6 lt/min ow rate (integrated
regulator), trigger control handle, ABS xed wall
bracket and 1250 mm double clenched hose, white

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
TOILETS AREA , EXECUTIVE ROOMS
TOILETS
ITEM:
IOM TOILET TISSUE HOLDER

122 x 63 x 94
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
toilet tissue holder with cover, chrome.

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
EXECUTIVE ROOMS TOILETS
ITEM:
IOM TOILET TOWEL RAIL

450 x X x X
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
single towel rail 45 cm, chrome.

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
SHOWERS AREA, TOILETS AREA
ITEM:
IOM SINGLE ROBE HOOK

45 x 45 x 45
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
single robe hook, chrome.

MAIN WORKS
APPLICATION:
EXECUTIVE ROOMS
ITEM:
STREAM KITCHEN MIXER

52 x 257x 176
TECHINICAL DETAILS:
kitchen mixer cast spout with 35 mm ceramic

cartridge, metal handle, cascade aerator M22x1,
Easy- x, exible hoses G3/8”, chrome.

MAIN WORKS
SECTION 11014
FAÇADE CLEANING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
This section includes the supply and installation of the following type of window
washing system:
1
Perimeter Monorail System at various location around the building circumference.
2 Potable Davit System, at pump room area and grid 13 and 14.
3 One numbers fully equipped Cradle.
B. The complete equipment, tracks, controls and associated parts and accessories
including associated civil works necessary for their installation shall be subject to
review and approval by the Engineer.
C. Include for supports to carry all structural reaction, impact and uplift loads
imposed by the equipment.
D. Electrical and mechanical installation in association with the system.
E. Co-ordination with other sections of work.
A. Monorail System:
1 Aluminium monorail system is fixed to the exterior of the building. Galvanised
bracket is fixed along the perimeter to hold the monorail.
2 The framework is connected to each other by means of aluminium joints rods.
3 Cradle is suspended from the monorail by a trolley for window cleaning.
B. David System:
1 The system is potable and fixed on roof at predetermined position, by simple
fixing method.
2 From this the cradle is lowered, for window cleaning.
NOTE: CONTRACTOR / SUB CONTRACTOR TO PROPOSE THE SUITABLE

SYSTEM
All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a professional

NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Product data including catalogue for each item of façade cleaning system
required, including the manufacturer's standard details and installation and
maintenance instructions.
A. Shop drawings for each item of façade cleaning system required. Include plans,
elevations, and details of typical members and other components. Show layout
and installation details, including anchorage details. Indicate the following on the
shop drawings:
1 Complete layout and configuration of the systems, principal parts of the systems,
and other component locations and accessories.
2 Rail layout.
3 Track/rail bracket spacing and maximum loads on tracks/rails.
4 Reactions at points of support.
5 Weights of principal components.
6. Location of circuit breaker, switchboard panel or disconnect switch.
7 Control functions and operational description.
8 Installation instructions and all necessary working usage and general safety
instructions.
B. Maintenance data for façade cleaning system components for inclusion in the
Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1.
1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Design, material, fabrication, examination, testing, inspection, certification,

documentation and operation shall conform to the local regulations, British,
German, American or equivalent standards, OSHA standards and specifications
as applicable.
A. The system manufacturer shall be qualified and experienced in design,

manufacture, installation and maintenance of the type of equipment to be
provided with documented evidence. The manufacturer shall submit a list of
similar installations, including references to be contacted by the Engineer to
ascertain the reliability, maintenance and experience record of the equipment
installed.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is an authorized
representative of the equipment manufacturer for both installation and
maintenance of the type of units required for this Project, and whose installations
have resulted in construction with a record of successful in‑service performance.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data. Include description of the system,

method of operation and control, motor control system, and special or non-
standard features provided.
B. Provide parts catalogs with complete list of equipment, replacement parts with
equipment description and identifying numbers. Provide legible schematic wiring
diagrams covering electrical equipment installed, including changes made in final
work.
1.07 MAINTENANCE
A. After completion of the installation and acceptance, a maintenance and call back
service for the equipment shall be provided for a period of Defects Liability
Period. This warranty shall cover the systems, operating equipment and other
related devices.
B. This service shall include

1 Furnishing complete service and maintenance of the system and components
during the Defect Liability Period.
2 Examining semi-monthly, clean, adjust and lubricate all equipment as per
manufacturer’s instructions.
3 Repairing or replacing parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the
manufacturer of the original equipment. Replace wire ropes when necessary to
maintain the required factor of safety.
4 Maintaining locally, an adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency
purposes, and have qualified installation personnel available to ensure the
fulfillment of this maintenance service without unreasonable loss of time.
5 Performing maintenance work using competent personnel, under the supervision
of the system manufacturer.
6 Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or sub-
contractor without prior written consent of the Owner.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.08 SPARE PARTS, TOOLS AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT
A. Supply two new complete sets of tools complete with lockable tool boxes for the
proper operation, routine maintenance and adjustments of all components and
equipment.
B.
All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original
packing, clearly labeled and referenced. Provide complete schedules of spare
parts and maintenance equipment clearly cross-referenced with the ‘as-built’
record drawings and with operation and maintenance instruction manuals.
C All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be as recommended by

the equipment manufacturer and shall be subject to the final approval of the
Engineer.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Submit warranty against defects in material, workmanship, or installation for all

components, providing for repair or replacement for a minimum period of one
year including material and labor. Such shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all
other liabilities which manufacturers and the Contractor may have by other
provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. Any fault or failure due to defective or improper material, equipment,

workmanship or Contractor’s design which may develop shall be made good
forthwith, by and at the expense of the Contractor, including all other damage
done to areas, materials and other systems resulting such fault or failure.
C. The Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the systems are of sufficient
capacity to meet the performance requirements stipulated in or implied by the
Contract Documents. Provide a warranty for a period of 3 years from the date of
substantial completion certificate.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Refer NEB approver Suppliers and Subcontractors List
2.02 MONORAIL SYSTEM
A. The monorail shall be provided with horizontal access system comprising of a

fixed around the perimeter of the building structure. A traversing trolley from
which is suspended a solo cradle, shall travel along the monorail to reach the
various parts of the building. The rail should be protected by against corrosion.
The brackets shall be galvanised steel and mounted on the façade by 3 mounting
bolts. The trolley to comprise of 2 geared motors and 1 set of guide rollers, fitted
on the around rail and giving a safe and reliable traversing around the corners
and inclined section. The rollers to have a polyurethane tread to prevent wear of
the rail. The casing of the trolley should be in stainless steel. The effort required
to traverse the trolley should be as low as possible so that it is possible to move
by hand.
B. Mechanical Spec for the System

Track Section Type : Top Mounted Extruded Track.
Track Material : Aluminium 6063-T6.

Mounting of Track : Horizontal Support from the Parapet Wall.
Design Load for the Track Support : 9.75 kN (Factored Dynamic).
Support Spacing of Track : 1800 mm Typically
Monorail Trolley Type : Manually Traverse
Suspended Height : Approximately 28.5 meters
Surface Finishes : Track - RAL Powder Coated
Support Bracket - RAL Powder Coated
Fixing Bolts - Stainless Steel
Cradle - Mill Finish
2.03 DAVIT SYSTEM
A. Davit System: Portable system, mounted on base plate fitted on rooftop. These
base plates to be mounted on concrete upstand. The Davit Boom should pivot to
allow the cradle to be manoeuvred over the parapet from small traversing trolley,
which allows the movement of the cradle along the davit boom for about 600mm.
A manual Tirfor machine should be used to erect the Davit System. The whole
system should be able to be dismantled when required. The machine supplied
should be according to Federal OSHA code and the rotation per person should
not exceed 40lbs.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.04 CRADLE
A. Light weight design and extremely stable solo cradle powered by hoist combined
with BLOCSTOP safety device, mounted on a secondary wire rope, to ensure
complete safety to the operator and two adjustable rollers rest against the façade
to prevent spinning and excessive swaying. Should there be a power failure, the
operation of the centrifugal brake allows controlled lowering to avoid any long
delay in rescue.
Capacity : 215 kgs.
Weight : 85 kgs.
Dimensions :105 x 70 x 105 cms
Over height : 230 cms
PART EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Prior to beginning equipment installation, examine areas to receive equipment.
Verify that critical dimensions are correct and that conditions are acceptable.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide templates for anchor bolts and other items encased in concrete or below
finished surfaces in sufficient time so as not to delay the Work.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions

and placement drawings.
Coordinate placement of anchors and accessories encased in concrete with
Division 3.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of

equipment. Train the personnel in procedures to follow in the event of
operational failures or malfunctions.
3.05 CLEANING
A. After installation clean finished surfaces. Touch up damaged shop‑applied
finishes as required to restore damaged areas.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 11150
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Automatic packing gate access and exit devices, controllers and barriers.
B. Preformed steel curb frames and card control unit and ticket control Units.
C.
The Contractor shall become familiar with other equipment and appliances and
performed all necessary operations, required to execute the work of this Section.
D. The Contractor shall become familiar with other Sections of the specifications for
co-ordination, affecting work of this trade.
E. The Contractor shall test and commission all equipment.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each item of parking control equipment. Include
manufacturer's standard details and installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: For each item of parking control equipment. Include plans,
elevations, and details of typical members and other components. Show layout
and installation details, including anchorage details.
1 Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for parking control equipment operator, signal,
and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-
installed wiring.
a.
Show locations of connections to electrical service provided in other Sections.
C. Maintenance Data: For parking control equipment components to include in the
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
D. Maintenance Instructions: Manufacturer's written instructions for maintenance of
parking control equipment.
1 Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining equipment in
optimum operating condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions.
2 Include precautions against materials and methods that may be detrimental to
finishes and performance.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized
representative of the parking control equipment manufacturer for both installation
and maintenance of the type of units required for this Project, and whose
installations have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Provide internal electrical components required as part of
parking control equipment specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1 The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes of

establishing minimum quality standards. Manufactures which are equal to, or
better than those specified, and which conform to the Engineer’s design
requirements and colour selections, may be acceptable subject to the Engineer’s
approval.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
2.03 ARM AND SUPPORT
A. Gate Arm: Aluminum, single folding arm, external counterbalance, with safety
rubber bottom edge and automatic arm reversing switch. Gate arm to be 3.650m
long.
B. Arm Control: Mechanism to raise and lower arm by instant reversing electric
motor, enclosed speed reducer operated by self contained, plug-in breakage if
arm is forced, and to permit manual operation if required. Arm movement to stop
and start at reduced speed. Components of cadmium coated steel.
C. Electrical Components: Self-contained, plug-in, replaceable components. Include
wiring for control units, zinc plated connection box. Grounded convenience outlet,
switch for automatic or manual operation, switch to disconnect power unit,
thermostatically controlled minimum 250 Watt heater strip, and thermal protection
disconnect for motor.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.04 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Electrical Characteristics:
1 240 Volts, single phase, 50 Hz.
2 Refer to Division 16.
B. Motor: Refer to Division 16.
C. Controls: The system shall be equipped with logic controls and operational
controls. The logic controls shall be provided in factory sealed enclosure.
D. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor
quantities, sizes, and materials indicated.
E. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment under
provisions of Division 16.
2.05 CAR CONTROL UNITS
A.
General: Provide pedestal mounted card control units and ticket control unit to
activate barrier gates. Fabricate housing of welded cold rolled steel sheet with
weatherproof access panel on front. Provide flush mounted lock and two keys to
operate access panel. Mount housing on a 2-inch (50 mm) square, steel tube
pedestal with a curved top to receive housing and trim plate to cover anchor
bolts. Finish units with manufacturer’s standard baked enamel coating system.
B.
Operation: While entering, the automatic barrier is controlled by card controlled
unit, inserting a specially prepared plastic card with an inner magnetic-core
coding causes magnetically actuated internal elements to activate barrier gate.
While exiling, the automatic barrier is controlled from the guardhouse.
2.06 FINISH
A. Gate Arm: Two coat enamel with reflective black and yellow diagonal stripes
both sides of arm.
B. Gate Posts: Baked enamel on steel, white colour.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that anchor bolts, curbs are ready to receive work and dimensions are as
indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install parking control system and components in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.
B. Cut grooves in pavement surface, install vehicle detection loops and lead-in
wires, and fill grooves with loop filler.
C. Install internal electrical wiring, conduit, junction boxes, transformers, circuit
breakers, and auxiliary components required.
3.03 TESTING
A. After installation, inspect test and demonstrate all equipment under co-operating
conditions in the presence of the Engineer and Employer’s operating personnel.
B. Any equipment failing the tests shall be immediately removed and replaced by
Contractor.
A. Protect all equipment during and after installation. Remove protective coverings
only when all work which may cause damage or abuse to parking control
equipment and related fittings has been completed.
B. Type of protective coverings shall be as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer. Strippable coating (if used) shall be completely removable with no
residue left on finished surfaces.
C. Cleaning of all equipment at completion of the work shall be by means
recommended by the equipment manufacturer and to the approval of the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 14210
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
SECTION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1 SCOPE
A. Work Included: The specification included in this Section is intended to cover the
complete provision and installation of gearless traction elevators. All work and
material necessary to accomplish this installation in a complete and workmanlike
manner, except that specifically excluded as "Work by Others", shall be provided.
This work shall be done in accordance with the requirements of local codes which
may govern the requirements of the installation. All terms in these specifications
have the definition given in the latest edition including revisions and authorized
changes in effect on the date of these specifications. In all cases where a device or
part of the equipment is referred to in the singular number, it is intended that such
reference should apply to as many devices as are required to complete the
installation.
B. Applicable requirements of the following sections of this specification apply to all

work required under this section.
1 Conditions of the Contract.
2 Division 1‑General Requirements of the Contract.
C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1 Hoistways and Machine Spaces: Plumb hoistways and machine spaces complete
with lighting, environmental control, pit access ladders, pit sumps and sump pumps
or drains, basement machine governor and overhead sheaves access ladders,
platforms, access doors, catwalks and doors, blind (express run) hoistway access
doors, frames, closers and warning signs, cants, sprinkler systems and smoke
control. Furr in all elevator express run front walls to give less than a 120mm, flush
wall condition.
2 Supports: Supports for equipment reactions, hoistway entrance sills and guide rails
as shown on the drawings. NOTE: Only those structural supports and divider
beams indicated on the structural drawings will be provided by Other Trades. The
Elevator Contractor is responsible for providing and installing any other required
structural supports or inserts to accommodate and support his equipment.
3 Blockouts, Cutting, Patching and Finishing: All blockouts in, or cutting of structural
members, walls or work specified in other sections, together with patching and
finishing of same, including grouting under sills and around hoistway entrance
frames.
4 Painting: Painting of machine room walls, floors, ceilings and equipment not
installed under this section. Finish painting of elevator entrance frames and doors
in a color and finish as selected by the Architect.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
5 Guards: Protective enclosure around hoistway openings during construction.

6 .3 sq. m. per elevator of hoistway smoke venting ducted to the outside air with
motorized or spring dampers and actuating smoke detectors. Alternately, if
approved by the local Building Authority, hoistway pressurization may be installed in
lieu of venting provided that the system shall be responsive to an accumulation of
smoke and heat at the top of the hoistway.
7 Cab Flooring: Passenger Elevators: Stone infill, as indicated.

8 Fire rated, blind, hoistway access doors, frames, sills, locks and closers conforming
to EN81-1 - for elevators with express runs in excess of 10m or as required by the
local code authorities.
9 Electrical:
a. Electrical feeders for normal, standby and rescue device mainline power through
circuit breaker devices. There will be enough standby power to run one elevator per
passenger elevator group and one elevator per service elevator group,
simultaneously. NOTE: Elevator Contractors shall provide and install all main line
wiring and conduits to run from the machine room disconnect switches to their car
controllers/power conversion panels. Elevator Contractors shall provide and install
all required auxiliary disconnect switches or manually‑operated switches, connected
in the control circuits to prevent elevator starting, if the main line disconnect
switches or circuit breakers (furnished by Others) are not within sight of the power
converter or motor starter per NEC, Rule 620‑51(b).
b. A pair of conductors run from the standby power transfer switch(es) to each elevator
group dispatch controller to signal the loss of normal power and the application of
standby power. Contacts are to be normally closed. Transfer switches are to be
provided with an in phase monitor, a neutral position or a 15-20 second delay timer
to permit the elevators to come to a complete stop before power switching occurs.
c. Electrical feeders and disconnect devices for normal and standby car lighting,
emergency call bell, the elevator intercom system, the cab exhaust blower, the
elevator readout C.R.T.'S and each elevator hoist machine cooling blower (if
furnished). NOTE: Elevator Contractors shall provide and install all supplemental
wiring and conduit to run from the machine room disconnect switches to their car
controllers.
d. Means for absorbing regenerative power during an overhauling load (full load down)
in accordance with EN81-1.
(Note: Elevator drives will employ diode - transistor or I.G.B.T. converter / inverters.)
e. Power for construction and testing; temporary power for construction hoists,
temporary elevators and, temporary occupancy permit elevators.
f. Machine room/pit lighting and convenience outlets.
g. Remote Conduits, Wiring or Duct: The Elevator Contractor shall provide and install
all remote wiring, ducts and conduit for connecting the elevator hoistways to the
elevator, indicator, intercom and control panels to be located in the building BMS
control center, and the lobby control panel(s).
h. A telephone/data link/modem line to each elevator machine room for use in the
remote elevator monitoring system.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
10 Life Safety:
a. 3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a professional
b. All building paging system to machine room junction boxes.
c. Sound‑powered telephone wiring to machine room junction boxes.
11 Security: Card readers, interface boards, security computer, monitor and keyboard
for encoding, overriding, and monitoring restricted access floors on selected
passenger elevators and service/firefighters’ elevators. (only provision).
D. Work to include:-
1 A life safety, supervised "all building paging" speaker to be installed in each elevator
cab canopy. (only provision).
2 A sound‑powered firefighters' telephone jack to be installed in each elevator main
car operating station.
E. Work or Items Furnished, But Not Installed:

1 Service elevator cab protection pads (1 set/car).
2 One print, one Mylar and one sepia of elevator maintenance manuals, operating
instructions, wiring diagrams and parts ordering manuals, and lubrication charts.
3 Elevator operating keys (5 sets of each key).
F. No Elevator Company cab nameplates or logos shall be exposed to public view.

1 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with the most‑stringent requirements of the following:

1 U.A.E. Building Laws and Codes:
2 Applicable Local Building Laws. 3. Local Codes, Ordinances and Laws.
4 EN81-1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
5 Elevator Inspectors' Manual, EN81-1 -
6 National Electrical Code No. NFPA 70‑1997.
B. Permits: Obtain and pay for all local construction permits and the first year’s elevator
operating permits.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Approved Manufacturers:
A. REFER NEB APPROVED LIST:

1 Elevator supplier shall be capable of providing maintenance service, including
adequate local parts inventory within 10 kilometers of the installation.
2 Supplier shall be capable of providing 24‑hour‑a‑day emergency service and

respond to trouble calls within 1‑1/2 to 2 hours and passenger entrapments within
30 minutes of notification.
3 Supplier shall employ competent personnel, experienced in elevator maintenance.
4 Suppler shall perform all maintenance during specified maintenance period and
shall offer contract maintenance service to Owner. Maintenance service shall not
be assigned or transferred.
B. Elevator Cab Enclosures: As per approved sub contractor/supplier list.
C. Fire‑Rated Hoistway Entrances: The Elevator Contractor,
D. Guarantee:
1 The materials and workmanship of the elevator apparatus installed shall comply in
every respect with these specifications and any defects not due to ordinary wear
and tear, or improper use or care which may develop within 1 year from date of final
acceptance and/or beneficial use of each individual elevator shall be corrected to
the satisfaction of the Architect at no additional cost.
2 The Elevator Contractor shall make any and all modifications, adjustments and
improvements to the elevator systems necessary to meet the performance
requirements specified in Part 2.2 of these specifications.
1 SUBMITTALS AND SAMPLES
Within 60 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit a sepia and 3 copies of the
shop drawings and required material for review.
In general, the following are required:
A. Scaled Layouts: Equipment arrangement, entrances and car enclosures. Provide

drawings at the following scale: hoistway sections 1:50; hoistway shaft details
1:33‑1/3; hoistway and machine room plans 1:20; elevator cabs and hoistway
entrances 1:20; fixtures 1:10.
B. Design Information: Indicate equipment lists, reactions, rail loads and stacking plan,
door weights, heat emissions, seismic loads (if the installation is in a seismic zone),
wind loads, and design information on layouts.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Power Confirmation Sheets: Include hp(kw), code letter, starting current, full‑load
running current, demand factor and regenerative loads for applicable motors and
power conversion units.
D. Finish Material: Submit samples per the Architect's requirements. Submit 3

samples of the following: 30 cm x 30 cm materials and finishes exposed to view;
welded entrance frame detail, engraving (1 word in each size); extruded stainless
steel car sill.
E. Fixtures: Submit cuts and shop drawings and samples of all fixtures including one
of each of the following: each type of hall lantern; hall pushbutton; light fixture; car
operating panel; electroluminescent display screen; elevator monitoring CRT, CPU
and keyboard, etc.
F. Certificates: Submit certificate of elevator performance with contract closeout

documents. After adjustments, test, and inspections are performed, forward
certificate signed by Elevator Manufacturer stating that the equipment and controls
provide the level of elevator service specified. Include certification that elevator
hoistway doors, frames, transom panels, hardware and accessories comply with
specified fire rating requirements.
1.1 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall furnish:

1 Preventative maintenance on all equipment described herein for a period of 12
months commencing on date of final acceptance and/or beneficial use by Owner of
each elevator unit, including unlimited 24‑hour emergency call backs. The
maintenance shall include systematic examinations, adjustment, cleaning and
lubrication of all equipment. The Contractor shall also repair or replace electrical
and mechanical parts whenever required and shall use only genuine, standard parts
produced by the Manufacturer of the equipment installed. Maintain elevator
machine rooms, hoistways, and pits in clean condition.
2 All maintenance work shall be performed by competent personnel under the
supervision and in the direct employ of the Contractor.
3 The Owner, at his option, may choose to delete this maintenance from the capital
contracts and to pay this amount in 12 equal installments directly to the Contractor
during the period in which the work is being accomplished.
4 Indicate the amount included for this maintenance on the bid form.
B. Contract:
1 Quote the monthly cost for a 5‑year maintenance agreement to commence on
completion of the 12‑month period above. This quotation shall be submitted with
the elevator bids on the Owner's own executed standard maintenance form (VTMA)-
Under this agreement, the equipment performance requirements, as specified, shall
be provided at all times.
2 If this contract is accepted, the contract price may be adjusted at the expiration of
the new installation service period and, thereafter, as provided in the contract.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
C. Interim:
1 When 1 or more elevators have been installed to a stage near completion and
declared ready for service before the entire installation of all elevators has been
completed and accepted, the Owner may accept the interim elevators for use and
place them in regular service.
2 During this period, the Owner may agree to pay the Contractor for a mutually agreed
amount per day per elevator for regular maintenance of elevators on interim service.
Bidders shall indicate the amount per unit with their bids.
3 The maintenance and guarantee periods herein specified shall not commence for
units accepted on an interim basis or accepted and shut down due to lack of need.
4 Provide full maintenance on construction lifts being utilized by the main contractor
and under the temporary occupation permit requirements. (T.O.P.).
1.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel: Low carbon, cold rolled to stretcher leveled standard flatness per ASTM
A366 for sheet, ASTM A36 for structural.
B. Stainless Steel: Type 302 or 304 with No. 4 or 8 polished directional finish on
exposed surfaces per ASTM A167, as specified and indicated on the architectural
drawings. Grain of belting in direction of longest dimension or as indicated on the
Architect's drawings.
C. Aluminum: Extrusions per ASTM B221; sheet and plate per ASTM B209.
D. Paint: All exposed metal work furnished under this section, except as otherwise
noted, shall be cleaned of oil, grease, scale and other foreign matter and factory
painted 1 shop coat of Manufacturer's standard rust‑resistant primer. After erection,
provide 1 finish coat of industrial enamel paint. Galvanized metal exposed inside of
the hoistway or in the machine room need not be painted (except as noted). Field
paint and touch up any ferrous metal that is exposed or welded during construction
or installation.
E. Prime Finish: Clean all surfaces receiving a baked enamel finish of oil, grease,
scale, etc. Apply 1 coat of rust‑resistant mineral paint followed by a filler coat over
uneven surfaces. Sand smooth and apply final coat of mineral paint.
F. Baked Enamel: Prime per "E" above. Apply and bake 3 additional coats of enamel
in the solid color and finish as selected by the Architect.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.1 CAB ALLOWANCE:
A. General - All Passenger Elevators: Complete cabs shall be delivered to the jobsite
under a separate contract to be let at a later date. It is intended that the contract for
all of this material and work is to be made between the Elevator Manufacturer and
Cab Manufacturer selected by the Owner.
Elevator Contractors shall include the cab allowances specified in the allowance
section of these specifications in their base bids. The cab allowances are to include
all interior finishes, the ceiling and interior lighting. The cab platforms, steel shells,
front returns, transoms, and doors, sills, stiles, slings, safety plank, roller guides,
headers, door operators, controls, toe guards, and emergency exit contacts are not
to be a part of the cab allowances and are to be included in the base bid.
B. Bids: The Owner may obtain separate bids for the cabs and then direct the Elevator
Manufacturer to secure equipment from a designed Manufacturer. Elevator
Manufacturers are hereby cautioned to include any amount they deem necessary in
their base bids to cover their responsibility for coordinating fabrication, “mock ups“
and viewing, storage and installation of this material. No allowance over the net
price quoted for cabs will be allowed the Elevator Manufacturer when directed to
secure this material.
C. Cabs: The Elevator Manufacturer shall supervise and coordinate all drawings and
materials included in this specification and also install the cabs. An appropriate
amount to cover the V.A.T. tax (if any) on the enclosures will be added to the net
FOB quotation when purchase is authorized. The Elevator Manufacturer shall also
be responsible for the following:
1 Furnish and install all electrical controls and signal fixtures and wire complete.
2 Furnish and install conduit and wiring to lighting and ventilating fixtures provided.
3 Furnish and install car door headers, tracks and threshold.
4 Furnish and install car door hangers and gibs on car doors and hang doors.
5 Furnish and install car operating panels and position indicator controls, sound-
powered telephone jacks, cab telephones, service panels, and faceplates.
6 Install speakers in cab canopy provided by Contractor.
D. Cab Weights: For equipment design purposes, the Lift Contractor shall estimate the
complete weight of the passenger lift interior cab finish materials at an average of
400kg Note: Passenger panoramic lifts 4 & 5 will contain all structural glass walls,
canopies and fluted tops and bottoms.
1.1 KEYS
Five sets of keys to operate all keyed switches and locks shall be furnished upon
completion. Keys shall be properly tagged. All keying shall be arranged with the
Building Owner.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
1.1 HOISTING
All required hoisting and movement of elevator equipment, shall be the responsibility
of the Elevator Contractor.
SECTION 2 - PRODUCTS
2 SUMMARY – TRACTION ELEVATORS
2 PERFORMANCE
A.
B. Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold up to 125% of the rated load.
C.
D. Door Times: The door opening time shall be measured from the instant the doors
start to open until they are in the fully open position.
The door closing times shall not be less than those permitted by the EN81-1 and
the kinetic energy of the hoistway door and all parts rigidly connected thereto
(includes the sum of the weights of the hoistway and car doors and related parts)
computed for the average closing speed shall not exceed 12J. The force necessary
to prevent closing of the hoistway door or car door from rest shall not exceed 13.5
kilograms.
E. Floor‑to‑Floor Time: Floor‑to‑floor time shall be measured from the instant the
doors start to close at one floor until the car is level and stopped at the next
adjacent floor, up or down travel direction. Doors shall not be more than 3/4 open
(2 open on Service Elevator) before the car is level and stopped. These
performance times shall be obtainable with dependable, consistent operation
without undue wear or stress on the equipment and without excessive maintenance.
The elevator shall provide a comfortable ride with smooth acceleration, retardation
and a soft stop.
F. System‑Response Time: The group passenger system‑response times for the

indicated group Elevators as measured by registration of hall calls, shall meet the
following criteria during any 15‑minute period of the day with all passenger elevators
in group service:
1 Passenger Elevators 1-3:
a. Average system-response time shall not exceed: 18 seconds
b. Percent of all hall calls registered shall be answered within 30 seconds: 81%
c. Percent of all hall calls registered shall be answered within 60 seconds: 96%
d. Percent of all hall calls registered shall be answered within 90 seconds: 99%
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
The system response time requirements are based upon not more than 150 hall
calls being registered in each group within each 15 minute period. The
system‑response time for service at floors not served by all group elevators shall
not be included in the verification of system‑response time performance.
At the completion of the project, and when the office floor is 80% occupied, the
contractor shall record elevator group's system response time and submit the results
to the elevator consultant for verification.
2 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
A. All elevator equipment (including hoist machines, deflector sheaves, power

conversion units and support equipment) shall be mechanically isolated from the
structure and electrically isolated from the building power supply and each other to
prevent noise and vibration being transmitted to occupied areas of the building.
B. Elevator equipment shall be designed, installed and adjusted to meet the

performance requirements of Paragraph 2.02 within the following parameters.
1 Horizontal acceleration (postwise and front to back) within cars during all riding and
door operating conditions shall not exceed 15mg peak-to-peak in the 1‑10 Hz
range.
2 Acceleration and deceleration shall be constant and shall be at least .9m/sec2 and
not exceed 1.0m/sec2 with an initial ramp between 0.5 and 0.75 second.
3 3
Sustained jerk shall be a minimum of 1.0m/sec and not exceed 1.6m/sec .
3
C. Measured noise levels relating to elevator equipment and its operation shall not
exceed 40‑45 dBA in the elevator machine rooms and lobbies and 55 dBA in
elevator cars under any condition including door operation and cab exhaust blower
on highest speed.
2 OPERATION
A. Operational Control: (The various systems specified hereafter shall be provided for
each elevator/group per the equipment summaries.)
1 Microprocessor‑Based, Simplex Selective Collective: Elevator shall operate without

an attendant from buttons located at each floor and in the car. The registration of a
hall call, when the car is idle, shall automatically start the elevator and dispatch it to
the corresponding floor. If a call is registered at the floor where the car is idle, the
doors shall automatically open.
Once the direction of travel has been established, the car will not reverse direction
until all car calls have been answered or until all hall calls, ahead of the car and
corresponding to the direction of car travel, have been answered.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
The car shall slow down and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered
calls, in the order in which they are approached in each direction of travel. As
slowdown is initiated for a hall call, that call shall be automatically canceled and the
hall button for that direction of travel remain ineffective until the car leaves the floor.
Car calls shall be similarly canceled. The car shall remain at the arrival floor an
adjustable time interval to permit passenger transfer.
The car shall only answer calls corresponding to the direction in which the car is
traveling except that it may answer a call in the opposite direction if that call is the
highest (or lowest) call registered.
Registration of a call shall cause the appropriate button to illuminate. When the call
is answered, the light shall go out.
2 Microprocessor-Based, Duplex Selective Collective: Elevators shall operate without

attendants from buttons in each car and at each floor. With two cars in service and
no calls registered, one car shall normally park at the service level entry floor
("home" car). The other car shall park where last used ("free" car). Registration of
a hall call above the entry floor or a car call in the free car shall cause that car to
start and begin operation. When a car has been started, it shall respond to calls
registered for the direction of its travel in the order in which the floors are reached.
Once the direction of travel has been established, the car will not reverse direction
until all car calls have been answered or until all hall calls, ahead of the car and
corresponding to the direction of car travel, have been answered.
Cars shall slow down and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered
calls, in the order in which they are approached in each direction of travel. As
slowdown is initiated for a hall call, that call shall be automatically canceled and the
hall button for that direction of travel remain effective until the elevator leaves the
floor. Car calls shall be similarly canceled. The car shall remain at the arrival floor
an adjustable time interval to allow passenger transfer.
The cars shall only answer calls corresponding to the direction in which the car is
traveling except that it may answer a call in the opposite direction if that call is the
highest (or lowest) call registered.
When the free car is clearing calls, the home car shall respond to:
a. A call registered on the home car buttons.

b. An up hall call registered below the free car while the free car is traveling up.
c. An up or a down call registered above the free car while the free car is traveling
down.
d. A hall call registered and the free car is delayed in its normal operation for a
predetermined period.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
When both cars are clearing calls, only one car shall stop in response to any
registered hall call. The first car to clear its calls shall return to the main floor and
become the home car. Should the last service required bring both cars to the main
floor, the car that arrived first shall become the free car.
Registration of a call shall cause the appropriate button to illuminate. When the call
is answered, the light shall go out.
Lower basement or parking level calls shall be answered by the "home" car unless
the free car is parked at the floor where the call occurs. If no car is parked at the
main level, the first down traveling car shall answer the lower parking level call.
Stops shall not be made at the main floor by cars traveling to or from lower parking
level stops unless there are calls registered for service at that floor.
3 Group Supervisory Control System (Elevators 1-3):

a. Provide each passenger elevator group with a microprocessor‑based group
dispatch, car control and motor control system per the equipment summaries with
the following minimum features hereafter described.
b. System shall be adaptive and continually calculate the estimated time of arrival for
each car to each prospective car and hall call before they are registered. The
system shall operate to meet changing traffic conditions on the basis of demand, but
dispatch from the bottom terminal landing may be used when traffic is
predominantly in the up direction. As traffic demands vary, the supervisory system
shall automatically and continually scan the status, direction, and location of each
call, location and travel direction of each car, assign the "best" car to the call and
provide for any changes in the method of dispatching to provide the most‑effective
means of handling the building traffic conditions. System shall include means to
scan for coincidental or contiguous car and hall calls, to sense long wait hall calls
and preferentially serve them, accomplish direction reversal without closing and
reopening doors, and minimize the group average system‑response times. Only
one car shall respond to a registered hmachine,
c. Heavy‑Up Traffic: An available car at the lower dispatch terminal shall be selected
and its up signal illuminated. Doors shall remain open an adjustable time for
loading. As the doors begin to close on this selected car, its up signal shall be
extinguished and the signal of the next car illuminated. A car that becomes almost
fully loaded shall be dispatched in advance of its normal loading time. Dispatching
interval may be measured from the departure of the previous car. Cars shall not be
dispatched unless demand for service exists. Cars shall respond to up calls on the
up trip and automatically stop and reverse at the floors corresponding to the highest
car call or down hall call registered. Cars shall stop for down hall calls when
returning to the terminal, except that provision shall be made to express a car to the
lower dispatch terminal if no car is available there for a predetermined time.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
d. Heavy‑Down Traffic: Cars arriving at the lower dispatch terminal shall illuminate
their up signal and remain at the terminal for only the same length of time as
described for intermediate floors. Cars shall be dispatched from the terminal
without regard to sequence and without interval between cars. Once started from
the terminal, cars shall respond to car calls and up hall calls, reverse at assigned
high call and return to the lower dispatching terminal, stopping for car calls and
down hall calls on the downward trip. Spacing of cars to equalize service shall be
accomplished by continually scanning and updating the system.
e. Two‑Way Traffic‑Balanced or Fluctuating Heavier in Either Direction: Elevators
shall respond on demand during balanced traffic. Cars may be spaced by a priority
system relating to various types of demand which may develop. Dispatching of cars
shall take place from landings where they become available without the necessity of
traveling to the terminal. Parked cars shall be capable of responding to assigned
calls in either direction of travel. Assignment of calls and dispatching of cars to
meet demands for service shall be done in a manner which provides equitable
service to all floors and minimizes system‑response times.
f. Intermittent or Light Traffic: Dispatching shall be arranged so that any car or cars
may be used when traffic demands are light. Cars shall park at random or at their
last stop when no demand exists. Parked cars shall have their doors closed and be
available to respond to calls. As traffic develops during an intermittent period,
elevators shall operate and be dispatched on demand. Only one car shall respond
to any particular call. During light traffic, it shall not be necessary for cars to travel
to terminals for spacing or dispatching.
g. Auxiliary Dispatching: A backup dispatch system shall be provided should the car
selection or dispatching system fail. The cars shall leave the dispatching terminals
without regard to sequence or regular intervals and proceed to answer registered
calls in normal sequence and manner (not if firefighter=s return features have been
activated).
4 Other Items:
a. Anti‑Nuisance Feature‑Passenger Elevators: In the event car loading or operation
is not commensurate with the number of car calls registered (when the elevator is in
automatic operation), all maliciously registered car calls for that elevator or deck
shall be automatically canceled.
b. Load Weighing‑Passenger Elevators: Provide under platform mounted micro
switches or strain gages or crosshead‑mounted strain gages for weighing the
passenger load in each elevator when they are in automatic operation. Design the
control system to provide dispatching in advance of normal intervals and to provide
landing call bypass when the car is filled to approximately 80% of full‑capacity load.
c. Artificial Intelligence Systems: Include one or more of the following Aartificial

intelligence@ approaches to maximizing the interfloor traffic performance and
reducing the number of Along wait calls@ for a given group of elevators:
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
-1 A long term learning function that records traffic patterns in the building on a hard
disk over at least a week of operation. It shall make use of this information by
positioning cars at floors at certain times of the day when heavy traffic is anticipated,
by minimizing stops by inferring likely traffic patterns and arrival/departure rates at
different floors during different times of the day. The system shall reduce the
probability of long wait calls during heavy periods of traffic, etc.
-2 Incorporates neural network, fuzzy logic type rule sets in an expert system rule
base. Provide a short term learning function and a knowledge base of predicted
traffic patterns and car movements.
-3 Contractor shall supply full details of his preferred approach to these requirements
with his bid response.
d. Stopping Accuracy: An automatic 2‑way stopping and leveling device shall be

provided, designed to govern the stopping accuracy of the car to within mm
above or below the landing sill. This operation shall be effective to avoid overtravel,
as well as undertravel, of the car and maintain the stopping accuracy regardless of
the load in the car, direction of travel, rope slippage or stretch.
B. Independent Service: Provide controls for operation of each elevator from car
buttons only. Under this operation door closing shall be initiated by activating the
desired destination floor button or the door close button.
C. Door Operation‑Passenger Elevators: Doors shall open automatically when the car
arrives at a floor to permit the transfer of passengers. When another car is at the
lobby floor terminal and is loading for departure or upon expiration of a timed
interval, the doors shall close until the arriving car is designated for loading. In the
event a passenger has entered the elevator, before it is assigned for dispatching,
the doors shall reopen upon registration of a call on the car button or by pressing
the door open button. If no other car is at the terminal, an arriving car shall have its
doors open until the car is dispatched or expiration of a timed interval with no
demand. Equip the car doors with preopening circuits so that the doors are about
3/4 open when the elevator is level at the landing.
D. Door Operation‑Service Elevator:

1 Doors shall open automatically when the car arrives at a floor to permit egress of
passengers and carts. After the timed interval, the doors shall automatically close.
Equip the car doors with preopening circuits so that the doors are approximately 2
open when the elevator is level at the landing.
2 Include an extended door hold open button in the main car operating panel to
extend the door hold open time (10-20 seconds, time to be adjustable thru the
E.M.S. keyboard) to facilitate cart transfers when the elevator is on automatic
service. Registration or re-registration of a car call shall cancel the hold open time.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
E. Motor Control: The closed-loop, digital type, motor feedback control system shall be
suitable for the operation specified. The microprocessor‑based motor control
system shall continually calculate, or compare, the ideal speed curve based upon a
minimum acceleration/deceleration rate of .9 meters per second per second and
incorporate a digital signal feedback reference pattern and a digital car position
count so that the ideal‑speed curve is exactly duplicated regardless of the car load,
machine room temperature, or hoist rope stretch. The system shall be capable of
providing smooth, comfortable acceleration, retardation and dynamic braking and
limiting the difference in speed between full load and no load to not more than
of the contract speed.
F. Emergency Features:
1 Firefighters' Service: Equip the elevators with control system to operate and recall
the cars during a fire or other emergency condition per EN81-1 - Provide terminals
on the controller for connection of signal from sensors provided in other sections of
the work. Operation shall be similar on all elevators and visual/audible signal shall
operate until return is complete or automatic operation restored. Provide the
designated level and alternate return level sequencing per the Local Fire Authority
Requirements. Phase 1 and phase 2 operation fro one passenger lift and for the
service lift.
2 Emergency Cab Lighting and Emergency Alarm Unit: Car‑mounted or machine
room mounted battery unit including solid‑state charger and testing means enclosed
in common metal container. Battery to be rechargeable nickel cadmium, lead acid,
or gel-cell type with a 10‑year minimum life expectancy. Mount the emergency call
bell on each car top. Locate emergency bulbs (2 bulbs minimum) above the cab
dropped ceiling so that the unit is not readily visible from the cab interior but gives
sufficient intensity to provide at least 50 lux measured at a height of 1 meter above
the cab floor. Alternately, if incandescent cab interior lights are provided as a part of
the cab design, illuminate two of these bulbs during an emergency lighting condition.
Locate an emergency lighting test button in the car service panel. A main line
power failure or pressing the test button shall illuminate the emergency lighting
bulbs.
3 Standby Power Transfer: In the event of normal power failure, adequate standby
power will be supplied through normal feeders to start and run all of the passenger
elevators full time plus additional power to run one service elevator per group at
rated speed. Provide controls to automatically start and run the cars nonstop to the
designated terminal, one car at a time. E.M.S. selection controls shall also be
provided in the command center panel so that any alternate group elevator may be
selected to run continually. Under either mode of operation, only one group elevator
and all of the designated elevators shall be running on standby power at a time.
Provide standby power to run the elevator E.M.S. system, the intercom system and
all cab lights, exhaust blowers and emergency call bells.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
4 Auto Rescue Device: In the even of normal and standby power failure, each
elevator shall be provided with a battery operated rescue device. When activated,
the rescue device shall serve to open the doors of elevators at a landing and run
elevators away from a landing to the nearest landing at slow speed and open the
doors. The rescue device shall be provided with an automatic battery charger,
inverter and fail safe controls.
G. DEWA
I. Sound‑Powered Telephone Jack: Install a sound‑powered telephone jack

(provided by the Contractor) and wiring in each elevator car. The system shall
provide for 2‑way communications between all of the stations with the wiring
terminating at each machine room car controller's junction box.
2.1 MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT
A. Arrange equipment in machine rooms. Provide identifying numbers on machine,

power‑conversion unit, controller, data concentrator and main line and auxiliary
disconnect switch.
B. Gearless Traction Machine: Single worm geareless or helical geareless traction

type with AC induction or P.M.S.M., ACV3F motor, brake, worm, gearless, drive
sheave equipped with rope guards, and all case mounted in proper alignment on an
isolated bedplate. Machine shall have ball or roller bearings, and meet testing
requirements without external cooling appurtenances. Elevators listed in Summary
2.01 shall be equipped with basement application gearless traction machines
located adjacent to the hoistway properly braced and configured to take the up‑pull
reactions associated with this type of equipment. The Elevator Contractor shall
provide removable 16 gage sheet metal closures between the elevator machine
room and the elevator hoistway for basement or offset mounted machines, as
required to maintain the fire and smoke separation between the hoistway (pit) and
machine room. Provide a belt, direct‑drive, or friction‑driven digital reference signal
tach generator mounted to each hoist machine. Isolate the all
call.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
order to minimize noise and vibration transmission into occupied areas of the
building.
C. Power Conversion and Regulation Units: Provide solid‑state, or alternating current
variable voltage, variable frequency ACV3F, I.G.B.T. converter/inverter drives. The
units shall be designed to limit current, suppress noise and prevent transient voltage
feedback into the building power supply. Provide internal heat sink cooling fans for
the power drive portion of the converter panels. Isolate unit from the building
structure to minimize noise and vibration transmission. Provide each unit with
isolation transformers, line filters, noise filter networks, and choke inductors, as
required. The Elevator Contractor shall be responsible for all required corrections to
suppress solid‑state converter noises (audible and vibratory), radio frequency
interference in unit, or eliminate regenerative voltage transients induced into main
line feeders or the standby power generator.
All ACV3F converter/inverter drives shall be regenerative and utilize dynamic
braking during an overhauling condition. Supplement direct‑current power for the
operation of the hoist machine brake, door operator, dispatch logic processors,
signal fixtures, etc., shall be supplied from separate, static power supplies.
E. Encoder: Encoders shall be provided and mounted in the machine room. The
encoders shall be the solid‑state, optical, digital‑count type, mechanically coupled
to the car via a slotted tape with drive sheaves and a pit‑tensioning sheave or driven
from the car governor. Optical, inductive pulse, or mechanical cam‑type tape
encoders or rail Afriction@ encoders mounted in the hoistway shall not be used on
the passenger elevators.
F. Controller: Cabinet type, with removable doors or drawers and adequate ventilation
fans to dissipate heat complying with NEC Code Article 110‑16(a) working
clearances, shall be provided. Wire to identified terminal block studs. Identifying
symbols or letters identical to those on wiring diagrams permanently marked
adjacent to each component on the controller. Provide the proper ampere rating
marked adjacent to all fuse holders. Each car controller, the group dispatch
controller and data concentrator panels (if provided) shall be equipped with plug
compatible diagnostic ports, system monitoring ports, and remote CRT drivers and
plugs. Provide the dispatch controller or data concentrator panel with a 56k modem
and data card for the remote monitoring telephone line connections.
G. Templates, Forms, Sleeves and Guards: All templates, forms and sleeves for
providing necessary openings in the concrete slab over the hoistway shall be
provided as part of this work. Sleeves for conduit and other small holes shall project
25 mm above the concrete slab. Provide 25 mm steel angle guards around hoist
cables, governor ropes, encoder tapes, or duct slots that penetrate the machine
room slab. Provide approved rope and smoke guards for sheaves and cables.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
H. Machine Beams: Provide structural steel beams required for support of the elevator
machine, secondary sheave, overhead sheaves, governors and dead‑end hitches.
Provide bearing plates, anchors, shelf angles, blocking, etc., to support beams and
equipment. Elevator Contractors shall provide special slab support shelf angles
welded into the webs of their machine beams, if required, to support the machine
room slab and decking. Cope the machine beams and weld them to the building
support steel, as required by the Structural Engineer for proper load transfer.
I. Governor: Centrifugal type, car/counterweight driven, with pull‑through jaws.

Provide 2 bi‑directional electrical shutdown switches and any overhead supports
required which are additional to building structure.
J. Tie‑Down Bolts and Template: Provide for securing the basement or offset
mounted gearless hoist machines into the building monolithic, concrete tie down
pads or structure.
2.1 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
A. Guide Rails: Steel T‑section suitable for travel, car and counterweight weights, and
support locations at structural floors. Provide rail backing, intermediate
counterweight tie brackets, and hoistway inserts if necessary to meet EN81-1
Note: Only those supports indicated on the structural drawings will be provided by
Other Trades. The Elevator Contractor shall be responsible for any additional rail
supports, brackets or attachments.
B. Buffers: Oil type with any blocking, supports, and permanent inspection ladders and
platforms (required where the car and/or counterweight buffer oil inspection port is
located 2.0 m or more above the pit floor). Provide reduced stroke buffers if
required, to meet the minimum code overhead requirements.
C. Sheaves: Machined grooves with ball or roller bearings. Provide mounting means
to machine beams, machine bedplate, car and counterweight structural members,
etc. Provide drip pans under 2:1, overhead, and deflector sheaves, rope guards on
drive, compensation, 2:1 and all secondary sheaves. Provide car top, underslung,
and counterweight 2:1 sheaves with top metal dust covers and guards. Provide lock
down compensation pit embedment items and support channels.
D. Governor and Encoder Pit‑Tensioning Sheaves: The sheaves shall be mounted to

pit support members or the rails and provided with guides or pivot points to enable
free vertical movement.
E. Compensation gearless Elevators: Provide whisperflex encapsulated chain

compensation with pit guidance rollers, if required.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
F. Counterweight: Channel construction, steel channel frame with metal filler weights,
and 2 subweight retainer rods that pass through all subweights and the
counterweight crosshead, guided by four sets of roller guide shoes. Each roller
guide shall have three rollers of a diameter sufficient to limit the rotational speed to
less than 1000 r.p.m.
G. Counterweight Guard: Metal guard around counterweight in pit, per code.
H. Hoist and Governor Ropes:

1 8 x 19 or 8 x 25 seale construction traction steel type; use 13 mm minimum
diameter for all hoist ropes.
2 Governor rope to suit Manufacturer's governor specification.
3 Fasten with adjustable shackles.
4 2:1 roping dead‑end hitches shall be provided with dampening springs.
I. Normal and Final Terminal Stopping Devices: Per Code. Provide emergency
terminal slowdown devices, if required, to meet the minimum Code overhead
requirements.
J. Electrical Wiring:
1 Conductors: Solid or stranded copper throughout with individual wires coded and all
connections on identified studs or terminal blocks. Use no splices or similar
connections in wiring except at terminal blocks, control cabinets, junction boxes or
condulets. Provide 10% spare conductors throughout. Flexible conduit shall not be
used on flat portions of the car top.
2 Conduit, Etc: Painted or galvanized steel and duct. Conduit size shall be 13 mm
minimum. Flexible conduit exceeding 45 cm in length or mounted on flat portions of
the car top shall not be used. Flexible heavy‑duty service cord, Type SO, may be
used between fixed car wiring and car door protection light matrix junction boxes.
3 Traveling Cables: Flame and moisture‑resistant outer cover. Include 6 sets of

shielded communication wires and car lighting circuits from machine room to car
connection points. Prevent traveling cables from rubbing or chafing against
hoistway or car items. Traveling cables exceeding 30 m in length shall be supported
with steel internal messenger wires. Provide a continuous vertical strip of wire cloth
between the cables and hoistway items. Provide each set of traveling cables with
10% spare conductors and 4 spare sets of shielded pairs and a coaxial t.v. monitor
cable.
K. Entrance Equipment:
1 Door Hangers: 2‑point suspension with upthrust adjustment. Hanger rollers shall
be equipped with polyurethane insert tires; no metal‑to‑metal contact permitted.
2 Door Tracks: Bar or formed, cold‑drawn steel with smooth hanger contact surface.
Tracks shall be removable for replacement.
3 Interlocks: Type operable without retiring cam. Provide fire‑resistant wiring, NEC,
Type SF‑2 or equivalent.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
4 Closers: Spring, spirator, or weighted type attached to the entrance struts.

5 Relating Cables: Provide between door panels, include stainless steel aircraft cord,
swaged fasteners, sheaves and adjustment clips.
l. Pit Stop Switch: Per Code.

M. Floor Numbers: Provide painted 10 cm high fire floor numbers within the hoistway
per EN81-1.
2.1 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. Summary: Provide complete 1 ½ hour fire rated entrances with the clear
dimensions indicated, bearing UL fire labels, per the equipment summaries.
B. Frames: No. 14 U.S. gage steel welded and mitered construction, (bolted on the
service elevator side openings).
C. Door Panels: No. 16 U.S. gage steel with 2 removable, fire type gibs located .3 m
on center per panel. Doors with heights greater than 2200 mm shall be constructed
with interlocking stiffening ribs. Provide all door panels with top and bottom fire
safety retainer clips that mesh with the entrance jambs when in the closed position
per EN81-1.
D. Sight Guards: Same material and finish as door panels.
E. Transoms: Provide transoms and offset, sheet type transoms at indicated
openings.
F. Sill: Extruded or formed stainless steel at the main lobby floors; Extruded aluminum
sills at all other floors and service elevator. Provide Agroutless@ sill supports for all
sills.
G. Fascia, Toe Guards, Dust and Hanger Covers: No. 14 U.S. gage furniture steel with
Manufacturer's standard dark color enamel finish.
H. Express Run Hoistway Fascia: The express run portions of the elevator hoistways
will have the front shaft walls furred out to give less than a 12cm car running
clearance so metal fascia will not be required in these portions of the hoistways.
I. Struts and Headers: Provide for necessary support of entrances and related
material. Provide door open rubber bumpers on each entrance support strut.
J. Provide hoistway blind (express run) access door locks, interlocks and wiring as
required by the local elevator code.
K. Coordination: Provide information to Painting Subcontractor on prime finish used on
hoistway entrances and use of compatible products for final painting.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.1 CAR EQUIPMENT
A. Car Frame: Welded or bolted steel channel construction.
B. Car Safety Device: Type B, flexible guide clamp type.
C. Platform: Isolated type, constructed entirely of steel.
D. Guide Shoes: Roller type with 3 or more sound‑deadening rollers per shoe.
Maximum rotation speed, 350 r.p.m. up to speeds of 5.0 m.p.s.
E. Floor Covering: Inset Stone, Passenger Elevators; checkered steel or aluminum

flooring with recessed fasteners on service elevator.
F. Car Sill: Narrow type, extruded or formed stainless steel on Passenger Elevators;
nickel silver on service elevators; set at a height to be flush with the finished cab
flooring.
G. Toe Guard: Per Code.
H. Car Door Hangers and Tracks: Conform to specification on hoistway entrance

hangers and tracks. Equip doors with polyurethane‑tired hanger rollers.
I. Header: Constructed of 5 mm thick steel shaped to provide stiffening flanges,

securely mounted and braced to the car top.
J. Car Door Clutches: Provide heavy‑duty clutches, vanes, linkage arms, drive blocks
and pickup rollers or cams to provide positive, smooth, quiet door operations and 75-
150mm of predoor opening. The clutches shall be designed with movable vanes to
permit the car doors to be closed while the hoistway doors remain open at the floor
for maintenance purposes. Provide car doors with restrictors per EN81-1.
K. Car Door Electrical Contact: Electrical contact to operate in conjunction with the car
doors so that elevator cannot operate unless doors are closed or within tolerance
allowed by Code.
L. Door Operator: High‑speed, heavy‑duty, ACV3F master, closed loop, door operator
capable of opening doors at no less than .75 to .9 m.p.s. and accomplishing
reversal in no more than 6.5 cm of door movement. Arrange operator so the car
doors can be opened by hand from inside the car in case of power failure if it is
within the hoistway door unlocking zone.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
M. Door Reopening and Control Devices:

1 Car Door Reversal Device: A solid-state electronically operated infrared door
reversal, proximity device shall be installed on the car doors. The device shall
contain specially designed electronic components enclosed in an insulated chassis.
The device will create a criss-cross matrix of invisible, infrared, light beams,
minimum 32 beams, which shall scan the car doorway and shall detect, through the
breaking of any light beam, any opaque object that may be placed in its path.
After a car stop is made, the door shall remain open for a predetermined interval
before closing. If, while the door is closing, the matrix of invisible light beams is
interrupted by a passenger or object entering or leaving the car, the door shall stop
and reopen, after which the door shall again start to close.
2 Door Open Timing Feature Service Elevator: Timing feature shall operate in
conjunction with door light ray matrix to provide adjustable, reduced, hold‑open time
once rays are broken and reestablished. In the event rays are broken beyond an
adjustable time, a buzzer shall sound and doors try to close at reduced speed.
3 Variable Timing Feature Passenger Elevators: Provide separately adjustable

timers, to enable varying the time that the hoistway doors remain open after
stopping in response to a car call or a landing call. The dwell time for a car call stop
shall be adjustable between 1 and 4 seconds and the timing for a landing call stop
shall be adjustable between 3 and 8 seconds. If a stop is made in response to both
a landing call and a car call, the timing of the landing call shall predominate. In the
event that the light beam is interrupted while the doors are opening or after the
doors are fully open, the time that the doors remain open after the light beam has
been reestablished shall be reduced to an adjustable time between 2 and 1 second,
depending upon whether a landing call or a car call predominated. This time shall
also be a minimum time that the doors remain open if the door protection beams are
interrupted and reestablished before the door is fully open.
4 Nudging Action: In the event a door protection light beam is continually obstructed,
or the door hold open button is continually activated, for a predetermined time
interval (20 seconds) after automatic door closing has been initiated, a buzzer shall
sound and the doors shall be closed at a gentle, reduced speed and no more than
4J in closing force. Timers shall be individually adjustable.
N. Car Control Stations:

1 Two opposite‑hand car control stations without faceplates, consisting of a metal box
containing the operating fixtures, and a lockable service panel shall be mounted in
the cab front return panels on the Passenger Elevators. A single car operating
station with a brushed stainless‑steel faceplate, recessed mounted with
tamperproof screws shall be provided for the Service Elevator.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2 The front return panels or faceplates shall be engraved and filled with the identifying
number of each elevator and its capacity in KG and number of permitted persons.
The floor call buttons, alarm button, door open button, and emergency stop switch
shall be suitably identified by permanently applied. All automatic operating controls
(provide vandal‑resistant type on the Service Elevators) shall be located no higher
than 135 cm above the car floor (90 cm for stop switch and alarm button). Engrave
and fill CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION ON FILE IN THE BUILDING OFFICE and
NO SMOKING at the top of the return panels or faceplates in each cab. The
operating panel shall contain the following controls and buttons:
a. Car floor buttons with 13 mm numbers corresponding to the floors served for
registration of car calls. Call registered lights, located within or behind the buttons,
shall illuminate the floor number corresponding to the call registered.
b. An illuminating alarm button shall be provided at the bottom of each car station to
ring a bell located in the hoistway near the main lobby and on top of the car.
c. Provide an illuminating intercom call button. Actuating the intercom call button shall
activate the control center panel intercom distress signal. The call button light shall
flash for 10-20 seconds once the intercom call is answered (latching feature
canceled).
d. A door open button, which shall stop the closing motion of the doors and return
them automatically to their fully open position. This button shall be effective while
the car is at a landing and until the car starts into motion, regardless of any special
operational features (except firefighters' service).
e. Provide an extended time, door hold open button with an internal registration light in
the main car operating panel on Service Elevator to increase the normal door open
time (automatic operation) to 10‑20 seconds for cart transfer. Registration or re-
registration of a car call shall cancel this hold open time and the registration light.
f. One Firefighters' Phase II service key switch door close button, light jewel, buzzer,
and call cancel button.
g. One sound‑powered telephone jack.
h. One security card reader in specified elevators (provided by others).
i. A service panel with a heavy‑duty, vandal‑resistant, hinged, lockable, door
matching the front return panel finishes or faceplates shall be mounted below the
main car operating station.
The service panel shall contain the following controls with each control and its
operating positions identified by engraved and black filled letters:
-1 An inspection (hand) service switch for disconnecting all automatic operation,
limiting the car speed, and making the appropriate hoistway access switch operable,
when the car is at the top or bottom terminal, conforming to the EN81-1.
-2 Automatic car light & fan Off.

-3 Cab lighting dimmer switch for the incandescent cab lights.
-4 An emergency cab lighting "test" button to activate the cab emergency lights.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
-4 4‑position (off, low, medium, high speeds) cab exhaust blower switch.
-6 An independent service selection switch to permit the selection of independent or
automatic operation (double‑deck visual independent service selection switch).
-7 Attendant service operating lights, chimes and "up", "down", and "pass" and "door
control" buttons for Service Elevator and Passenger Elevators as specified in
Summary 2.01.
-8 A start button for closing the doors and starting the elevator when operating on
independent service. Alternately, the car floor pushbuttons may be used for this
function.
-9 A 220 volt, 1 phase, 50 hertz, G.F.I. protected electrical duplex outlet.
O. Car Top Control Station: Provide stations per Code.
P. Emergency Exits: Provide car top emergency access exits and cab side exits (if
required) and contacts per Code. Provide double-deck elevators with upper and
lower deck top exits and the upper deck with through-the-floor exits and contacts for
intercab emergency access.
Q. Work Light and Duplex Plug Receptacle: Provide on the top and the bottom of the
elevator car. Provide lights with an on/off switch and wire or plastic bulb guards.
2.1 CAR ENCLOSURES
A. Passenger Elevators: Elevator car enclosure shall be manufactured by an

Approved Company. The interior side and rear wall finishes, the cab ceiling, the car
handrails and lighting, and cab flooring finished materials are to be included in a
cash allowance as stipulated in Summary 2.01 The steel cab shells are to be
included in the base bid and shall have the following features:
1 Shell: Reinforced U.S. 14 gage furniture steel side and rear walls with baked
enamel interior finish and side exits and/or through floor exits on the double deck
elevators (if required). Shell base is to contain concealed ventilation cutouts on the
side and rear walls. Apply sound‑deadening mastic to exterior.
2 Top: Reinforced U.S. 12 gage furniture steel with hinged exit and baked enamel
finish.
3 Front Return Panels and Integral Entrance Columns: Provide No. 8 mirrored
polished stainless steel finish as shown on the Architect's drawings. The entire units
are to swing on concealed hinges or pivots for access to integral car station wiring
and fixtures. Secure in closed position with concealed 3‑point latch. Provide
cabinets with flush doors for service controls and cutouts for pushbuttons, etc.
4 Transom: U.S. 14 gage stainless steel with mirrored, polished No. 8 finish as
indicated on the Architect's drawings.
5 Car Door Panels: Same construction as hoistway door panels, interior finish No. 8
polished stainless steel as shown on the Architect's drawings.
6 Ventilation: 3‑speed Morrison Products, Model AAA, exhaust blower or equal, with
a diffuser and exhaust and intake port protective screens. The blower shall exhaust
the cab air into the hoistway.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
B. Service Elevator: Elevator car enclosure shall be provided by the Elevator

Contractor and manufactured by an Approved Company. Provide the following
features:
1 Shell: Reinforced U.S. 14 gage furniture steel side and rear walls with baked
enamel interior finish and side exits (if required). Apply sound‑deadening mastic to
exterior.
2 Top: Reinforced U.S. 12 gage furniture steel with hinged exit and white baked
enamel interior finish.
3 Front Return Panels: U.S. 14 gage, stainless steel, rigidized No. 4 finish, integral
with entrance columns with cutout for the operating panel and service cabinets.
4 Entrance Columns and Transom: U.S. 14 gage, No. 4 stainless steel, rigidized
finish.
5 Car Door Panels: Same construction as hoistway door panels, stainless steel,
rigidized No. 4 finish.
6 Base: Rigidized stainless steel with protected ventilation cutouts.
7 Ventilation: 2‑speed exhaust blower, Morrison Products, Model OE, Part No.
06‑01029‑0 or equal, with a diffusor, exhaust and intake port protective screen and
a stainless steel grille mounted in the cab canopy. The blower shall exhaust the cab
air into the hoistway.
8 Lighting: Multiple, 2‑tube, 40‑watt fluorescent recess‑mounted fixtures with a
white‑back reflector, a hinged stainless steel wire mesh lockable access cover with
a translucent diffusor all flush mounted around the perimeter (side and rear walls) in
the cab canopy.
9 Walls: Rigidized U.S. 14 gage, No. 4 stainless steel panels (no more than 45 cm
wide) to form the complete side and rear cab walls.
10 Bumpers: Mount 2 lines of Pauley Rubber Company bumpers or oak bumpers on
the side and rear walls at a height of 45 cm and 90 cm above the cab floor.
11 Flooring: Studded rubber flooring .12. Pads: 3‑section removable, full‑height

quilted, fire‑retardant protection pads for each elevator to cover walls and front
returns with cutouts for access to car control station and service cabinet. The pads
shall extend from the car canopy to 2.5 cm above the floor. Stainless steel hanger
buttons shall be installed around the full cab perimeter within a minimum clearance
from the ceiling.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.1 CONTROL AND SIGNAL FIXTURES
A. Pushbuttons: Provide each Passenger elevator group with pushbutton risers as

specified in Summary 2.01, flush mounted with special No. 8 polished steel
faceplates, as indicated on the Architect's drawings. Provide standard, No. 4
finished stainless steel fixtures mounted with vandal‑resistant screws at all floors on
the service elevators. Each fixture shall include pushbuttons for each direction of
travel which illuminate to indicate call registration.
Provide the main lobby level floor pushbutton fixtures on the passenger elevators,
with a custom design as indicated on the Architect's drawings.
B. Hoistway Access Switches: Mount without faceplates in entrance frame side jamb
at all top floors and bottom floors where walk‑in pits are not provided.
C. Firefighters' Switch and Box: Mount in Fire Command Center and identify purpose
with permanent engraving. Provide flush‑mounted box with lockable hinged cover
as directed by the local Fire Department to contain keys and instructions for
emergency use of elevators. Box faceplate material to be similar to fire command
console faceplate and contain engraved legend, EMERGENCY ONLY in 13 mm
high letters.
D. Car Position Indicators:
1 Service Elevator: Provide multi‑light type position indicator in the car entrance
transoms with floor designations and direction arrows. Faceplate to be stainless
steel and fastened with tamper proof fasteners.
2 Passenger Elevators: Dual color, active dot matrix LCD or OLED display screens
mounted in each car swing front return panel. The position indicators shall display
the travel direction and floor position of the elevator in the hoistway at all times.
E. Hall Lanterns: Provide plug‑in type direction signals illuminating white for up and
red for down, without faceplates located adjacent to each hoistway entrance at
indicated landings. Provide Manufacturer's standard hall lanterns (special
allowances at indicated floors) equipped with No. 8 polished stainless steel
(passenger elevators) or No. 4 brushed stainless steel (service elevators) faceplates
mounted with tamperproof screws at all levels on the Service Elevators. Lantern
shall illuminate indicating the direction of travel and chime sound (once for up
direction, twice for down direction) approximately 4 seconds before the arriving car's
doors open. Provide the Passenger Elevators with fixed‑car assignment
(prediction) type hall lanterns and car selections so that the appropriate hall lantern
is lighted and its chime sounded within 2 second of hall call registration. As the
responding car approaches the landing, the lantern shall signal the elevator's final
arrival by pulsing the hall lantern and resomachine, or bedplate and the deflector
sheave
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.1 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
A. General: An Ducane, ITT or Aiphone intercommunication system for all Elevators

shall be provided as part of this work. Provide all wiring and conduits between
elevator hoistways and the intercom stations. The system shall contain the
following stations:
STATION TYPE SELECTION BUTTONS TO CALL

LOCATION STATION
EACH ELEVATOR MASTER ELEVATOR CABS IN THAT GROUP, FIRE
MACHINE ROOM CONTROL PANEL, BMS COMMAND
CENTER PANEL, LOBBY CONTROL
PANELS
B.M.S. COMMAND MASTER ALL ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOMS, ALL
CENTER PANEL ELEVATOR CABS, FIRE CONTROL
PANEL, LOBBY CONTROL PANELS
FIRE CONTROL MASTER ALL ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOMS, ALL
PANEL ELEVATOR CABS, BMS COMMAND
CENTER PANEL, LOBBY CONTROL
PANELS
LOBBY CONTROL MASTER ALL ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOMS, ALL
PANELS ELEVATOR CABS, BMS COMMAND
CENTER PANEL, FIRE CONTROL PANEL
ELEVATOR CABS REMOTE BMS COMMAND CENTER PANEL
1 Basic Equipment: The system shall contain the following equipment:

a. A solid‑state amplifier shall provide static‑free voice transmission with adequate
volume and a minimum of distortion at each station in the system. Provide a
preamplifier that is capable of receiving Muzak inputs.
b. Master stations shall contain the following:

1 Speaker‑microphone combination and a handset for 2‑way communication.
2 Selection buttons for completing the circuits to enable communication with the
master and remote stations as listed above. When a selected button is depressed,
continual reception from that station shall be maintained.
3 A 2‑position talk‑listen button: Press to talk, release to listen.
4 An "in use" light to be illuminated when any master station is being used.
5 A reset button which when pushed shall reset the station selection buttons and
extinguish the "in use" light, making the system available for use by any master
station.
6 A volume control knob to permit continual adjustment of incoming volume.
7 A button to establish communications with all other stations in the elevator system
simultaneously (fire control panel, command center panel and lobby control panels).
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
8 A distress light consisting of a separate light fixture for each elevator which shall be
illuminated when the alarm button or emergency stop switch in the elevator car is
actuated. This light shall be provided in the master station in the BMS command
center panel or the lobby panel (selection switchable) panels only. A buzzer shall
sound whenever a distress light is illuminated.
9 Both the distress light and buzzer shall remain energized until the intercom selection
button for that car has been depressed at the command center or the lobby panel
master station to indicate communication.
10 Remote stations, one in each elevator car, shall consist of a microphone and
speaker or transceiver‑speaker combination located above the cab dropped ceiling.
The cab remote speakers shall be mounted in the car canopy and be equipped with
a protective grille.
Provide an illuminating intercom call button in each car.
Provide a selection switch in the command center control panel for making the lobby
control master intercom station active or inactive.
2 Station Housings:
a. The master station in the machine rooms shall be housed in a metal cabinet of
baked enamel finish attached to the group elevator supervisory control panel or wall
mounted. Provide a handset with 7.5 m long cord.
b. The BMS command center, lobby control and fire control center master intercoms
shall be provided with stainless steel faceplates with engraved and filled operating
instructions. Coordinate faceplate and installation of units with the Console
Manufacturer. Provide each master station with a handset, equipped with a 3m long
cord.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 3 - EXECUTION
3 SITE CONDITIONS AND INSPECTION

A. Prior to beginning the installation of equipment, examine the hoistway and machine
room areas and verify that no irregularities exist that would affect quality of
execution of work as specified. Particularly, note:
1 Hoistway size and plumbness.
2 Sill supports and pockets.
3 Support areas for brackets, beams, etc.
4 Divider beams.
B. Notify the General Contractor if any discrepancies exist in the building work that will
prevent the installation of the elevator equipment.
3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's original, unopened protective packaging.
B. Store materials in original protective packaging. Prevent soiling, physical damage or

wetting.
C. Protect equipment and exposed finishes during transportation, erection and

construction period against damage and stains.
3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each equipment item in accordance with accepted Manufacturer's direction,

referenced codes and specifications.
B. Install machine room equipment with clearances complying with referenced codes
and specifications.
C. Install items so that they may be removed by portable hoists or other means for
maintenance and/or repair.
D. Install items so that access for maintenance is safe and readily available.
E. Install equipment to afford maximum safety and continuity of operation after a

seismic acceleration.
3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Work at the jobsite will be checked during the course of installation. Full
cooperation with these Inspectors is mandatory. Any corrective work they require
shall be accomplished prior to per-forming further installation dependent upon or
related to the required correction.
B. Have Code Authority acceptance inspection performed. Verifica-tion that such tests
have been completed, all correc-tive work accomplished and installation approved
for issuance of a permit to operate shall be re-quired before acceptance of any unit.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.1 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Align guide rails vertically within a tolerance of 1.6 mm in 30 m. Secure joints
without gaps and file any irregularities to a smooth surface.
B. Balance cars after the final cab installations to equalize pressure of roller guide
shoes on rails.
C. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
D. Adjust motors, power converters, brakes, controllers, leveling switches, limit
switches, stopping switches, door operators, interlocks and safety devices to
achieve required performance levels.
E. Fabricate and assemble the various parts in the shop insofar as practical to
minimize field assembly. Parts which cannot be shop assembled or require close
field fit shall be trial assembled in the shop and marked for field erection.
3.1 CLEANUP AND TOUCHUP

A. Keep work areas orderly and free from debris during progress of project.
B. Remove all loose materials and filings resulting from this work from hoistway
surfaces.
C. Clean machine room equipment and floor of dirt, oil and grease.
D. Clean hoistway, car, car enclosures, entrances, operating and signal fixtures, and
trim of dirt, oil, grease and finger marks.
E. Touchup all minor scratches, dings or imperfections in finished materials and
painted surfaces that are exposed to public view.
3.1 ACCEPTANCE INSPECTIONS AND TEST
A. General: Final acceptance of the installation shall be made only after all field quality
control inspections and tests are complete, all submittals and certificates have been
received and the Owner's Representative satisfied that the following have been
satisfactorily completed:
1 Workmanship and equipment comply with specification.
2 Contract speed, capacity and floor‑to‑floor performance comply with specification.
3 Performance of following are satisfactory:

a. Starting, accelerating, running.
b. Decelerating, leveling, stopping.
c. Door operation and closing force.
B. Personnel, Equipment and Instruments: Furnish personnel, equipment and

instruments to perform required tests. The following instruments may be necessary
to complete the tests:
1 25 kg test weights (larger weights with dollies or wheels are acceptable if weight is
certified).
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2 Multi meter.
3 500‑volt Megger.
4 Alternating‑current voltmeter and ammeter.
5 Stop watch.
6 Celsius‑calibrated thermometers (4 minimum on traction elevator test).
7 Precision tachometer.
8 Spring scale for door‑force test.
9 Decibel meter for noise test.
10 3‑axis recording accelerometer for vibration, car sway and car ride test.
C. Traction Elevators:
1 Insulation‑Resistance Test: Test safety circuit, door lock circuit, loop circuit, and
motor and generator field circuits at 500 volts. Minimum resistance to ground shall
be 1 megohm.
2 Running Test: With equipment within of ambient machine room temperature,
the following shall be accomplished:
At the end of the test, again check floor‑to‑floor performance time, stopping
accuracy and general ride with full load, balanced load and no load in car.
3 Test Results:
a. In all test conditions speed and performance times specified shall be met, stopping
accuracy shall be maintained without releveling and general riding quality shall be
acceptable to the Owner's Representative.
b.
D. Performance Guarantee: Should these tests develop any defects or poor

workmanship, any variance or noncompliance with the requirements of the specified
codes and/or ordinances or any variance or noncompliance with the requirements of
these specifications, the following work and/or repairs shall be completed at no
expense to the Owner.
1 Replace all equipment that does not meet Code or specification requirements.
2 Perform all work and furnish all materials and equipment necessary to complete the
specified operation and/or performance.
3 Perform all retesting required by the governing Code Authority and the owner to
verify the specified operation and/or performance.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
3.1 OWNERS INFORMATION

A. Submittals: Provide written information and equipment necessary for proper
maintenance and adjustment of the equipment prior to final acceptance, as follows:
1 Straight‑line wiring diagram of as‑installed elevator circuits with index of location

and function of all components. Mount installation diagrams on masonite panels or
hang bound sets in racks and leave on the job. Provide three final corrected sets,
one copy, one Mylar and one sepia copy within 90 days after job acceptance for the
Owner's file.
2 Lubrication instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants.
3 Parts catalogs for all replaceable parts including ordering forms and instructions.
4 Complete operating and maintenance instructions for all controls and switches
provided.
5 Five sets of keys to operate each type of key switch provided.
6 Any special maintenance or trouble shooting tools or devices required for
maintenance on all elevators.
3.1 OWNERS PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. Assist the designated Owners elevator operating, safety and security personnel in
understanding and training to operate the elevator intercoms, card readers, E.M.S.
Systems, security keyboards, elevator operations, emergency systems and car
operating panel controls.
B. Provide all required training information, videos, CD Roms, manuals, training

classes, and training personnel to the provide Owners personnel with training
knowledge, and information on how to operate all of the elevator interface functions
and controls.
3.1 WARRANTY INSPECTION
A. At least 30 days prior to warranty expiration, schedule final inspection and retest
with Owner's Representative. Requirement shall include close examination of all
equipment.
B. Replace, repair or adjust any equipment found defective and covered by warranty
prior to expiration of warranty period.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
APPENDIX‐1
SECTION 14210
ELEVATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK / SUMMARY
Supply, installation, testing, commissioning, trouble‐shooting, providing preventive maintenance,

breakdown maintenance including spares and consumables during the defects liability period specified
elsewhere in this document.
Scope includes 24 units of Gearless Traction Elevators with Machine Room Directly Above as specified in
the particular specifications.
All related works and materials deemed necessary to accomplish the defined scope of Electric Traction
Elevators in a complete and acceptable workmanlike manner is part of the Elevators Contractors scope.
This work shall be carried out in accordance with the latest requirements of codes / regulations which
may govern the requirements of the installation. All terms in these specifications have the definition
given in the latest edition of EN81‐20/50 including revisions and authorized changes in effect on the
date of these specifications. In all cases where there is a discrepancy between the specifications and the
regulations, the most stringent one take precedence of the other. Elevator contractor is solely
responsible to declare the non‐conformities and non‐compliances and failure to document them deem
to be fully compliant bid.
All related design, engineering, equipment/ material, workmanship, third party acceptance and permits
required to satisfactorily complete Elevator installation required by contract Documents.
Tenderers are required to comply with the applicable conditions of General, Special and Supplemental
specifications, Tender Drawings and any other tender documents related to this project. Tenderers have
to note that in case of any contradictions between those documents, the most stringent requirement
supersedes rest.

DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in BSEN 81‐20, including all sub‐sections, amendments as on date shall apply to work of
section. For special requirements of the DCD/ local codes that are not covered in EN81‐20, related
sections of ASME A17.1 shall apply to work of this Section.

B. MC is the “MAIN CONTRACTOR”.
D. EC is the “ELEVATOR SUB CONTRACTOR”

MAIN WORKS
E. OC/ OT is “Other Contractor” or Other Trader
F. Defective Elevator Work: Non‐standard installation practices, poor presentation & architectural
details, operation or control system failure including excessive malfunctions; performance below
specified Key Performance Indicators; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials and
finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar
unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.
G. Technical Data: Technical description, functional description, shop drawings, code compliance details,
type test reports, 3rd party certifications, local authority approvals.
H. Singular and Plural: Any word implying the singular only also includes the plural (and vice versa)
meaning too when read in context.
CODES AND REQUIREMENTS OF AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION

Comply with most stringent applicable codes, laws, and/or authorities, including latest amendments,
revisions in effect:
1. EN81 –20/50 Safety Code for Elevators
2. EN81‐28: Remote alarm on passenger and goods passenger Elevators.
3. EN81‐70: Accessibility to Elevators for persons including persons with disability.
4. EN81‐71: Vandal Resistant Elevators.
5. EN81‐72: Firefighters Elevators
6. EN81‐73: Behavior of Elevators in the event of fire.
7. BS ISO 18738:2003 Lifts (Elevators) – Measurements of lift ride quality
8. ASME A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators for Loading Classification
9. EN 12015 and EN 12016 Electromagnetic compatibility
10. Seismic design requirements for non‐structural systems to match UBC Zone 2A.
11. Sustainability requirements of Authorities having Jurisdiction.
12. Dubai Civil Defense / Requirements of Authorities having Jurisdiction.
13. NFPA 101, 5000 for Fire detection, Protection and other recommended safety measures.
14. Fire‐fighter’s use as per NFPA and Dubai Civil Defense requirements including phase 1 & 2 fire
15. UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice
QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Only Approved Manufacturers with proven experience and products for a period of 10 years in
this region.

2. The Country of Origin: EC shall propose the best configurations from the single factory of the
parent owned company and guaranteed to meet the code compliance, design intent, the tender

MAIN WORKS
specifications and performance requirements set out in this contract without deviation or
qualifications.
3. Installer shall be Elevator manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized representative who is
trained and approved for installation of the products proposed and accepted in this project.
4. The EC shall not sub‐contract the installation works. The complete works shall be installed and
supervised, inspected & certified by the elevator manufacturer’s quality engineer.
5. Elevator supplier shall be capable of providing after sales service including fully fledged with
adequate spare parts inventory and located within 30 kilometers of the installation.
6. Elevator Supplier shall be capable of providing on call service. The service/Maintenance
coverage is 24X7, the response time for any call backs or breakdowns should be less than 30
minutes and resolution time between 60 minutes to 90 minute. Passenger entrapments to be
less than 20 minutes and resolution or release of the entrapped people to be less than 30
minutes.
7. The preventive and breakdown maintenance shall be carried out by the competent personnel
employed by Elevator Contractor. The preventive maintenance shall be carried out on pre
assigned schedules as required by the employer/ operator.
8. Elevator Supplier shall perform all maintenance during specified maintenance period and shall
offer contract maintenance service to Employer. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or
transferred.
WARRANTY
1. Manufacturer’s standard form in which the manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace
defective elevator work within specified warranty period.
2. The EC shall provide 10 years warranty for the structural components, major equipment not
limited to Machine, Drives, Cabin Assembly, shaft mechanical equipment and 10 years warranty
for the finishes.
3. The EC shall provide an operational warranty and monthly preventive for a period as mentioned
in the contract documents. The EC will be responsible for the immediate replacement of any
and all defective equipment throughout this period.
4. The EC shall be solely responsible for the warranty required in the contract documents for the
complete units.

RELATED DOCUMENTS/ SECTIONS
Related Sections include the following: [The MC and EC are responsible to comply with the requirements
of all related sections, not limited to the below list.]
1. Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” for operating instructions and maintenance manual.
2. Section "Cast‐in‐Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete.

MAIN WORKS
3. Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry and for grouting
elevator entrance frames installed in masonry walls.
4. Section "Structural Steel Framing" for the following:
a. Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for fastening guide‐rail
brackets.
b. Machine beams.
c. Divider beams.
d. Hoist beams.
e. Structural‐steel shapes for sub‐sills that are part of steel frame.
5. Section "Metal Fabrications" for the following:
a. Bearing plates and angles for supporting guide‐rail brackets.
b. Machine beams.
c. Weld plates for anchoring elevator machine to machine room floor slab.
d. Machine Maintenance Platforms
e. Cover for Trap Doors at Machine Floor
f. Divider beams.
g. Hoist beams.
h. Steel Angles for Sill fixation
i. Pit ladders.
j. Counterweight screens
k. Hoist way / pit divider screens
l. Safety Screens between moving bodies
m. Pit Maintenance Platform
n. Car top barricades
o. Temporary Doors for Lifts Shaft during installation
6. Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railings, barriers between adjacent elevator pits.
7. Section "Decorative Metal" for combination units that contain hall push‐button stations.
8. Section “Architectural Wood Work” for wood paneling and finishes related to elevator entrances and
elevator cars.
9. Section “Metal Doors” for fire rated sliding doors and frames of elevators.
10. Painting Sections for field painting of hoist way entrance doors and frames.
11. Section "Floor Finishes" for finish flooring in elevator cars.

MAIN WORKS
12. Section "Wire Mesh Partitions" for guards between adjacent elevator pits.
13. Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including fused disconnect switches at machine
room and standby power source, transfer switch, and connection from auxiliary contacts in transfer
switch to controller.
14. Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for telephone service for elevators.
15. Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency
recall operation and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator
equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator controllers.
RELATED WORKS BY OTHER CONTRACTORS

1. Legally Plumb hoist ways and machine room, water proof pit, headroom as required by the
elevator manufacturer.
2. Structural openings for Entrances
3. All block outs for fixtures and signal devices in walls together with patching and finishing of
same.
4. Sump Pits in the Elevator pits with suitable grating.
5. Installation of hoisting hooks beams in the elevator machine room ceiling as required by EC. The
hooks will be free issued to site prior to casting in of the hooks. Main Contractor to provide
permanent labels on SWL for each hook.
6. Making of floor numbers above the entrances of the Elevators inside the shaft.
7. Providing fire stoppers for the sleeves used for hall fixtures and signals and any other related
switches.
8. Providing grouting of entrances to achieve fire rating of the landings as required by authorities.
9. Machine Room ship ladders and guard rails for the Machine Room Slab
10. Cut outs for Trap Doors in Machine Room floor slab and reinforced trap doors with a handle to
open and lift it.
11. MEP services with isolators, switched, interfaces and connectors for Main Power, Emergency
Power for Cabin Ventilation, Emergency Intercom, CCTV, Public Address System and
Communication to Fire Command Centre, Shaft lighting, Pit Lighting and lighting for machine
room.
12. Means to provide the machine and controller located at machine room with adequate
ventilation and air‐conditioning. Maintain minimum temperatures between 5 Degree to 40
Degree and humidity below 90% without condensation.
13. Suitably rated power outlet at pit level.
14. Permanent Electrical services within the shafts
a. Shaft lighting to achieve a minimum of 100 lux inside the shafts
b. Pit Lighting with a minimum protection of IP67.
c. Lighting for machine room

MAIN WORKS
d. The luminaries shall be IP54 rated and be provided with bulkhead cover
15. Two way switches for shaft lighting one located at lower level in the lift shaft and other at
machine room as required by the EC.
16. Hoist way Pressurization, Sprinkler system in pit, machine room as required by UAE Fire Code.
17. Shunts to cut off the electrical power to Elevators Main supply prior to activation of sprinklers in
shaft and machine room.
18. Containment and wiring between the interface located at machine room of each elevator to the
centrally located Fire Command Centre, DCD Panels, BMS Room, Security Room and any other
locations as required by the Engineer for the following systems
a. DCD Required Alarm signals and health status
b. BMS Signals
c. Entertainment System if any
d. Fire Alarm Panels
e. Emergency Power Signal
19. Containment with draw wires between the interface located at machine room of each elevator
to the centrally located Fire Command Centre, DCD Panels, BMS Room, Security Room and any
other locations as required by the Engineer for the following systems
a. Elevator monitoring system
b. Intercom System
c. Vertical Lifting of Lift equipment to machine room/ floors with the tower cranes

RELATED WORKS UNDER EC SCOPE

1. EC shall be responsible for design and installation of all secondary steel works listed below
within the Elevator shaft but not limited to;
a. Support beams for machines
b. Pit Ladder
c. Pit Separation Screen
d. Screen between Cabin and counter weight
e. Sill angles for entrances
f. Pit Platforms for deeper pits
g. Shaft Divider beams
h. Shaft reduction beams
i. Guards for all moving parts
j. Car top barricades
2. Scaffold less Elevator installation system or installation with scaffolding including getting safety
certified should be part of EC scope.
3. Project site office and equipment as required by the EC to fulfill his works. MC will provide
space only.
4. Temporary Electrical services from main DB of MC located at a common point

MAIN WORKS
a. Task Lighting
b. Power for hand tool
c. Any other temporary works within the shafts
5. Special storage requirements for the environmental sensitive parts.
6. Offloading and horizontal movement of all equipment during delivery of materials and
subsequent to installation location. Co‐ordinate with main contractor for Crane availability. Any
special requirement apart from the tower crane should be included in EC scope.
7. Signage for Elevators which are permanently fixed on Elevators.
8. The EC shall be responsible for the free issue of the following
a. Machine Room hooks with design calculations
9. Seismic detectors in the elevator pits.
10. Water detectors in the elevator pits.

MAINTENANCE

Defects Liability Period Maintenance:
1. Defects Liability Period: As specified in the contract from the date of the taking over certificate.
2. Material and workmanship of installation shall comply in every respect with sub contract/
tender Documents. Elevator Contractor to ensure corrective measures for defective material
or workmanship which develops within defects liability period stated in the contract of all work
to satisfaction of Architect, Employer and Consultant at no additional cost, including wear and
tear. Perform monthly preventive maintenance and breakdown maintenance 24 x 7 during
downtime of equipment in accordance to ensure the equipment restored in operation within
minimum downtime.
3. Defective is defined as any downtime of the equipment or its abnormal operation due to failures
other than vandalism and misuse.
4. Elevator Contractor should make modifications, requirements, adjustments, and improvements
to meet performance requirements mentioned elsewhere in the document.
5. Provide preventive maintenance every month and 24‐hour emergency callback service during
DLP period commencing on date of taking over certificate by Employer. Systematically examine,
adjust, clean, and lubricate all equipment as guided by the Manufacturers maintenance
manuals. Repair or replace defective parts using parts produced by the OEM of installed
equipment. Maintain Elevator hoist way, and pit in clean condition.
6. Supplier shall be capable of providing day on call emergency service and respond to the
response time for any call backs or breakdowns should be less than 30 min and resolution time
between 60 min to 90 min. Passenger entrapments to be less than 20 minutes and resolution or
release of the entrapped people to be less than 30 minutes
7. Use competent personnel, acceptable to the Employer, supervised and employed by the service
Provider.

MAIN WORKS
8. The Defects Liability Period maintenance specified in the contract shall be extended one month
for each three month period in which equipment/ workmanship related failures average more
than 0.25 per unit per month.
1. Employer retains the option to delete cost of the Defects Liability Period maintenance from new
equipment contract and remit equal installments directly to Provider during period in which
maintenance is being performed.
9. Post DLP Maintenance:
10. Submit along with tender bid annual maintenance price for five year Preventive/ Breakdown
Maintenance Agreement (Full comprehensive without any exclusion) commencing upon the
successful completion of DLP period.
11. Use competent personnel, acceptable to the Employer, employed and supervised by Provider.
12. Construction Time Usage of the Elevators:
a. To facilitate the project completion, the Main Contractor may needs one or more
elevators prior to the final handing over to the client or during the final stage of
construction. The EC shall enter into the interim contract for preventive/ breakdown
maintenance during that period with Main Contractor. Main Contractor must provide or
pay for temporary hoist way and car enclosures; protect installed equipment and
finishes; pay for and return Elevators to Elevator sub‐contractor for all cleaning, repairs,
and replacement of materials necessary to restore Elevator to “as‐new” condition prior
to final acceptance. However EC is responsible to refurbish these elevators free from
defect and re‐commission the elevators and prepare handing over in the same quality of
other elevators.
b. During this period Main Contractor may pay a mutually agreed upon monthly amount
per Elevator for preventive maintenance. Indicate amount per unit per month with
quotation.
c. Temporary acceptance form must be acceptable to Main Contractor and signed prior to
use.

SUBMITTALS

1. Submittals required during tender / bid submission
a. EC Proposed Specifications
b. Compliance statement to Tender/ Contract Specifications
c. Confirmation letter for Shaft dimensions and other structural dimensions in the tender
documents and drawings
d. Scope of Matrix Confirmation
e. Samples and data sheets for proposed materials
f. Color catalogues highlighting proposed fixture options for Architects/ Client Selection

2. Submittals required during post award
a. Within 4 calendar weeks or as required to meet the project milestone after award of
contract and before beginning equipment fabrication, submit shop drawings and

MAIN WORKS
required materials for review as outlined in contract documents. Allow review period as
detailed in the contract for response to initial submittal.
b. Technical Submittals: Detailed technical submittals highlighting the design, engineering
from the supplier to meet the tender/ contract requirements. The detailed technical
submittals shall describe the following in detail but not limited to;
c. Selection of Motor and Drive System
d. Type of Controllers and its features
e. Drive Calculation
f. Battery Operated Automatic Evacuation System
g. Rope/ Suspension system verification
h. Selection of Door Drive and Doors
i. Selection of Cabin Assembly
j. Selection of Mechanical System
k. Guide Rail for Car
l. Guide Rails for Counter weight
m. Car and Counter weight Guide Shoes
n. Safety Gear for Car
o. Speed Governor
p. Compensation system (if applicable)
q. Selection of Shaft Electrical System
r. Travelling Cable
s. Hall/ Car to Controller Communication System
t. Sensors and Leveling system
u. Communication System and Alarm
v. Monitoring System and its protocols
w. Information about the proposed interfaces
x. Fire Interface
y. BMS Interface
z. DCD Panel Interface
aa. Fire Command Centre Interfaces
bb. CCTV in Cabin Ceiling
cc. High Level Access Control System
dd. Detailed description about the features and control functions

3. Detailed Drawings and General Arrangement Drawings

a. General Arrangement or Layout Drawings: Plan of the cabin in the shaft, Plan of pit,
hoist way as applicable indicating equipment arrangement, elevation of the entrances,
section of hoist way, details of car enclosures hoist way entrances, and car/hall signal
fixtures.
b. Design Information: Indicate equipment lists, reactions, and design information on
layouts.

MAIN WORKS
c. Power Confirmation Information: Indicate motor power in KW, starting current A, full‐
load running current A, Power Required from Alternate source (kVA) and demand
factor, required main switch rating, cable specifications and any other related
information for the services required from Others
d. Co‐Ordination Information: schematic Drawings / Single Line Diagram required for the
provided interfaces and the required services from other contractors like ELV/ Fire
Panel, BMS etc
e. A detailed cabin drawings incorporating the dimension of the finishes, fixtures etc.
f. Submit all technical data of major components confirming compliance to specifications
& codes.

4. Samples
a. Fixtures: Include not less than 3 models from the premium range for Guest and Public
Elevators. Include a minimum of 2 models for Service/ BOH Elevators. Fixtures shall be
subject to Architects selection. Maintain harmony among other elevators
b. Finish Material: Submit 3 sets 30 cm x 30 cm samples for Panel works and 100 mm L for
running materials for Architect review of color, pattern, and texture. Compliance with
other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the EC.
c. Submit data sheet and specific product compliances along with samples submission.
d. EC to submit the following samples (not limited to) along with specification compliance
and data sheet
i. Operating Panels in Car
ii. Operating Panels in Landings
iii. Signaling devices in Car and in Landings
iv. Architectural Finishing materials for walls, ceiling, flooring, skirting
v. Lighting
vi. Handrail
vii. Key switches
viii. Shaft lighting
ix. Shaft trunking

5. Certificates:
a. Submit all type and third party certificate of elevator performance with contract
closeout documents. EC is responsible to have those certificates verified by local
authorities or their representatives prior to the handing over of the units. After
adjustments, test, and inspections are performed, forward certificate signed by Elevator
Contractor stating that the equipment and controls provide the level of elevator service
and ride qualities specified. Include certification that elevator hoist way doors, frames,
transom panels, hardware and accessories comply with specified fire rating
requirements. EC is responsible to have these certificates validated till the end of DLP.
b. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by
authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use during construction
use, prior to handing over and operation during DLP period.

MAIN WORKS
MOCK UPS
a. Not Required.

FACTORY VISITS

a. Not Required

PART 2 – PRODUCTS AND GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

PRODUCTS:

a) Material Standards:
S.No Material Specification

Stretcher‐leveled, cold‐ rolled, commercial quality steel (Color and
1 Sheet Steel (Architectural) texture for exposed works selected by Architect). Factory
standard finishes shall be accepted for concealed surfaces
304 with standard tempers and hardness required for the
intended design. The grains and shades to match the complete
project.
2 Stainless Steel Brushed finish for All applications unless specified in the particular
specification. Direction of grain to architect selection.
Textured Material (Scratch Resistance) for Service Elevator
Applications
3 Aluminum: Extrusions, Plates as per design intended application
Fire‐Retardant Treated Particle Board Panels with minimum 1"
4 Particle Board Panels 3/4" thick backup for wood or plastic laminates suitable for
marine applications
5 Primer Finish 2 coats for factory applied primer finish
Grade 304 Continuous with invisible fixing and without finger
6 Stainless‐Steel Tubing
traps
7 Mirror / Glass Suitable for Design intended applications

b) Elevator Contractor has to follow the specifications/ data or cut sheets for any other materials
specified in the tender/ contract documents and included in the scope of Vertical Transportation
Package.

MAIN WORKS
DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.2.1 Code Compliance Required: Comply with BS/EN standards specified in this document and
detailed compliance schedule.
a) Select latest equipment to meet the design/ performance requirements and any non‐
compliance needs to be explicitly submitted during the tender. Successful tenderer should
seek formal written approval for those non‐compliances prior to commencement of
manufacturing.
b) Tenderer to submit their proposed design including product selection reasoning out that the
required design and performance elements are met with their proposal.
c) All performance standards in accordance with the BS/CIBSE/European Standards
d) Speed: ±3% under any loading condition or travel direction.
e) Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold up to 125% of the rated load
f) Stopping Accuracy: +/‐3 mm under any car loading condition
g) Start delay shall not be more than 0.5sec.
h) Starting, stopping, and leveling shall be smooth and comfortable without appreciable steps
of acceleration and deceleration. Stopping shall be without jerks.
i) While stopping, there shall be no time lost in the door zone for the sake of achieving leveling
accuracy.
j) Full speed running shall be quiet and free from vibration and swaying. When the car is
standing at the floor with doors open, it shall remain firmly stopped and shall not “teeter”.
k) The car shall not move from side to side during the process of opening and closing the
doors.
l) Door Times: The door opening time shall be measured from the instant the doors start to
open until they are in the fully open position. The door closing times shall not be less than
those permitted by the applicable code and the kinetic energy of the hoist‐way door and all
parts rigidly connected thereto (includes the sum of the weights of the hoist‐way and car
doors and related parts) computed for the average closing speed shall not exceed 12J. The
force necessary to prevent closing of the hoist‐way door or car door from rest shall not
exceed 13.5 kilograms. Tender should submit the details of the door open and close time in
their submission.
2.2.2 Elevator equipment shall be installed and adjusted to meet the performance specified
herein within the following parameters with tests performed in accordance with Vibration
Measurements as defined in BS ISO 18738:2003.
Lateral vibration within cars during all riding and door operating conditions shall not exceed
15 mg ISO MPtP (less than 10 mg ISO A95) in the 0.5 to 12 Hz range.

Vertical vibration within cars during all riding and door operating conditions shall not exceed
15 mg ISO MPtP (less than 14 mg ISO A95) in the 5 to 12 Hz range.

2.2.3 NOISE LEVELS
a) Measured noise levels in a moving car outside the leveling zone shall not
exceed 55 dB under the condition including car exhaust blower/fan is on full

MAIN WORKS
speed. Measurements shall be made at 1.5m above floor level and 1.0m
from the door face.
b) Measured noise levels in the car within the leveling zone or when the car is
stopped shall not exceed 54dB. Measurements shall be made at 1.5m above
floor level and 1.0m from the door face.
c) Measured noise levels at the top floor shall not exceed 55 dB (A).
d) There shall be no discernible sound in the elevator car from the machine,
ropes, sheaves, drive units, car or counterweight guides.
e) There shall be no discernible sound at the top floor elevator lobby from the
machine, rescue panel & controller. Limit noise level at top floor lobby to
55dB (A) at any time of operation.
f) Include noise dampening methods on the motor electro‐magnetic brakes.
Brake drop/ pick‐up noise shall not exceed 55dBA within the machinery space.
EC should make enough arrangements to minimize the noise within these
limits as there are likely to be guest areas adjacent to the lift cores.

2.2.4 THIRD PARTY TESTING
a) Third party testing shall be carried out by TUV or approved equivalent. The EC
shall provide all necessary tools for carrying out the performance tests. The
performance tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.
OPERATION
A. Simplex Selective Collective allows to
1. Operate car without attendant from pushbuttons in car and located at each floor. When car is
available, automatically start car and dispatch it to floor corresponding to registered car or hall call.
Once car starts, respond to registered calls in direction of travel and in the order the floors are reached.
2. (Do) not reverse car direction until all car calls have been answered, or until all hall calls ahead of car
and corresponding to the direction of car travel have been answered.
3. Slow car and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered calls, in the order in which they
are approached in either direction of travel. As slowdown is initiated for a hall call, automatically cancel
hall call. Cancel car calls in the same manner. Hold car at arrival floor an adjustable time interval to
allow passenger transfer.
4. Answer calls corresponding to direction in which car is traveling unless call in the opposite direction
is highest (or lowest) call registered.
5. Illuminate appropriate pushbutton to indicate call registration. Extinguish light when call is
answered.
B. Duplex Selective Collective allows to

MAIN WORKS
1. Operate cars without attendants from pushbuttons in cars and located at each floor. When cars are
available, park one car at main floor (“home” car). Park other car where last used (“free” car).
2. Respond to car calls and hall calls above main floor using the “free” car. Once a car has started,
respond to registered calls in the direction of travel and in the order the floors are reached.
3. Do not reverse car direction until all car calls have been answered, or until all hall calls ahead of the
car and corresponding to the direction of car travel have been answered.
4. Slow cars and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered calls in the order in which they
are approached in either direction of travel. As slowdown is initiated for a hall call, automatically cancel
hall call. Cancel car calls in the same manner. Hold car at arrival floor an adjustable time interval to
allow passenger transfer.
5. Answer calls corresponding to direction in which car is traveling unless call in the opposite direction is
the highest (or lowest) call registered.
6. When the “free” car is clearing calls, start “home” car to respond to:
1. A call registered on “home” car pushbuttons.
2. An up hall call registered below “free” car.
3. An up or a down call registered above “free” car while “free” car is traveling down.
4. A hall call when “free” car is delayed in its normal operation for a predetermined period.
When both cars are clearing calls, stop only one car in response to any registered hall call. Return the
first car to clear its calls to main floor. Should last service required bring both cars to main floor, the first
arriving car becomes the “free” car. Illuminate appropriate pushbutton to indicate call registration.
Extinguish light when call is answered.
C. Other Items:
1 Load Weighing: Provide means for weighing car passenger load. Control system to provide
dispatching at main floor in advance of normal intervals when car fills to capacity. Provide hall call by‐
pass when the car is filled to preset percentage of rated capacity and traveling in down direction. Field
adjustment range: 25% to 100%.
2 Anti‐Nuisance Feature: If car loading relative to weight in car is not commensurate with number of
registered car calls, cancel car calls. Systems employing either load weighing or door protective device
for activation of this feature are acceptable.
3 Independent Service: Provide controls for operation of each car from its pushbuttons only. Close
doors by constant pressure on desired destination floor button or door close button. Open doors
automatically upon arrival at selected floor.

MAIN WORKS
4. Independent Service from Lobby: Provide key operated switch at Main Lobby to disconnect each
elevator from group control to serve as a simplex elevators as required by the building management.
Securing the key positing to normal shall enable the lift back in the group control.
E. Fireman’s Service: Provide equipment and operation as specified below.
1. Fireman’s Service: Provide 2 levels of fire recall function for all elevators upon receiving signals
from the assigned primary and secondary evacuation floors. Equip the Elevators with control system to
operate and recall the cars during a fire or other emergency condition. Provide required volt free
contacts in the controller to receive signal from smoke detector sensors/ Fire alarm panels provided in
other sections of the work. Operation shall be similar on all Elevators and visual/audible signal shall
operate until return is complete or automatic operation restored. Provide the designated level and
alternate return level return switches and sequencing per the Local Civil Defense Requirements.
F. Automatic Car Stopping Zone: Stop car. Provide stopping zone within 1/4" above or below the
landing sill regardless of load in car, direction of travel, distance between landings, hoist rope slippage or
stretch.
G. Remote Monitoring and Diagnostics: Equip each controller and the group dispatch logic
controller, with standard ports, interface boards, and drivers to accept maintenance, data logging, fault
finding diagnostic and monitoring computers, keyboards, modems, and programming tools. The system
shall be capable of driving remote color CRT monitor(s) that continually scan and display the status of
each car and call. Provide each group with a full, interactive elevator monitoring (EMS) system as
specified elsewhere.
H. Motion Control: Microprocessor based AC, variable‐voltage, variable frequency with digitally
encoded closed‐loop velocity feedback suitable for operation specified and capable of providing smooth,
comfortable car acceleration, retardation, and dynamic braking. Limit the difference in car speed
between full load and no load to not more than ±3% of the contract speed.
I. Door Operation: Automatically open doors when car arrives at main floor. At expiration of normal
dwell time, close doors. Provide front or rear selective door operation as required. Provide “heavy
door/variable air pressure” feature for consistent specified door operation within appropriate speed and
inertia limits.
J. Standby Lighting and Alarm: Car mounted battery unit with solid‐state charger to operate alarm
bell and car emergency lighting. Battery shall be rechargeable type with minimum 3 year life
expectancy. Include required transformer. Provide constant pressure test button in service
compartment of car operating panel. Provide lighting integral with portion of normal car lighting system.
In addition, the Electrical contractor should provide a separate and dedicated line to Cabin Lighting and
Ventilation to operate both lighting and ventilation for 2 hours during power failure.
K. Standby Power Operation: Upon loss of normal power, adequate standby power will be supplied
via building electrical feeders to simultaneously start and one Elevator from each Elevator group and
single cars at contract car speed and capacity.

MAIN WORKS
1 Automatically return one car at a time, in each group and single car(s), nonstop to designated
floor, open doors for passenger to exit, close doors and park car. During return operation, car and hall
call pushbuttons shall be rendered inoperative. As each car parks, system shall immediately select
the next car until all cars in a group have returned to the designated floor. If a car fails to start or
return within 30 seconds, system shall automatically select the next car in the group to automatically
return.
2 When all cars in a group have returned to the designated floor, one car in each group shall be
designated for automatic operation. When a service demand exists for 30 seconds and designated car
fails to start, next available car in the group shall be automatically selected for operation.
3 Successive Starting: When normal power is restored or there has been a power interruption,
individual cars in each bank shall restart at five second intervals.
L. Battery Operated Emergency Landing Operation during power interruption: Upon loss of normal
power, provide controls to feed automatically from a battery – invertor supply to run the car(s) at slow
speed to the nearest landing, up or down, depending upon load in the car. Upon arrival at the nearest
landing, the elevator doors shall open automatically and remain open. The elevator shall then become
deactivated. The battery – invertor pack shall be located in the separately or housed in the controller.
Battery to be rechargeable lead acid or nickel cadmium with a 3‐year life expectancy.
MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT

A. Gearless Traction Hoist Machine:
1. The elevator machine shall be low RPM and equipped with variable voltage and variable
frequency controlled PMSM gearless motors, having step‐less, smooth speed time
characteristics and 240 starts per hours as minimum.
2. All machines shall meet testing and "in service" duty requirements without additional cooling
equipment being fitted. All rotating elements shall be dynamically balanced and certified in the
factory; a test certificate shall be forwarded to the Engineer.
3. The machine shall be designed to meet loads encountered in the specified elevator service and
be continuously rated.
4. When the machine is running continuously with rated load at rated speed for the maximum
starts per hour, the temperature rise should be no more than 50 degrees centigrade measured
internally at any point within the machine without any additional or assisted cooling.
5. The insulation resistance of any conductor to the motor frame or earth shall exceed 1 Megohm
at 50 degrees centigrade where Class F insulation is provided.
6. The machine when running full load up shall exhibit a noise output of no more than 55 dBA
measured at any point 1m from the machine and exhibit an overall efficiency of at least 90%.
7. The braking surfaces of the pulley shall be continuous and not include any joint; they shall
present a bright smooth surface.
8. Brake operation should be continually monitored by an approved method.

MAIN WORKS
9. Bright mild steel fitted bolts shall be used in close fitting holes to join the coupling assembly
together. The threaded section of any coupling bolt shall not enter the coupling assembly.
10. An adequate means shall be provided for preventing the nuts of any coupling bolt from
becoming loose.
11. Adjustment shall be provided for both air gap between the plungers and the compression of the
main springs. Profiled plungers giving uniform force/distance plots are preferred.
12. The final operating length to which the compression springs are set shall be stamped on a rating
plate together with the appropriate air gap.
A. Arrange equipment in spaces as per manufacturers design in compliance with codes and the local
regulations
B. Solid State Power Conversion and Regulation Unit: Provide solid‐state, alternating current,
variable voltage, variable frequency (ACV3F), I.G.B.T converter/inverter drives
1 Design unit to limit current, suppress noise, and prevent transient voltage feedback into
building power supply. Provide internal heat sink cooing fans for the power drive portion of the
converter panels.
2 Isolate unit to minimize noise and vibration transmission. Provide isolation transformers, filter
networks, and choke inductors.
3 Suppress solid‐state converter noises, radio frequency interference, and eliminate regenerative
transients induced into the mainline feeders or the building standby power generator.
4 Supplemental direct‐current power for the operation of hoist machine brake, door operator,
dispatch processor, signal fixtures, etc., from separate static power supply.
5. Provide 'REGENERATIVE DRIVE’ to generate power under overhauling conditions. Regenerative mode
shall be disabled while operating with generator power. Include brake resistors to dissipate the heat
emissions due to dynamic braking, while operating under generator power.
Encoder: Direct drive, solid‐state, digital type. Update car position at each floor and automatically
restore after power loss.
B. Controller:
1 Compartment: Securely mount all assemblies, power supplies, chassis switches, relays, etc., on
a substantial, self‐supporting steel frame. Completely enclose equipment with covers. Provide means to
prevent overheating.
2 Microprocessor‐Related Hardware
a. Provide built‐in noise suppression devices which provide a high level of noise immunity on all
solid‐state hardware and devices.
b. Provide power supplies with noise suppression devices.

MAIN WORKS
c. Isolate inputs from external devices (such as pushbuttons) with opto‐ isolation modules.
d. Design control circuits with one leg of power supply grounded.
e. Safety circuits shall not be affected by accidental grounding of any part of the system.
f. System shall automatically restart when power is restored.
g. System memory shall be retained in the event of power failure or disturbance.
h. Equipment shall be provided with Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI) shielding
i. Wiring: Neatly route all wiring interconnections and securely attach wiring connections to studs
or terminals.
j. Permanently mark components (relays, fuses, PC boards, etc.) with symbols shown on wiring
diagrams.
k. Monitoring System Interface: Provide controller with serial data link through RJ45 Ethernet
connection and install all devices necessary to monitor all functions/ features specified under the
monitoring system.
l. Provide controller or machine mounted auxiliary, lockable “open,” disconnect if mainline
disconnect is not in sight of controller and/or machine.
m. Sleeves and Guards: Provide 1”‐2" steel angle guards around cable or duct slots through floor

slabs and/or walls. Provide rope and smoke guards for sheaves, cables, and cable slots in control room.
C. Noise/Vibration Isolation: All elevator equipment including their supports and fastenings to
building, shall be mechanically and electrically isolated from the building structure and main line power
feeders to minimize objectionable noise and vibration transmission to car, building structure, or
adjacent occupied areas of building.
D. Interface Cabinet: Provide for all Elevators equipped with interface cabinets in the machine room
or controller to connect to the other service providers where termination is by the other contractors or
other traders.

E. Electrical Wiring and Wiring Connections:
1. The wiring installation shall conform to the general requirements of BS EN 81 and the IEE Wiring
Regulations and shall be carried out utilizing LSF single core cables installed in galvanized steel trunking
and conduit. (PVC Trunking shall not be accepted)
2. All cables and flexible cords shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest appropriate
Standard.
3. Lighting and power cables shall be installed from the distribution boards to switches and terminal
points without any joints in the conductor. For final sub‐circuits serving more than one point, the

MAIN WORKS
“looping in and out” system shall be employed and not more than 3 cables shall be bunched at one
terminal point.
4. Conduit and wiring for the motor, main brake and other high voltage devices to be kept separate
from control wiring and other low voltage circuits.
5. All conduits shall be erected in a neat and organized manner; PVC conduit will not be accepted for
surface mounted cable runs.
6. Once the point of supply has been established by the Elevator Contractor they are to supply, fix and
connect all trunking, conduit and cables from these points of supply termination.
7. The Elevator Contractor shall ensure that the whole of the conduit system and metalwork of the
elevator installation is effectively connected to the earth terminal at the isolator. The following earth
continuity cables and earth terminals are to be provided:
a. Earth bonding cable between the earth terminal on the main isolation switch and the earth terminal
on the controller
b. Earth bonding cable between the controller earth terminal and the hoist motor
c. One core of a control circuit travelling cable connected between the earth terminal of the controller
d. One earth cable inside each length of flexible conduit
e. Extraneous earth cable between metal surfaces in the machine room and the main controller earth
terminal
f. Extraneous earth cable between metal surfaces in the elevator shaft and an earth potential terminal
HOIST WAY EQUIPMENT

A. Car and Counter weight Guide Rails:
1. Approved guide rails only will be accepted. Hallow Guides and cold drawn guide rails are not
accepted.
2. Guide rail lubrication if required shall be non‐drip.
3. The EC shall supply all embeds, inserts, guide rail backing, intermediate counterweight tie brackets
etc., as necessary for guide rail fixings at and between floors to achieve necessary maximum pitch of
fixings, requisite ride quality, compliance with standards and this specification.
4. All guides, sole plates and fixings must withstand the forces imposed on them when the safety gear
operates under full contract load in over speed condition. Adequate area sole plates shall be fitted to
the foot of each guide.

MAIN WORKS
5. The EC shall arrange guide rails to compensate for building compression averaging up to 6mm
per floor of travel, with between 150mm and 300mm top and bottom clearances.
6. Guide rail alignment should be maintained after building becomes fully occupied. All guide rail
brackets are to be either through bolted and finally pinned or welded back to supporting
structure/brackets when finally located.
B. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Oil Buffer energy accumulating type.
C. Sheaves: Machined grooves and sealed bearings. Provide mounting means to machine support
frame and car and counterweight structural members. Sheaves made of non‐metal or non‐alloys are not
accepted.
D. Counterweight Assembly: Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel framework shall be provided to
balance the weight of the car and the specified capacity. Always allow for spare space for additional
blocks required as result of the final testing. Provide minimum 2 (two) retainer rods passing through all
the blocks and binding them as a single piece
E. Guide Shoes:
Spring dampened sliding guide shoes with oil less inserts shall be accepted for both car and counter
weight.
F. Counterweight Guard: Metal guard in pit shall be provided by the EC Contractor as required by
the codes.
G. Governor Rope and Encoder Tape Tensioning Sheaves: Mount sheaves and support frame on pit
floor or guide rail at head room. Provide frame with guides or pivot point to enable free vertical
movement and proper tension of rope and tape.
H. Hoist and Governor Ropes:
1. Bright steel wire ropes with fibre cores of adequate cross section manufactured to BSEN81 or Steel
wire ropes with adequate cross – section, manufactured to BSEN81.
If non‐conventional ropes (belts embedded with steel) are proposed, the EC shall provide complete
technical data & 3rd party certification details along with the tender submittal. For the proposed non‐
conventional ropes, EC to propose the method statement of verifying the belts for damages during
preventive and breakdown maintenance.
2. Always use a higher number of ropes to eliminate excessive rope stretch and re‐leveling conditions.
3. The hoist ropes shall be made with traction steel with size and quantity to provide proper traction,
safety factor, and elastic stretch.
4. Governor rope to suit Elevator Contractor’s specification and shall be as per EN81 codes.

MAIN WORKS
I. Compensation: Where required the Elevator Contractor shall provide jacketed chain "Whisper‐flex"
or approved alternative with approved secure proprietary fixings to ensure that noiseless operation is
achieved. Application must meet performance requirement of specification.
J. Terminal Stopping: Provide normal and final devices.
K. Electrical Wiring and Wiring Connections:
1. The wiring installation shall conform to the general requirements of BS EN 81 and the IEE Wiring
Regulations and shall be carried out utilizing LSF single core cables installed in galvanized steel trunking
and conduit.
2. All cables and flexible cords shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest appropriate
Standard.
3. Half‐way disconnecting boxes are NOT to be fitted whether in the well or the machine room.
4. The Elevator Contractor shall ensure that the whole of the conduit system and metalwork of the
elevator installation including guide rails, etc. is effectively connected to the earth terminal at the
isolator. The following earth continuity cables and earth terminals are to be provided:
a. One core of a control circuit travelling cable connected between the earth terminal of the controller
and an earth terminal to be provided on the elevator car
b. One earth cable inside each length of flexible conduit
c. Extraneous earth cable between metal surfaces in the elevator shaft and an earth potential terminal
L. Traveling Cables:
1. Provide approved travelling cable Flame and moisture‐resistant outer cover .
2. Prevent traveling cable from rubbing or chafing against hoist way or equipment within hoist
way.
3. Provide two (2) pair of shielded wires and two (2) RG‐6/U type coaxial cables for card reader.
4. Provide Three (3) CAT 6A cables within traveling cable from car controller to car top, plus
1000mm excess loop at both ends.
5. Provide two (2) pair 1.5mm wire for CCTV power.
6. Provide each set of traveling cables with 10% spare conductors.
7. EC contractor shall provide second travelling cable to provide the required special and spare
cables, however responsible to comply with the design related to seismic and fire fighters
control requirements.

M. Entrance Equipment:
1. Door Hangers: Two‐point hanger roller with neoprene roller surface and suspension with
eccentric up thrust roller adjustment.
2. Door Tracks: Bar or formed, cold‐drawn removable steel tracks with smooth roller contact
surface.
3. Door Interlocks: Operable without retiring cam. Paint interlock box flat black.
4. Door Closers: Spring, aspirator or jamb/strut mounted counterweight type. Design and adjust

MAIN WORKS
to insure smooth, quiet mechanical close of doors.
5. Door Shoes: Provide a minimum of two (2) gibs per panel, one at leading and one at trailing
edge with guides in the sill groove entire length of door travel. Include a kicking plate in the sill
groove entire length of door travel.
6. Hoist way Door Unlocking Device: Provide unlocking device with escutcheon in door panel at all
floors, with finish to match adjacent surface.
N. Floor Numbers: Stencil paint 100 mm high floor designations in yellow color on inside face of
Hoist‐ way doors or hoist way fascia in location visible from within car.

HOIST WAY ENTRANCES

A. Complete entrances bearing fire certification labels from a nationally recognized testing laboratory
from the manufacturing country. Fare rating shall comply with EN81‐58 for 120 minutes. Type certificate
should be submitted as part of the technical submittals. Final certificates shall be submitted upon the
delivery of the entrance materials for Engineer verification and approval.
B. Frame Assembly: Fire rated frame assembly made of 14 gauge hollow metal at all floors as per the
manufacturers design details. EC Contractor has to propose their design in the bid submission. Also the
required grouting between the concrete and the metal frame should be clearly highlighted in the tender
submission to achieve the fire rating. Provide 14 gauge sub‐frame for special architectural overlay
finishes if shown in the architectural drawings. Door frame finish shall be as specified in the schedule.
C. Door Panels: Minimum 16 gauge stainless steel sandwich construction without binder angles.
Provide leading edges of center‐opening doors with rubber astragals. Provide a minimum of two (2) gibs
per panel, one at leading and one at trailing edge with gibs in the sill groove entire length of door travel.
Include a kicking plate in the sill groove entire length of door travel. Construct door panels with
interlocking, stiffening ribs. Door panel finishes shall be as specified in the schedule.
D. Landing Sills (Do not show logo or brand name): Sills shall be securely fitted at every landing
entrance. Provide all elevators sills fabricated from material as specified in particular specification. Sills
shall be provided with integral grooves to act as guide for the bottom of the door panels. Door guide
shoes should be simple to replace when worn out i.e. without removing door panels. The sills shall be
designed to provide adequate strength to support the loads exerted on them as per the specified
loading class of the elevators. All required secondary steel and its fixtures are in the scope of Elevator
sub‐contractor.
G. Fascia, Toe Guards and Hanger Covers: Minimum 16 gauge furniture steel with Manufacturer’s
standard finish. Provide full height fascia, toe guards, and hangar covers as required by code. Provide
front and/or rear fascia for express hoist way travel.
H. Struts and Headers: Provide for vertical support of entrances and related material. Provide door
open bumpers on entrances equipped with vertical struts.

MAIN WORKS
CAR EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide car enclosure, decoration, accessories to the requirements of the particular
specifications.
B. Elevator Car Finishes: The size of the car, interior design and decorations, ceiling and lighting and
other accessories shall be as described in the schedules. If the specification/ Lift Schedule specify
Manufacturers standard finishes provide from the manufacturer’s exclusive range used in high‐end
projects for the Engineer’s selection.
C. The car platform shall be fabricated out of structural steel sections for required loading and
reinforcement. Elevators shall comply fully with the loading class specified. Sub‐flooring shall be sound
deadening, structural steel topped with exterior marine grade plywood, 16mm thick, minimum.
E. The car shell shall be fabricated with flush, hollow‐metal construction with sound isolation designed
and manufactured all in accordance with relevant sections of BSEN81‐1 and finished in with rust
inhibitive, prime painted steel. Car panels shall be stiffened suitably for anti‐drumming (sound
deadening) properties. Stiffeners shall be provided around the outside perimeter of the elevator car to
reinforce the walls against impacts.
F. Cab finishes & fit‐out: The Elevator Supplier’s factory finished fit outs are preferred. In case the
supplier intends to propose fit outs works to be carried out in UAE, then the bidder has to list out the
proposed fit out sub‐contractors along with their detailed profile and experiences in the bid submission.
Elevator contractor should obtain approval from the contractor, client and consultant for engaging such
contractors prior to engage those sub‐ contractors.
G. Suspended Ceiling: Provide as per interior decoration specifications and drawings. Ceiling finishes &
layout shall be as per the Engineer’s approval. The suspended ceiling shall not block the emergency exits
on the car ceiling. The suspended ceiling should be easy‐dismantling type for quick rescue of passengers
inside the car.
H. Flooring: Provide a recess or flooring as per elevators schedule. In case of recess, required sub
structure shall be part of EC scope. EC has to allow for the required co‐ordination with MC for the
flooring inside the cabin.
I. Mirrors: Refer to Lift Schedule for location and size. Mounting shall be without screws and sharp edges
and finger traps. A minimum of 3 choices from manufacturers range should be available for section by
Engineer.
J. Handrails: Refer to Lift Schedule. The handrail shall be strong enough to bear the weight of a person
climbing on it. Provide end caps with concealed fasteners and free from finger traps.
K. Bumper rails: The service/ freight elevators shall be provided with neoprene bumper guard rails at 2
levels on all walls. Refer to elevator particular specification for the requirements

MAIN WORKS
L. Drapes: Drape studs will be incorporated around the elevator car(s) at a high level. All protective
drapes shall be removable, full height, fire retardant, quilted pads of at least 20mm thickness to cover all
walls and front returns with see through sections for access to the car operating panels.
M. Emergency exit on roof [all elevators]: There shall be an electrically interlocked, emergency exit on
the car ceiling for rescue of passengers by the fire fighters. This exit shall not be blocked by the
suspended ceiling/light fixtures of the car. . The dimensions of the trap doors shall comply with EN81‐1.
N. In‐car lighting: In‐car lighting shall be according to the interior decoration or Manufacturers range as
per the contract requirements to achieve a minimum lux level of 200 Lux. The lighting should be LED
type and shall meet the green building regulations act.
O. Ventilation: Noise Less Quiet 2 speed electric ventilation fans mounted on car roof shall provide
forced ventilation. Provide clear ventilation clots at both top and bottom for complete circulation of
ventilation. The fan shall cut off after a pre‐defined time when the elevators are at le to save energy.
The fans shall be connected to the emergency power supply for an uninterrupted operation of 120
minutes during the failure of Main Power. Emergency power is under the provision of EC.
P. Emergency Lighting: Emergency lighting upon power failure shall be energized by a self‐contained,
automatic, battery with a battery trickle charger. This is provided by the EC under his scope. The battery
pack shall be capable of proving 100 Lux lighting for 120 minutes during power failure. The batteries are
maintenance free type and guaranteed for 3 years of trouble free operation.
Q. Car Doors: The car doors shall be fully automatic sling doors, with hollow metal construction. The
type and finish shall be as specified in the Schedule.
R. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching finish of door edges (both car and landing
doors.), minimum in stainless steel. None of the landing door/car door headers, components, rollers
shall be visible from the landing.
S. Car top working area: A working area, complying with BS EN 81 shall be provided on the roof of the
car. Car top shall be painted in approved color with safe working area clearly marked out.
T. Car Top Guard Rail: Provide a car top guard rail that meets the requirements of the code and in
accordance with the head room height.
U. Car Sills: The car sill shall be securely fitted to the car platform and the landing sills securely fitted to
the entrance threshold. The sills shall be designed to provide adequate strength to support the loads
exerted on them as per the specified loading class of the elevators.
CAR DOOR DRIVE AND DOOR

2.8.1 Car Doors: All car doors will withstand a thrust of 750N without deforming. Car doors shall be
designed so that they overlap the clear opening by a minimum of 20mm except at the sill. The overlap

MAIN WORKS
between the trailing edge of any fast door in a 2‐speed door arrangement shall overlap the slow door by
at least 20mm. Car door hanger rollers shall be located toward the extreme ends of the top of each car
door panel. Where slotted holes are used to fix door hangers they shall be pinned after final adjustment.
The car door contact assembly shall be capable of precise adjustments such that the car door contact
makes up not more than 12mm from final door close position; it shall be located in a position that is
reasonably inaccessible to interference by passengers. The maximum packing between car door and
hanger shall be not more than 10mm. Provide a minimum of two bottom guide pieces per door panel,
one at leading and one at trailing edge, with guide pieces in the sill groove over the entire length of
travel. All normally visible surfaces of door panels shall not display any method of fixing e.g. pop rivets,
cover strips, etc., nor any sharp edges of facing material.
2.8.2 Mechanical and /or Electrical locking devices shall be provided to prevent doors from opening
when the elevator car out of door zones. All mechanical locking shall be electrically proven in the
primary safety circuit such that the elevator car cannot move unless the locking is set in position. All
door locking devices shall be hidden to prevent misuse. On all centre opening doors arrangements the
door operator shall include drive arms to both halves of the door.
2.8.3 Heavy Duty Door Operators:
The Elevator Contractor shall include details of the proposed door operator and indicate the design
features which determine its suitability in the tender submission. The torque output of all door
operators shall be adjusted electrically on site to limit the opening and closing forces applied to the car
door panel. Door reversal shall be accomplished within no more than 50mm of door movement after
the door open button is pressed. The Elevator Contractor shall ensure that door operation is
substantially silent to meet the specified maximum noise levels. It shall not be possible to manually open
the car doors from within the elevator car whilst the car is in motion. The door open/close action should
not impart any motion to the car enclosure.
CAR AND LANDING CONTROL STATIONS

2.9.1 Car Operating Panel (Do not show logo or brand name)
2.9.2 Provide all elevators with number of operating panels as specified in the schedule. The COP shall
be swing type and without faceplates. Faceplate shall be hinged type. For Finish please refer to the
schedule.
2.9.3 The cab return panels shall be engraved and filled with the number of each Elevator and its
capacity in KG and number of permitted persons. The alarm button, door open button, door close
button shall be suitably labeled by permanently applied, tactile symbols and Braille markers in English.
The operating panel shall confirm to EN81‐70 and contain the following controls and buttons:
a. Tactile push buttons with braille marking for all floor levels on passenger Elevators.
b. An illuminating alarm button shall be provided at the bottom of each car station to ring a bell
located in the hoist way near the main lobby and on top of the car. Actuating the alarm button shall

MAIN WORKS
activate the control center panel intercom distress signal and enable to the hand free microphone and
speaker system for communication.
c. A door open button, which shall stop the closing motion of the doors and return them
automatically to their fully open position. This button shall be effective while the car is at a landing and
until the car starts into motion, regardless of any special operational features (except firefighters'
service).
e. A door close button, which shall start and close doors to their fully closed position. This button
shall be effective while the car is at a landing and until the car starts into motion, regardless of any
special operational features (except firefighters’ service).
f. Provide a door hold open button with an internal registration light in the main car operating panel
on all Elevators to operate the elevator in service mode. Enabling/ Disabling the button shall cancel this
hold open function.
g. Provide firefighters’ Phase II key switch with jack, engraved instructions filled red. Include display
signals in the COP, audible signal.
h. Indicator in the COP shall display Emergency Mode with an audible signal during the activation of
seismic sensors.
i. A service panel with a heavy‐duty, vandal‐resistant, hinged, lockable, door matching the COP
finish shall be mounted below the main car operating station. The service panel shall contain the
following controls with each control and its operating positions by engraved and black filled letters:
1) Fan on/ off switch.
2) Independent service switch.
3) Constant pressure test button or spring return key for battery pack emergency lighting.
4) Switch to select either floor voice annunciation, floor passing tone, or chime.
5) Fire Fighters Jack to connect to the public address system

2.9.4 Landing Operating Panel (Do not show logo or brand name):
All Face plates shall be finished as per Lift schedule. These fixtures are provided with back box to house
the electronic parts and face plate shall be flush type and fixed without screws. If clips are used they
shall be heavy duty type. Tactile and Braille operating buttons with markings to correspond to the
direction served with call acceptance light and acceptance sound/beep for each button. Surface
mounted fixtures are not recommended however subject to the architect’s approval. The required key
switches shall be integral part of the Landing Control Station without having a separate mounting.

MAIN WORKS
CAR AND LANDING SIGNALIZATION

2.10.1. IN CAR DISPLAY: EC has to provide, bright, high contrast, LED display one per COP from their
standard range. Indicators shall capable to display all emergency operations / instructions. Indicators
shall be located to enable the passenger easy view under crowded conditions. Display shall consist of
reprogrammable screen layout with background images, real time clock and calendar. e. Display
emergency instructions within the car.
2.10.2 LANDING POSITION INDICATOR: EC has to provide bright, high contrast LED panel display for hall
indicators with direction arrows from their standard range. Indicators shall capable to display all
emergency operations / instructions. As the elevator travels through the hoist way, its position shall be
indicated by the illumination of the numeral/letter corresponding to the landing at which the elevator is
stopped or passing. These fixtures are provided with back box to house the electronic parts and face
plate shall be flush type and fixed without screws. If clips are used they shall be heavy duty type. Surface
mounted fixtures are not recommended however subject to the architect’s approval.
2.10.3 HALL LANTERNS: EC has to provide hall lanterns integrated with Position Indicators for all
Passenger Elevators. Locate the triangles as per the approval of architects. The terminal landings shall be
provided with one hall lantern either up or down as applicable. Intermediate landings shall be provided
with both up and down hall lanterns. All fixtures are flush mounted with back box. Surface mounted
fixtures are not recommended however subject to the architect’s approval.
2.10.4 Arrival Chime: An electronic chime shall sound to inform waiting passengers of the car arrival and
shall be part of the lantern signalization, which shall be fixed at all floors above or beside door as
required by architects. The volume of the gong shall be adjustable.
2.10.5 Car Top Control Station: Mount to provide safe access and utilization while standing in an upright
position on car top.
2.10.6 Work Light and Duplex Plug Receptacle: GFCI protected outlet at top and bottom of car. Include
on/off switch and lamp guard. Provide additional GFCI protected outlet on car top for installation of car
CCTV, card reader and digital video display.

ENTRALLY LOCATED CONTROL PANELS & INTERFACE FOR DCD 24/7 PROVISION

2.11.1 BMS Interface Panels: The EC shall include within each elevator motor room/ Controllers/
Interface box located at headroom, a separate clearly marked BMS interface terminals to provide hard‐
wired connection (volt‐free contacts) for essential status monitoring.
a. Normal power
b. Alarm

MAIN WORKS
c. Elevator under fault
d. Elevator under fire recall mode
All the above signals shall be provided through potential free contacts (NO/ NC). Coordinate with BMS
supplier to effect monitoring of above conditions at the BMS panel located at the location approved by
the Architect. It is the Other Traders responsibility to provide the required containment and wiring in
line with the requirements of the EC.
2.11.2 BMS Interface for DCD: The EC shall include within each elevator motor room/ Controllers/
Interface box located at headroom, a separate clearly marked BMS interface terminals to provide
connection (volt‐free contacts) for essential status monitoring as required by the Dubai Civil Defense
24/7 system Centres.
PC BASED MONITORING SYSTEM WITH OPEN PROTOCOLS ‐ OPTIONAL PRICE

A. EC contractor shall provide PC based Elevator Management System. The system shall consists of the
latest PC meant for heady duty usage with the processor not lower than i7 series, 2TB Hard Drive and
RAM of 512 SDD with LED monitor of size 32”.
B. The PC based Elevator Management System from the Elevator manufacturer shall be from their
standard to meet the requirements listed below. The system shall be capable of proving following
output information, including data logging, fault logs operational events, performance information
including car speed, floor to floor times, and door times. The system shall be real time, capable of
driving remote color LCD monitors that continually display the status of each car and call. Provide a slave
display located at the security personnel room for easy viewing of the status
1. The system shall concurrently display all units in a group and separate units on one screen in a
graphical format and record the following information for each monitored unit:
a. Group status:
1) Group operational mode
2) In/out of service
3) Standby power
4) Location and direction of hall calls
6) Phase I operation
b. Individual car status – expandable menus:
1) Direction of travel
2) Independent service
3) Elevator under maintenance
5) Firefighters’ service
6) Position of elevator
7) Door status (open, opening, closing, closed)
8) Door dwell time
9) Load by‐pass
10) Standby power operation/sequence

MAIN WORKS
11) Power on/off
12) Alarm button
17) Registered car calls
18) Trip counter
21) Car speed
22) Door open times
23) Door close time
24) Start to stop motion time
25) Floor lockouts (car or hall)
28) Lobby recall
29) VIP service

2. Faults monitored with visual and audible alarm, triggered by combinations of any of the above status
points:
a. Safety circuit
b. Alarm bell
c. Emergency two‐way communication device
e. Door failure
f. Manual Override
INTERCOM SYSTEM
A. General: Provide 3 way analogue communication systems for all Cars, Machine locations and the
lobby / Reception/ central locations. Locate the master stations at Lobby/ Security/ Fire command
Centre. The required containment and wiring shall be provided by Other Traders under other sections.
The complete intercom system is supplier with uninterrupted power supply by Other Traders. EC
contractor has to specify the required power ratings and interfaces with single line diagrams with 21
days after the award of the contract.
B. Basic Equipment in CAR
A solid state device with hand free equipment activated by pressing the alarm button. Activation of
emergency building communication system overrides all other conversations and permits one‐way
conversation to all master stations in system.

PART 3 EXECUTIONS

SITE CONDITION AND INSPECTION

EC has to examine hoist way and control room areas prior to beginning installation of equipment. EC to
verify that no irregularities exist which affect execution of work specified after the delivery of the
materials to site. Do not proceed with installation until work in place conforms to project requirements.

MAIN WORKS
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

EC has to deliver material in Manufacturer’s original, unopened protective packaging. EC has to store
material in original protective packaging. EC has to co‐ordinate with measures to prevent soiling,
physical damage, moisture damage of deformation of the materials due to the weather conditions and
protect equipment and exposed finishes from damage and stains during transportation, erection, and
construction.
INSTALLATION

EC has to submit and obtain approval for the method statement for installation prior to the
commencement of the installation. Install all equipment in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions,
referenced Codes, specification and approved submittals.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

EC contractor’s QAQC personnel have to inspect the work in progress from time to time and submit
periodical reports to the MC for Engineers approval. EC has to initiate WIR (Work Inspection Request)
for finished works at job site during the course of installation. Any rejected or commented work shall be
corrected prior to next work inspection.
FINAL ADJUSTMENTS

A. EC to secure guide rail joints free from any irregularities to a smooth surface. Static balance car to
equalize pressure of guide shoes on guide rails. Prior to handing over, EC has to adjust all the settings for
the complete elevator system and lubricate all equipment in accordance with Manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Adjust motors, power conversion units, brakes, controllers, leveling switches, limit switches,
stopping switches, door operators, interlocks, and safety devices to achieve required performance
levels.
C. Special care should be exercised for the elevators used under construction time use or interim
beneficial use. EC has to bring the elevators to brand new condition replacing the worn out parts,
operating panels, sills and any other damaged cabin and landing finishes.

MAIN WORKS
CLEANING

EC has to remove debris and unused materials from Site upon completion and dispose of safely. EC is
responsible for cleaning exposed surfaces using methods recommended by the material manufacturers,
and without scratching surfaces. Do not use abrasive cleaners or materials that will damage adjacent
work. If stainless steel has not been protected by adhesive film, the Elevator Contractor should
thoroughly clean prior to presentation to the Engineer for acceptance. Any changes in the color or any
scratches due to cleaning, EC is responsible to fix it in good and new condition to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
ACCEPTANCE REVIEW AND TESTS

A. Review procedure shall apply for individual elevators, portions of groups of elevators and
completed groups of elevators accepted on an interim basis or elevators and groups of elevators
completed, accepted, and placed into operation.
B. Provider shall perform review and evaluation of all aspects of its work prior to requesting
Consultant's final review. Work shall be considered ready for Consultant's final contract compliance
review when all Providers’ tests are complete and all elements of work or a designated portion thereof
are in place and elevator or groups of elevators are deemed ready for service as intended.
C. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for Consultant’s review. Notify Consultant a
minimum of five (5) working days in advance when ready for final review of elevator or group.
D. Consultants’ written list of observed deficiencies of materials, equipment and operating systems
will be submitted to Provider for corrective action. Consultant’s review shall include as a minimum:
1 Workmanship and equipment compliance with Contract Documents.
2 Contract speed, capacity, floor‐to‐floor, and door performance comply with Contract Documents.
3 Performance of following is satisfactory:
a. Starting, accelerating, running
b. Decelerating, stopping accuracy
c. Door operation and closing force
d. Equipment noise levels
e. Signal fixture utility
f. Overall re quality
g. Performance of door control devices
h. Operations of emergency two‐way communication device
i. Operations of firefighters' service
j. Operations of seismic devices
k. Operations of special security features and floor lock‐off provisions
l. Operations of remote monitoring devices
m. Operations of elevator car air conditioner/heater
n. Operations of emergency battery lowering device
4 Test Results
a. In all test conditions, obtain specified contract speed, performance times, and stopping accuracy
without re‐leveling, and re quality to satisfaction of Purchaser and Consultant. Tests shall be conducted
under both no load and full load condition.

MAIN WORKS
b. Temperature rise in motor windings limited to 50° Celsius above ambient. A full‐capacity, one (1)
hour running test, stopping at each floor for ten (10) seconds in up and down directions, may be
required.
E. Performance Guarantee: Should Consultant’s review identify defects, poor workmanship, variance
or noncompliance with requirements of specified Codes and/or ordinances, or variance or
noncompliance with the requirements of Contract Documents, Provider shall complete corrective work
in an expedient manner to satisfaction of Purchaser and Consultant at no cost as follows:
1 Replace equipment that does not meet Code or Contract Document requirements.
2 Perform work and furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary to meet specified
operation and performance.
3 Perform retesting required by Governing Code Authority, Purchaser and Consultant.
F. A follow‐up final contract compliance review shall be performed by Consultant after notification
by Provider that all deficiencies have been corrected. Provide Consultant with copies of the initial
deficiency report marked to indicate items which Provider considers complete. If additional reviews are
required due to Manufacturer’s gross non‐compliance with initial and follow‐up deficiency reports,
consultant shall bill Provider at normal billing rates plus expenses, and Provider acknowledges it will pay
for additional compliance reviews.

OWNER’S INFORMATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Operating and maintenance manuals must be produced and
must be available in a form accepted in advance by the Engineer. The Elevator Contractor shall provide
two sets of neatly bound written information necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment of
equipment within 30 days following final acceptance. Practical completion shall be withheld until the
data, including the following as a minimum, is received by the Company Representative:
a. Maintenance procedures for all major components
b. Lubricating instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants
c. Parts catalogue for all replaceable parts including ordering forms and instructions
d. Test certificates for all type test components
e. A signed copy of the completed test certificate to EN 81‐1: 1998
f. Complete operating and maintenance instructions for all controls and switches provided.
g. Five sets of keys to operate each type of key switch provided.
h. Any special maintenance or trouble shooting tools or devices required for maintenance on all
elevators.
OWNERS’ PERSONNEL TRAINING

A. Assist the designated Owner's elevator operating, safety and security personnel in
understanding and training to operate the elevator intercoms, card readers, BMS, Systems, security
keyboards, elevator operations, emergency systems and Car Operating Panel controls.
B. Provide all required training information, videos, CD‐ROMs, manuals, training classes, and training
personnel to the Owner personnel with training knowledge, and information on how to operate all of
the elevator interface functions and controls.

MAIN WORKS
EMERGENCY RELEASE PROCEDURES

A. The emergency release procedure and requirements shall comply with EN 81‐1: 1998, clause 12.5 and
the instructions complying with EN81‐1: 1998, clause 15.4.3 shall be placed in the machine room.
B. The Elevator Contractor shall ensure the hand winding instruction notice relates to the equipment
supplied.
C. The Elevator Contractor shall allow for adequate approved training to be given to comply with EN81,
clause 0.3.13 to the Owners' personnel and or designates for the release of passengers in the event of
occupied breakdowns including the switching off of power to each elevator as necessary for hand
winding etc.
CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS / PROCESS

Please complete the submission of project close out documents 6 weeks prior to the final acceptance of
the Buildings. The documents shall be as referred in Division 1 of the Tender/ Contract Document and
A. Provide three sets of neatly bound written information necessary for proper maintenance and
adjustment of equipment to include the following:
1 Straight‐line wiring diagrams of “as‐installed” elevator circuits, with index of location and
function of components. Provide one set reproducible master. Mount one set wiring diagrams on
panels, racked, or similarly protected, in elevator control room. Provide remaining set rolled and in a
protective drawing tube. Maintain all drawing sets with addition of all subsequent changes. These
diagrams are Client’s property.
2 Lubrication instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants.
3 Recommended spares and consumable for 2 years of operation (Including DLP Period) with the
Parts catalogs for all replaceable parts including ordering forms and instructions.
4 Four sets of keys for all switches and control features properly tagged and marked.
5 Diagnostic test devices together with all supporting information necessary for interpretation of
test data and troubleshooting of elevator system, and performance of routine safety tests.
6 The elevator installation shall be a design that can be maintained by any licensed elevator
maintenance company employing journeymen mechanics, without the need to purchase or lease
additional diagnostic devices, special tools, or instructions from the original equipment Provider.
a. Provide on‐site capability to diagnose faults to the level of individual circuit boards and individual
discrete components for the sol state elevator controller.
b. Provide a separate, detachable device, as required to the Purchaser as part of this installation if
the equipment for fault diagnosis is not completely self‐contained within the controller. Such device
shall be in possession of and become property of the Purchaser.
c. Installed equipment not meeting this requirement shall be removed and replaced with conforming
equipment at the cost of the Elevator Contractor.
7 Provide upgrades and/or revisions of software during the progress of the work, warranty period
and the term of the ongoing maintenance agreement between the Purchaser and Provider.

‐End of Sections of PART A –

MAIN WORKS
PART – B PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION

B. PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC TRACTION MACHINE ROOM ABOVE ELEVATORS
I General Information
1.1 Elevator Type Machine Room Directly Above
1.2 Code EN81-20
1.3 Elevator Designation PL01-PL02
1.4 Quantity 24 No (2 in each Building)
1.5 Application/ Type Machine Room Above
1.6 Classification Passenger
1.7 Loading Class Class A
1.8 Capacity in KGs 1350 KGS
1.8 Capacity in persons 17
1.9 Speed in mps 1.75 mps
1.10 Roping Factor 2:1
1.11 No of Floors Served/ No of Entrances 7/7
1.12 Floor Denominations G, 1 – 6
1.13 Non Stop Floors Nil
1.14 Emergency Stop Floors Not Applicable
1.15 Elevator Travel Appx 22.95 M
1.16 Machine Room Location Directly above the shaft
1.17 Shaft Size 2275 mm W x 2900 mm
1.18 Pit Depth 1800 mm
1.18 Overhead Height 4600 mm
1.19 Machine Room Height 2300 mm
1.20 Safety Gear For Counter weight Not Required
1.21 Pit Maintenance Platform Not Required
II Machine, Drive and Control System
2.1 Machine Type PMSM Gearless
2.2 Drive System VVVF
2.3 Control System Duplex Collective Selective
2.4 Controller Location In the Machine Room
2.5 Power 13 KW
2.6 Power Supply Main/ Lighting 400V, 3Phase, 50 Hz / 230V, 1Phase, 50Hz
III Elevator Cabin and Landings
Car Internal Dimensions - Structural mm
3.1 1350 x 2200 x 2300
(W x D x H)
Car Internal Dimensions - Finished mm (W
3.1 1350 x 2200 x 2300
x D x H)
3.2 Cabin Structure Structural Car

MAIN WORKS
Car & Landing Entrance Type: High

3.3 Two Panel Centre Opening
Performance
Car & Landing Entrance Wide x High in
3.4 1000 x 2100
mm
3.5 Structural Opening Wide x High in mm 1300 x 2200
3.6 No of Car Entrances One

3.7 Door Operator Type VVVF
Pressure Sensitive Door Reversal on Contact
3.8 Door Protection 2D Sensors
Door Nudging Feature with warning buzzer
IV Cabin and Landing Signalization

Selection from Manufacturers standard range
4.1 Car - Car Operating Panel
(Min 3 options for selection by Architect)
a. Numbers of COP per Car Two
b. Position Side Wall
c. Type Full Height
d. Finish Stainless Steel Brushed 304
Micro‐Movement with Tactile from
e. Push Button Type:
Manufacturers Standard Range
f. Illumination Ring/ Button Illumination
g. Phase 2 Operation (Key Switch) Yes
h. Position and Direction Indicators LED Indicators in Car Operating Panel
i. Lockable Service Cabinet Yes
4.2 Landing Control Station
a. Intermediate Landing Up and Down Tactile Buttons
b. Terminal Landing Up or Down tactile Button at Terminal Landings
c. Call Station Faceplate Finish Stainless Steel Brushed 304
Micro‐Movement with Tactile from
d. Push Button Type
Manufacturers Standard Range
4.3 Landing Signalization
a. Main Floor - Above Door LED Type Position Indicator
b. All Other Floors - Above Door LED Type Position Indicator
c. Chime Once for Up/ Twice for Down
V Cabin and Landing Finishes

5.1 Car Enclosure Finishes
Stainless Steel Etched Hairline Finish from
a. Front Return & Transom Panel
Manufacturer’s standard range
b. Side Walls

MAIN WORKS
c. Rear Wall
d. Skirting Stainless Steel Hairline Finish
e. Car Door
f. Car Sill Extruded Aluminum
Bevel Edged tinted Mirror with concealed fixing
g. Mirror (Safety Glass)
on Rear Wall above handrail.
Stainless Steel tubular of 35 mm Dia with
h. Handrails:
concealed fixings on rear wall
i. Finishes Allowance for Flooring 1 Not applicable
5.2 Car Ceiling
Stainless Steel Hairline Finish with Direct or
a. Design (Provide Catalogues as necessary) Indirect Lighting from Manufacturer’s standard
range
b. Lighting: LED Direct or Indirect Lighting
Battery Powered LED Lights (50 Lux for 120 Min).
Main lights should work as Emergency lights
c. Emergency Lights
with battery power. Battery power from EC

Two Speed Blower type fan of Manufacturer's
d. Ventilation
standard.
e. Emergency Exit 500 x 350
5.3 Car Floor
a. Recess Not applicable
Stone Flooring from Manufacturer’s standard
b. Finish
range
5.4 Landing Entrance Finishes
Stainless Steel Hairline Finish from
a. Landing Door
b. Fire Rating 120 Min ‐ EN81‐58
c. Landing Door Frame Type Full Wall Architraves with Transom
d. Landing Door Frame Finish Stainless Steel Hairline Finish
e. Door Sill Extruded Aluminum

VI Control Features
6.1 3 Station / 3-Way Communication System Yes
6.2 Car Top Inspection Yes
6.3 Car Emergency Light - 120 Minutes Yes
6.4 Independent Service (Key Switch) in Car Yes
6.5 Wrong Car Call Cancelling Yes
6.6 Fire Detection Yes
6.7 Door Nudging Yes

MAIN WORKS
6.8 Over Load Indicator & Buzzer Yes

6.9 Full Load By-pass Operation Yes
6.10 Motor Thermal Protection Yes
6.11 Phase Failure Yes
6.12 Car Reader Interface + Cable Provision Yes
6.13 CCTV Camera interface + Cable Provision Yes
6.14 Audio Speaker Cable provision Yes
Protective Drapes for Service Application No
6.15 only
6.16 Regenerative Drive Yes
6.17 Earth Quake Operation Yes
6.18 Designated Fire Fighters Elevator PL02 Only
6.19 Fire Emergency Operation (Phase 1 & 2) Yes
6.20 Machined Guide Rails Yes
6.21 Hall Lanterns above/ beside Doors No
6.22 Auto Re-leveling Yes
6.23 Automatic Parking Yes
6.24 Homing during Emergency Power Yes
6.25 Battery operated Automatic Rescue Device Yes
6.26 Compensation As per Manufacturers Standard
6.27 Light Curtains for Doors Yes ‐ 2D

END OF SCETION

MAIN WORKS
SECTION 14560
CHUTES & COLLECTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1 Waste compactor, component fittings, and accessories.
2 Refuse sack carrying trolley.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of waste compactor specified, including installation
instructions for each principal component. Provide shipping, installed, and
operating weights.
0 Provide manufacturer's performance data.
B. Shop drawings from the manufacturer detailing waste compactor fabrication and
installation. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale details showing the layout
and types of each item of equipment required, including components, and
accessories.
0 Show rough-in dimensions, service connection details, and the location of field
connections.
1 Show required clearances for equipment service and operation.
2 Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchor bolts and
other anchorages to be installed as a unit of Work under other Sections.
C. Maintenance data for each waste compactor to include in the "Operating and
Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1. Include operating and maintenance
instructions, parts list, parts inventory list, purchase source for operational and
maintenance materials, emergency instructions and similar information. Include
name, address, and telephone number of the manufacturer's nearest service
representative.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is an authorized

representative of the waste compactor manufacturer for both the installation and
maintenance of the type of equipment required for this Project.
B. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than 2 hours normal travel time from the
Installer's place of business to the Project site.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing waste

compactors similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of
A. Maintenance: Starting at date of Substantial Completion, provide full

maintenance of compactors for 3 months on a weekly surveillance basis,
followed by 9 months on a monthly surveillance basis. Correct operational
imperfections and restore or replace defective or deteriorated components and
finishes. Use only genuine parts, components, and supplies as used in the
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Refer volume - III, NEB Approved suppliers and subcontractors list
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Diameter: 24” for rubbish chute.

B. Chute Material: Stainless Steel 16 gauge.
C. Intakes: 15” x 18” Self closing type
D. Sprinkler’s: ½” Sprinkler head
E. Vent: Metal explosion cap.
F. Automatic cleaning system: Specifically designed to clean the vertical length of all
chutes
Manufacturer’s Standard.
G. Refuse Containers: Heavy duty galvanized steel refuse container run on 4 wheels
with MGB 2.5 cu.m capacity.
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate waste compactors with manufacturer's standard joints and
seams, with exposed edges smoothed and eased. Fabricate bins, hoppers,
chutes, compaction chambers, unit bodies, and similar components of steel plate
with welded joints. Reinforce with structural steel members sized and spaced to
withstand impacts and pressures of normal operations, and sufficient strength to
prevent excessive long-term development of waves or valleys.
2 Fabricate with replaceable parts at points of normal wear.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Prior to beginning installation, examine areas to receive waste compactors. Verify
that critical dimensions are correct and that conditions are acceptable.
2 Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install compactors according to manufacturer's instructions.
B. Set each compactor securely and accurately in place; plumb, level and properly
aligned. Anchor as required for secure operation.
Complete field assembly with joints as recommended by manufacturer. Grind
C. welds smooth and restore finish. Comply with NECA Standards for electrical
work.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service

representative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train the
Owner's personnel as specified below.
2 Test and adjust compactor controls and safety features. Replace damaged or
malfunctioning controls and equipment. Make necessary adjustments for safe
and proper operation of equipment.
3 Instruct the Owner's operational personnel in proper use and maintenance of
waste compactors. Demonstrate capacity ratings, safety features, cleaning
4 Review data in "Operating and Maintenance Manual." Refer to Division 1 Section
"Project Closeout."
5 Schedule training with the Owner through the Architect, with at least 7 days'
advance notice.
END OF SECTION
NEB-P-17-1747
MAIN WORKS
SECTION 310000
EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 033001.
B. Site Restoration: Section 310101.
C. Rock Removal: Section 312316.
D. Topsoil: Section 329120.
E. Seeding: Section 329219.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms shall have the meanings ascribed to them in this Article,
wherever they appear in this Section.
1. Earth Excavation: The removal of all surface and subsurface material
not classified as rock (as defined below).
2. Rock: Limestone, sandstone, shale, granite, and similar material in solid
beds or masses in its original or stratified position which can be removed
only by blasting operations, drilling, wedging, or use of pneumatic tools,
and boulders with a volume greater than 1.0 cu yd. Concrete building
foundations and concrete slabs, not indicated, with a volume greater than
1.0 cu yd shall be classified as rock.
a. Limestone, sandstone, shale, granite, and similar material in a
broken or weathered condition which can be removed with an
excavator or backhoe equipped with a bucket with ripping teeth
or any other style bucket shall be classified as earth excavation.
b. Masonry building foundations, whether indicated or not, shall be
classified as earth excavation.
3. Subgrade Surface: Surface upon which subbase or topsoil is placed.
4. Subbase: Select granular material or subbase course Type 2 which is
placed immediately beneath pavement or concrete slabs.
5. Foundation Bearing Grade: Grade/elevation at which the bottom-of-
footings are constructed.
6. Maximum Density: The dry unit weight in pounds per cubic foot of the
soil at “Optimum Moisture Content” when determined by ASTM D 698
(Standard Proctor), or ASTM D 1557 (Modified Proctor).
7. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs,
tanks, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made
stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
8. Landscaped Areas: Areas not covered by structures, walks, roads,
paving, or parking.

MAIN WORKS
9. Unauthorized Excavation: The removal of material below required

elevation indicated on the Drawings or beyond lateral dimensions
indicated or specified without specific written direction by the Director’s
Representative.
10. Grading Limit Line (Shown on Drawings): Limits of grading,
excavations and filling required for the work of this contract. Unless
specifically noted otherwise, the Grading Limit Line and Contract Limit
Line shall be considered the same.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer’s catalog sheets, specifications, and
installation instructions.
B. Samples: Submit samples as follows. Take the samples in the presence of the
Director’s Representative, and submit to the Directors Representative the
laboratory test results for gradation, proctors and soundness tests, when required.
These tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM standards, shall be
performed and signed by a certified soils laboratory, and shall be submitted as
part of the original submittal. At a minimum the samples taken shall be of the
following quantities:
1. Select Granular Material: 50 - 60 lb. (Two Samples).
2. Subbase Course Type 2: 50 - 60 lb. (Two Samples).
3. Selected Fill: 40 - 50 lb.
4. Cushion Material: 30 lb.
5. Crushed Stone: 30 lb
6. Pea Gravel: 40 – 50 lb.
C. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Excavation Procedure: Submit a lay out drawing or detailed outline of
intended excavation procedure for the Director’s information. This
submittal will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the
successful performance of intended excavation methods.
2. Subbase Materials: Name and location of source and the DOT Source
Number. If the material is not being taken from an approved DOT
Source the results of the gradation and soundness tests performed by an
ASTM certified soils laboratory will be required.
3. Other Aggregates: Name and location of source and soil laboratory test
results.
A. Protect existing trees and plants during performance of the Work unless
otherwise indicated. Box trees and plants indicated to remain within the grading
limit line with temporary steel fencing or solidly constructed wood barricades as
required. Protect root systems from smothering. Do not store excavated
material, or allow vehicular traffic or parking within the branch drip line.
Restrict foot traffic to prevent excessive compaction of soil over root systems.

MAIN WORKS
B. Cold Weather Requirements: When freezing temperatures are predicted, do not

excavate to final required elevations for pipe, conduit or equipment requiring
concrete work unless concrete can be placed immediately. Retain enough earth
over the bottom elevation of excavations to prevent frost penetration.
C. Cold Weather Requirements:

1. Excavation: When freezing temperatures are anticipated, do not
excavate to final required elevations for concrete work unless concrete
can be placed immediately.
2. Backfilling: If backfill is being placed during freezing temperatures the
backfilling operations shall be monitored by the Director’s
Representative and the following procedures shall be followed:
a. Frozen ground shall be removed in its entirety from beneath and
five feet beyond the area of fill placement.
b. The fill material placed shall consist of Selected Fill and shall be
free of all frozen chunks that exceed four inches in size. The
material transported to the project site shall only consist of
material excavated from below the frost depth.
c. At the end of the work day, the area of fill placement shall be
covered with insulated blankets, or left unprotected. Other
means of protection (hay, wood chips, etc.) may also be used for
protection provided it is approved by the Director’s
Representative.
d. Following work day, remove the insulated blankets and/or strip
the area of all frozen material as specified previously.
e. Upon establishing the subgrade elevations, protect the grades
with insulated blankets or place additional material that will
adequately insulate the exposed earth surface from frost. This
additional fill or protective material shall be stripped just prior to
pouring concrete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Select Granular Material: Stockpiled, sound, durable, sand, gravel, stone, or

blends of these materials, free from organic and other deleterious materials.
Comply with the gradation and material requirements specified below:
Sieve
Percent Passing
Sieve Size Size opening (mm)
2 inch 50.8 100
1/4 inch 6.35 30-65
No. 40 0.425 5-40
No. 200 0.075 0-10
1. Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Test: 20 percent maximum loss by

weight after four test cycles.

MAIN WORKS
2. Plasticity Index: The plasticity index of the material passing the No. 40
mesh sieve shall not exceed 5.0.
3. Elongated Particles: Not more than 30 percent, by weight, of the
particles retained on a 1/2 inch sieve shall consist of flat or elongated
particles. A flat or elongated particle is defined as one which has its
greatest dimension more than three times its least dimension.
B. Subbase Course Type 2: Stockpiled, crushed ledge rock or approved blast

furnace slag. Comply with the gradation and material requirements specified
below:
Sieve
Percent Passing
2 inch 50.8 100
1/4 inch 6.35 25-60
No. 40 0.425 5-40
No. 200 0.075 0-10
1. Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Test: 20 percent maximum loss by

weight after four test cycles.
2. Plasticity Index: The plasticity index of the material passing the No. 40
mesh sieve shall not exceed 5.0.
3. Elongated Particles: Not more than 30 percent, by weight, of the
particles retained on a 1/2 inch sieve shall consist of flat or elongated
particles. A flat or elongated particle is defined as one which has its
greatest dimension more than three times its least dimension.
C. Selected Fill: Sound, durable, sand, gravel, stone, or blends of these materials,
free from organic and other deleterious materials. Comply with the gradation
requirements specified below:
Sieve
Percent Passing
4 inch 101.6 100
No. 40 0.425 0-70
No. 200 0.075 0-15
D. Suitable Material (Fill and Backfill for Landscaped Areas): Material consisting
of mineral soil (inorganic), blasted or broken rock and similar materials of natural
or man-made origin, including mixtures thereof. Maximum particle size shall not
exceed 2/3 of the specified layer thickness prior to compaction. NOTE: Material
containing cinders, industrial waste, sludge, building rubble, land fill, muck, and
peat shall be considered unsuitable for fill and backfill, except topsoil and
organic silt may be used as suitable material in landscaped areas provided it is
placed in the top layer of the subgrade surface.
E. Cushion Material: Shall consist of clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles, free
from lumps of clay and all deleterious substances and shall meet the following
gradation requirements:

MAIN WORKS
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
1/4 inch 6.35 100
No. 60 0.25 0-35
No. 100 0.15 0-10
F. Rip Rap: Fine, Light, Medium or Heavy Stone Filling that complies with DOT
Article 620-2.02 for stone filling.
G. Pea Gravel: Comply with DOT Article 703-02 for screened gravel.
Sieve
Percent Passing
1/2 inch 12.7 100
1/4 inch 6.35 90-100
1/8 inch 3.17 0-15
No. 200 Sieve 0.075 0-1
H. Item B-12: Equal Blend of No.1 and No. 2 Crushed Stone that complies with
material requirements of DOT Article 703-02, crushed stone only.
Sieve
Percent Passing
1-1/2 inch 38.1 100
1 inch 25.4 95-100
½ inch 12.7 45-60
¼ inch 6.35 0-15
I. No. 1 Coarse Aggregate: Crushed Stone that complies with material

requirements of DOT Article 703-02 and meets the following gradation.
Sieve
Percent Passing
1 inch 25.4 100
1/2 inch 12.7 90-100
1/4 inch 6.35 0-15
J. No. 2 Coarse Aggregate: Crushed Stone that complies with material

requirements of DOT Article 703-02 and meets the following gradation.
Sieve
Percent Passing
1-1/2 inch 38.1 100
1 inch 25.4 90-100
1/2 inch 12.7 0-15

MAIN WORKS
K. Marker Tape: FL Industries Blackburn/Holub’s Type YT6, or Seton Nameplate

Corporations Type 6 ELE, imprinted with message suited to item buried below.
2.02 GEOTECHNICAL FABRICS
A. Filter Fabric (GeoTextile)

1. Drainage and Erosion Control: Amoco 1199 & 2019, Maccaferri
MacTex MX140 & MX155, Mirafi 140N & 160N, Fiberweave 403 &
404 or equivalent.
2. Separation for foundation drains, underdrains, undercuts: GeoTex 801,
Contech Construction Products Inc. C-180, Synthetic Industries Geotex
250ST & 315ST, Mirafi Geolon HP570 & HP1500 or equivalent.
3. Separation/Stabilization beneath pavements: Amoco 4551, Bonded
Fibers Products PN080, Maccaferri Gabions MacTex MX275 & 340,
Mirafi 160N & 180N or equivalent.
2.03 BRICK AND MORTAR
A. Manhole Brick: Standard size, ASTM C 32, Grade MS.
B. Mortar Materials: Dry packaged, proportioned for Type M unit masonry mortar,
complying with ASTM C 387.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Clear and grub the site within the Grading Limit Line (GLL) of trees, shrubs,
brush, other prominent vegetation, debris, and obstructions except for those items
indicated to remain. Completely remove stumps and roots protruding through the
ground surface.
B. Fill depressions caused by the clearing and grubbing operations in accordance

with the requirements for filling and backfilling, unless further excavation is
indicated.
3.02 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
A. Locate existing underground utilities prior to commencing excavation work.

Determine exact utility locations by hand excavated test pits. Support and
protect utilities to remain in place.
B. Do not interrupt existing utilities that are in service until temporary or new
utilities are installed and operational.
C. Utilities to remain in service: Shall be re-routed as shown on the Contract

Drawings.

MAIN WORKS
D. Utilities abandoned beneath and five feet laterally beyond the structure’s
proposed footprint shall be removed in their entirety. Excavations required for
their removal shall be backfilled and compacted as specified herein.
E. Utilities located outside the limits specified above may be abandoned in place
provided their ends are adequately plugged as described below.
1. Permanently close open ends of abandoned underground utilities
exposed by excavations, which extend outside the limits of the area to be
excavated.
2. Close open ends of metallic conduit and pipe with threaded galvanized
metal caps or plastic plugs or other approved method for the type of
material and size of pipe. Do not use wood plugs.
3. Close open ends of concrete and masonry utilities with concrete or flow-
able fill.
3.03 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate earth as required for the Work.
B. Install and maintain all erosion and sedimentation controls during all earthwork
operations as specified on the Contract Drawings or as directed by local officials.
If the erosion and sedimentation controls specified by the local officials are more
stringent than those specified on the Contract Drawings contact the Director’s
Representative.
C. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of

backfilling. Comply with Code of Federal Regulations Title 29 - Labor, Part
1926 (OSHA).
1. Trenches: Deposit excavated material on one side of trench only. Trim
banks of excavated material to prevent cave-ins and prevent material
from falling or sliding into trench. Keep a clear footway between
excavated material and trench edge. Maintain areas to allow free
drainage of surface water.
D. Stockpile excavated materials classified as suitable material where directed, until

required for fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage as
approved by the Director’s Representative.
E. Excavation for Structures: Conform to elevations, lines, and limits indicated.

Excavate to a vertical tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Extend excavation a
sufficient lateral distance to provide clearance to execute the Work.
F. Footings and Foundations: The foundation bearing grade shall be established

just prior to constructing the concrete foundations when concrete is to bear on
undisturbed soil.
G. Concrete Slabs, Floors and Bases: Excavate to the following depths below
bottom of concrete for addition of select granular material:
1. Interior Floors: 6 inches unless otherwise indicated.
2. Exterior Slabs and Steps: 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

MAIN WORKS
H. Pipe Trenches and/or Bell and Spigot Pipe Trenches: Open only enough trench
length to facilitate laying pipe sections. Unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings, excavate trenches approximately 24 inches wide plus the outside pipe
diameter, equally divided on each side of pipe centerline. Cut trenches to cross
section, elevation, profile, line, and grade indicated. Accurately grade and shape
trench bottom for uniform bearing of pipe.
1. Trench in Rock: Excavate an additional 6 inches below bottom of pipe
for bed of cushion material under the piping.
I. Conduit, Cable, Tubing and Piping (other than Bell and Spigot): Provide
sufficient trench width for installation and to accommodate special backfill when
specified.
J. Underground Storage Tanks: Excavate as required to install tank and to

accommodate special backfill.
K. Open Ditches: Cut ditches to cross sections and grades indicated.
L. Pavement: Excavate to subgrade surface elevation.
M. Unauthorized Excavations: Unless otherwise directed, backfill unauthorized

excavation under footings, foundation bases, and retaining walls with compacted
select granular material without altering the required footing elevation.
Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavation as specified for
authorized excavation of the same classification, unless otherwise directed by the
Director.
1. Unauthorized excavations under structural Work such as footings,
foundation bases, and retaining walls shall be reported immediately to
the Director before any concrete or backfilling Work commences.
N. Notify the Director’s Representative upon completion of excavation operations.

Do not proceed with the Work until the excavation is inspected and approved.
Inspection of the excavation by the Director’s Representative will be made on 3
working days notice.
3.04 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface and subsurface water from flowing into excavations and trenches
and from flooding the site and surrounding area.
B. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations or trenches. Remove water

from all excavations immediately to prevent softening of foundation bottoms,
undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to the stability of subgrades
and foundations. Furnish and maintain pumps, sumps, suction and discharge
piping systems, and other system components necessary to convey the water
away from the Site.
C. Convey water removed from excavations, and rain water, to collecting or run-off
area. Cut and maintain temporary drainage ditches and provide other necessary

MAIN WORKS
diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench
excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
D. Provide temporary controls to restrict the velocity of discharged water as

necessary to prevent erosion and siltation of receiving areas.
3.05 PLACING FILTER FABRIC
A. Place and overlap filter fabric in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation
instructions, unless otherwise shown.
B. Cover tears and other damaged areas with additional filter fabric layer extending
3 feet beyond the damage.
C. Do not permit traffic or construction equipment directly on filter fabric.
D. Backfill over filter fabric within two weeks after placement. Backfill in
accordance with the fabric manufacturer’s instructions and in a manner to prevent
damage to the fabric.
3.06 PLACING FILL AND BACKFILL
A. Surface Preparation of Fill Areas: Strip topsoil, remaining vegetation, and other
deleterious materials prior to placement of fill. Remove all asphalt pavement in
its entirety from areas requiring the placement of fill or break up old pavements
to a maximum size of four inches. Prior to placement of fill, smooth out and
compact areas where wheel rutting has occurred due to stripping or earthwork
operations.
B. Excavations: Backfill as promptly as practicable, but only after approval by the

Director’s Representative. Do not backfill with excavated material unless it
meets the requirements of this Section.
C. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches thick in loose
depth unless otherwise specified. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each
layer as necessary to facilitate compaction to the required density. Do not place
backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or covered with ice.
1. Place fill and backfill against foundation walls, and in confined areas
(such as trenches) not easily accessible by larger compaction equipment,
in maximum six inch thick (loose depth) layers.
2. For Open Graded Stone/Clean Stone (Item B-12, No. 1 crushed stone,
No. 2 crushed stone, etc.) in access of six inches: Material must be
wrapped in separation fabric.
D. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by placing backfill

uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each layer. Place
backfill against walls of structures containing basements or crawl spaces only
after the first floor structural members are in place.
E. Under Exterior Concrete Slabs and Steps:

MAIN WORKS
1. Up to Subgrade Surface Elevation: Place selected fill when fill or

backfill is required.
2. Subbase Material: Place 12 inches of select granular material over
subgrade surface.
F. Under Interior Concrete Slabs:

2. Subbase Material: Place six inches of select granular material over
subgrade surface.
G. Under Pavements and Walks:

2. Subbase Material: Place as indicated.
H. Landscaped Areas: Place suitable material when required to complete fill or

backfill areas up to subgrade surface elevation. Do not use material containing
rocks over four inches in diameter within the top 12 inches of suitable material.
I. Plastic Pipe in Trenches: Place cushion material a minimum of six inches deep
under pipe, 12 inches on both sides, and 12 inches above top of pipe. Complete
balance of backfill as specified.
J. Copper Tubing and Steel Gas Pipe in Trenches: Place cushion material a
minimum of six inches deep under pipe, six inches on both sides, and 4 inches
over top of pipe. Complete balance of backfill as specified.
K. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Except where concrete encasement is required,

place cushion material a minimum of four inches deep under conduit, four inches
on both sides, and 12 inches over top of conduit. Complete balance of backfill as
specified.
3.07 COMPACTION
A. All materials with exception of open graded stone (No. 2 Coarse aggregate, No. 1
Coarse aggregate, Item B-12, etc.):
1. Compact each layer of fill and backfill for the following area
classifications to the percentage of maximum density specified below
and at a moisture content suitable to obtain the required densities, but at
not less than three percent drier or more than two percent wetter than the
optimum content as determined by ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor) or
1557 (Modified Proctor).
a. Structures (entire area within ten feet outside perimeter): 95

percent.
b. Concrete Slabs and Steps: 95 percent.
c. Landscaped Areas: 90 percent.
d. Pavements and Walks: 95 percent.
e. Pipes and Tunnels: 95 percent.

MAIN WORKS
f. Pipe Bedding: 95 percent.

2. If a compacted layer fails to meet the specified percentage of maximum
density, the layer will be re-compacted and retested. If compaction
cannot be achieved the material/layer will be removed and replaced. No
additional material may be placed over a compacted layer until the
specified density is achieved
B. Open graded Stone: Place material in maximum twelve inch lifts. Each lift shall
be raked smooth and compacted through several passes of a walk behind
vibratory roller. Compaction Testing is not required.
3.08 GRADING
A. Rough Grading: Trim and grade area within the Grading Limit Line and
excavations outside the limit line, required by this Contract, to a level of four
inches below the finish grades indicated unless otherwise specified herein or
where greater depths are indicated. Provide smooth uniform transition to
adjacent areas.
B. Finish Grading: Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as
follows:
1. Grassed Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within 1 inch above or
below the required subgrade surface elevations.
2. Walks and Pavements: Place and compact subbase material as specified.
Shape surface of areas to required line, grade and cross section, with the
finish surface not more than 1/2 inch above or below the required
subbase elevation.
3. Building Slabs: Grade subbase material smooth and even, free of voids,
compacted as specified to within 1/4 inch above or below required
subbase elevation.
C. Spread approved topsoil directly upon prepared subgrade surface to a depth

measuring 4 inches after natural settlement of the topsoil has occurred in areas to
be seeded or to receive sod. Place to greater depth when necessary to adjust
grades to required elevations.
1. Approved existing topsoil within the Grading Limit Line may be used.
Provide additional topsoil from outside sources as required.
D. Finish topsoil surface free of depressions which will trap water, free of stones
over 1 inch in any dimension, and free of debris.
3.09 RESTORATION
A. Restore pavements, walks, curbs, lawns, and other exterior surfaces damaged
during performance of the Work to match the appearance and performance of
existing corresponding surfaces as closely as practicable.
B. Topsoil and seed or sod damaged lawn areas outside the GLL and new lawn
areas inside the GLL. Water as required until physical completion of the Work.

MAIN WORKS
3.10 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIALS
A. Remove from State property and dispose of excess and unsuitable materials,
including materials resulting from clearing and grubbing and removal of existing
improvements.
B. Transport excess and unsuitable materials, including materials resulting from

clearing and grubbing and removal of existing improvements, to spoil areas on
State property designated by the Director’s Representative, and dispose of such
materials as directed.
A. Compaction Testing: Notify the Director’s Representative at least 3 working

days in advance of all phases of filling and backfilling operations. Compaction
testing will be performed by the Director’s Representative to ascertain the
compacted density of the fill and backfill materials. Compaction testing will be
performed on certain layers of the fill and backfill as determined by the
Director’s Representative. If a compacted layer fails to meet the specified
percentage of maximum density, the layer shall be re-compacted and will be
retested. No additional material may be placed over a compacted layer until the
specified density is achieved.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Protect graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep them free of trash and
debris.
END OF SECTION

MAIN WORKS
SECTION 31 1000
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Protecting existing trees and grass to remain.

2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, and grass.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.
6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place.
7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Su stainable Design Requirements" for additio nal LEED
requirements.
2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting trees remaining
on-site that are affected by site operations.
3. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures, and site
improvements.
4. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for so il materials, excavating, backfilling, and site
grading.
5. Division 23 Section "Turf, Grasses and Plants" for finish grading including preparing and
placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Topsoil: Nat ural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter an d sand, silt, a nd
clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gra y, or red th an
underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2
inches (50 m m) in diamet er; and fre e of sub soil and weeds, roots, toxic material s, or oth er
nonsoil materials.
B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrou nding individual trees or groups of trees to be p rotected
during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the peri meter drip line of
groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

MAIN WORKS
1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil or oth er materials indicated to rema in Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing con ditions of tree s and planting s,
adjoining construction, and site improve ments that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by site clearing.
B. Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and
accurately locating capped utilities a nd other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical
conditions.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct street s, walks, or other adjacent occu pied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
B. Improvements on A djoining Property: Author ity for pe rforming site clearing indicated on
property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.
1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Engineer.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area wh ere Project is located before si te
clearing.
D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Material s: Requi rements for satisfactory soil material s are spe cified in
Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil material s off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not
available on-site.

MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain b enchmarks and survey control p oints from di sturbance during
construction.
B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to preve nt soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or ai rborne dust to adj acent properties and walkwa ys,
according to sediment and erosion control Drawings.
B. Inspect, repair, and m aintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction
until permanent vegetation has been established.
C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and re store and sta bilize areas disturbed during
removal.
3.3 TREE PROTECTION
A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing.
Remove fence when construction is complete.
1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area.
2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area.
3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.
B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and
excavate to minimize da mage to ro ot systems. Use na rrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to
expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.
1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.

2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected
and covered with soil.
3. Coat cut face s of roots mo re than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified
asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues.
4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.
D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that a re damaged by construction
operations, in a manner approved by Landscape Architect.
1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdi ction where Project is located, to submit details of
proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.

MAIN WORKS
3.4 UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not inte rrupt utilities serving fa cilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after a rranging to p rovide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit in stallation of ne w
construction.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a cl ean and careful manner
where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
3. Grind stumps and remov e roots, ob structions, and debris extending to a de pth of 18
inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade.
4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.
5. Chip removed tree branches and stockpile in areas approved by Landscape Architect.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbi ng operations with satisfactory soil mat erial
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm),
and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depth s are e ncountered in a manner to prevent intermingli ng with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots,
and other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with sub soil.
Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm).

2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.
3. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

MAIN WORKS
3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to

facilitate new construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of
existing pavement to re main before removing e xisting pavement. Saw-cut fa ces
vertically.
2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.
3.8 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,
and waste materials including trash and deb ris, and legally disp ose of them off Owner' s
property.
1. Separate recyclable mate rials produced during site clearing from other nonrecycl able
materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them
to recycling facilities.
END OF SECTION

MAIN WORKS

.

SECTION 31 31 00
SOIL TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:
1. Sand barrier termite control.
2. Mesh termite control.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 32 90 00 (02900) – Planting: Landscape maintenance program.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product
provided under work of this Section:
1. Recycled Content:
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-
consumer recycled content per unit of product.
b. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar
value of product included in project.
c. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the
percentage of recycled content product in the assembly by weight.
d. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar
value of recycled content product to total dollar value of assembly.
.
2. Local/Regional Materials:
a. Sourcing l o c a t i o n (s): Indicate l o c a t i o n o f extraction,
h a r v e s t i n g , a n d recovery; indicate distance between extraction,
harvesting, and recovery and the project site.
b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility;
indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site.
c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional
materials; include materials cost only.
d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced
or manufactured in separate locations, provide location information for
each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of each component
per unit of product.

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Mesh System Warranty: Provide a 5 year written warranty against infestations
and reinfestations by subterranean termites of the buildings and building additions
constructed under this contract.
1. Perform annual inspections of the building If live subterranean termite
infestation or subterranean termite damage is discovered during the warranty
period, and building conditions have not been altered in the interim, the

MAIN WORKS
Contractor shall:

a. Correct defective mesh installation and perform other treatment as may
be necessary for elimination of subterranean termite infestation;
b. Repair damage caused by termite infestation; and,
c. Reinspect the building approximately 180 calendar days after the repair.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SAND BARRIER TERMITE CONTROL

A. Sand: Clean, dry sand manufactured from crushed basalt rock meeting the following
requirements.
1. Material gradation, ASTM C 136:

Sieve Size Percent Passing
4.75 mm 100

2.36 mm 95 - 100
2.00 mm 75 - 95
1.70 mm 35 - 50
1.18 mm 0 – 10

Sieve Size Percent Passing
No. 4 100
No. 8 95 - 100
No. 10 75 - 95
No. 12 35 - 50
No. 16 0 – 10

2. Specific gravity, ASTM C 128, 2.80.
3. Silica (S102) content, ASTM C 289, 45 percent.
4. Abrasion loss, after 500 revolutions, 20 percent, when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 131.

B. Termite shield:
1. Galvanized sheet m e t a l ; ASTM A 6 5 3 /A 653M, G90 c o a t i n g
designation; structural quality; (0.7 mm) thick profile as indicated on drawings.
2. Rigid plastic sheet, profile as indicated on drawings. Extruded and
Compression Molded Basic Shapes Made from Thermoplastic Polyester (TPES),
complying with ASTM D6261 / Extruded, Compression Molded, and Injection
Molded Basic Shapes of Poly(aryl ether ketone) (PAEK), complying with ASTM
D6262.
a. Recycled content: Minimum 50 percent post-consumer recycled
content.
2.2 MESH TERMITE CONTROL

A. Barrier Mesh: 0.18 mm 0.007 in. diameter strands with mesh openings of 0.66 x 0.45
mm. 0.026 x 0.018 inches.
1. Stainless steel mesh shall conform to ASTM A 478 and ASTM A 580/A 580M,
Type A1AA marine grade 316 stainless steel mesh.
2. Plastic.

B. Accessories: Parging adhesives, bonding cement, high grade stainless steel clamps,
ties, and other accessories as recommended by mesh system supplier.


MAIN WORKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the substrates and conditions under which work of this section will be
performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to timely and
proper completion of the work have been corrected.

B. Verify that the site conditions under the slab(s) are proper for the installation of termite
barrier system as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
Prior to installation, verify that:
1. The ground has been cleared of wood scraps such as ground stakes, forms and
other termite food sources.
2. The work area has been filled with finely graded soil consisting of particle sizes
no larger than 25 mm 1 in and compacted to eliminate soil movement.
4. Footings and foundations, and outer forms are in place.
5. Communications, electrical and plumbing penetrating pipes are in place.
6. Sand system: Prior to placing material, remove visible plant roots and standing
water from the excavated area. Verify that utility trenches are sufficiently wide to
permit adequate cover under, around, and over pipes and conduit that will be
encapsulated with the termite sand barrier. Verify that the foundation perimeter
has sufficient room between the sides of excavations and edges of foundations
to provide the required barrier depth and width.
3.2 INSTALLATION – SAND BARRIER

A. Sand barrier: Install a sand barrier around perimeter of the foundation. Place material in
one lift for thicknesses of 150 mm (6 inches) or less and in successive lifts of 100 to 150
mm (4 to 6 inches) where the indicated thickness is greater than 150 mm (6 inches).
Compact each lift prior to placing successive lifts. Use power driven, vibrating-plate type
tampers for large areas and rod-and-plate type hand tampers for small areas such as
utility trenches and foundation and walk edges. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 12
inches wide and 6 inches deep.
1. Slab-on-Grade: Rake smooth and machine tamp, giving at least three passes
over the entire area. Hand tamp around pipe and conduit risers.
2. Utility Trenches: Place the required depth of material for bedding in trenches
prior to placing pipes and conduits. Hand tamp. For pipes 75 mm 3 inches and
larger in diameter: After placing pipe, bring material up to the top of the pipe and
carefully hand tamp the material. Then, bring material up to the top of the trench
and tamp. For pipes smaller than 75 mm 3 inches in diameter and for conduit:
Bring material up to the top of the trench and tamp.
3. CMU Block Walls: Place the material in ungrouted cells at a height of at least
one course above grade of the wall.
4. Fence Posts and Utility Poles: Line the designated hole with a geotextile or
similar material before proceeding with the work. Once the geotextile is in place,
put a 100 to 150 mm (4 to 6 inch) layer of the sand barrier at the bottom of the
hole. Hand tamp. After positioning the fence post or utility pole in the middle of
the hole, fill around the sides, compacting the material after successive lifts of
150 to 300 mm (6 to 12 inches) until the hole is completely filled. Ensure that a
100 to 150 mm (4 to 6 inch) sand barrier exists around the perimeter of the post
or pole.
5. Retaining Walls: Place the required amount of material below the footing and up
to the grade level of the wall. Place lifts of 100 to 150 mm (4 to 6 inches) with
compaction of each lift prior to placing successive lifts.

B. Termite shield: Install termite shield at perimeter of concrete slab edges as indicated on
drawings. Fit tightly around pipe or other penetrations.


MAIN WORKS
3.3 INSTALLATION – MESH SYSTEM

A. Mesh barrier: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and as
indicated.
1. Place the mesh barrier across all openings, joints, penetrations and other termite
entry points to the building (including all shrinkage cracks in concrete slabs and
built penetrations in slabs and walls that termites may use for access point).
2. Install mesh as required, fit and clamp mesh around all pipe penetrations, and
terminate at perimeters as appropriate for the building construction. Clamp,
parge adhere, bond and/or embed the termite mesh to the material surrounding
the opening. Install with no gaps, penetrations or damage to the mesh system.
3. Install special fittings appropriate to construction.
4. Coordinate with vapor barrier, reinforcing steel and concrete specified under
other work of other sections.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect the installed termite system, attachments and accessories before, during and
after the work of all trades.
1. Mesh system: In the event following trades on the site move or damage the
mesh, clamps or parging mix, immediately contact the mesh installer, for
recommendation of necessary repairs.

B. Prevent contact of dissimilar metals and electrolytic reaction. Do not place dissimilar
metals in contact with the stainless steel mesh and metal termite shield.

END OF SECTION

MAIN WORKS
SPECIAL SPECIFICATION 0321400 - UNIT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and gener al provisions of the Contract , including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Specification for Unit Pavers:
1. Concrete Paver, ie sidewalk paver, (paver on concrete)
2. Blasted Glass Paver (paver on concrete)
B. Related Sections include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Concrete Sidewalks
2. Stone Masonry
3. Paver Grate Frames/Tree Grates and Frames
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C 33: Specification for Concrete Aggregates
2. ASTM C 67: Method of Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay
Tile
3. ASTM C 136: Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of F ine and
Coarse Aggregates
4. ASTM C 140: Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units and Related Units
5. ASTM C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
6. ASTM C 150: Specification for Portland Cement
7. ASTM C 936: Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units
8. ASTM C 979, Standard Specific ation for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete.
NEB-P-17-1747 1/11 Civil Specs/Sec. 321400

MAIN WORKS
9. ASTM C 1645, Standard Test Method for Freeze-thaw and De-icing

Durability of Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units
B. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPI):
1. ICPI Tech Spec Technical Bulletins
C. T.C.A. Tile Council of America
1. Installation Method Cement Mortar Bonded F101
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.
1. Manufacturer’s product catalog sheets with specifications.
2. Laboratory test reports certifying compliance with referenced ASTM

requirements
B. Samples for Verification:
1. Four (4) full size sam ple pavers of each manufactured, type, size and
color selected or specified
2. Accepted samples become the standard of acceptance for the work.
3. Joint materials
C. Paver Installation Subcontractor
1. A copy of Subcontractor’s current certificate from the Inte rlocking

Concrete Pavement Institute Concre te Paver Installer Certificatio n
program.
2. Job references from projects of a similar size and complexity. Provide

Owner/Client/General Contractor names, postal address, phone, fax, and
email address.
3. Written Method Stat ement and Quality Contro l Plan that describes
material staging and flow, paving dire ction and installation procedures,
including representative reporting forms that ensure conformance to the
project specifications.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting
material from one source with resources to provide materials and products of
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

MAIN WORKS
B. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Each type of unit paver covered under this Section shall be produced by a
single manufacturer unless otherwise specified
2. Manufacturer shall submit evidence of having not less than fifteen (15)
years successful production of this product
3. The paver manufacturer shall demons trate, either by proven fie ld

performance or a laboratory freeze-thaw test that the paving units hav e
adequate durability if they are to be subjected to a freeze-thaw
environment.
a. Satisfactory field per formance is indicated when units similar in

composition and made with the same manufacturing process as
those to be supplied to the purchaser, do not exhibit objectionable
deterioration after at least 3 years.
b. The units used as the basis for proven field performance shall have
been exposed to the same general type of environment, temperature
range and traffic volume, as is contem plated for the units supplie d to
the purchaser.
c. Pavers to be used in vehicular app lication must be 2-3/4” thick.

Pavers over 12” in length should not be used vehicular traffic areas.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals

and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Approved mockups (10 foot x 10 f oot) may become part of the completed
Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct c onference at Project site to comply wit h

requirements
E. Paver Installation Subcontractor Qualifications:
1. Subcontractor shall submit evid ence of skill a nd not less than five (5)
years specialized experience with specified products
2. Utilize an installer having succe ssfully completed unit paver installatio n

similar in design, material and extent indicated on this project.
3. Utilize an installer hold ing a current certificate from the Interlockin g

Concrete Pavement Institute Concre te Paver Installer Certificatio n
program

MAIN WORKS
F. Coordinate sequencing, sc heduling and protection of work (including finished

work) with other supporting, adjacent, cont iguous or otherwise related material
trades
A. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to

avoid construction delays
B. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a secure, dry location. If units are not
stored in an enclosed location, c over tops and sides of stacks with water proof
sheeting, securely tied.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be

maintained and contam ination avoided. Cover aggregates with waterproof
covering if needed to prevent exposure to ra infall or removal by wind. Secure
the covering in place
D. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged

container packaging with identification tags intact on each paver bundle.
1. Coordinate delivery and paving schedul e to minimize interference with

normal use of buildings adjacent to paving.
2. Deliver unit pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic
wrapped cubes capable of transfer by forklift or clamp lift.
3. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the
product or existing construction
E. Extra materials
1. Provide 2% additional material fo r use by owner for maintenance and

repair
2. Pavers shall be from the same production run as installed materials.
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or

coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds.
1. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.
2. Do not install sand and pavers over frozen base materials
3. Do not install frozen sand or saturated sand
4. Do not install concrete pavers on frozen or saturated sand

MAIN WORKS
B. Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain or snowfall
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE PAVERS
A. Solid interlocking paving units co mplying with ASTM C 936 made from normal-
weight aggregates.
1. Products: :
a. Pavestone, Holland Stone Paver (or equal)
2. Thickness: 2-3/8 inches
3. Face Size and Shape: 3-7/8-by-7-13/16 inch rectangle.
4. Color: Approved by Architect
B. Reference Standard
1. Average Compressive Strength (C140) : 8000 psi (55 MPa) with non
individual unit under 7200 psi (50 MPa) per ASTM C 140
2. Average Water Absorption (AST M C 140) : 5% with no unit greater than

7%.
3. Freeze/Thaw Resistance (ASTM C 1645): 25 freeze-th aw cycles with no

greater loss than 200 g/m 2 of paver surface area or no greater loss than
500 g/m2 of paver surface area after 50 freeze-thaw cycles. Freeze-thaw
testing requirements shall be waiv ed for applications not exposed to
freezing conditions
C. Product Substitutions:
1. Equivalent products may be submitted for review.
2. No substitutions permitted unless approved by landscape architect prior to

construction.
2.2 BLASTED GLASS PAVERS
A. Solid concrete paving units with blasted glass surface
1. Products:
a. Wassau Tile, Blasted Glass Paver (or equal)
b. Thickness: 2-3/4 inches


Volume 2 Part B Civil Specifications R

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Volume 2 Part B Civil Specifications R

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MAIN WORKS

CONSTRUCTION OF 12 BUILDINGS STAFF ACCOMMODATION VILLAGE

EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

PART B – CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME I - TENDER AND CONTRACT CONDITIONS

VOLUME II - EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME II (PART A) - EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS

VOLUME II (PART B) - CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME II (PART C) - MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME II (PART D) - PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME II (PART E) - ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME III - SCHEMATIC DESIGN DRAWINGS

VOLUME IV - BILLS OF QUANTITIES

VOLUME V - OTHER DOCUMENTS - SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT

Volume 2 - Part B April 2018 - R0

LIST OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS AND SUB CONTRACTORS

SECTION 01001 REFERENCES

SECTION 02240 DEWATERING

SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Volume 2 - Part B April 2018 - R0

SECTION 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL

DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS

SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 07130 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATER PROOFING

DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS

SECTION 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

Volume 2 - Part B April 2018 - R0

SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

SECTION 11014 FACADE CLEANING EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (N/A)

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (N/A)

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS

SECTION 14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

SECTION 310000 EARTH WORKS

SECTION 321400 UNIT PAVING

Volume 2 - Part B April 2018 - R0

Volume 2 - Part B April 2018 - R0

01 Subsurface Investigation a. Fugro UAE

02 Concrete Ready Mix a. Arabian Ready Mix UAE

03 Water Stops a. BASF UK

04 Couplers a. Ancon/Emirate Specialities UK

05 Cement a. RAK Cement UAE

06 Corrosion Inhibitors & a. BASF UK

07 Sand and Aggregate a. Ras Al Khaimah UAE

08 Construction Chemicals a. BASF UK

09 Reinforcement Steel a. Emirates Steel UAE

10 Precast Concrete a. Gulf Precast Concrete UAE

11 GRC/GRP precast firms a. Terrazzo (GRP & GRC) UAE

12 Light Weight Concrete a. Hanan Al Khaleej UAE

13 Air Entraining Agent a. BASF UK

14 Self Levelling Screed a. BASF EU

16 Concrete Unit Masonry a Juma Al Majid UAE

17 Anchors & Reinforcement a. Hilti UK

18 (AAC) Lightweight Masonry Units a. Spectrum Light Block UAE

19 Thermal Concrete Block a. APEX UAE

20 Exterior Stone Cladding a. Al Hashim Marble GCC

21 Structural Steel Framing a. Galadari Steel UAE

22 Steel Decking a. Kirby Building System Kuwait

23 Glazed Metal Railing a. Intercare UAE

24 Non Structural Metal Fabrications a. System Engineering UAE

25 Pipe and Tube Railing a. Intercare UAE